JP2021097768A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a case having a time-shortening limiter function, the number of balls acquired by a player is still less than 7,200 and "latent probability variation state" is underway in a stage when one hour passes after entering a "consecutive" state, and further a possibility of requiring approximately 17 minutes or longer until a next jackpot is acquired after entering the "latent probability variation state" is set to become high. Accordingly, it becomes possible to more gradually increase the number of balls acquired in a short time of approximately 1 hour by the player than a Pachinko machine without any time-shortening limiter functions, thus preventing the number of balls acquired by the player per hour from becoming excessive. As a result, a player's speculative spirit cannot be aroused excessively, thus providing a Pachinko machine 10 allowing the player to appropriately play a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined gaming medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). And are configured to be able to be generated, and a winning game is won in the second gaming state, and the second gaming state can be continuously generated again (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295672

It is necessary to improve the interest of the game and to increase the player's motivation to play the game machines and the like as illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information, a determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player by using the above, and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state means that can generate the above, the second advantageous state counting means that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and the second advantageous state counting means that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state. 2 When the number of times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the advantageous state and the number of times determining means determine that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time, a specific state different from the second advantageous state can be generated. The predetermined event is performed with the specific state means and the execution period longer than the execution period of the predetermined event executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific state and the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state. It is equipped with a viable means of prolonging the execution period.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined event is the first advantageous state generated by the first advantageous state means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means capable of inserting a gaming ball launched by the launching means, and the ball entering means. The means is provided with a changing means for changing the means into a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter, and the first advantageous state means is described at least a plurality of times. The ball-entry means is changed from the non-ball-entry state to the ball-possible state by the changing means, and the execution period prolonging means increases the execution period of the ball-impossible state.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 includes, in the gaming machine according to claim 3, the non-entry state includes at least a start period executed at the start of the first advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the non-entry state is at least between the one possible state and the next possible entry state. It has an interim period during which it is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, by using an information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information, a determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination result by the determination means. , A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player, and capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The two advantageous state means, the second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and the generation of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means. A number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times, and a specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state when the number-of-times determining means determines that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time. When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific state, the execution period during which the predetermined event can be executed is longer than the execution period of the predetermined event executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state. It has a means of prolonging it. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined event is the first advantageous state generated by the first advantageous state means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means capable of launching the game ball, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means, and the ball entering means in the non-entering state in which the game ball cannot enter and the game. The first advantageous state means includes a changing means for changing the ball into a ball-fillable state, and the first advantageous state means causes the ball-entering means to enter the ball from the non-ball-filling state at least a plurality of times. The ball-capable state is changed, and the execution period prolonging means increases the execution period of the ball-impossible state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-entry state includes at least a start period executed at the start of the first advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-entry state includes at least one interval period between the possible entry state and the next possible entry state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine, and is mainly a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of each counter, each holding ball storage area, and holding ball execution area. (A) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 jackpot random number table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2. The drive pattern of the big winning opening solenoid and the probable change area solenoid in each round when "probability A big hit" or "latent A big hit" occurs, the detection mode of the big winning opening switch and the probable change area switch, and the probability change transition flag. It is a timing chart which showed the setting mode of. The drive pattern of the big winning opening solenoid and the probability change area solenoid of each round when "time saving A big hit" or "normal A big hit" occurs, the detection mode of the big winning opening switch and the probability change area switch, and the probability change transition flag. It is a timing chart which showed the setting mode. It is a list showing the number of "series villas" according to the continuation probability when entering the ST state, and the arrival probability and the end probability of the number of "series villas". In each game state, the trigger for transition to the game state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol, the recommended ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol It is a list that explains the fluctuation time, the special symbol that is likely to be stopped first, and whether or not it is possible to hit right. It is a figure which showed the firing mode in each game state, and the transition destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. It is a figure which shows an example of the reserved number table for special figure 1 schematically. It is a figure which shows an example of the reserved number table for special figure 2 schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an E table of a stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an F table of a stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a G table of a stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an H table of a stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an I table of a stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a J table of a stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss / small hit, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hit. Is. Special figure 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for loss / small hit. Special Figure 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hits. It is a figure which showed the example of the jackpot open table schematically. It is a figure which showed the number of occurrences of each phenomenon in each game state and a jackpot state, the required time, and the total time, and also showed the average total staying time in each game state and a jackpot state. The winning rate, required time, number of occurrences, firing time, number of fired balls, and number of returned balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each game state in the "renso" state are shown, and in each jackpot state and each game state. It is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls. It is a figure which showed the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of times of "ream villa" in the case where there is no time saving limiter function, and the case where there is. (A) is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when there is no time saving limiter function, and (b) is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when there is a time saving limiter function. It is a figure which showed the example of the small hit open table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal figure, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation time table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation time table. It is a figure which showed the example of the electric service opening table schematically. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio lamp control device. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the 1st hold information storage area and 1st execution information storage area, and 2nd hold information storage area and 2nd execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passing processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving limit processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 change process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 change process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows ST / time saving counting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the hit process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot open / close control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a big winning opening which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening / closing control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a small winning opening which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service control process which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. In the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first starting port, and the second starting port, the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the fluctuation display and the drive timing of the solenoid for ordinary electric service, the solenoid for the small winning opening, and the solenoid for the large winning opening opening / closing plate. In the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first start port, and the second start port, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol. It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variation display of the second special symbol and the drive timing of the solenoid for ordinary electric service, the solenoid for the small winning opening, and the solenoid for the large winning opening opening / closing plate. In the right-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first starting port, and the second starting port, the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the fluctuation display of the above and the drive timing of the solenoid for ordinary electric service, the solenoid for the small winning opening, and the solenoid for the large winning opening opening / closing plate. It is a figure which showed the transition of the "premium live production" performed in the 3rd symbol display device when a big hit is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", and (a) is the 2nd special in the "latent probability fluctuation state". It is a figure which showed the state which the jackpot was won and the jackpot result was derived in the variation production of a symbol, and (b) shows a plurality of "premium live" in the jackpot state in 7 consecutive villas from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the selection screen of "directing", and (c) is a figure which showed that 1 "premium live directing" is selected from the state of (b), and the "premium live directing" is started. It is the figure which showed the screen, and (d) is the figure which showed the state which "premium live production" is executed from the state of (c). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the small hit open table in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal figure in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation time table in the second embodiment. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing an example of an ordinary electric service opening table in the second embodiment. The winning rate, required time, number of occurrences, firing time, number of firing balls, and number of returning balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the consecutive villa state of the second embodiment are shown, and each jackpot state and each It is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in a game state. It is a figure which showed the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of consecutive villas in the case where there is no time saving limiter in the second embodiment, and the case where there is. It is a slump graph at the time of consecutive villas when there is a time saving limiter in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. In each game state of the third embodiment, the trigger for transition to the game state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol, the recommended ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the special symbol that is likely to be stopped first, and whether or not right-handed strike is possible. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the reserved number table for special figure 1 in 3rd Embodiment. The winning rate, required time, number of occurrences, firing time, number of firing balls, and number of returning balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the consecutive villa state of the third embodiment are shown, and each jackpot state and each It is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in a game state. It is a figure which showed the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of consecutive villas in the case where there is no time saving limiter in the third embodiment, and the case where there is. It is a slump graph at the time of consecutive villas when there is a time saving limiter in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal figure in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation time table in the third embodiment. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing an example of an ordinary electric service opening table according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. In the right-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the third embodiment, the detection timing of the ball at the through gate, the first starting port, and the second starting port, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol. It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the variation display of the second special symbol and the drive timing of the solenoid for ordinary electric service, the solenoid for the small winning opening, and the solenoid for the large winning opening opening / closing plate. It is a figure which showed the transition of the "symbol confrontation production" performed in the "latent probability fluctuation state" after 6 consecutive villas performed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment, and (a) is a figure which showed after 6 consecutive villas. It is a figure which showed the state which the "symbol confrontation effect" was started in the variation effect of (b), and is the figure which showed the state which "the symbol confrontation effect" is performed from the state of (a). , (C) are diagrams showing which symbol-corresponding character wins from the state of (b), and (d) is a diagram showing which symbol-corresponding character wins from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state which was done. (A) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 jackpot random number table in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 jackpot random number table in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1 in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2 in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure shown as a target. It is a list showing the number of consecutive villas according to the continuation probability when entering the ST of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot opening table in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the number of occurrences of each phenomenon in each game state and the jackpot state of 4th Embodiment, the required time, and the total time, and also showed the average total staying time in each game state and a jackpot state. The winning rate, required time, number of occurrences, firing time, number of firing balls, and number of returning balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the consecutive villa state of the fourth embodiment are shown, and each jackpot state and each It is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in a game state. It is a figure which showed the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of consecutive villas in the case where there is no time saving limiter in the fourth embodiment, and the case where there is. (A) is a slump graph at the time of "continuous villa" when there is no time saving limiter function in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a slump graph at the time of "continuous villa" when there is a time saving limiter function in the fourth embodiment. It is a slump graph in. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1 in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2 in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure shown as a target. In the case of entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" as a result of entering the ST in the fifth embodiment and entering the consecutive villas, the number of consecutive villas according to the continuation probability when the right-handed game is executed and the left-handed game are executed. It is a list showing the number of consecutive villas according to the continuation probability in the case of. The "normal game state" in the fifth embodiment, the number of occurrences of each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each game state in the consecutive villa state, each required time are shown, and the average in each jackpot state and each game state is shown. It is a figure which showed the total staying time. The ball launch period, winning rate, required time, number of occurrences, launch time, number of launched balls, and number of return balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each game state in the fifth embodiment are shown, and each jackpot state and each game. It is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in a state. It is a figure which showed the acquired ball number and the cumulative ball number at the time of a right-handed game and a left-handed game when entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" in the case of right-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the fifth embodiment. It is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when the left-handed game is played in. It is a figure which showed the transition of the "launch mode selection effect" performed at the beginning of the "latent probability fluctuation state" after 6 consecutive villas performed by the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment, and (a) is 6 It is a figure which showed the state in which the jackpot of the consecutive villas occurred, and (b) shows the "launch mode selection effect" on the ending screen of the jackpot state of the sixth consecutive villas from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which is, (c) shows the screen which "left-handed mode effect" is executed when the left-handed game is selected in "launch mode selection effect" from the state of (b). FIG. 2D is a diagram showing a screen in which the “right-handed mode effect” is executed when the right-handed game is selected in the “launch mode selection effect” from the state of (b). .. It is a figure which showed each table schematically about the lottery of a normal symbol in 6th Embodiment, (a) is a figure which showed an example of the random number table per ordinary figure schematically, and (b) is the figure which showed typical. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a fluctuation time table, and FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically showing an example of an ordinary electric service opening table. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal electric service control process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the other change processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ST / time saving counting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit process executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 65, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (ball entry openings) 63, 64, 65a, 71, 73, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later in FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, is changed. Further, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol is referred to as "variation effect"). Also used as.

Further, the variable effect is an effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (see FIG. 3). For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (see FIG. 3) described later, and the symbol (third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. It is a production that presents to the player the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the prize by combining the symbols.

Further, the stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, are unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the “city stage” and “sky” are used. There are three stages, "Stage" and "Island Stage". The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

Further, the "reach display" refers to a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. .. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It means the state of being.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as a "variable element"). It is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and is executed by developing from the variable element of "super reach" which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the same "normal reach". There is a variable element of "special reach" that has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of "super reach".

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed invisible to the player in the fluctuation effect. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "sky stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" is changed to the variable element of "super reach". When developing into a variable element of "special reach", a selection screen of a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the variable elements of "normal reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. It is configured so that the selected candidate is changed when the player presses it. Then, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". As for the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player directs the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward, backward, right and left). Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted.

Further, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side side view of the upper plate 17, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it can be pressed by the player. It may be arranged, for example, on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50 described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause the illumination units 29 to 33. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" just before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in the front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Style) in which the area around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more glitter, hereinafter abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the operation handle 51, the push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 503. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of nails, windmills, rails 61, 62, and balls for ball guidance are awarded to a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. A general winning opening 63 that can obtain a predetermined prize ball, a variable winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third symbol occurs, and a first special that is one of the third symbols (so-called special symbols). The first starting port 64, which triggers the lottery of symbols, the second starting port 71, which triggers the lottery of the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, and the through, which triggers the lottery of the second symbol (so-called normal symbol). The gate 67 is opened when a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the ordinary electric service 72, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which allows the ball to enter the second starting port 71 by being opened. The variable display device unit 80 and the like having the small winning opening 73, the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol display device 83, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting opening 71, the ordinary electric service 72, the small winning opening 73, and the variable display device unit 80 are attached to the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the formed through hole and is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as a "right-handed game". On the other hand, the act of passing the fired ball through the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as a "left-handed game"). In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can enter the first starting port 64 (or the small winning opening 73), while the ball enters the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the second starting opening 71. It is configured to be difficult to ball. Further, in the right-handed game, the ball may enter the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the second starting opening 71, while it is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting opening 64 (or the small winning opening 73). It is configured in.

Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a special LED group 37b is arranged on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 3). Has been done. The special symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later (hereinafter, the variation display of both special symbols is referred to as “variation display of both special symbols”. "Dynamic display") is displayed, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The state LED group 37a determines the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (winned) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, which will be described later. It is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of jackpot rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply referred to as "R") and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The state LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot means from the opening to the closing of the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a that opens and closes the variable winning device 65, which will be described later, in order to divide the number of winning balls in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "30 seconds" has passed since the opening of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a was started, or 10 balls are won while the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is open. It is configured to perform one "round".

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, that is, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. In the upper LED group 37b1, a first special symbol indicating a determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 is dynamically displayed. Further, in the lower LED group 37b2, a second special symbol indicating a determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 71 is dynamically displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 is dynamically operated until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the first starting port 64 provided in the center of the board surface of the game board 13 elapses. After the display (in the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a symbol showing the determination result (first embodiment). Then, the stop display is performed with any of a total of 64 types of stop symbols) depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs.

Further, the lower LED group 37b2 is dynamically displayed until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the second starting port 71 provided on the right side side of the game board 13 elapses (dynamic display time). In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are lit one by one in order from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol showing the determination result (in the first embodiment, the first embodiment). Depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs, the stop display is performed with one of a total of 64 types of stop symbols).

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is lost, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, it corresponds to the type (type) of the big hit. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, a hit / fail judgment (big hit / small hit lottery) is made for entering the ball into the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, and each hit / fail judgment is determined to be a big hit. In this case, the jackpot type is also determined according to the winning openings 64 and 71, and the variable winning device 65 and the probability variation region solenoid 65d, which will be described later, are opened and closed according to each jackpot type. Further, when it is determined as a small hit in the hit / fail determination in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the small winning opening 73 is opened and closed.

The jackpot types determined in the first embodiment are "10 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, may be referred to as" probability variation A ")" and "10 round time reduction jackpot" based on the winning of the first starting port 64. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "time saving A") "," 10 rounds latent probability variable jackpot (hereinafter, may be referred to as "latent probability A") ", and" 10 rounds normal jackpot (hereinafter, "normal A") (Sometimes referred to as ")" is prepared (see FIG. 8 (a)). Further, based on the winning of the second starting port 71, "probability variation A" and "latent probability A" are prepared (see FIG. 8B).

Here, the "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not a "probability fluctuation state", a "latent probability fluctuation state", or a "time reduction state", and means a jackpot probability of each special symbol and a hit of a normal symbol. A state in which the probability is normal (that is, a low probability state) and the opening of the ordinary electric service 72 is short. That is, the "normal game state" has a lower jackpot probability of each special symbol than the "probability fluctuation state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", and is more normal than the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". The probability of hitting the symbol is low, and the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 is also short.

Details will be described later, but in the case of the "normal game state", a game state in which the ball is likely to win the second starting port 71 when a so-called right-handed game is played (hereinafter, a state in which the ball is easily won in the second starting port 71). This is not the "winning assistance state"), but the most unfavorable game state for the player. In the "normal game state", when the ball is launched by a right-handed game (for example, detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67), the player and the player know that the unencourageed game is being executed. In order to suggest to the people involved in the hall, it is configured to output a predetermined alarm sound (for example, "Please return to the left-handed game"). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the non-encouragement right-handed game in the "normal game state" and to realize the game playability according to the game specifications.

Next, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is a low probability state as in the "normal game state", but the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (hereinafter, normal) is performed. (The variable display of the symbol is called "variable display") A state in which a so-called "time saving function" with a shortened time is added. In this "time shortened state", the ordinary electric service 72 provided on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 71 is likely to be opened, and as a result, the winning assist function is activated and the ball is sent to the second starting port 71. It becomes easy to enter the ball.

That is, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is equivalent to that of the "normal game state", but the hit by the normal symbol is more likely to be derived in a shorter time than in the "normal game state", and the normal electric service 72 Is a state in which the open state of is prolonged. Therefore, in the "time shortened state", since it is easy for the ball launched by the right-handed game to win a prize in the second starting port 71, it is possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol. 2 It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on a prize in the starting port 71 and play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is a dynamic of a special symbol of a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) after the "time reduction state" is started. Until the display is executed, the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, it is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot probability of each special symbol after that is increased as an added value, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the ordinary electric service 72 is awarded. The auxiliary function is activated.

That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, the hit result by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 72 is extended. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the ball launched by the right-handed game is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed and the second starting is performed. It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on the winning of the mouth 71 and play the game while suppressing the decrease of the number of balls held, and further, a jackpot game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol (special). It is possible to play a game in a state in which a game state) is likely to occur.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "probability fluctuation state" is a dynamic special symbol of a predetermined number of times (160 times in the first embodiment) after the "probability fluctuation state" is started. Until the display is executed (so-called special time. Hereinafter, the acronym of Special Time (special time) may be abbreviated as "ST"), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state. It becomes. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, it is configured to shift from the "probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state".

Next, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", after the jackpot ends, the jackpot probability of each special symbol after that is increased as an added value, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is as low as in the "normal game state". A state that is a state. Unlike the "normal game state", this "latent probability fluctuation state" allows right-handed games, and although it is difficult for the normal electric service 72 provided on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 71 to be in the open state, it is a normal symbol. When the normal electric service 72 is opened in the variable display of, the ball wins the second starting port 71, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed.

That is, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", although the jackpot by the special symbol is a high probability state, the hit by the normal symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", while the right-handed game is allowed, so that the second It is possible to receive a big hit lottery by dynamically displaying the second special symbol while obtaining a certain prize ball by winning a ball into the starting port 71. The details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to facilitate the derivation of the jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the dynamic display of the first special symbol. In the "latent probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the left-handed game in the "normal game state" is triggered by the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the right-handed game. Since it is easy to acquire the execution trigger of the display and a certain prize ball can be given when the execution trigger of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is acquired, the player can play the left-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state". Rather than receiving the lottery for the first special symbol, it is possible to play the game while receiving the lottery for the second special symbol in the right-handed game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is the same as the "probability fluctuation state", which is a predetermined number of times since the "latent probability fluctuation state" is started (in the first embodiment). , 160 times) Until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, it is configured to shift from the "latent probability fluctuation state" to the "normal game state".

Therefore, the jackpot type of "probability change A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round, and the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a is opened. In the 10th round of the jackpot, the probability variation region solenoid 65d (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven, and the probability variation region switch 65e (see FIG. 5) enables the ball to be detected. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number described later is not reached, the jackpot type of this "probability change A" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the "probability change A" can be selected. When a sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 65e during the jackpot of "A", it is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" described later after the jackpot ends.

Here, the time saving limiter will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is equipped with a time saving limit function, and after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, the number of consecutive winnings of the jackpot type of the special symbol to which the "time saving function" is given is predetermined. Every time the number of times (6 times in the first embodiment; hereinafter, the number of times may be referred to as a "time saving limit number of times") is reached, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot at the time when the predetermined number of times is reached is always ". A function that prohibits the transition to a gaming state (that is, a "normal gaming state" or a "latent probability fluctuation state") to which the "time saving function" is not given, and a transition to a high probability state of a normal symbol (so-called time saving limit (limiter)). Function) is installed.

That is, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by clearing the RAM, a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given (hereinafter, after the initialization by clearing the RAM, or after the time saving limit function is activated, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low. After winning the jackpot that occurs after becoming the "first jackpot" (sometimes referred to as the "first jackpot"), the game never shifts to the "normal game state" (so-called "ream villa state". Hereinafter, special symbols (Sometimes, the continuous winning of the special symbol is called "renso"), every time the consecutive winning of the special symbol jackpot type to which the "time saving function" is given reaches 6 times (hereinafter, the jackpot of the special symbol) When the "time saving function" reaches the time saving limit number of times is sometimes referred to as "when the time saving limit is reached"), when the special symbol of the 6th consecutive villa is won, the "time saving function" is always used. Is configured so that only the jackpot type to which is not given, that is, the jackpot type in which the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" occurs is selected.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive wins of the jackpot type to which the "time saving function" is given has not reached the time saving limit number, that is, the number of jackpots to which the "time saving function" is given is from 1 to 5 times (hereinafter, "" When the number of jackpots to which the "time saving function" is granted is 1 to 5 times, it may be referred to as "before reaching the time saving limit"), the "time saving function" is granted when the jackpot of the special symbol is won. It is configured so that the jackpot type can be selected.

With this configuration, every time a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given occurs a predetermined number of times, the low-probability state of the normal symbol can always be set, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol continues to be excessive. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a winning assistance state for a good player. As a result, the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the pachinko machine 10 (the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls, the number of return balls) divided by the number of out balls, so-called. , Machine discount. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "ball output rate".) It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result far from the appearance appears, and the game value given to the player does not become too high. Can be configured as Further, in order to make the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have the time saving limit function, the ball ejection rate is lowered due to the limitation of the number of consecutive occurrences of the "time saving function". It is possible to make up for the minutes by making it easier to generate big hits of special symbols, and to make up for the continuation rate of the high probability state of special symbols with high continuation, which is done with ordinary pachinko machines that do not have a time saving limit function. It is possible to realize a variety of playability that cannot be achieved.

As described above, the "renso" means that an advantageous state is generated again from a state that is clearly advantageous to the player, and in the first embodiment, the "probability fluctuation" in which the right-handed game is performed is performed. It means the case where one of the big hits is won again in the "state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state". Therefore, if a big hit is won in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which a right-handed game can be performed, it corresponds to "renso" and "probability fluctuation state", If any of the jackpots is won in the "normal game state" after the "time reduction state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" is completed, that is, in the left-handed game, it does not correspond to the so-called "renso".

In addition to "6 times", the time reduction limit is set to the game specifications (for example, jackpot probability, jackpot type selection ratio, number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened, continuation rate of "probability fluctuation state", number of time reductions, etc.). It can be set arbitrarily according to the situation. For example, the time reduction limit number of times may be set to "10 times" according to the game specifications, or the time reduction limit number of times may be set to "1 time" according to the game specifications.

Next, the jackpot type of "time saving A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and while the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the tenth round, " Unlike "Probability A", the probabilistic region solenoid 65d (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is not driven in any round, and the ball cannot be detected by the probabilistic region switch 65e (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot of this "time saving A" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and after the jackpot of the "time saving A" is completed, the "time" is reached. It is configured to transition to the "shortened state". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving A" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Next, the jackpot type of "latent A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round, and the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a is opened. Similar to "Probability A", in the 10th round of the jackpot, the probability variation region solenoid 65d (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven, and the probability variation region switch 65e (see FIG. 5) enables the ball to be detected. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number is reached, the jackpot type of this "latent probability A" can be selected instead of the "probability variation A" in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When a sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 65e during the jackpot of "latent probability A", it is configured to shift to the "latent probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Next, the jackpot type of "normal A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1st round to the 10th round, and " Similar to "Time saving A", in each round, the probabilistic region solenoid 65d (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the probabilistic region switch 65e (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, when the time reduction limit number of times is reached, the jackpot type of this "normal A" can be selected instead of the "normal A" in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot of the "normal A" can be selected. It is configured to shift to the "normal game state" after the end. In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "normal A" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b of each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 16 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", and the jackpot type "time saving A". There are 16 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type, 16 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latent A", and 15 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "normal A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. ing. Then, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, the stop display of the loss can be recognized, while the jackpot type "probability change A", "time reduction A", "latent probability A" or "normal". It is difficult to identify which stop display of "A" is displayed.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability change A", and the jackpot type "latent". There are 31 types of display patterns corresponding to "Probability A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Then, like the upper LED group 37b1, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, the stop display of the loss can be recognized, while the stop display of the jackpot type "probability change A" or "latent probability A" is used. Is configured to be difficult to identify.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped, It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. For this reason, it is difficult to identify whether or not the probability variation area switch 65e, which will be described later, is the jackpot type, and the player is made to guess which game state the player is in. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 3 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize.

Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 "starts" the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the ball entering the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71). A liquid crystal display that performs a variable effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 according to the game state, triggered by (sometimes referred to as "winning"). A third symbol display device 81 composed of (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") and a second symbol display composed of an LED capable of executing variable display of a normal symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A device 83 (hereinafter, the second symbol display device 83 may be referred to as a “normal symbol display device 83” for convenience of explanation) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is used for controlling the main control device 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. It is a thing. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel (so-called simultaneous fluctuation). That is, during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 64, when the start prize is given to the second start port 71, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed. Even so, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 71. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed in three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4). On the other hand, the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed using the three symbols Z1 to Z3, but in the variation region 88b for special figure 2 (see FIG. 4) described later. 2 It is configured to produce an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of a special symbol. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment corresponds to the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged. While the variation effect is executed using the three symbol strings Z1 to Z3, the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not performed using the three symbol strings Z1 to Z3, and is used for the special figure 1 described later. In the variable region 87b (see FIG. 4), it is configured to perform an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to be able to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in parallel at the same time, it is possible to take measures against capture or harassment by the player. Is possible. Specifically, for example, if it is composed of priority fluctuations or winning order fluctuations of any of the special symbols, the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", and "latent probability fluctuation state" are advantageous for the player. There is a possibility that the dynamic display of the first special symbol will be executed even though it is desired to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol which is easy to select the big hit type. Therefore, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time, the length of each fluctuation time is set according to the game state, and the special symbol to be executed as the game specification is desired. By configuring the dynamic display result of the above to be easily derived, it is possible to prevent the jackpot type, which is disadvantageous to the player, from being selected.

In addition, during the "normal game state" in which the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not encouraged as a game specification, the player plays a right-handed game and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. Even if it does, it is possible to suppress the derivation of the dynamic display result of the second special symbol by the small hit or the big hit of the first special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the addition of the game value based on the illegal game by the player. It will be possible.

Furthermore, when the game state changes from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, it is necessary to prolong the execution time of the dynamic display of the non-encouragement second special symbol acquired during the right-handed game. If the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set to change preferentially (so-called special figure 2 priority change) or changes in the order in which the prizes are won (so-called change in the order of winning), "normal game" In the "state", the dynamic display of the second special symbol of non-encouragement is executed for a long period of time, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol of encouragement is not executed for a while. Therefore, even if the dynamic display of the special symbol on the non-encouragement side is executed, by configuring the dynamic display of the special symbol on the encouragement side so that it can be executed and the result can be derived, there is a problem when the game state changes. It can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 set to the winning order change or the special figure 2 priority change, the player who intends to stop the game maliciously right in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged. A player who plays a pachinko game to win a ball in the second starting port 71, then stops the game and leaves the seat, and then plays the next game, has a dynamic display of the second special symbol that is executed for a long period of time. If you do not wait for the end, there will be a situation where the lottery by the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed. Therefore, even in a situation where the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol is executed, the dynamic display of the special symbol on the encouragement side is configured to be executable so that the lottery result can be derived. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the influence of malicious harassment of the player and to perform a comfortable game.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") are the characters such as the kimono, the furoshiki, and the helmet that almost fill the front of the wooden box. An attached symbol that imitates is added, and an even number is added so that an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is produced. It is configured so that a big hit will occur after the fluctuation production is finished. For example, when the jackpot type of "probability change A" is won, a variable effect is mainly performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "7" are aligned. In addition, when the jackpot type of "latent A" is won, odd numbers other than "7", that is, numbers "1", "3", "5" or "9" are mainly added. A variable production with the main symbols aligned is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of "Time saving A" or "Normal A" is won, mainly the even-numbered symbols, that is, the main symbols with the numbers "2", "4", "6" or "8" are attached. A variable production is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when each of the jackpot types of "probability variation A" and "latent probability A" is won, all the main symbols can appear. Specifically, for example, even when "probability change A" or "latent probability A" is won, a variable effect in which the same main symbols with the numbers "2" and "8" are aligned is performed. There is. By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the variable effect is stopped, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, and the promotion effect during the jackpot is performed to provide a wide variety of games. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds are reserved with the main display area Dm that fluctuates the third symbol. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of balls and the like, and the other upper 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays a notice effect, a character, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and when the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol set for each game state is performed, the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot of the special symbol set for each gaming state.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a preview effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm.

In the cockpit display area Db, the variation display (variation effect) is not executed among the balls entered in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 corresponding to the special symbol set for each game state. It is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls).

In the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds, the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls, and the movement of the second special symbol The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 which can be changed in synchronization with the target display and the number of reserved balls is configured to be displayable.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 is a number display 87a for special figure 1 that displays the number of pending dynamic display of the first special symbol numerically, and a dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation effect). It is composed of a variable region 87b for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The hold number display 87a for the special figure 1 is configured so that the hold number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be displayed as a numerical symbol in the range of “0” to “4”. Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved numbers in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0, and the reserved number for special figure 1 is reserved. When the number display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1, and the hold number display 87a for the special figure 1 displays "2". If, it indicates that the number of pending numbers of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 2, and if the number of reserved numbers displayed 87a for the special figure 1 displays "3", the number of the first special symbol is displayed. If it indicates that the number of holds for dynamic display is 3, and the number of holds for special figure 1 display 87a is "4", the number of holds for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4. It shows that there is.

That is, the reserved number display 87a for the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 is the content of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. In the "normal game state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, it matches the content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved symbol display area Db1 described later. Is displayed.

The variable region 87b for the special figure 1 is a display area for executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and showing the result, and the display color of the square symbol is configured to be changeable. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable region 87b for special diagram 1 is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It changes at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the order of white → red → .... Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the variable region 87b for the special diagram 1 is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was lost, and the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 is lost. When stopped in red, it means that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was a big hit, and when the square symbol in the variable region 87b for special figure 1 stopped in blue, the dynamic display of the first special symbol was dynamic. It is configured to indicate that the display was a small hit. That is, the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 is displayed so as to correspond to the display content of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In the "normal game state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 is a number display 88a for special figure 2 that displays the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol numerically, and a dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect). It is composed of a variable region 88b for special figure 2 that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The hold number display 88a for the special figure 2 is configured so that the number of hold numbers for the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be displayed in the range of “0” to “4”. Specifically, when the reserved number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved numbers for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0, and the reserved number for special figure 2 is reserved. When the number display 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1, and the hold number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "2". If, it indicates that the number of pending numbers of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2, and if the number of reserved numbers displayed 88a for special figure 2 is displaying "3", the number of the second special symbol is displayed. If it indicates that the number of holds for dynamic display is 3, and the number of holds for special figure 2 display 88a is "4", the number of holds for dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4. It shows that there is.

That is, the reserved number display 88a for the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 is the content of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. The content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved symbol display area Db1 described later in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed to match.

The variable area 88b for special figure 2 is a display area for executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol and showing the result, and like the variable area 87b for special figure 1, the display color of the square symbol can be changed. Has been done. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable region 88b for special diagram 2 is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It changes at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol such as white → red → .... Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special diagram 2 is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was lost, and the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 is lost. When stopped in red, it means that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a big hit, and when the square symbol in the variable region 88b for special figure 2 stopped in blue, the dynamic display of the second special symbol was dynamic. It is configured to indicate that the display was a small hit. That is, the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 is displayed so as to correspond to the display content of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm.

On the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, in the "normal game state", a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 4 (b). .. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds1 on the left and the small area Ds3 on the right, indicating that it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual, and a firing mode encouraged according to the gaming state. Etc. are suggested to the player. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. The color of the hair and the color of the normally white headband will change, and another character will appear to give a notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, or the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) performs a variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. If a ball enters the second starting port 71 while it is being played, the number of times the ball enters (the number of reserved balls) is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the reserved number display 87a for the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 is used. It is also displayed in the hold number display 88a, and further, the variation effect of the special symbol corresponding to the game state is also shown in the first to fourth hold symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the hold symbol display area Db1 in the cockpit display area Db. Is done.

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved ball (one reserved ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game state. Each symbol (“○” symbol (white circle symbol) in the normal display mode) is displayed, and according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, depending on the game state. The number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed (priority display) is displayed.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the first special symbol is set to be displayed according to the gaming state. Alternatively, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one and two reserved symbols are displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, the game state. Indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the above, is two times, and one in each of the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, for a total of three. When the reserved symbol is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is three times, and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed in each of the areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is four times. Show that. When the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the gaming state is 0. Indicates that there is no variable effect that is held at times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, but only one of the lottery games can be executed. May be configured to execute. When only one of the lottery games is executed, when one of the running lottery games is completed, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored respectively. The second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority change), or in the order of winning (so-called special figure 2 priority change). It may be configured to execute a lottery game of a special symbol according to the so-called change in the order of winning. Further, the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol may be configured to be simultaneously displayable on the third symbol display device 81.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol display area Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, and an execution symbol larger than each reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d is provided. It is configured to be displayed. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm is completed, and the displayed reserved symbol is reserved on the lower side as the execution symbol is deleted. It is moved and displayed as a pattern. Specifically, for example, in a situation where four reserved symbols of the first special symbol exist in the "normal game state", they are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol. When the execution symbol is deleted, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is set. The number of balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight), respectively. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls, which are equal to the maximum number of hold lamps of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and hold balls are provided according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. It may display a number.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 performs a winning lottery for the normal symbol due to the turning on. It should be noted that the through gate 67 only serves as a lottery opportunity for the variable display of the normal symbol, and is configured so that the prize balls and the like are not paid out even when the balls pass.

An ordinary electric service 72 is arranged on the right side side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The ordinary electric service 72 is mainly composed of an infestation plate 72a and an ordinary electric service solenoid (not shown) that drives the infestation plate 72a in and out.

The main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) of the first embodiment normally keeps the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 in a protruding state and covers the upper side of the second starting port 71 in front view. The inflow of balls into the second starting port 71 is prevented. Then, when the winner is won by the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal electric function solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 protrudes from the appearance plate 72a for a predetermined time. It is driven from the state to the immersive state immersive in the game board 13 to allow the ball to flow into the second starting port 71, and is played right-handed to flow down the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80. The ball is configured to be in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71, that is, in a winning assisting state.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the low probability state (for example, 1/2), and the "probability fluctuation state" and "probability fluctuation state" in the variable display of the normal symbol are set. By making it harder to win than the "time shortened state", it is difficult to make the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 into the immersive state (open state), and the second starting port from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state". It is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in 71. On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state (for example, 9/10), and the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" are set in the variable display of the normal symbol. By making it easier to win the prize, the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 can be easily put into an immersive state (open state), and the second starting port 71 can be easily won a prize.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variable display derives a hit with a high probability (that is, 90%), so that the "probability fluctuation state" in which the normal symbol is a high probability state and In the "time reduction state", the ball fired in the right-handed game is configured so that it can win a prize in the second starting port 71, while the variable display has a certain probability (even in the low probability state of the normal symbol). That is, since a hit can be derived at 50%), the ball launched in the right-handed game is to a certain extent even in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is allowed and the normal symbol is in the low probability state. (For example, one of three balls) is configured so that the second starting port 71 can win a prize. As a result, even in the "latent probability fluctuation state", although not as much as in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the lottery game of the second special symbol can be received and the second starting port 71 is won. By paying out the prize balls based on the above, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of his / her own balls from the "normal game state".

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol from the "normal gaming state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" as in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the hit probability is changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The time for the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 to be immersed (opened) and the number of times for the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 to be immersed (opened) may be changed. Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the time for the infestation plate 72a of the normal electric service 72 to immerse is made longer than in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", or 1 The number of times that the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is immersed in each time may be made larger than that in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state". Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortened state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the immersion time of the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is lengthened, and the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is increased. At least two things, such as increasing the number of immersions, may be performed at the same time.

The ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (ordinary symbols) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is a normal electric service 72 provided above the front view of the second starting port 71 when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the first embodiment). Is in the operating state for a predetermined time, and when it is stopped at a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (the symbol of "x" in the first embodiment), the normal electric service 72 is in the non-operating state (the closed state is maintained). Has been done.

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the above-mentioned second symbol holding lamp 84 (hereinafter, regarding the second symbol holding lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "ordinary symbol holding lamp 84". It is also lit and displayed. Four ordinary symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 84, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the normal symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not be used for lighting display.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. Game nails and the like are planted around the first starting port 64 so that about 6 balls (so-called S1 = 6) fired in the left-handed game can win a prize per minute. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first starting port switch. (See FIG. 5), a lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol is made. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. Based on the variation effect is executed. The first starting port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

On the right side side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, a second starting port 71 is provided so that a ball can enter only when the normal electric service 72 is in the open state. Game nails are planted around the second starting port 71 so that when the normal electric service 72 is in the open state, about 30 to 40 balls fired in the right-handed game win a prize per minute. Has been done. When the ball enters the second starting port 71, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second starting port switch. (See FIG. 5), a lottery for the jackpot of the second special symbol is made. Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes based on the second special symbol according to the game state. The production is executed. The second starting port 71 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters.

A horizontally long rectangular large winning opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the variable winning device 65 at the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, three sets of the same symbol ("777"). "Etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. After that, according to the jackpot type, the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (big hit game) in which the ball can easily win a prize in the jackpot. As this special game state, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a, which is normally closed, is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses or 10 balls are won). ..

When the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and after the closing, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened again. To. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is configured to be repeatable up to 10 times (10 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball in the variable winning device 65 in the game. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

Further, inside the variable winning device 65, a probabilistic region solenoid 65d (see FIG. 5) that is driven only when the jackpot type of "probability variation A" or "latent probability A" is won is provided. A probabilistic region switch 65e (see FIG. 5) is arranged on the downstream side of the probabilistic region solenoid 65d, and the ball can be detected by the probabilistic region switch 65e only when the probabilistic region solenoid 65d is open. It is configured. As described above, the opening / closing operation of the probability variation region solenoid 65d is open-driven only in the 10th round during the jackpot when the jackpot type of "probability variation A" or "latent probability A" is won, and is driven at most once. Only openable. By making the probability variation region switch 65e win a ball, a high probability state of a special symbol can occur after the end of the jackpot. The driving mode of the probabilistic region solenoid 65d and the detection timing of the sphere of the probabilistic region switch 65e will be described later in FIG.

Below the front view of the first starting port 64, a small winning opening 73 that is opened when a small hit result is derived in each special symbol is arranged. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a provided in the small winning opening 73 is used for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second). , It is opened so that the opening / closing operation is performed only once. When a small hit is won in the second special symbol, the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a provided in the small winning opening 73 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the opening / closing operation thereof is performed. Is configured to be repeated 3 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the small winning opening 73 is arranged directly below the front view of the first starting opening 64, and the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is opened to allow a ball to enter the small winning opening 73. Even if a winning state is available, both the ball launched in the left-handed game and the ball launched in the right-handed game flow into the small winning opening 73 due to the outer shape of the first starting port 64. It is installed in a difficult position. As a result, even when the small hit game, which occurs relatively frequently than the big hit game, is won in the first special symbol, the prize ball based on the winning of the small winning opening 73 is suppressed, and the game is excessively played. It is possible to suppress the situation where the game value is paid out to the person.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65, 71, 73 are guided through the out openings 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. The balls that have won the winning openings 63, 64, 65, 71, and 73 are also guided to the ball discharge path and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the balls that have passed through the out openings 66.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random access memory (Random Access Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variation effect of each special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and display result of variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 are obtained. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, a jackpot open table 202f, a small hit open table 202g, a random number table 202h per normal figure, and a normal figure. At least the variable table 202i and the ordinary electric service opening table 202j are stored. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like perform a big hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, a variable effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of the variable display display result of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, various control timings, transitions of the gaming state, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 30.

For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot symbol are used. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the fluctuation effect, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 used for is used.

Further, the counter C4 per normal figure is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure.

Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at "4 ms" intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), and some counters are irregular in the main process (see FIG. 35). Is updated to, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d composed of four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas has a ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 9999") to reach the maximum value (for example, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999"). After reaching "0", it returns to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 9999". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 98), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start opening 64 (starting prize), the first hold first 1 to 2 provided in the first hold ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64 (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first holding area of any of the fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 71 (starting winning), the second holding first 1 to 2 provided in the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting opening 71 (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any second holding area of the fourth area.

The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot or a small hit is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the hold area of the first hold ball storage area 203d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the holding area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a1 (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1”) corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a2 (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2”) corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. is there.

The special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment are for the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state of the special symbol for each set value, respectively. It is divided into two types, one for the high-probability state, which is used when the game state is the high-probability state of the special symbol, which has a higher probability of becoming a big hit than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

Then, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently for each set value. In addition, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required to shift from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the loss. That is, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased in order to shift from the low probability state to the high probability state, the number of lost random numbers is reduced and the decrease is allocated as the number of jackpot random numbers. In this way, by making the number of jackpot random numbers different according to the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small hit random values included in each set value and in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set to be the same. That is, the number of small hit random numbers in the first special symbol is the same for each set value, and is configured to be the same in the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Similarly, the number of small hit random numbers in the second special symbol is also the same for each set value, and is also configured to be the same in the low-probability state and the high-probability state. In this way, by making the number of small hit random values the same for each set value in each special symbol, and for the low probability state and the high probability state, all the set values and the game state in each special symbol are set. The ratio of the game value given considering only the small hit game in is the same.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the low-probability state to the high-probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is lost in all the set values. It is configured to supplement from the number of. In addition, the number of small hit random numbers of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured so as not to be changed for each set value. That is, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change and the increase in the number of jackpot random values due to the change from the low probability state to the high probability state in each setting are reduced by the number of lost random numbers. Then, the decrease is compensated by assigning it to the jackpot random number value, and the number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol small hit random number value is the same for each first special symbol or second special symbol setting. .. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, which increases the man-hours when designing the game specifications. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to the setting change can be acquired when the jackpot random number counter C1 is the easiest to stay in the game. It is configured to compensate from the combination of the most random number values other than (that is, the lost random number value). With this configuration, for example, in the first special symbol whose execution is encouraged in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is high, the appearance of the lost role, which is the most common role in the variation effect of the first special symbol. It is possible to make it difficult to determine the setting from the number of times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the set value of the pachinko machine 10 to be detected by setting the setting discriminating element by the player only as the appearance rate of the jackpot whose appearance probability is lower than that of the lost role. As a result, even if the setting is low (that is, the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without causing the player to detect the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to the setting change is used as the loss random number value corresponding to the loss role in the jackpot random number counter C1 that does not give the player a game value. It is configured to compensate from the number.

Unlike the big hit role and the small hit role, the lost role is a role that does not give a game value, so it is provided for each pachinko machine 10 and is a data lamp (not shown) that displays the game result and the like in the pachinko machine 10. It is a role that is not clearly (largely) displayed in. Here, if the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game, which is easily displayed clearly (on a large scale) on the data lamp, and the number of small hit random numbers corresponding to the small hit game are both changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rate of the two elements of the big hit game and the small hit game with the data lamp, it becomes easy to guess the setting determination of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, for example, when the player finds out the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to a low setting (for example, the set value "1"), the player does not play the game on the pachinko machine 10 and pachinko. There is a risk that the operation of the machine 10 will be reduced.

Therefore, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the change in the probability setting value is not given to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1 and is not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. By configuring so as to compensate from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to, the setting discriminating factor by the player is only the appearance rate of the big hit, and the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be detected from the appearance rate of the small hit. be able to. Therefore, the discriminating element of the probability setting value is limited to the appearance rate of the winning combination based on one random value, and for example, even if the setting value is low (that is, the setting value "1", etc.) is set to the player. It is possible to continue the game without detecting it and promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lower the set value is, the less likely the jackpot is to occur, and the higher the set value is, the more likely the jackpot is to occur. In the "state", the lower the set value, the longer the period of stay in the "latent rate fluctuation state" tends to be. As a result, the lower the set value, the more times the small hit is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", so that the game value given in the "latent probability fluctuation state" increases. Therefore, even when the set value is low, it is possible to increase the game value that can be given to the player by entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" as compared with the case where the set value is high. Therefore, by providing the "latent probability fluctuation state", the advantages and disadvantages in the setting difference can be reversed, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1", the jackpot random number that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The number of values (big hit random number values) of the counter C1 is 33, and the values "0 to 32" are defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 33/10000 = 0.33 / 100. (That is, it is set to be 0.33%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 100, and the value "0 to 99" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, That is, 1%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is 100, which is low. The value "33 to 132" in the case of the probability state or the value "100 to 199" in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol are high. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 986, and the value "133 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9800 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "200 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortening state") of the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 9867/10000 = 98.67 / 100. (That is, 98.67%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9800. It is set so that / 10000 = 98/100 (that is, 98%).

That is, at the set value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Special Figure 1 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 9867 or less) while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured as follows.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 35, and the value "0 to 34". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 35/10000 = 0.35 / 100. (That is, it is set to be 0.35%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 105, and the value "0 to 104" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 105/10000 = 1.05 /. It becomes 100 (that is, 1.05%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the set value "1". As in the case, both are 100, and the value "35-134" in the low probability state or the value "105-204" in the high probability state is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. Has been done. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "2" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 986, and the value "135-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9795 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "205-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortening state") of the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 9865/10000 = 98.65 / 100. (That is, 98.65%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9795. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.95 / 100 (that is, 97.95%).

That is, at the set value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 1 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 986 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 1%) as the set value "1", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). Probability state: 0.33% → 0.35%, high probability state: 1% → 1.05%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 37, and the value "0 to 36". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 37/10000 = 0.37 /. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.37%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 110, and the value "0 to 109" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 110/10000 = 1.1 /. It becomes 100 (that is, 1.1%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" and As in the case of the set value "2", both are 100, and the value "37 to 136" in the low probability state or the value "110 to 209" in the high probability state is the special figure 1 jackpot random number table. It is defined (set) in 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "3" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9863, and the value "137 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9790 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "210-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 9863/10000 = 98.63 / 100. (That is, 98.63%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9790. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.9 / 100 (that is, 97.9%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 1 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 9863 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 1%) as the set value "2", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). Probability state: 0.35% → 0.37%, high probability state: 1.05% → 1.1%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 39, and the value "0 to 38". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time reduction state") of the first special symbol with the set value "4" is 39/10000 = 0.39 / 100. (That is, it is set to be 0.39%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 115, and the value "0 to 114" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "4" is 115/10000 = 1.15 /. It is 100 (that is, 1.15%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low-probability state and the high-probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is from the set value "1". As in the case of "3", both are 100, and the value "39 to 138" in the low probability state or the value "115 to 214" in the high probability state is displayed in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "4" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9861, and the value "139 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9785 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "215-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "4" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 9861/10000 = 98.61 / 100. (That is, 98.61%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9785. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.85 / 100 (that is, 97.85%).

That is, at the set value "4", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Special Figure 1 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 9861 or less).

Therefore, the set value "4" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 1%) as the set value "3", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). Probability state: 0.37% → 0.39%, high probability state: 1.1% → 1.15%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 41, and the value "0 to 40". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "5" is 41/10000 = 0.41 / 100. (That is, 0.41%) is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 120, and the value "0 to 119" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "5" is 120/10000 = 1.2 /. It becomes 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low-probability state and the high-probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is from the set value "1". As in the case of "4", both are 100, and the value "41-140" in the low probability state or the value "120 to 219" in the high probability state is shown in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "5" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9859, and the value "141-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9780 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "220 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "5" is 9859/10000 = 98.59 / 100. (That is, 98.59%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9780. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.8 / 100 (that is, 97.8%).

That is, at the set value "5", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 1 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 9859 or less).

Therefore, the set value "5" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 1%) as the set value "4", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). Probability state: 0.39% → 0.41%, high probability state: 1.15% → 1.2%), and it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 43, and the value "0 to 42". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "6" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 43/10000 = 0.43 / 100. It is set to be (that is, 0.43%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 125, and the value "0 to 124" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "6" is 125/10000 = 1.25 /. It becomes 100 (that is, 1.25%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low-probability state and the high-probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is from the set value "1". As in the case of "5", both are 100, and the values "43 to 142" in the low probability state or the values "125 to 224" in the high probability state are shown in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "6" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9857, and the value "143 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9775 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "225-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "6" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 9857/10000 = 98.57 / 100. (That is, 98.57%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9775. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.75 / 100 (that is, 97.75%).

That is, at the set value "6", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 1 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 9857 or less).

Therefore, the set value "6" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 1%) as the set value "5", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). Probability state: 0.41% → 0.43%, high probability state: 1.2% → 1.25%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1", the jackpot is determined in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The number of values (big hit random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 is 33, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 32" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. Has been done. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 33 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.33 / 100 (that is, 0.33%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 100 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 99" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 100, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is 9875. The value "33 to 9907" in the low probability state or the value "100 to 9974" in the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "1" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 92 pieces, the value "9908 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 25 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9975-9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 92/10000 = 0.92 / 100. It is set to be (that is, 0.92%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”) is 25. It is set to be / 10000 = 0.25 / 100 (that is, 0.25%).

That is, at the set value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 2 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" (that is, 92 or less) while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured as follows.

In this way, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 98.75%), and is compared with the lost random number value in the second special symbol. The number is set so that it is very easy to select. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, it is set so that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 35, and the value "0 to 34" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 35 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.35 / 100 (that is, 0.35%).

When the set value is "2", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 105 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 104" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 105, as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.05 / 100 (that is, 1.05%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit as a big hit from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of, both are 9875, and the value "35-9909" in the low probability state or the value "105-9979" in the high probability state is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. ) Has been done. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "2" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. There are 90 pieces, and the value "991-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 20 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9980 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 90/10000 = 0.9 / 100. It is set to be (that is, 0.9%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”) is 20. It is set so that / 10000 = 0.2 / 100 (that is, 0.2%).

That is, at the set value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state of Special Figure 2 is reduced, and the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game is reduced. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 90 or less).

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 98.75%) as the set value "1", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.35% → 0.37%, high probability state: 1% → 1.05%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 37, and the value "0 to 36" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 37 /, as in the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.37 / 100 (that is, 0.37%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 110 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 109" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 110, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.1 / 100 (that is, 1.1%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". And, as in the case of "2", both are 9875, and the value "37 to 9911" in the low probability state or the value "110-9984" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "3" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 88 pieces, the values "99992 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 15 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9985-9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 88/10000 = 0.88 / 100. It is set to be (that is, 0.88%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”) is 15. It is set to be / 10000 = 0.15 / 100 (that is, 0.15%).

That is, at the set value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 2 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 88 or less).

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 98.75%) as the set value "2", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.35% → 0.37%, high probability state: 1.05% → 1.1%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 39, the value "0 to 38" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "4" is 39 /, as in the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.39 / 100 (that is, 0.39%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 115, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 114" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "4" is 115, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.15 / 100 (that is, 1.15%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of "3", the number is 9875, and the value "39 to 9913" in the low probability state or the value "115 to 9989" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "4" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 86 pieces, the values "99991 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 10 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9990 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "4" is 86/10000 = 0.86 / 100. (That is, 0.86%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 10. It is set so that / 10000 = 0.1 / 100 (that is, 0.1%).

That is, at the set value "4", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 2 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 86 or less).

Therefore, the set value "4" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 98.75%) as the set value "3", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.37% → 0.39%, high probability state: 1.1% → 1.15%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 41, and the value "0 to 40" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "5" is 41 /, as in the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.41 / 100 (that is, 0.41%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 120 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 119" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "5" is 120, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.2 / 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so that it is about three times as easy to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of "4", the number is 9875, and the value "41-9915" in the low probability state or the value "120-9994" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "5" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 84 pieces, the values "9916 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining five other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9995-9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "5" is 84/10000 = 0.84 / 100. (That is, 0.84%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 5. It is set to be / 10000 = 0.05 / 100 (that is, 0.05%).

That is, at the set value "5", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 2 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 84 or less).

Therefore, the set value "5" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 98.75%) as the set value "4", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.39% → 0.41%, high probability state: 1.15% → 1.2%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 43, and the value "0 to 42" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "6" is 43 /, as in the first special symbol. It is set so that 10000 = 0.43 / 100 (that is, 0.43%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 125 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 124" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "6" is 125, which is the same as the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.25 / 100 (that is, 1.25%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about three times as easy to hit as a big hit from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of "5", the number is 9875, and the value "43 to 9917" in the low probability state or the value "125 to 9999" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "6" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 82 pieces, the values "9918 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the number of lost random numbers is set in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The corresponding value is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "6" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 82/10000 = 0.82 / 100. (That is, 0.82%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 0. It is set so that / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), and is configured so that the losing combination does not appear.

That is, at the set value "6", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state shown in FIG. 2 is reduced by reducing the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" where the stay rate is highest in the game. The number of jackpot random numbers for the increase from the low probability state to the high probability state and the increase due to the change of the set value is the range of the number of lost random numbers in the "normal game state" while being configured to compensate from the decrease. It is configured to be within (that is, 82 or less).

Therefore, the set value "6" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 98.75%) as the set value "5", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.41% → 0.43%, high probability state: 1.2% → 1.25%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

As described above, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" is calculated as the "normal game state". It is configured to be within the range of the number of lost random number values in the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state" while being configured to supplement from the number of lost random number values in the "time shortened state". In addition, the number of small hit random numbers is configured so as not to change between the "normal game state" or "time reduction state" and the "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state". With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random number value, and suppress the increase in man-hours when designing the game specifications. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, a big hit is made among the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area as the first holding area where the random number counter C1 is stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, a big hit among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, unless the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that is a jackpot. That is, if it is a random number that is lost (lost random number value), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the 1st reserved ball storage area 203d or the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that becomes a jackpot, the variation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are the ones at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 are stored. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. And are provided.

Here, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 8B is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, the number of times the "time saving function" is given in association with the jackpot of the special symbol (the above-mentioned time saving limit number of times) is a predetermined number of times. (In the first embodiment, 5 times, that is, when the jackpot type to be won next is selected after winning the jackpot type to which the "time saving function" is given 5 times), the time saving limit number is reached. It is equipped with a time-saving limit function that prohibits the transition of the game state after the end of the jackpot to the low-probability state of the normal symbol, which is not always given the "time-saving function", and prohibits the transition to the high-probability state of the normal symbol. That is, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by clearing the RAM, the jackpot type that becomes the high probability state of the normal symbol at the time of selecting the next jackpot is not selected every time the time saving limit is reached (hereinafter, the high probability of the normal symbol at the end of the jackpot). An event in which the jackpot type that becomes the state is not selected may be referred to as "the time saving limiter operates"), and only the jackpot type that becomes the low probability state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends can be selected.

On the other hand, when the time saving limit is not reached, that is, the number of big hits to which the "time saving function" is given is 1 to 5 times (hereinafter, the number of big hits of the special symbol is 1 to 5 times (first time) to 5 times. , "Before reaching the time saving limit") is configured so that a jackpot type that becomes a high-probability state of a normal symbol after the jackpot ends can be selected.

By configuring in this way, every time a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given occurs a predetermined number of times, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be surely set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol continues. It is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears, which is given to the player. It can be configured so that the playing value per hour is not too high (too much). In addition, in order to make the ball ejection rate of this pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limiter function, the amount of decrease in the ball ejection rate due to the limitation of the number of "renso" is set. It is possible to make up for the jackpot of special symbols by making it easier to generate, or to make up for the continuation rate of the high probability state of special symbols before reaching the time saving limit, and it is possible to make up for it, and it is a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limiter function. It is possible to realize a variety of playability that cannot be achieved with a machine.

As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is divided into a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and further, before the time reduction limit of the number of jackpots is reached. It is divided according to when the time saving limit is reached, and further, the type of special symbol (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the jackpot type according to the type of the special symbol, and the jackpot type counter. It is a table associated with the value of C2. The jackpot type that can be selected may be different depending on the game state in which the player stays.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a jackpot type, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the jackpot probability of the special symbol are performed until the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (160 times in the first embodiment). After a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds and a "probability variation A" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state (so-called ST state)" in which both normal symbol hit probabilities are in a high probability state, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is low. Although it is in a state, the maximum number of rounds is "Time saving A" corresponding to the "time reduction state" in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. After 10 rounds of jackpot, until the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (160 times similar to "probability variation A" in the first embodiment), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is obtained, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is low. "Hidden probability A" corresponding to the "latent probability fluctuation state" that becomes the state, and "normal A" in which both the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol become low probability after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. There is.

The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 are configured so that the jackpot types that can be selected are different depending on whether or not the time saving limit is reached at the time when the jackpot occurs, and each of them is configured for each jackpot type. , The possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type are associated with each other.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 8A, the number of jackpots is before the time reduction limit is reached and after the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of jackpots is the first to the fifth after the time reduction limit is reset). When a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for "probability change A". "0 to 49" is associated, and the value "50 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A". In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of jackpots after resetting the time reduction limit is the sixth), and the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state" When a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in, the value "0 to 49" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability A", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "normal A". "50 to 99" are associated with each other.

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol in all the gaming states before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first holding ball storage areas 203d is set. When the value of the stored jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is Special figure 1 Determined from the jackpot type table 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95". For example, "time saving A" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type of "probability change A" is 50% and the jackpot type of "time saving A" is 50%. , Will be won. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type of "latent change A" is 50% instead of "probability change A", and "time saving A" is replaced with "". Usually, the jackpot type of "A" will be won at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, before the time reduction limit is reached (after the time reduction limit is reached), the selection ratios of the jackpot types "probability variation A" and "time reduction A" are selected at the same level (both 50%). When the time saving limit is reached, the selection ratios of the jackpot types "latent A" and "normal A" are set to be the same (both 50%).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first starting port 64 can be won and the first special symbol can be dynamically displayed, but it is difficult to win the second starting port 71. As a result, it is difficult to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Further, in the right-handed game, the second special symbol can be dynamically displayed by winning the second starting port 71, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed because it is difficult to win the first starting port 64. Is hard to execute. Then, when the time saving limiter is activated, it means that the "time saving function" is operating, that is, the state during the "ream villa", and in the present embodiment, the right-handed game is encouraged during the "ream villa". Therefore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is difficult to execute. Therefore, when the time saving limiter is activated in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the player dares to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol even though the right-handed game is encouraged. This is a case where a left-handed game is performed, a ball is won in the first starting port 64, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, the game state in which the right-handed game is encouraged (that is, the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", and the "latent probability fluctuation state") is until the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived. Is configured to be longer than the time until the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived (see FIGS. 14 to 23 described later), so that the movement of the first special symbol The "latent probability A" and the "normal A" that can be selected when the time saving limiter is operated in the target display are set so as to be practically difficult to be derived (not derived).

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 8B, the number of jackpots is 1 to 5 before reaching the time saving limit and after reaching the time saving limit (that is, after resetting the time saving limit number of times). In addition, when a jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type counter C2 is used for the "probability change A". Values "0 to 99" are associated with each other. In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of jackpots after resetting the time reduction limit is the sixth), and the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state" When the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in, the value "0 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "latent probability A".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol in all the gaming states before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the first holding area of any one of the second holding ball storage areas 203e When the value of the stored jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same first holding area is It is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, and in the first embodiment, "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type by the values of all the jackpot type counters C2.

Therefore, if a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type of "probability variation A" will be won at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type of "latent change A" is won at a rate of 100% instead of "probability change A".

Therefore, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type "probability variation A" is always selected, and when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type "latent probability A" is always selected. It is configured to be selected. As a result, after winning the first jackpot, if the "renso" state continues without shifting to the "normal game state" even once, the jackpot of the special symbol that is given the "time saving function" will be 6 times. Every time it occurs, a "latent probability fluctuation state" can be generated without fail after the sixth big hit. As a result, every time a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given occurs a predetermined number of times, the low probability state of the normal symbol can always be set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol continues to be excessive in the "renso". It is possible to prevent the addition of game value from occurring in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears, which is given to the player. It can be configured so that the playing value per hour is not too high (too much). In addition, in order to make the ball ejection rate of this pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limiter function, the amount of decrease in the ball ejection rate due to the limitation of the number of "renso" is set. It is possible to make up for the jackpot of special symbols by making it easier to generate, or to make up for the continuation rate of the high probability state of special symbols before reaching the time saving limit, and it is possible to make up for it, and it is a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limiter function. It is possible to realize a variety of playability that cannot be achieved with a machine.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the right-handed game is not encouraged (prohibited) in the "normal game state", and the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived in the "normal game state". Since the time until the first special symbol is dynamically displayed is set to be longer than the time until the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived (see FIGS. 14 to 23 described later), "normal game" In the "state", the lottery result by the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured so as to be practically difficult to be derived.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 65 in each jackpot type, the detection mode of the sphere in the probability variation region switch 65e, and the probability variation based on the detection of the sphere on the probability variation region switch 65e. The setting mode of the transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) and the like will be described. FIG. 9 shows the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid 65b or the probabilistic region solenoid 65d in each round when the jackpot types of “probability A” and “latent probability A” are won, and the large winning opening switch 65c or the probabilistic region switch 65e. It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the detection timing of a ball, the period during which the special winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is closed (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), and the setting timing of the probability variation transition flag 203k. Further, FIG. 10 shows the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid 65b or the probabilistic region solenoid 65d in each round when the jackpot types of “time saving A” and “normal A” are won, and the large winning opening switch 65c or the probabilistic region switch 65e. It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the detection timing of the sphere, the interval, and the setting timing of the probability variation transition flag 203k.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the jackpot type "probability change A" or "latent probability A", a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and the jackpot solenoid 65b is turned on at the start of each round to open and close the jackpot. The plate 65a is opened. Then, in each round, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from the opening, or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 65c) is satisfied. At the same time, the large winning opening solenoid 65b is turned off, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is closed, and one round is completed. Then, the opening / closing operation in 10 rounds is repeated in the jackpot game of 1, and the jackpot game of 1 is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "probability change A" or "latent probability A", the probability variation region solenoid 65d is turned on in the 10th round in the jackpot game, and the ball can be detected by the probability variation region switch 65e provided on the downstream side thereof. It becomes a state. Then, when the ball flowing into the variable winning device 65 in the 10th round is detected by the probability variation region switch 65e while the probability variation region solenoid 65d is on, the probability variation transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is set. It is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the jackpot of the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "latent probability A" is completed, the probability variation transition flag 203k is set to on, so that a high probability state of a special symbol occurs. It is configured as follows.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10, in the jackpot type "time saving A" or "normal A", a total of 10 rounds of jackpot games are executed as in the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "latent probability A", and one jackpot is played. The game ends.

Here, in the jackpot type "time saving A" or "normal A", unlike the jackpot types "probability variation A" and "latent probability A", the probability variation region solenoid 65d is not turned on in the 10th round in the jackpot game, so that it is downstream thereof. The sphere cannot be detected by the probability variation region switch 65e provided on the side. Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving A" or "normal A", there is no chance that the probability variation transition flag 203k (see FIG. 5) is set to on, so after the jackpot type "time saving A" or "normal A" ends the jackpot. By setting the probability variation transition flag 203k to off, the high probability state of the special symbol does not occur and remains in the low probability state.

In this way, it is possible to make different whether or not to drive the probability variation region solenoid 65d according to the jackpot type, and to make different whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes the high probability state of the special symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "probability fluctuation state" which is the ST state is entered, the probability and the end of the "probability fluctuation state" being "consecutive". The probability of doing so will be explained. FIG. 11 is a list showing the number of “series villas” (0 to 10 times) according to the continuation probability when entering the ST state, and the arrival probability and end probability of the “sequential villas” number of times. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is 1/100 at the set value "1" and at the set value "2". 1.05 / 100, 1.1 / 100 at the set value "3", 1.15 / 100 at the set value "4", 1.2 / 100 at the set value "5", 1. It is configured to be 25/100. Then, in any of the set values, the ST state after the end of the big hit is configured to continue 160 times. Here, for convenience of explanation, the ST continuation probability and the end probability in the set value "1" will be described, and the description of other set values will be omitted. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game specification is set in which the time saving function is not given after the next big hit when the time saving function is given six times in a row in the "renso" state by the time saving limiter function. However, here, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol will continue is shown without considering the time saving limiter function.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot type of "probability variation A" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the left-handed game, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot game ends. .. Then, how to win the jackpot again in the dynamic display of the special symbol performed with a probability of 1/100 until the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the right-handed game is performed 160 times. The game is played.

As shown in FIG. 11, whether or not a jackpot with a probability of 1/100 is derived while the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed 160 times is 79.97% (hereinafter, for convenience, “80.0%”. In addition, "about" is omitted in the notation of the percentage.) When the first jackpot enters the "probability fluctuation state", the average "renso" until it returns to the "normal game state". The number of times will occur 4.99 times (about 5 times).

Here, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the special symbol is dynamically displayed 160 times without being able to win the jackpot, and the "renso" ends. The probability is 20.0%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability of being able to "ream" once in the jackpot is 80.0% as described above, and the jackpot is hit. The probability that the "ream villa" state will end after one "ream villa" is made is 36.0%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" twice is 64.0%, and the jackpot is twice "consecutive". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 48.8%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" three times is 51.2%, and the jackpot is "consecutive" three times. After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 59.0%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" four times is 41.0%, and the jackpot is "consecutive" four times. After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 67.2%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" 5 times is 32.8%, and the jackpot is 5 times "consecutive". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 73.8%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "renso" 6 times is 26.3%, and the jackpot is 6 times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 79.0%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "reamed" 7 times is 21.0%, and the jackpot is 7 times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 83.2%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "renso" eight times is 16.8%, and the jackpot is eight times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 86.6%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "renso" 9 times is 13.4%, and the jackpot is 9 times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 89.3%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" 10 times is 10.7%, and the jackpot is 10 times "consecutive". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 91.4%.

That is, when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot and the "probability fluctuation state" is entered, for example, the rate at which the jackpot "renso" occurs 6 times is about 4 times when the first jackpot is won. In addition, the rate at which the jackpot "renso" occurs 10 times is about once in 10 times when the first jackpot is won. Therefore, for example, in the case of playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 for one day, even if the first jackpot can be won 10 times, the phenomenon that the jackpot of 10 "renso" occurs is 1 in the day game. Whether or not it occurs once.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, the gaming mode in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the transition condition of the gaming state in each gaming state, and the transition destination will be described. FIG. 12 shows the transition to the game state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol, the recommended ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the first in each gaming state. 2 This is a list that explains the fluctuation time of special symbols, special symbols that are likely to be stopped first, and whether or not right-handed strikes are possible. Further, FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a launch mode in each game state and a transition destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. Note that, in FIG. 13, the transition of the gaming state when the game is played in the non-recommended firing mode is also shown, but the description thereof is omitted here for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 12, the opportunity to shift to the "normal game state" is the initial state at the time of shipment from the factory, the RAM clear state, the winning of the jackpot type "normal A" (see FIG. 13), and the "probability fluctuation state". When the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 160 times (see FIG. 13), or when the dynamic display of the special symbol in the "time reduction state" is executed 100 times (so-called end of electric support. See FIG. 13). .) ,.

Further, in the "normal game state", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is also in the low probability state. Further, in the "normal game state", the left-handed game is encouraged, and the ball launched in the left-handed game mainly wins the first starting port 64. Then, while the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the first special symbol is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds", the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is fixed at "600 seconds". As a result, even if the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, the movement of the first special symbol is performed. The target display is stopped first and the result is easily derived. In this "normal game state", when a right-handed game is performed, the firing mode is detected by a through gate 67 or the like, and based on the detection, the sound is suppressed in order to suppress the firing in the right-handed game. The output device 226 (see FIG. 5) or the like is configured to execute the right-handed prohibition notification.

Next, the only opportunity to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" is to win the jackpot type "probability change A" (see FIG. 13).

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the high probability state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is also the high probability state. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball launched in the right-handed game wins a prize in the second starting port 71 in which the winning assist function is activated. Then, while the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is performed in the range of "1 second to 60 seconds", the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the first special symbol is fixed at "600 seconds". As a result, even if the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, the movement of the second special symbol is performed. The target display is stopped first and the result is easily derived. In this "probability fluctuation state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the only opportunity to shift to the "time reduction state" is to win the jackpot type "time reduction A" (see FIG. 13).

Further, in the "time reduction state", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Further, in the "time shortened state", the right-handed game is encouraged as in the "probability fluctuation state", and the ball launched in the right-handed game wins the second starting port 71 in which the winning assist function is activated. To do. Then, while the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is performed in the range of "1 second to 60 seconds", the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the first special symbol is fixed at "600 seconds". As a result, even if the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, the movement of the second special symbol is performed. The target display is stopped first and the result is easily derived. In this "time reduction state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Next, the only opportunity to shift to the "latent probability fluctuation state" is to win the jackpot type "latent probability A" (see FIG. 13).

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the low probability state. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", as in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball launched in the right-handed game does not have the winning assist function. However, when the ordinary electric service 72 is opened, the second starting port 71 is won. Then, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 130 seconds" which is longer than the "probability fluctuation state", while the fluctuation of the dynamic display of 1 of the first special symbol is performed. When the time is fixed at "600 seconds" (see FIGS. 14 to 23 described later), and as a result, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time. However, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped first, and the result is easily derived. In this "latent probability fluctuation state", since the right-handed game is encouraged, the right-handed prohibition notification is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, the number of held fluctuation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 determine the rough production mode of the fluctuation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of jackpot and loss. Be selected. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a long pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as “long”) in which a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected for each production mode and a fluctuation time shorter than the long pattern are used. A middle pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "middle") in which is easy to select and a short pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "short") in which a fluctuation time shorter than the middle pattern is easily selected are prepared. ing.

Specifically, there are "non-reach (long)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" production mode, and "normal reach" as "reach display". "Normal reach (long)" production mode, "normal reach (middle)" production mode or "normal reach (short)" production mode in which only variable elements are executed, and "super reach" developed from the variable elements of the "normal reach" "Super Reach (Long)" production mode, "Super Reach (Middle)" production mode or "Super Reach (Short)" production mode in which the variable elements of "Super Reach (Long)" are executed, and "Normal Reach" Five production modes are selected: a "special reach (long)" production mode, a "special reach (middle)" production mode, or a "special reach (short)" production mode in which the variable element of the "special reach" is executed.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode The "reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode may be collectively referred to as the "non-reach" production mode). In the third symbol display device 81 in which the columns Z1 to Z3 fluctuate, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" that shuffles each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at high speed is performed, the second symbol row Z1 that stops first. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in Z3 and "reach display" does not occur.

The fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is, for example, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81. , A variable element that is scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific production mode ("non-reach (short)" production mode). It is configured to be used.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element means that in the third symbol fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, the third symbol is slowed down at a speed visible to the player. A variable element that scrolls to. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in order while causing the player to recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the 2 symbol rows (for example, left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4)) that are stopped and displayed first, it is assumed that "reach display" has occurred and "normal reach" is displayed. While developing into a variable element, if a different third symbol is stopped in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation effect is ended. It is configured in. The details of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" or each variable element including the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (middle)" production mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and then the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are stopped in order, different third symbols are stopped in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped first, the remaining 1 symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the variation effect of 1 is completed. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the fluctuation element of the "high speed fluctuation", each symbol sequence Z1 to Z1 Z3 stops at the same time, and a different third symbol stops at 2 symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, 2 symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), and another symbol row Z2. Also stops, and the variation effect of 1 ends.

Among the production modes, "normal reach (long)" production mode, "normal reach (middle)" production mode and "normal reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "normal reach (long)" production mode, "normal reach (middle)" The effect mode and the "normal reach (short)" effect mode may be collectively referred to as the "normal reach" effect mode) in the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. Immediately after the same third symbol is stopped in the two symbol columns Z1 and Z3 that are stopped and displayed, the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and the variable element of other "reach display", that is, the "super reach" or "super reach" is executed. This is one of the production modes of "reach display" that does not develop into a variable element of "special reach".

Among the production modes, "super reach (long)" production mode, "super reach (middle)" production mode and "super reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "super reach (long)" production mode, "super" The "reach (middle)" production mode and the "super reach (short)" production mode are sometimes collectively referred to as the "super reach" production mode), which evolved from the variable elements of the "normal reach". This is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

Among the production modes, "special reach (long)" production mode, "special reach (middle)" production mode and "special reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "special reach (long)" production mode, "special" The "reach (middle)" production mode and the "special reach (short)" production mode may be collectively referred to as the "special reach" production mode), which evolved from the variable elements of the "normal reach". This is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "special reach" is executed.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the first hold first to fourth areas provided in the first hold ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64 is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first hold area to be stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 71, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the second hold first to fourth areas provided in the second hold ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start port 71 is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second hold area to be stored.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 has a stop pattern selection counter C3 according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current game state, and the number of variation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently pending. The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the value is configured differently. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols on standby.

Further, in the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the current gaming state. Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, the effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variation effect, is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. A plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the success or failure of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state". Or, this is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether the player is in the "normal gaming state" and (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. That is, depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost, the stop pattern, that is, the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode. By configuring the mode so that the selection ratio is different, the degree of expectation of a big hit is changed for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode are easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" production is performed. It is configured so that the mode and the "normal reach" production mode can be easily selected.

With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production that does not make a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit a big hit appears in a variable production, it is suggested to the player that a big hit is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit is being performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to hit. The effect mode (stop pattern), which is a rough content of the variable effect, is selected based on the above. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is lost, the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is determined based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it difficult to select the effect that is easy to hit the jackpot and makes it easy to select the effect that is difficult to hit the jackpot. Configure to select. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the jackpot for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is that the number of times of waiting for the first special symbol variation effect has reached the upper limit, and the number of times of entering the first starting port 64 or waiting for the second special symbol variation effect is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow prizes) based on the entry of balls into the second starting port 71 in the state of reaching.

Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port 71 in the "variable state", the "latent probability fluctuating state", and the "time shortened state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is easily reached. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, balls entering the second starting port 71 frequently occur when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, and the second starting port is bent. Despite entering 71, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect having a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is reserved during the execution of the variation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the first starting port 64, and the fluctuation effect is digested so that the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. The firing of the ball is stopped until the game is interrupted. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) can be easily reached, or the number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of reserved balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variation time is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of balls into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

Further, the third reason is that the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed, so that the state in which the variation effect is executed is maintained for a long time. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small (not present), a new ball is inserted into either the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variation effect cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired to play the game, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Instead, I get excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will stop playing on the pachinko machine 10 because it is determined that it is difficult to obtain the game value.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it easy to select a long variation time when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. There is. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Further, as a fourth reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variable machine capable of simultaneously executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in parallel. However, the special symbols that you want to execute (encourage) for each game state are set (specified) in advance as game specifications, and in order to actively draw the special symbols that you want to execute for each game state, It is configured to give a predetermined penalty (penalty) when a lottery opportunity for a (non-encouragement) special symbol that is not desired to be executed in a predetermined gaming state is obtained.

Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state", a left-handed game is encouraged in advance as a game specification, and the left-handed game is performed to win a jackpot game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. While obtaining the game value of the jackpot game, the game property of which of the accompanying "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", and "time reduction state" is realized according to the jackpot type is realized. Further, in the "time reduction state", the right-handed game is encouraged in advance as a game specification, and how the second special game is dynamically performed while the right-handed game is performed and the winning assistance state is effective. Achieve the playability of whether or not to win the jackpot game on the display. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged in advance as a game specification, and the next big-hit game becomes what kind of big-hit type while maintaining the winning assistance state by performing the right-handed game. Achieve the playability of whether or not. Then, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the right-handed game is encouraged in advance as a game specification, and although the right-handed game is performed and there is no winning assistance state, the second starting port 71 is appropriately won. It is configured to win a small hit game based on the winning and to increase the number of balls held by winning a ball in a variable winning device 65 that can win in a right-handed game, and wins a prize in the second starting port 71. It is set in advance as a game specification so as to realize the game property of how to continue the period of the "latent probability fluctuation state" for a long time without winning the jackpot game based on the game.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the left-handed game is encouraged, while in the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state". , The execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the right-handed game is encouraged. Here, if the game is not executed according to the above-mentioned game specifications, in particular, an act of executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol while executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state". If this is done, a game result different from the ball output rate based on the initially set game specifications will be derived, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage in the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a plurality of dynamic displays of the second special symbols are held (for example, four) in the "normal game state", the second special to be newly started. The dynamic display of the symbol is performed for a long time (for example, 600 seconds), and the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is reduced. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", and "latent probability fluctuation state", when a plurality of dynamic displays of the first special symbol are held (for example, four), a new start is made. The dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed for a long time (for example, 600 seconds), and the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is reduced. With this configuration, when a ball is awarded to the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, which causes the dynamic display of the special symbol that is not recommended as a game specification, the first special symbol or the first special symbol or By reducing the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of adding the game value. As a result, it is possible to make the player hesitate to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol for which the dynamic display is not encouraged, suppress the game different from the expected game specifications, and go to the hall. Disadvantages can be reduced.

In the "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state", the left-handed game is not encouraged as a game specification, but the non-encouragement game (that is, the left-handed game) is performed. Even in this case, the game value obtained by the player is set to be lower than that in the case of playing the encouraged game (that is, the right-handed game). Therefore, since it is not a game mode that is disadvantageous to the game hall, no special penalty is provided.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202c will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the reserved number table 202c1 for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIG. 15 is a reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 corresponding to the second special symbol. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first start port 64, whether or not the variation effect is correct and the effect thereof are determined. Refer to the reservation number table 202c1 for special figure 1 based on the game state at the time point and the total number of hold points of the variation effect of the first special symbol at that time point, and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d10. It is configured. Further, when the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the second starting port 71, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the game state at that time, and the second special at that time are also performed. It is configured to refer to the reservation number table 202c2 for special figure 2 based on the total number of reservations of the symbol variation effect and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d10. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on any one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d10 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c1 for special figure 1 of FIG. 14, the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3" at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction in the "normal game state". In the case of ", the A table 202d1 (see FIG. 16A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. In addition, when the total number of reserved balls is "4" at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction in the "normal game state", B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 16B). Is selected. On the other hand, at the time of extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 17A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", and the "latent probability fluctuation state", regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls, the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 17 (FIG. 17). b) See) is selected.

That is, in the "normal game state", if the big hit is not won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (that is, a loss or a small hit), the game is stopped based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at that time. It is configured to select A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 of the pattern table 202d. On the other hand, in the "normal game state", when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time. It is configured to.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls and the hit / miss of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured to be.

In addition, when a big hit is won in the "normal game state", or even in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", the stop pattern table 202d is displayed according to the number of reserved balls or the result. It may be configured differently. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected may be selected.

In this case, for example, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, it is configured to select an effect mode in which only the time of the variable element portion of the "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds. .. With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started with the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being four times, even if the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed in 5 seconds. At the time when the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds ends (when it is recognized as the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds), "reach display" may occur in the fluctuation production. Therefore, even when the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the production mode in which the "reach display" is executed other than the "non-reach (short)" production mode is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss at the time of executing the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202c2 for the special figure 2 of FIG. 15, in the "normal game state", the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d (regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls) (See FIG. 17 (b)) is selected.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the loss extraction or the small hit extraction is performed and the total number of reserved balls is "1", the stop pattern table 202d E table 202d5 (See FIG. 18 (a)) is selected. In addition, when the total number of reserved balls is "2 to 4" at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the F table of the stop pattern table 202d 202d6 (see FIG. 18B) is selected. On the other hand, at the time of the jackpot extraction of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the G table 202d7 (see FIG. 19A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", when the loss is extracted or the small hit is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is "1", the H table 202d8 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 19 (b)). ) Is selected. Further, when the total number of reserved balls is "2 to 4" at the time of the loss extraction or the small hit extraction of the "latent probability fluctuation state", the I table 202d9 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 20 (FIG. 20). a) See) is selected. On the other hand, at the time of the jackpot extraction of the "latent probability fluctuation state", the J table 202d10 (see FIG. 20B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 20. FIG. 16A is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 16B is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 17A is a diagram schematically showing an example of C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 17B is a diagram schematically showing an example of D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d. It is a figure shown. Further, FIG. 18A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 18B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d. It is a figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (long)" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (long)" effect mode is set. Is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (long)" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in A table 202d1, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode, "normal reach (middle)" production mode, "normal reach (short)" production mode, "super reach (middle)" production mode ) ”Direction mode,“ Super reach (short) ”production mode,“ Special reach (middle) ”production mode,“ Special reach (short) ”production mode (hereinafter,“ non-reach (middle) ”production mode,“ Normal reach (normal) "Middle)" production mode, "super reach (middle)" production mode, and "special reach (middle)" production mode may be collectively referred to as "middle production mode". Also, "non-reach (short)" The production mode, "normal reach (short)" production mode, "super reach (short)" production mode, and "special reach (short)" production mode may be collectively referred to as "short production mode"), and , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and none of the middle effect mode, the short effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected. Has been done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (middle)" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "super reach (middle)" effect mode is set to. The range of C3 is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (middle)" effect mode is set to "98,99".

In the B table 202d2, a "non-reach (long)" production mode, a "normal reach (long)" production mode, a "super reach (long)" production mode, and a "special reach (long)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (long)" production mode). The "reach (long)" production mode, the "normal reach (long)" production mode, the "super reach (long)" production mode, and the "special reach (long)" production mode may be collectively referred to as the "long production mode". The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to any of the long effect modes, the short effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode, and any of the long effect modes, the short effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation". The production mode is also set so as not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, 75% of the "non-reach (long)" production mode, 20% of the "normal reach (long)" production mode, 3% of the "super reach (long)" production mode, and "special reach (long)" production mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 2%. In addition, in the B table 202d2, "non-reach (middle)" production mode is 75%, "normal reach (middle)" production mode is 20%, "super reach (middle)" production mode is 3%, and "special reach (middle)" production mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 2%.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, in the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2, the long effect mode of each "reach display" is selected for each "reach display".

Therefore, since the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are selected so that the long effect mode or the middle effect mode is different only in the "non-reach" effect mode, the A table 202d1 is selected as compared with the B table 202d2. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production tends to be relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the pending variable effect. It is configured as follows. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is relatively short is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small, in order to secure the ball entry time into the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is used. Select a "non-reach (long)" effect mode with a long variable effect time. As a result, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected, can be performed, so that the ball enters the first starting port 64. By making it easier to secure time and increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to maintain the situation in which the variation effect is being executed. ..

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variation effect of the loss, but the first start port 64 Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected between the determination of the variation effect based on the ball entering the second starting port 71 and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry. It is configured in.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a variable effect of loss, either A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. In the table 202d1 and the B table 202d2, a "non-reach (long)" production mode or a "non-reach (middle)" production mode, a "normal reach (long)" production mode or a "normal reach (middle)" production mode, and a "super reach" production mode The value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "(long)" production mode or "super reach (middle)" production mode, or the "special reach (long)" production mode or "special reach (middle)" production mode, respectively. It is set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect, only the long effect mode or the middle effect mode is selected in each effect mode, and the time of the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is different. Then, substantially the same production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same (same type) even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). The production mode of is selected. As a result, even when a pre-reading notice such as "pending change notice" is given based on the production mode selected at the time of starting prize, the contents of the variable production to be executed are substantially the same (same type), and the pre-reading is performed. In the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause a discrepancy with the content of the look-ahead notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17A, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach (long)” effect is set to “0” to “4”. The stop pattern selection counter C3 that is set and corresponds to the "super reach (long)" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the stop pattern selection counter that corresponds to the "special reach (long)" effect mode. The range of C3 is set to "40" to "99".

Since the C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit and the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to each middle effect mode and each short effect mode, and neither middle effect mode nor short effect mode is selected. There is. Further, in the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is also set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17B, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode ("0" to "99"). ), The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other "loss display" or "reach display" is executed. Therefore, it is selected by the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" and the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state". The stop type is always set to be the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode.

In the first embodiment, when a small hit is derived in the lottery of the first special symbol, the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is equivalent to the "loss display" or the "reach display" at the time of the loss derivation. Is configured to appear, and the "loss display" or "reach display" when the loss is derived and the "loss display" or "reach display" when the small hit is derived are indistinguishable. There is. On the other hand, in the special symbol display device 37, the result stopped at the time of deriving the loss and the result stopped at the time of deriving the small hit are identifiablely displayed, and the small winning opening 73 is opened at the time of deriving the small hit. Depending on the display result of the special symbol display device 37 and the small winning opening 73 and the driving mode of the small winning opening 73, it is possible to identify whether the loss is derived or the small hit is derived.

With this configuration, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in the "normal game state", the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time (for example, 600 seconds). It is configured to reduce the execution efficiency of the variation effect of the second special symbol. In addition, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", and the "latent probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol is lengthened. It is configured to be performed for a time (for example, 600 seconds) to reduce the execution efficiency of the variation effect of the first special symbol. As a result, when the variation effect of the special symbol that is not encouraged as a game specification can be executed, the execution efficiency of the variation effect of the special symbol that is not encouraged can be reduced, thereby reducing the efficiency of adding the game value. it can. As a result, the player can hesitate to win a prize at the starting ports 64 and 71 triggered by the special symbol that is not encouraged, and the game is played differently from the game specifications assumed for each game state. It can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the hall can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18A, in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is set to “0” to “83”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that is set and corresponds to the "normal reach (short)" effect mode is set to "84" to "93", and the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (short)" effect mode is set. The range of is set to "94" to "98", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (short)" effect mode is set to "99".

In the E-table 202d5, each long production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode, "normal reach (middle)" production mode, "super reach (middle)" production mode, and "special reach (middle)" production mode , And, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and any of the long effect modes, "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and "normal reach (middle)" effect The mode, the "super reach (middle)" effect mode, the "special reach (middle)" effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode are also set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the F table 202d6 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “83”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (short)" effect mode is set to "84" to "93", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "super reach (short)" effect mode is set to. The range of C3 is set to "94" to "98", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (short)" effect mode is set to "99".

In the F table 202d6, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the middle effect mode, the short effect mode, and the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and any of the middle effect mode and the short effect mode is used. , And the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is also set not to be selected.

That is, in the E table 202d5, "non-reach (middle)" production mode is 92%, "normal reach (short)" production mode is 5%, "super reach (short)" production mode is 2%, and "special reach (short)" production mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 1%. In addition, in the F table 202d6, "non-reach (short)" production mode is 92%, "normal reach (short)" production mode is 5%, "super reach (short)" production mode is 2%, and "special reach (short)" production mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 1%.

That is, in the E table 202d5, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected, and in the F table 202d6, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, in the E table 202d5 and the F table 202d6, the short effect mode of each "reach display" is selected for each "reach display".

Therefore, since the E table 202d5 and the F table 202d6 are selected so that the middle effect mode or the short effect mode is different only in the "non-reach" effect mode, the E table 202d5 is selected as compared with the F table 202d6. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production tends to be relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the F table 202d6 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the E table 202d5.

In this way, when the right-handed game is encouraged and the lottery result of the loss is extracted in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" having the winning assist function, the pending ball of the fluctuation effect is on hold. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the number. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode with the shortest variable effect time is selected. As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" in which the winning assist function is activated, when the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation production is large, the execution time of the fluctuation production to be executed is shortened, and the fluctuation production is performed. By increasing the number of executions, it is possible to improve the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is small even though the winning assist function is activated, in order to secure the ball entry time to the second starting port 71, "non-reach" is performed. Select the "non-reach (long)" production mode in which the variable production time is longer than the "(middle)" production mode. As a result, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected, can be performed, so that the ball enters the second starting port 71. By making it easier to secure time and increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to maintain the situation in which the variation effect is being executed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the G table 202d7 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach (short)” effect is set to “0” to “4”. The stop pattern selection counter C3 that is set and corresponds to the "super reach (short)" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the stop pattern selection counter that corresponds to the "special reach (short)" effect mode. The range of C3 is set to "40" to "99".

Since the G table 202d7 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit and the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the G table 202d7, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to each long effect mode and each middle effect mode, and neither long effect mode nor middle effect mode is selected. There is. Further, in the G table 202d7, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is also set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19B, in the H table 202d8 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “77”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that is set and corresponds to the "normal reach (middle)" effect mode is set to "78" to "92", and the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (middle)" effect mode is set. The range of is set to "93" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (middle)" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In the H table 202d8, each short production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "normal reach (long)" production mode, "super reach (long)" production mode, and "special reach (long)" production mode , And, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and any short effect mode, "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, or "normal reach (long)" effect Aspects, a "super reach (long)" effect mode, a "special reach (long)" effect mode, and a "super long variation" effect mode are also set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the I table 202d9 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is “0” to “77”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (middle)" effect mode is set to "78" to "92", and the stop pattern selection counter corresponding to the "super reach (middle)" effect mode is set to. The range of C3 is set to "93" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (middle)" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In the I table 202d9, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the long effect mode, the short effect mode, and the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and any of the long effect mode and the short effect mode is assigned. , And the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is also set not to be selected.

That is, in the H table 202d8, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is 78%, the "normal reach (middle)" production mode is 15%, the "super reach (middle)" production mode is 5%, and the "special reach (middle)" production mode. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 2%. Further, in the I table 202d9, the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is 78%, the "normal reach (middle)" production mode is 15%, the "super reach (middle)" production mode is 5%, and the "special reach (middle)" production mode is 5%. ) ”The effect mode is set to be a selection ratio of 2%.

That is, in the H table 202d8, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and in the I table 202d9, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, in the H table 202d8 and the I table 202d9, the middle effect mode of each "reach display" is selected for each "reach display".

Therefore, the H table 202d8 and the I table 202d9 are selected as compared with the H table 202d8 or the I table 202d9 because they are selected so that the long effect mode or the middle effect mode is different only in the "non-reach" effect mode. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production tends to be relatively long. In other words, it can be said that the variation time of the selected variation effect of the I table 202d9 tends to be shorter than that of the H table 202d8.

In this way, when the right-handed game is encouraged, but the lottery result of the loss is extracted in the "latent probability fluctuation state" that does not have the winning assistance function, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the pending fluctuation production. Therefore, it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode with the shortest variable effect time is selected. As a result, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" which does not have the prize assist function, since the prize assist function is not provided, it is difficult to win the second starting port 71 from the "probability fluctuation state" which has the prize assist function. It is an advantageous gaming state by making it easier to select an execution time of the variation effect that is relatively longer than the "probability variation state" and prolonging the state in which the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by the interruption of the fluctuation effect of the object.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the J table 202d10 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach (middle)” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The stop pattern selection counter C3 that is set and corresponds to the "super reach (middle)" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the stop pattern selection counter that corresponds to the "special reach (middle)" effect mode. The range of C3 is set to "40" to "99".

Since the J table 202d10 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit and the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the J table 202d10, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to each long effect mode and each short effect mode, and it is set so that neither the long effect mode nor the short effect mode is selected. There is. Further, in the J table 202d10, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, and the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is also set not to be selected.

Therefore, as shown in C table 202d3, G table 202d7, and J table 202d10, the selection ratio is in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode in the variable effect at the time of winning the jackpot. As shown in A table 202d1, B table 202d2, E table 202d5, F table 202d6, H table 202d8 and I table 202d9, in the variation effect at the time of loss, "normal reach" effect mode> "super reach" effect mode. > The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "special reach" production mode. Therefore, it is highly possible that the jackpot display result will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode for the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display". It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation for the jackpot according to the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling of the big hit according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

Based on the above, the game is determined by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the type of the special symbol, the appropriateness of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of times the variable effect is executed based on the situation in which the variable effect is performed, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

When "reach display" is selected when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is large (for example, "4"), the stop pattern in which the effect element of the "high-speed fluctuation" of each "reach display" is shortened. A table 202d may be provided. Further, the effect mode may be selected based on the total number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed variation" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, a stop pattern table 202d in which the selection rate of each effect mode is completely different may be provided according to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading notice execution decision and the said The number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead notice may differ. In such a case, a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect is required, which complicates the process.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 has a configuration in which, for example, "1" is added in order within the range of "0 to 9", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"), the value returns to "0". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first start port 64. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 273d4 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area.

This fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. In addition, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare the command of the total variation pattern of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. In this pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table 202e, the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of loss and small hit of the first special symbol and the special figure used at the time of big hit of the first special symbol are used. 1 Big hit variation pattern table 202e2 and special figure 2 used when the second special symbol is lost and small hit 2 Loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 and special figure 2 used when the second special symbol is big hit A variation pattern table 202e4 is prepared.

FIG. 21 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 21 (b) is a special figure stored in the ROM 202. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e2 for a big hit, and FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202e3 for a special figure 2 loss / small hit stored in ROM 202. FIG. 23 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the fluctuation pattern tables 202e1 to 202e4 are grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode at the time of loss / small hit, "E0: non-reach long" and "non-reach (middle)", which are referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, are used. ) ”For“ E1: non-reach middle ”referred to when the production mode is determined, and“ E2: non-reach short ”referred to when the“ non-reach (short) ”production mode is determined. "E3: Normal Reach / Long" and "Normal Reach (Middle)" are referred to when the production mode is determined. "E4: Normal Reach (Middle)" is referred to when the production mode is determined. Refer to when the "normal reach / middle" and "normal reach (short)" production modes are determined. Refer to when the "E5: normal reach / short" production mode is determined and the "super reach (long)" production mode is determined. "E6: Super Reach Long" and "Super Reach (Middle)" production will be referred to when the mode is decided. "E7: Super Reach Middle" and "Super Reach (Short)" production For "E8: Super Reach Short" which is referred to when the mode is decided, and for "E9: Special Reach Long" which is referred to when the "Special Reach (Long)" production mode is decided. "EA: Special Reach Middle", which is referred to when the "Special Reach (Middle)" production mode is determined, and "EB:", which is referred to when the "Special Reach (Short)" production mode is determined. It is divided into "special reach short" and "EC: super long fluctuation" which is referred to when the "ultra long fluctuation" production mode is determined.

In addition, as the production mode at the time of a big hit, when the "normal reach (long)" production mode is determined and the "E3: normal reach long" production mode is determined, and when the "normal reach (middle)" production mode is determined. The reference "E4: Normal Reach Middle" and the "Normal Reach (Short)" production mode referred to when the "Normal Reach (Short)" production mode is determined are the "E5: Normal Reach Short" and "Super Reach (Long)" production modes. For "E6: Super Reach Long", which is referred to when it is decided, and for "E7: Super Reach Middle", which is referred to when the "Super Reach (Middle)" production mode is decided, and "Super" "E8: Super Reach Short" which is referred to when the "reach (short)" production mode is decided, and "E9: special reach" which is referred to when the "special reach (long)" production mode is decided. -For "Long" and for "EA: Special Reach Middle", which is referred to when the "Special Reach (Middle)" production mode is decided, and when the "Special Reach (Short)" production mode is decided. It is divided into the one for "EB: special reach short" to be referred to and the one for "EC: super long fluctuation" to be referred to when the "ultra-long fluctuation" production mode is determined.

Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), that is, If it is a lost value or a small hit value (small hit random number value), refer to the reserved number table 202c1 for Special Figure 1 and refer to the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the above, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1 group (group), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is set in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the reserved fluctuation production.

In the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the first special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation (" high-speed fluctuation ()) in which the total fluctuation time is "15 seconds". One fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "fluctuation pattern" with "fluctuation time") of "long)" fluctuation element + "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element "is prepared. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. All values ("0-9") are associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "". That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, "the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. To.

Here, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "normal reach", the fluctuation element of "super reach", and the fluctuation element of "special reach" Variable elements and “re-variable” variable elements are provided.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. The fluctuation element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "15 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation production when the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the like is selected (hereinafter, referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). (In some cases), when a "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected, "5 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation production (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). When a "non-reach (short)" production mode or the like is selected, "1 second" is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation production (hereinafter, may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)"), and "ultra-long fluctuation" is performed. When the effect mode is selected, "595 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variation effect (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "high-speed variation (ultra-long)"). When the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "1 second", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "595 seconds", and the third symbol can be visually recognized. It is a variable element that shows whether or not the scroll fluctuates to generate "reach display". The variable element of this "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or " When an effect mode other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode (for example, a “non-reach (long)” effect mode) is selected, “5 seconds” is performed after the fluctuation element of the “high-speed fluctuation”.

That is, in the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each symbol sequence of the third symbol display device 81 is "low-speed fluctuation". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bita stop) without going through the variable element of. When the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation effect may end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode has a variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "10 seconds" and a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds". The fluctuation effect is composed of the fluctuation pattern including. Further, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode, the fluctuation production is configured by the fluctuation pattern of only the fluctuation elements of the "high-speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds". Further, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation" of "1 second". Further, in the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode, the variation effect is composed of a variation pattern including a variation element of "high speed variation" of "595 seconds" and a variation element of "low speed variation" of "5 seconds".

The variable element of "normal reach" remains when the same symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "reach forming symbol") is stopped and displayed in the two symbol sequences that stop first in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the symbol sequence of. This "normal reach" variable element is performed "5 seconds" after the "low speed fluctuation" variable element when the "normal reach (long)" effect mode and the "normal reach (middle)" effect mode are selected. When the "normal reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, "4 seconds" is performed after the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the pattern of "super reach" There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that once makes a temporary "loss display" appear and then executes the variable element of "re-variation". Has been done.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and the variable element of the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable element is performed "40 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach (long)" variable element, "15 seconds" after the "normal reach (middle)" variable element, and "normal reach (normal reach)". It takes "10 seconds" after the "short") variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern in which the "loss display" is directly displayed and a pattern in which the "big hit display" is directly displayed are temporarily provided. A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "loss display" is displayed.

The variable element of the "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of the "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and the variable element of the "special reach" is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a special effect (for example, "competitive effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "160 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach (long)" variable element, "105 seconds" after the "normal reach (middle)" variable element, and "normal reach (normal reach)". "Short)" followed by "50 seconds".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and a pattern that directly displays the "big hit display" are temporarily provided. There is a pattern that "re-variates" after the "loss display" appears.

It should be noted that, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", it is configured to develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". When the symbol is stopped, it may be configured to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the fluctuation element of the “re-variation” is prepared.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of "missing display (including small hit display. The same shall apply hereinafter)", the variable element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "loss display" to one of the "big hit displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the fluctuation elements of this "re-variation" are selected only in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, 202e4 (see FIGS. 21 (b) and 23), and the loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, 202e3 (FIG. 21). (A) and FIG. 22) are configured so as not to be selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E1: non-reach / middle" includes "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" in which the total fluctuation time is "5 seconds". One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "only the variation element of" high speed variation (short) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Since "E2: non-reach short" cannot be selected as the production mode in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1, it is provided in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1. No, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E3: normal reach / long" includes the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "variation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is "0 to 9" for "variable element + variable element of" normal reach "", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach". ] Is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take. ("0-9") is associated with "a variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ a variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ a variable element of" normal reach "". That is, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element. Is selected.

In addition, in the variable pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss / small hit, "E4: normal reach / middle" and "E5: normal reach / short" cannot be selected as the production mode, so special figure 1 for loss / small hit. It is not provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E6: Super Reach Long" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach Long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" is "0-9", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" Only the variable element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" can be selected.

That is, when the "super reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor correspond to all values ("0-9") It is attached. In other words, in the case of the "super reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach". Fluctuating factor of "+ Fluctuating factor of" super reach "" is selected.

In addition, in the variable pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss / small hit, "E7: super reach middle" and "E8: super reach short" cannot be selected as the production mode, so special figure 1 loss / small It is not provided in the hit variation pattern table 202e1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E9: Special Reach Long" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with the total fluctuation time of "180 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: Special Reach Long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" is "0-9", and the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" Only the variable element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach" can be selected.

That is, when the "special reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor correspond to all values ("0-9") It is attached. In other words, in the case of the "special reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach". Variable element of "+" variable element of "special reach" "is selected.

In addition, in the variable pattern table 202e1 for special figure 1 loss / small hit, "EA: special reach middle" and "EB: special reach short" cannot be selected as the production mode, so special figure 1 loss / small It is not provided in the hit variation pattern table 202e1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1, "EC: ultra-long variation" includes the variation element of "high-speed variation (ultra-long)" with the total variation time of "600 seconds" + " One fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EC: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only the "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ the variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the variation type counter CS1 can take. A "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ a variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with the value ("0-9"). That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "the variation element of" high-speed variation (ultra-long) "+ the variation element of" low-speed variation "" is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss and small hit of the first special symbol is determined as the fluctuation pattern as it is, so that the fluctuation pattern may be determined without using the fluctuation type counter CS1. Good. Further, although the selection is made using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 21B, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, the number of holdings for special figure 1 With reference to the table 202c1, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time, the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. The effect mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area was held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation production.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for special figure 1 jackpot, "E3: normal reach long" includes the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" 30 seconds "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variation element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation element +" normal reach "variation element +" re-variation " Two fluctuation patterns with "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach / long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". "0-2" for "variable element +" normal reach "variable element", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "re-variation" It is "3 to 9" for "variable elements of".

That is, when the "normal reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (long)" variation element. + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor 30%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach (long)" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-reach" The fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" of "variation" is easy to select (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element to be selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit.

In the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E4: normal reach middle" and "E5: normal reach short" cannot be selected as the production mode, so they are provided in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2. The value of the variable type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, in "E6: Super Reach Long", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" and "variable element of" high speed fluctuation (long) "with total fluctuation time of" 70 seconds "+ variable element of" low speed fluctuation " + Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be selected for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach Long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" vs. "0-3", variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" "Variable element +" Super reach "variable element +" Re-variable "variable element" is "4-9".

That is, when the "super reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (long)" variation. Factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor "variation pattern is 40%," high speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor +" low speed fluctuation "variation The variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach (long)" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + " The fluctuation pattern of "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "is easy to select (60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element should also be selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E7: super reach middle" and "E8: super reach short" cannot be selected as the production mode, so that the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 The value of the variable type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for special figure 1 jackpot, in "E9: Special Reach Long", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "180 seconds" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" and "variable element of" high speed fluctuation (long) "with total fluctuation time of" 190 seconds "+ variable element of" low speed fluctuation " + Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be selected for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 21 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: Special Reach Long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" vs. "0-4", variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" "Variable element +" Special reach "variable element +" Re-variable "variable element" is "5-9".

That is, when the "special reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (long)" variation. 50% of the fluctuation pattern of "element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation factor +" normal reach "variation factor +" special reach "variation factor", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation The variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" special reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach (long)" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol, the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + the "normal reach" fluctuation element + Fluctuation pattern of "special reach" fluctuation pattern and "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of "Variation element" is selected evenly (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which a jackpot can be expected equally in any fluctuation pattern.

Since "EA: Special Reach Middle" and "EB: Special Reach Short" cannot be selected as the production mode in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 The value of the variable type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e2 for special figure 1 jackpot, "EC: ultra-long fluctuation" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "600 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 21B, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EC: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only the "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ the variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("" "0-9") is associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "". That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "the variation element of" high-speed variation (ultra-long) "+ the variation element of" low-speed variation "" is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

By configuring in this way, if a jackpot is won, a relatively long fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, and by enhancing the production content of the fluctuation effect in which the jackpot occurs, the game can be played. You can improve your interest. In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the hit is lost or small, a relatively short fluctuation pattern such as a "non-reach" effect mode can be easily selected, so that the hit or small hit can be easily selected. By shortening the effect content of the time variation effect, the variation effect can be efficiently digested.

Next, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area of the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a jackpot value (big hit random number value), that is, a loss occurs. If it is a value or a small hit value (small hit random number value), refer to the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 to determine the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time. Based on this, the stop pattern table 202d is selected, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 is determined based on the selected production mode. In the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3 group (group), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is set in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the reserved fluctuation production.

In the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, which is referred to when the second special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation (" high-speed fluctuation ( One fluctuation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "fluctuation time") of "long)" fluctuation element + "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element "is prepared. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". Is set to "0 to 9", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. All values ("0-9") are associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "". That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, "the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. To.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E1: non-reach / middle", the total fluctuation time is "5 seconds" and "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "". One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "". It is set to "9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" high speed variation (short) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E2: non-reach short", only the fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" with the total fluctuation time of "1 second" are included. 』One fluctuation pattern is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0" for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "". It is set to "~ 9", and only "only the fluctuation elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (ultra-short) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E3: normal reach / middle", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed" with the total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" One fluctuation pattern of "variation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + It is "0-9" for "variable element of" normal reach "", and only the "variable element of" high speed fluctuation (short) "+ the variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ the variable element of" normal reach "" It is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take. ("0-9") is associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "". In other words, in the case of the "normal reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach". Variable element ”is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, "E5: normal reach / short" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" with the total fluctuation time of "10 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0 to 9" for "variable elements of" normal reach "", and the "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "" Only can be selected.

That is, when the "normal reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all that the variation type counter CS1 can take. ("0-9") is associated with "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (ultra-single)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach". Fluctuation factor of ”is selected.

In addition, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, "E3: normal reach / long" cannot be selected as the production mode, so that the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 is provided. No, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E7: Super Reach Middle", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" with the total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" + " One fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Super Reach Middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Super reach" variable element "is set to" 0-9 ", and the" high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element + Only "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "can be selected.

That is, when the "super reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor correspond to all values ("0-9") It is attached. In other words, in the case of the "super reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach". Fluctuating element of "+" fluctuating element of "super reach" "is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "E8: Super reach short", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" + One fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: super reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "is set to" 0-9 ", and the" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "variation element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation Only the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" can be selected.

That is, when the "super reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. For all values ("0-9"), "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor " It is associated. In other words, in the case of the "super reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (ultra-single)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach". "Variable element of" + "Variable element of" Super Reach "" is selected.

Since "E6: Super Reach Long" cannot be selected as the production mode in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, it is provided in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3. No, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202e3, in "EA: Special Reach Middle", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" with the total fluctuation time of "120 seconds" + " One fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EA: Special Reach Middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element "is set to" 0-9 ", and the" high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element + Only "normal reach" variable elements + "special reach" variable elements "can be selected.

That is, when the "special reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "High-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor correspond to all values ("0-9") It is attached. In other words, in the case of the "special reach (middle)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach". Variable element of "+" variable element of "special reach" "is selected.

Next, in Special Figure 2 Loss / Small Hit Fluctuation Pattern Table 202e3, in "EA: Special Reach Short", the fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" + One fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EA: special reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "is set to" 0-9 ", and the" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "variation element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation Only the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach" can be selected.

That is, when the "special reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. For all values ("0-9"), "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor " It is associated. In other words, in the case of the "special reach (short)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-single)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach". "Variable element of" + "Variable element of" special reach "" is selected.

Since "E9: Special Reach Long" cannot be selected as the production mode in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3, it is provided in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3. No, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is not assigned.

Next, in Special Figure 2 Loss / Small Hit Fluctuation Pattern Table 202e3, "EC: Ultra Long Fluctuation" includes the fluctuation element of "High Speed Fluctuation (Ultra Long)" with the total fluctuation time of "600 seconds" + " One fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 22, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EC: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ the variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the variation type counter CS1 can take. A "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ a variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with the value ("0-9"). That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "the variation element of" high-speed variation (ultra-long) "+ the variation element of" low-speed variation "" is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, the number of holdings for special figure 2 is held. With reference to the table 202c2, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time, the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. The effect mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area was held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation production.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpot, "E4: normal reach middle" includes the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "15 seconds". + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" High-speed fluctuation (short) "variation element with total fluctuation time of" 25 seconds "+" Low-speed fluctuation "variation element +" Normal reach "variation element +" Re-variation " Two fluctuation patterns with "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: normal reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "0-2" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element ], It is "3-9".

That is, when the "normal reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (short)" variation element. + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor 30%, "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach (middle)" production mode selected at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + " The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is easy to select (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element to be selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpot, in "E5: normal reach short", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "10 seconds" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "high speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" with total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" + variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + variable element of "normal reach" Two fluctuation patterns of "+" fluctuation element of "re-variation" "are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-3" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" It is "4-9" for "variable factor".

That is, when the "normal reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (ultra-short)" variation. 40% of the fluctuation pattern of "element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation factor +" normal reach "variation factor", "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation The fluctuation pattern of "element + fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach (short)" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 2, "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is easy to select (60% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element to be selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. However, it can provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit.

In the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, "E3: normal reach long" cannot be selected as the effect mode, so that it is not provided in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, and the variation type counter. The value of CS1 is also not assigned.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpot, in "E7: Super Reach Middle", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "super reach" and "variable element of" high speed fluctuation (short) "with total fluctuation time of" 40 seconds "+ variable element of" low speed fluctuation " + Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be selected for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Super Reach Middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Super reach" fluctuation factor "0 to 3", "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation It is "4-9" for "element + variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "super reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (short)" variation. Factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor "variation pattern is 40%," high speed fluctuation (short) "variation factor +" low speed fluctuation "variation The variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach (middle)" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + The fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation element of" super reach "+ fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element should also be selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, in "E8: Super reach short", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" "Variable element of" + "normal reach" + "super reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "of the total fluctuation time of" 30 seconds " Two fluctuation patterns of "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" super reach "variable element +" re-variable "variable element" are prepared so that they can be selected. The values are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: super reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor "0 to 3", "high speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" It is "4-9" for the variable element of "super reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" Fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor "variation pattern is 40%," high speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "variation factor +" low speed fluctuation " The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach (short)" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 2, "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + The fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation element of" super reach "+ fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element is also selected. As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which a big hit can be expected from any fluctuation pattern.

Since "E6: Super Reach Long" cannot be selected as the production mode in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, it is not provided in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, and the variation type. The value of the counter CS1 is also not assigned.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, in "EA: Special Reach Middle", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "120 seconds" Variable element of "normal reach" + variable element of "special reach" and "variable element of" high speed fluctuation (short) "with total fluctuation time of" 130 seconds "+ variable element of" low speed fluctuation " + Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be selected for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EA: Special Reach Middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + "Special reach" fluctuation factor "0 to 4", "High speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation It is "5-9" for "element + variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "special reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (short)" variation. 50% of the fluctuation pattern of "element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation factor +" normal reach "variation factor +" special reach "variation factor", "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation The variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" special reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach (middle)" production mode selected at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + the "normal reach" fluctuation element + Fluctuation pattern of "special reach" fluctuation pattern and "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of "Variation element" is selected evenly (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which a jackpot can be expected equally in any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4, "EB: special reach short" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds". "Variable element of" + "normal reach" + "special reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "of the total fluctuation time of" 70 seconds " Two fluctuation patterns of "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" special reach "variable element +" re-variable "variable element" are prepared so that they can be selected. The values are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EB: special reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "for" 0-4 "," high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach " It is "5-9" for the variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "special reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" Fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor "variation pattern is 50%," high speed fluctuation (ultra-short) "variation factor +" low speed fluctuation " The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach (short)" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot of the second special symbol, the "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation element + the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + the "normal reach" fluctuation element. + Fluctuation pattern of "special reach" fluctuation pattern and "high speed fluctuation (ultra-short)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor + " The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is selected evenly (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which a jackpot can be expected equally in any fluctuation pattern.

Since "E9: Special Reach Long" cannot be selected as the production mode in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, it is not provided in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, and the variation type. The value of the counter CS1 is also not assigned.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e4 for special figure 2 jackpot, "EC: ultra-long fluctuation" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "600 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "EC: ultra-long fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ the variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "ultra-long variation" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("" "0-9") is associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (ultra-long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "". That is, in the case of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "the variation element of" high-speed variation (ultra-long) "+ the variation element of" low-speed variation "" is always selected as the variation pattern. ..

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the counter C4 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and is 1 for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). It is updated several times and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36)), and the timing at which it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 is detected. Then, it is stored in any of the normal figure holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j in the order of being stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i, with respect to the value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j. Make a hit judgment.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202h per normal figure stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, 50/100 in the low probability state and 99 / in the high probability state). 100 etc.), and the value of the normal figure per counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j of the RAM 203 matches the value of the hit random number set by the random number table 202h per normal figure. In addition, it is judged as a hit. Then, the normal symbol variation table 202i is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (for example, when the winning assist function is not activated, the "normal game state" is 120 seconds, and the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set. 3 seconds, 0.5 seconds in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" when the winning assist function is activated), and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, the stop symbol (normal) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the symbol). After that, the normal electric service opening table 202j is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 is set (for example, when the winning assist function is not activated, 0.1 seconds × 1 in the “normal game state”. Times, 3 seconds x 1 time in the "latent probability fluctuation state", 3 seconds x 3 times in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" when the winning assistance function is activated), and is normal during the opening time. The appearance plate 72a of the electric service 72 is opened, and during that time, a ball can be awarded to the second starting port 71.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding area does not match the value of the hit random number set by the random number table 202h per normal figure, it is determined to be lost. Then, the variable display time is set with reference to the normal figure fluctuation table 202i according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). It is lit and displayed. The random number table 202h per normal figure, the normal figure fluctuation table 202i, and the ordinary electric service opening table 202j will be described later in FIG. 30.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as an output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 55) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball counter 203a, a second reserved ball counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a first reserved ball execution area 203f, and a second reserved ball execution. It has at least an area 203g, a normal figure holding ball number counter 203h, a normal figure holding ball storage area 203i, a normal figure holding ball execution area 203j, a probability variation transition flag 203k, an ST counter 203m, a time saving limit counter 203n, and a time saving counter 203o. ..

The first reserved ball number counter 203a has a special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) is set to a maximum of four times. It is a counter that counts up to.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 33). Then, every time the starting prize to the first starting port 64 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 37). S303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 40).

Like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is the second starting port 71 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. On hold of the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the start winning prize. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of standbys) up to 4 times.

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 33). Then, every time the start winning prize to the second starting port 71 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 37). See S309). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S5302 in FIG. 43).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the first reserved ball. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the number command or the second reserved ball number command (see S306 or S312 in FIG. 37). In the first reserved ball number command, every time the start winning to the first starting port 64 is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1, the second reserved ball number command is sent to the second starting port 71. This is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the second reserved ball number counter 203b is added by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a hold ball of a dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. Further, every time a start winning prize to the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 is detected, the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like (variation). Even if the number of reserved balls deviates from the number of reserved balls in the effect), the deviation can be corrected by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command received next.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command is transmitted. In the ball number command, not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b added by 1, but also the trigger of the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) is also included in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning.

That is, when there is a start prize, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110 is the first. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is set. The variation effect based on each value is pre-read before the execution, and what happens to the variation effect (whether or not it becomes a big hit, what happens to the variation time, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variation effect. Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, it is possible to decide the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and the execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

It should be noted that the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the command is the first at the timing of entering the ball into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71. Along with generating a 1-hold ball count command or a second hold ball count command, a variation pattern command based on the incoming ball and a command similar to the stop type command (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) are generated, and voice lamp control is performed. It may be configured to transmit to the device 113. In this case, with respect to the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the first starting port 64. , A memory for storing each value of the variable type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are calculated from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In the first holding ball storage area 203d, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the first special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the second starting port 71. , A memory for storing each value of the variable type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the second starting port 71 (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are calculated from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In the second holding ball storage area 203e, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has an area (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the first reserved ball execution area 203f is the operation of the big hit lottery or small hit lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81, which has started or is being executed. It is a memory for storing data (each value of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of target display and fluctuation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol, the large hit lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The oldest start of the data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 values) stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d described above in order to execute processing such as setting of the variation effect. The data corresponding to the winning is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the second reserved ball execution area 203g is the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, which is the big hit lottery or small hit lottery of the second special symbol which has started or is being executed. It is a memory for storing data (each value of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of target display and fluctuation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol, the large hit lottery or the small hit lottery of the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and Of the data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 values) stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above in order to execute processing such as setting of the variation effect, the data The data corresponding to one start winning is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203g.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are a large hit lottery or a small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the dynamic display and the variation effect of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, it is used for the big hit lottery for the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect. The jackpot random number counter C1 used to determine the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the variation effect, and the variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern. Used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d and the first reserved ball execution area 203f are the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning). The second reserved ball storage area 203e and the second reserved ball execution area 203g are acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning). Each value of the above counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is stored.

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4) like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Similar to the first hold ball storage area 203d, the four hold areas (second hold first to fourth areas) have a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been done.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the variable type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are set to 1. Although they are collectively provided in each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning) is for a maximum of four times. In that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (1st holding 1st to 4th areas). Be remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the first start port 64, which is older in time, is stored, and in the first hold first area, the first start port 64, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

Further, the first reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the first reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first one is irrespective of the presence or absence of data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e and the second reserved ball execution area 203g. When data is stored in the first hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203d, the data stored in the first hold first area is transferred to each area 203f1 to the first hold ball execution area 203f. Shift to 203f4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , Determine the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the stop type notified by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command. A variable effect of the first special symbol is performed.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 in the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 in the first hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 in the first hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the first reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved ball first area becomes vacant, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect of the first special symbol is made is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d (first to fourth). ) Suppose that the data is stored. In this state, when the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the first hold second area is shifted to the first hold first area, the data in the first hold third area is shifted to the first hold second area, and the data in the first hold fourth area is shifted. To the first hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start determination of the variation effect of the first special symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 can only use the data of the first reserved second area. , 1st Hold Shifts to the 1st area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Next, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning) can be stored up to four times. Data is stored, but in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (2nd holding 1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the second start port 71, which is older in time, is stored, and in the second reserved first area, the second start port 71, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

Further, the second reserved ball execution area 203g is composed of only one area. Similar to the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the second reserved ball execution area 203g includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203g1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A counter storage area 203g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203g4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol, the second is irrespective of the presence or absence of data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d and the first reserved ball execution area 203f. When data is stored in the second reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is transferred to each area 203g1 to the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Shift to 203g4 respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203 g is referred to in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 43), and the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed based on the reference data and the game state. , Determine the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter of the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Shift to area 203e1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203g2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 in the second hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203g3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 in the second hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203g4.

Then, when the data shift to the second reserved ball execution area 203 g is completed, the second reserved ball first area becomes vacant, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data is shifted only in the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variation effect of the second special symbol is made is "4", and the entire area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e (first to fourth). ) Suppose that the data is stored. In this state, when the data in the second reserved first area is shifted to the second reserved ball execution area 203 g and the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second hold second area is shifted to the second hold first area, the data in the second hold third area is shifted to the second hold second area, and the data in the second hold fourth area is shifted. To the second hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b at the time when the start determination of the variation effect of the second special symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 uses only the data of the second reserved second area. , The second hold shifts to the first area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the second hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

In this way, the data related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are separately stored and dynamically displayed based on each data. By performing the above, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The normal symbol display is based on the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. It is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of a normal symbol performed by the apparatus 83 up to 4 times.

Similar to the reserved ball number counters 203a and 203b, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203h is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 33). Then, each time the passage of a ball through the through gate 67 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display related to the normal symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (see S405 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203h is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol is executed (see S705 in FIG. 53).

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203i is a memory for storing the normal figure per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 is detected. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal figure from the counter buffer 203c and stores the normal figure holding ball. Store in area 203i. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203i has four holding areas (normal figure) so that the data (value of the counter C4 per normal figure) corresponding to one holding ball of the normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

The normal figure holding ball execution area 203j is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) to be referred to in the process of winning lottery or variable display of a normal symbol being executed or starting execution. is there.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery for the normal symbol and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. One of the data (value of the counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203i is shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j will be described. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203i and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform processing such as a winning lottery for normal symbols and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. To.

As described above, the normal symbol hit counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used for setting the normal symbol winning lottery and the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203i stores the value of the counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203i is composed of four holding areas (the normal figure holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (the first to fourth areas for holding the normal figure) is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the counter C4 for the normal figure.

In this normal figure holding ball storage area 203i, data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is stored up to four times, but in that case, four holdings are performed. Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area (1st to 4th areas on hold). That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the old through gate 67 in time is stored, and the first area on hold of the normal figure stores the data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the oldest through gate 67 in time. The data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the normal figure holding counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the data stored in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i is transferred to the normal figure hold ball execution area 203j. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j is referred to in the normal figure variation processing (see FIG. 53), a winning lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the contents of the variable display are performed. To determine. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the random number value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) per the normal figure in the normal figure hold first area of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i. Is shifted to the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal figure in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j.

Then, when the data shift to the normal figure reservation ball execution area 203j is completed, the normal figure reservation first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the normal figure reservation ball storage area 203i. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only in the normal map holding area (1st to 4th) in which the data is stored (held) in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the normal drawing holding ball storage area 203i will be described. For example, the value of the normal figure holding ball number counter 203h when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "4", and the entire area (1st to 4th) of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i is set. Suppose the data is stored. In this state, when the data in the first area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the execution area 203j for holding the normal figure and the first area for holding the normal figure becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the first area for holding the normal figure, the data in the third area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the second area for holding the normal figure, and the data in the fourth area for holding the normal figure. Is shifted to the third area where the data is reserved.

Further, for example, if the value of the normal figure hold ball counter 203h when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 normally uses only the data of the normal figure hold second area. Figure Hold Shifts to the first area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the normal map holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The probability variation transition flag 203k is a flag for indicating that a high probability state of a special symbol (that is, a “probability fluctuation state” or a “latent probability fluctuation state”) occurs in the on state. The probability variation transition flag 203k is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, during the jackpot, when the ball is detected by the probability variation region switch 65e (S6026: Yes in FIG. 49), the probability variation transition flag 203k in the off state is set to ON (see S6027 in FIG. 49). After that, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 50), when the high probability state of the special symbol is set by turning on the probability variation transition flag 203k, that is, "160" is set to the value of the ST counter 203m described later. When this is done, the probability variation transition flag 203k is set to off (see S6102 in FIG. 50).

The ST counter 203m is a counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. The ST counter 203m is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned on, so that “160” is set in the value of the ST counter 203m (see S6103 in FIG. 50). Then, when the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0", that is, when it is a "probability fluctuation state" or a "latent probability fluctuation state" which is a high probability state of the special symbol, the dynamic of the second special symbol Each time the display is executed, "1" is subtracted (see S5603 in FIG. 46). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0", the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is referred to as the high probability state of the special symbol, and the jackpot lottery of the special symbol is made. And a small hit lottery will be held.

In the time saving limit counter 203n, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the initialization of the time saving limit counter 203n (that is, clearing 0), the number of jackpots of the special symbol to which the "time saving function" is given is a predetermined number of times (first). In the embodiment, it is a counter for counting whether or not the number of times (6 times) has been reached. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, each time the number of jackpots of the special symbol to which the "time saving function" is given reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is reached. It is equipped with a time-saving limiter function that always shifts the gaming state after the end of the jackpot at the time of arrival to the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and at least prohibits the transition to the high-probability state of the normal symbol. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to refer to the value of the time reduction limit counter 203n in order to count the predetermined number of times.

The time saving limit counter 203n is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and thereafter, every time a jackpot of a special symbol to which the "time saving function" is given occurs without becoming a low probability state of the normal symbol. They are added one by one (see S5101 in FIG. 41). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a low probability state of a normal symbol, that is, in a "normal game state", a jackpot to which a "time saving function" is always given is selected. When a big hit is won in the "normal game state", the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is added by "1". Then, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is no longer smaller than "6", that is, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is "6" or more, a predetermined number of "time saving functions" are given. When it is determined that the jackpot has been continuously generated and the predetermined number of time reduction limits has been reached in the "ream villa" state, and the jackpot ends, the value of the time reduction limit counter 203n is initialized. (That is, it is configured to be cleared to 0) (see S6106 in FIG. 50). Further, when the "ream villa" state to which the "time saving function" is given ends, that is, when the value of the ST counter 203m becomes "0" and the high probability state of the special symbol ends, or which will be described later. When the value of the time saving counter 203o becomes "0" and the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is initialized (that is, cleared to 0). 46 (see S5606 or S5611).

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 confirms the value of the time saving limit counter 203n when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, and if the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is smaller than "6", the value is smaller than "6". From the jackpot types (that is, "probability variation A" or "time saving A") including the jackpot types that can shift to the high probability state of the normal symbol, 1 jackpot based on the values of the jackpot type table 202b and the jackpot type counter C2. Select the type. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is not smaller than "6", that is, if it is "6" or more, the jackpot type that does not include the jackpot type that can shift to the high probability state of the normal symbol (that is, "6" or more From the "latent probability A" or "normal A"), the jackpot type of 1 is selected based on the values of the jackpot type table 202b and the jackpot type counter C2.

With this configuration, every time the number of jackpots to which the "time saving function" is given reaches the predetermined number of times without returning to the "normal gaming state", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is always set to the normal symbol. It is possible to shift to the low probability state of. Therefore, it is obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 by suppressing the occurrence of an excessive jackpot "renso" in a short time due to the continuous high probability state of the normal symbol. It is possible to equalize the payout rate, and it can be configured so that the game value given to the player does not become too high.

The time reduction counter 203o counts the number of times the special symbol is executed after the jackpot ends, and has a function of assisting the winning of the second starting port 71 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" (that is, the high probability of the normal symbol). It is a counter for determining whether or not to operate (state, etc.). Based on the value of the time reduction counter 203o, the MPU 201 determines whether or not to activate the winning assist function for the second starting port 71, and determines the variable display of the normal symbol and the operation mode of the normal electric service 72. It is configured in.

The value of the time reduction counter 203o is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the jackpot ends, the value is set based on the jackpot type that generated the jackpot. Specifically, if the jackpot is based on the jackpot type "probability variation A", the value of the time reduction counter 203o is set to "160" at the end of the jackpot (see S6105 in FIG. 50), and the jackpot type " If it is a jackpot based on "time reduction A", "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203o at the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, if the jackpot is based on a jackpot type other than the jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type "latent A" or "normal A"), the value of the time saving counter 203o is set to "0" after the jackpot ends. clear. Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203o is larger than "0", the value of the time saving counter 203o is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed (see S5608 in FIG. 46). ..

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is a jackpot referred to for opening control of the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 when a jackpot is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The small hit opening table 202f and the small hit opening table referred to for opening control of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a of the small winning opening 73 when a small hit is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 202g and so on are stored.

Here, the jackpot opening table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot opening table 202f stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the opening mode of the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is based on the jackpot type in which the jackpot of each special symbol is generated. (Number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls) and the game state to be transferred after the big hit is specified.

First, the jackpot opening table 202f is a "starting port 64", which is a general term for the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71), which are easy to win for each gaming state. , 71 ”) and the opening mode and the like are classified based on the jackpot type selected based on the value of the time saving limit counter 203n.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", the "normal game state" referred to when the jackpot type "probability change A" or "time reduction A" is won, and the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" In the case of winning the jackpot type "probability change A" or "time saving A" that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit, and the jackpot type "latent A" or "normal A" that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit. For the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" to be performed, and for the "latent probability fluctuation state" referred to when the jackpot type "probability change A" or "time reduction A" is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state". , The opening mode of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a and the like are specified.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability change A" is won in the "normal game state", or when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won. That is, when the first big hit is made in the state where the time saving limiter function is initialized, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (hereinafter, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is changed to "large". The winning opening) is repeatedly opened and closed for 10 rounds. Then, the opening time of the jackpot (hereinafter, the opening time may be referred to as "OP time") is set to "30 seconds", and the interval which is the closing time between one round of the jackpot and the next round. The time (hereinafter, the interval time may be referred to as "IT time") is set to "2 seconds", and the ending time of the jackpot (hereinafter, the ending time may be referred to as "ED time") is set. It is set to "30 seconds". Further, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of winnings in one round is defined as "10".

Then, in the "normal game state", when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the transition to the "probability fluctuation state" is performed on condition that the ball passes through the probability variation area switch 65e, and the jackpot type "time reduction A" is selected. If you win, it is configured to shift to the "time reduction state".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the firing interval of the balls is "0.6 seconds", so that the minimum opening time in one round in which the maximum number of winnings is set to "10" is about ( Average) "6 seconds". Further, the number of prize balls when a ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 65c (see FIG. 5) is set to "15".

Next, as shown in FIG. 24, in the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, the jackpot type "probability change A" is set in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" before the time reduction limiter is reached. If you win the jackpot type "Time saving A", or if you win the jackpot type "Hidden A" when you reach the time saving limiter, or if you win the jackpot type "Normal A" The large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened / closed over 10 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". Further, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of winnings in one round is defined as "10".

Then, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", if the jackpot type "probability change A" is won before reaching the time reduction limiter, the "probability fluctuation state" is provided on condition that the ball passes through the probability change area switch 65e. , And if the jackpot type "Time saving A" is won, it is configured to shift to the "Time saving state". In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the jackpot type "latent probability A" is won when the time reduction limiter is reached, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is conditioned on the passage of the ball to the probability variation region switch 65e. When the game shifts to the "state" and the jackpot type "normal A" is won, the state shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, as shown in FIG. 24, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the jackpot type "time saving A" is selected. If a winner is awarded, that is, if a big hit is made after the time saving limiter function is activated, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened / closed over 10 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "180 seconds", the IT time is set to "3 seconds", and the ED time is set to "180 seconds". Further, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of winnings in one round is defined as "10".

Then, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the transition to the "probability variation state" is performed on condition that the ball passes through the probability variation area switch 65e, and the jackpot type "time saving A" is selected. If you win, it is configured to shift to the "time reduction state".

In this way, by changing the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game for each winning jackpot type, it is possible to make a difference in the game playability after the end of the jackpot based on the winning jackpot type. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to create a playability of which jackpot type is won or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at least in the "renso" state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is maintained and the jackpot of the special symbol occurs frequently, the OP time, IT time, and the jackpot time when one of the jackpot types is won, and By configuring the ED time to be shorter than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the first jackpot in the "normal game state", the digestion time of the entire jackpot in the "renso" state can be shortened, and the "renso" can be shortened. In this state, it is possible to shorten the time to reach the next jackpot. As a result, the time until the next jackpot occurs in the "renso" state can be shortened, and the time until the next jackpot arrives in spite of the "renso" state is prolonged, so that the player can play the game. By generating continuous jackpots at an early stage while suppressing the awakening of the game, it is possible to give the player a feeling of exhilaration and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the first jackpot in the "normal game state" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "renso" state, in that time It is possible to perform various other types of production. With this configuration, for example, explanation of the game method in the pachinko machine 10 during the OP time and ED time of the first jackpot (for example, suggestion of launch mode, suggestion of preventing forgetting to remove the card being inserted into the card sand, future (Explanation of the game state, etc.) and the production to congratulate the first big hit from the "normal game state", making it easier for the player to understand the game method of the pachinko machine 10, and finally making a big hit. It is possible to perform a production that contributes to the improvement of the player's interest by making them realize.

In addition, the OP time, IT time, and ED time at the time of the jackpot when any jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state" that can be entered after the time saving limiter function is activated in the "renso" state is "probability". By configuring it longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time at the time of big hit when winning the "variable state" or "time shortened state" (including "normal game state"), in the "ream villa" It is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value from occurring in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears, which is given to the player. It can be configured so that the playing value per hour is not too high (too much).

The opening mode of the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a at the time of jackpot based on the jackpot type (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of prize balls, and transition game state) is described above. It is not limited to the embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of open times (number of rounds) may be different for each jackpot type, the maximum open time may be changed for each jackpot type, and the maximum number of winnings may be set. It may be configured to change. Since the number of prize balls that can be paid out differs depending on the winning jackpot type, it is possible to make a difference in the game value directly given according to the winning jackpot type.

Further, it is not necessary to shift to a different gaming state for each jackpot type, and it may be configured to shift to a common gaming state for a plurality of jackpot types.

Further, the OP time and the ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set to a time longer than the OP time or the ED time. Further, the minimum opening time for reaching the maximum number of winnings in one round may be set to a time shorter than the IT time, OP time, and ED time. Further, at least one or more of OP time, IT time or ED time may be set to be the same time for each jackpot type. In addition, the jackpot OP time, IT time, and ED time in the "latent probability fluctuation state" are set to the jackpot OP time, IT time, and time in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state". , But it was configured to be shorter than the ED time, but any one or more OP time, IT time, or ED time was configured to be shorter, and the other one or more OP time, IT time, Alternatively, the ED time may be configured to be equal or longer. Further, the maximum opening time (for example, 2 seconds) of one round may be shorter than the minimum opening time (for example, 6 seconds) due to reaching the maximum number of winnings.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the average staying time in each game state and each jackpot state, and the game value obtained in each state (time) will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the number of occurrences, required time, and integrated time of each phenomenon in each game state and jackpot state, and also shows the average total staying time in each game state and jackpot state. In addition, FIG. 26 shows the winning rate, the required time, the number of occurrences, the firing time, the number of launched balls, and the number of returned balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the “renso” state, and each jackpot. It is a figure which showed the state and the total number of acquired balls in each game state. Further, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of “renso” in the case where the time saving limiter function is not provided and in the case where the time saving limiter function is provided. Further, FIG. 28 (a) is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when there is no time saving limiter function, and FIG. 28 (b) is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when there is a time reduction limiter function. is there. In the description of FIGS. 25 to 28, the jackpot probability and the like will be described in the case of the set value "1", and the other set values (that is, the set values "2" to "6") will be described. For convenience, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 25, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal game state" (when the encouraged left-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed). Then, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is 33/10000 (about 1/300), and the probability of selecting the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit is 75/100 (225/300). The probability that the "normal reach" production mode will be selected at the time of loss / small hit is 20/100 (60/300), and the probability that the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit will be selected is It is 3/100 (9/300), and the probability that the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit is selected is 2/100 (6/300).

Therefore, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability in the "normal game state", until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" production mode is selected as the production mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, While the first special symbol variation effect is performed 300 times, the average "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss or small hit is 224 times (one big hit of the "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance). (Calculated with 225-1 = 224 to replace with fluctuation) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 60 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit is average It will appear 9 times, the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss and small hit will appear 6 times on average, and the "special reach" production mode at the time of big hit will appear once on average.

In this case, the fluctuation time of the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit is between the start of the game and the occurrence of the big hit state of 1 without interruption of the fluctuation production of the first special symbol. Since it can be performed in "15 seconds" (including the opening time (small hit time) of the small winning opening 73 based on the small hit game. The same applies hereinafter), the time is 224 times x "15 seconds" = "3360 seconds". Since the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit can be performed for "20 seconds", it takes 60 times x "20 seconds" = "1200 seconds", and at the time of loss / small hit. Since the "super reach" production mode of "60 seconds" can be performed, it takes a time of 9 times x "60 seconds" = "540 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit is "special reach". Since it can be performed in "180 seconds", it takes 6 times x "180 seconds" = "1080 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit can be performed in "180 seconds", so once x It takes "180 seconds" = "180 seconds".

That is, the average total time from the start of the game to the occurrence of the jackpot state of 1 without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is "3360 seconds" + "1200 seconds" + "540 seconds" + "1080 seconds" + "180 seconds" = "6360 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 25, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first big hit (including both cases of the big hit types "probability change A" and "time saving A") in the "normal game state" is ". In the "big hit state" (when the ball is continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds" to the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game), the OP time is "30 seconds" and the big winning opening of each round. The minimum (shortest) opening time of the opening / closing plate 65a is 10 maximum winning numbers x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", each IT time is "2 seconds", and the ED time is "30 seconds". Will be done.

Then, in the first jackpot of 1, the opening effect is performed once, the round is 10 rounds, the interval is 9 times obtained by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is performed once.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot are won in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, the OP time as an opening effect is between the start and the end of the first jackpot of 1. It takes "30 seconds" and one round can be done in "6 seconds" on average, so it takes "6 seconds" x 10 = "60 seconds" and the interval of 1 is "2 seconds". Since it can be broken, it takes "2 seconds" x 9 = "18 seconds", and the ED time "30 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start of the first jackpot of 1 to the end is "30 seconds" + "60 seconds" + "18 seconds" + "30 seconds" = "138 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 25, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "probability fluctuation state" (probability fluctuation state) when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won in the first jackpot is performed and the encouraged right-handed game is performed. (2) When the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is about 100/10000 (1/100), and the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss or small hit is selected. The probability of losing is 84/100, and the probability of selecting the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss / small hit is 10/100, and the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss / small hit is selected. The probability is 5/100, and the probability that the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss or small hit is selected is 1/100.

Therefore, for example, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" effect mode is selected as the effect mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, the second special symbol While the variation effect is performed 100 times, the average number of "non-reach" effect modes at the time of loss and small hit is 83 times (because one time of the "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance is replaced with the jackpot variation. (Calculated with 84-1 = 83) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 10 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 5 times on average, The "special reach" production mode at the time of loss and small hit will appear once on average, and the "special reach" production mode at the time of big hit will appear once on average.

In this case, the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit between the time when the player enters the "probability fluctuation state" and the time when the next big hit state occurs without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation time of can be set to "1 second" (including the opening time (small hit time) of the variable winning device 65 based on the small hit game. The same shall apply hereinafter), 83 times x "1 second" = "83". It takes "seconds", and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit can be performed for "10 seconds", so it takes 10 times x "10 seconds" = "100 seconds", and when it is lost -Since the "super reach" production mode for small hits can be performed for "20 seconds", it takes 5 times x "20 seconds" = "100 seconds", and "special reach" for lost or small hits. Since the production mode can be performed in "60 seconds", it takes a time of 1 time x "60 seconds" = "60 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit can be performed in "60 seconds". It takes one time x "60 seconds" = "60 seconds".

That is, the average total time from entering the "probability fluctuation state" to the occurrence of the next jackpot state without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is "83 seconds" + "100 seconds" + " "100 seconds" + "60 seconds" + "60 seconds" = "403 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 25, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, before the time reduction limiter is reached (when the time reduction limiter is reached) in the "probability fluctuation state" (including the case of the "time reduction state"; the same applies hereinafter). In the "big hit state" (when the ball is continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds" to the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game) in the case of the "renso" big hit in (including), the OP time It is "10 seconds", the minimum (shortest) opening time of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of each round is the maximum number of winning 10 pieces x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", and each IT time is "1". It is "seconds", and the ED time is "10 seconds".

Then, in the "Renso" jackpot in this "probability fluctuation state", the opening effect is performed once, the round is 10 rounds, the interval is 9 times by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is 1 time. Will be done.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot win in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, the opening effect is produced between the start and the end of the 1 "renso" jackpot. As an OP time of "10 seconds" is required, one round can be performed in "6 seconds" on average, so "6 seconds" x 10 = "60 seconds" is required, and the interval of 1 is "1 second". , So it takes "1 second" x 9 = "9 seconds", and the ED time "10 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start to the end of the jackpot at the time of "ream villa" in the "probability fluctuation state" is "10 seconds" + "60 seconds" + "9 seconds" + "10 seconds" = " 89 seconds ".

Next, as shown in FIG. 25, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “latent probability fluctuation state” (encouragement) after winning the jackpot type “latent probability A” when the time saving limiter is reached at the time of “renso”. In the case of performing the right-handed game and executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is about 1/100 (100/10000), and the probability of a big hit is about 1/100 (100/10000). The probability that the "non-reach" production mode will be selected is 78/100, and the probability that the "normal reach" production mode will be selected at the time of loss or small hit is 15/100. The probability that the "super reach" effect mode is selected is 5/100, and the probability that the "special reach" effect mode is selected at the time of loss or small hit is 2/100.

Therefore, for example, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" effect mode is selected as the effect mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, the second special symbol While the variation effect is performed 100 times, the average number of "non-reach" effect modes at the time of loss and small hit is 77 times (because one time of the "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance is replaced with the jackpot variation. (Calculated with 78-1 = 77) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 15 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 5 times on average, The "special reach" production mode at the time of loss and small hit will appear twice on average, and the "special reach" production mode at the time of big hit will appear once on average.

In this case, the "non-reach" effect at the time of loss or small hit between the time when the player enters the "latent probability fluctuation state" and the time when the next big hit state occurs without interruption of the change effect of the second special symbol. Since the variation time of the embodiment can be set to "5 seconds" (including the opening time (small hit time) of the variable winning device 65 based on the small hit game. The same applies hereinafter), 77 times x "5 seconds" = " It takes "385 seconds", and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit can be performed for "15 seconds", so it takes 15 times x "15 seconds" = "225 seconds" to lose. Since the "super reach" production mode for hour and small hits can be performed for "30 seconds", it takes 5 times x "30 seconds" = "150 seconds", and "special reach" for lost and small hits. Since the production mode can be performed in "90 seconds", it takes time of 2 times x "90 seconds" = "180 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit can be performed in "90 seconds". Therefore, it takes one time x "90 seconds" = "90 seconds".

That is, the average total time from entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" to the occurrence of the next jackpot state without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is "385 seconds" + "225 seconds" + "150 seconds" + "180 seconds" + "90 seconds" = "1030 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 25, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “big hit state” in the case of the “renso” big hit in the “latent probability fluctuation state” (against the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game). (When the balls are continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds"), the OP time is "180 seconds", and the minimum (shortest) opening time of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of each round is the maximum number of winnings 10. Piece x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", each IT time is "3 seconds", and the ED time is "180 seconds". When the "renso" jackpot is hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", a "premium live production" (see FIG. 65) described later, which allows the player to select a favorite song, is executed.

Then, in the "renso" jackpot in this "latent probability fluctuation state", the opening effect is performed once, the round is 10 rounds, the interval is 9 times obtained by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is 1. It is done once.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot win in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, from the start to the end of the "renso" jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state". In the meantime, it takes "180 seconds" of OP time as an opening effect, and one round can be performed in "6 seconds" on average, so "6 seconds" x 10 = "60 seconds" is required, and 1 Since the interval can be set to "3 seconds", "3 seconds" x 9 = "27 seconds" is required, and the ED time "180 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start to the end of the jackpot at the time of "ream villa" in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is "180 seconds" + "60 seconds" + "27 seconds" + "180 seconds" = It becomes "447 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26, in the first jackpot at the time of entering the "renso", the main winning destination of the launched ball is the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening), and the opening time of the first jackpot is It is "30 seconds" and is performed "once" in the first jackpot. Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "30 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "50 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 for the first jackpot is "6 seconds" x "10 rounds (10 times)" = "60 seconds" when all the launched balls win. Assuming that the winning rate to the variable winning device 65 is "70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired)", the ball firing time is "60 seconds" ÷ "70%" = about "86". The number of shot balls is "86 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "143 balls", and the number of return balls is "15 balls" x "10 balls" x "10 rounds". = "1500 balls".

Further, the interval time of the first jackpot is "2 seconds", and the first jackpot is performed "9 times" in total between each round. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "2 seconds" x "9 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "30 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the first jackpot is "30 seconds", and the first jackpot is performed "once". Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "30 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "50 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, during the entire period of the first jackpot, the player fires the ball while the total firing time is "30 seconds" + "86 seconds" + "18 seconds" + "30 seconds" = "164 seconds". Then, while firing "50 balls" + "143 balls" + "30 balls" + "50 balls" = "273 balls", respectively, "0 balls" + "1500 balls" + "0 balls", respectively. "+" 0 balls "=" 1500 balls "win a prize ball. Therefore, in the first jackpot, the player can acquire "1500 balls"-"273 balls" = "1227 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26, the jackpot before reaching the limiter or when reaching the limiter at the time of "ream villa" (hereinafter, the jackpot before reaching the limiter or when reaching the limiter may be referred to as "big hit before activating the limiter"). Then, the main winning destination of the launched ball is the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening), the opening time of the jackpot before the limiter is activated is "10 seconds", and the jackpot before the limiter is activated is " It is done "once". Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "10 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about. It is "17 balls" and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot before the limiter is activated is the same as the first jackpot, and the shortest opening time when all the launched balls win is "6 seconds" x "10 rounds (10 times)" = "60". Although it is "seconds", assuming that the winning rate to the variable winning device 65 is "70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired)", the ball firing time is "60 seconds" ÷ " 70% "= about" 86 seconds ", the number of launch balls is" 86 seconds "÷" 0.6 seconds "= about" 143 balls ", and the number of return balls is" 15 balls "x" 10 "Ball" x "10 rounds" = "1500 balls".

Further, the interval time of the jackpot before the limiter is activated is "1 second" which is shorter than the interval time of the first jackpot, and the jackpot before the limiter is activated is performed "9 times" in total between each round. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "1 second" x "9 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "15 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the jackpot before the activation of the limiter is "10 seconds", and the jackpot before the activation of the limiter is performed "once". Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "10 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about. It is "17 balls" and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, during the entire period of the jackpot before the limiter is activated, the player has a ball while the total firing time is "10 seconds" + "86 seconds" + "9 seconds" + "10 seconds" = "115 seconds". , "17 balls" + "143 balls" + "15 balls" + "17 balls" = "192 balls", respectively, while firing "0 balls" + "1500 balls" + "1500 balls", respectively. Win a prize ball of "0 balls" + "0 balls" = "1500 balls". Therefore, in the first jackpot, the player can acquire "1500 balls"-"192 balls" = "1308 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot after reaching the limiter at the time of "renso" (hereinafter, the jackpot after reaching the limiter may be referred to as "big hit after activating the limiter"), the main of the launched ball. The winning destination is the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening), the opening time of the jackpot after the limiter is activated is "180 seconds", and the jackpot is performed "once" after the limiter is activated. Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, if the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "180 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "300 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 of the jackpot after reaching the limiter is the same as the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and the shortest opening time when all the launched balls win is "6 seconds" x "10 rounds (10 times). ) ”=“ 60 seconds ”, but assuming that the winning rate to the variable winning device 65 is“ 70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired) ”, the ball firing time is“ 60 seconds ÷ "70%" = about "86 seconds", the number of shot balls is "86 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "143 balls", and the number of return balls is the prize ball "15" "Balls" x "10 balls" x "10 rounds" = "1500 balls".

Further, the interval time of the jackpot after reaching the limiter is "3 seconds" which is longer than the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and the jackpot after the limiter is activated is performed "9 times" in total between each round. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "3 seconds" x "9 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "45 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the jackpot after reaching the limiter is "180 seconds", and the jackpot is performed "once" after reaching the limiter. Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "180 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "300 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, during the entire period of the jackpot after reaching the limiter, the player has a ball while the total firing time is "180 seconds" + "86 seconds" + "27 seconds" + "180 seconds" = "473 seconds". , "300 balls" + "143 balls" + "45 balls" + "300 balls" = "788 balls", respectively, while firing "0 balls" + "1500 balls" + "1500 balls", respectively. Win a prize ball of "0 balls" + "0 balls" = "1500 balls". Therefore, in the jackpot after reaching the limiter, the player can acquire "1500 balls"-"788 balls" = "712 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the main winning destination of the ball launched in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71, and the "probability fluctuation state". The jackpot probability of the special symbol in is set to 1/100. Further, the "probability fluctuation state" is set so that the ordinary electric service 72 can be opened for a long period of time with a high probability due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 71. There is. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the winning rate to the second starting port 71 was "60% (that is, when 10 balls were launched in the right-handed game, 6 balls were won in the second starting port 71)". In this case, and assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, the above is described in FIG. 25 until the jackpot is won, that is, until the second starting port 71 wins a "100 ball" ball. As described above, it is set to take a time of "403 seconds".

However, in the "probability fluctuation state" of "403 seconds", in the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, the player generally has a ball. In order to temporarily stop the firing (so-called stop hitting) (hereinafter, the period during which the player in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode temporarily stops the firing of the ball is "stop hitting". "Period"), the period from the period until the jackpot is won in the "probability fluctuation state" (that is, "403 seconds") to the above-mentioned stop period (that is, "100 seconds" which is the execution time of the "super reach" effect mode. + "183 seconds", which is obtained by subtracting "120 seconds", which is the execution time of the "special reach" effect mode, is the firing period of the ball.

In the "probability fluctuation state" (including the "latent probability fluctuation state" described later. The same shall apply hereinafter), the launch time of the ball may be calculated including the case where the ball is stopped in the "normal reach" production mode. Then, the firing time of the balls may be calculated including the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the maximum value (that is, "4") and the ball is stopped. In addition, the general winning opening 63 is placed at a position where the ball launched in the right-handed game can win, and the number of returning balls is calculated in consideration of the winning rate and the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 63. It may be configured.

Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the number of shot balls is "183 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = "305 balls", and the number of return balls is "305 balls" x "60%". "X" 1 ball (number of prize balls based on the winning of the second starting port 71) "=" 183 balls ".

As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the player fires balls for a period of "183 seconds", and while firing a total of "305 balls", "183 balls" Win a prize ball. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes "305 balls"-"183 balls" = "122 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the main winning destination of the ball launched in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71, and the "latent probability fluctuation". The jackpot probability of the special symbol in "state" is set to 1/100. Further, although the "latent probability fluctuation state" is not as much as the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the ordinary electric service 72 is opened at a fixed rate and for a short time due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The ball is set so that the ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", when the ball is continuously fired outside the stop striking period (for example, the ball is fired even in a situation other than the above stop striking period when the normal electric service 72 is not open. If you continue to do so, or if you do not stop with the "normal reach" effect mode or the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 or 3 etc., hereinafter, it may be referred to as "no stop"), the first 2 When the winning rate to the starting port 71 is "40% (that is, when 10 balls are fired in a right-handed game, 4 winnings are made to the 2nd starting port 71)", and according to the probability. Assuming that the jackpot is won, it takes "1030 seconds" as shown in FIG. 25 to win the jackpot, that is, to win the "100 balls" in the second starting port 71. Is set to.

However, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of "1030 seconds", in the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, the player has a stop period. During that time, in order to temporarily stop the firing of the ball, the period from the period until the jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (that is, "1030 seconds") to the above-mentioned stop-stop period (that is, the "super reach" production mode) The ball firing period is "610 seconds", which is obtained by subtracting the execution time of "150 seconds" + the execution time of the "special reach" production mode ("270 seconds").

Therefore, when playing without stopping in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the number of shot balls is "610 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "1017 balls", and the return ball. The number is "1017 balls" x "40%" x "1 ball (number of prize balls based on the winning of the second starting port 71)" = about "407 balls".

As a result, when playing without stopping in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the player fires a ball for a period of "610 seconds" and fires a total of "1017 balls". While doing so, he won the prize ball of "407 balls". Therefore, when playing without stopping in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes "1017 balls"-"407 balls" = "610 balls". ..

On the other hand, in this "latent probability fluctuation state", if the ball is continuously fired during a period other than the stop striking period, the consumption of the ball will increase, so that the player can prevent a useless launch ball. Depending on the skill, the ball is fired only when the normal electric service 72 is open (when the normal electric service 72 can be opened), and the ball launch is temporarily stopped in other situations. , In the situation where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated (for example, 4 or 3), the ball firing is temporarily stopped, or the ball firing is performed when the "normal reach" effect mode is executed. It may be temporarily stopped (hereinafter, the case where the launch of the ball is temporarily stopped other than the stop hitting period may be referred to as "with stop hitting"). In this case, the winning rate to the second starting port 71 is higher than that in the case without stop hitting, and by reducing the number of wasted balls as much as possible, the number of shot balls is approximately halved (that is, in the case without stop hitting). "610 balls" ÷ 2 = "305 balls").

Therefore, when playing with a stop in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the number of shot balls is "305 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "508 balls", and the return ball. The number is "508 balls" x "80%" x "1 ball (number of prize balls based on the winning of the second starting port 71)" = about "406 balls".

As a result, when playing with a stop in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player fires a ball for a period of "305 seconds" and fires a total of "508 balls". While doing so, he won the prize ball of "406 balls". Therefore, when playing with a stop in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes "508 balls"-"406 balls" = "102 balls". ..

Here, with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, an increase / decrease in the number of balls held by the player in consideration of the number of launched balls and the number of returned balls described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 27, when there is no time saving limiter function, the player acquires "1227 balls" at the first big hit, which is the trigger for entering the "renso" state, and the total number of balls in the "renso" state is increased. It becomes "1227 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state becomes "164 seconds" (see FIG. 28 (a)).

In addition, when there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "122 balls" in the first "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "1227 balls". "-" 122 balls "=" 1105 balls ", and the elapsed time from entering the" consecutive villa "state is" 164 seconds "+" 403 seconds "=" 567 seconds "(see FIG. 28 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "1308 balls" at the time of the second big hit at the time of "Renso" (the first big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the state is "1105 balls" + "1308 balls" = "2413 balls", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "renso" state is "567 seconds" + "115 seconds" = "682 seconds". (See FIG. 28 (a)).

In addition, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "122 balls" in the second "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "2413 balls". -"122 balls" = "2291 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "682 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "1085 seconds" (see FIG. 28 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "1308 balls" at the time of the third big hit at the time of "Renso" (at the time of the second big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the "" state is "2291 balls" + "1308 balls" = "3599 balls", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "renso" state is "1085 seconds" + "115 seconds" = "1200 seconds". (See FIG. 28 (a)).

In addition, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "122 balls" in the third "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "3599 balls". -"122 balls" = "3477 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1200 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "1603 seconds" (see FIG. 28 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "1308 balls" at the 4th big hit at the time of "Renso" (3rd big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the state is "3477 balls" + "1308 balls" = "4785 balls", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "renso" state is "1603 seconds" + "115 seconds" = "1718 seconds". (See FIG. 28 (a)).

In addition, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "122 balls" in the fourth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "4785 balls". -"122 balls" = "4663 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1718 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "2121 seconds" (see FIG. 28 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "1308 balls" at the 5th big hit at the time of "Renso" (4th big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the "" state is "4663 balls" + "1308 balls" = "5791 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2121 seconds" + "115 seconds" = "2236 seconds". (See FIG. 28 (a)).

In addition, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "122 balls" in the fifth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "5791 balls". -"122 balls" = "5849 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2236 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "2639 seconds" (see FIG. 28 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "1308 balls" at the 6th big hit at the time of "Renso" (the 5th big hit after entering "Renso"), and the "Renso" will be won. The total number of balls in the "" state is "5849 balls" + "1308 balls" = "7157 balls", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "renso" state is "2639 seconds" + "115 seconds" = "2754 seconds". (See FIG. 28 (a)).

In addition, in the sixth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa" when there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "122 balls", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "7157 balls". -"122 balls" = "7035 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2754 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "3157 seconds" (see FIG. 28 (a)).

Furthermore, at the time of the 7th big hit at the time of "Renso" when there is no time saving limiter function (at the time of the 6th big hit after entering "Renso"), the player gets "1308 balls" and "Renso". The total number of balls in the "" state is "7035" + "1308" = "8343", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "renso" state is "3157 seconds" + "115 seconds" = "3272 seconds". (See FIG. 28 (a)).

Therefore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the total number of balls acquired by the player may be "8343 balls" at "3272 seconds" before one hour (that is, "3600 seconds") elapses. Frequently, it is highly probable that the number of balls acquired by the player per hour will be excessive. Such a pachinko machine may excessively stimulate the gambling spirit of the player, and as a result, the pachinko machine may become inappropriate as a game and socially incompatible.

Here, as shown in FIG. 27, when there is a time saving limiter function, the first big hit, which is the trigger for entering the "renso" state, the first to fifth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", and , The 2nd to 6th jackpots at the time of "Renso" (the 1st to 5th jackpots after entering the "Renso") are the same as when there is no time saving limiter function. On the other hand, at the 6th jackpot after entering the "renso" (at the time of the 5th jackpot after entering the "renso"), the time saving limiter function is activated to enter the "latent probability fluctuation state".

Then, when entering this "latent probability fluctuation state", the player consumes "102 balls" (when there is a stop hit), and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "7157 balls"-". "102 balls" = "7055 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2754 seconds" + "1030 seconds" = "3784 seconds" (see FIG. 28 (b)). That is, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the game value obtained per unit time is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the time required until the next big hit is won can be lengthened.

In addition, when there is a time saving limiter function, the 7th big hit at the time of "renso" (the 6th big hit after entering the "renso") is a big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the player Acquired "712 balls", the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "7055 balls" + "712 balls" = "7767 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "3784 seconds" + “473 seconds” = “4257 seconds” (see FIG. 28 (b)). That is, at the time of the jackpot won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the game value obtained per unit time is lower than that at the time of the jackpot won in the "probability fluctuation state" (in FIG. 28B, the "probability fluctuation state"). The slope at the time of the jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is gentler than the slope at the time of the jackpot in.) Further, the time required for the jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can be made longer than the time required for the jackpot in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like.

Therefore, in the case of having the time saving limiter function, at the stage where one hour has passed since entering the "renso" state, the player is still less than "7200 balls" and is in the "latent probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, it is set so that there is a high possibility that it will take about 17 minutes or more from entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" to acquiring the next jackpot. This makes it possible to gently increase the number of balls that the player acquires in a short time of about one hour compared to a pachinko machine that does not have a time-saving limiter function, and the number of balls that the player acquires per hour can be increased. It can be made less likely to be excessive. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to play the game appropriately without inciting the player's gambling spirit too much.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the small hit opening table 202 g will be described. FIG. 29 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the small hit opening table 202g stored in the ROM 202. The small hit opening table 202g is referred to at the time of a small hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on each special symbol, the opening mode of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a of the small winning opening 73, etc. (number of rounds, maximum). Opening time, interval time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls) are specified. It should be noted that the game state is not changed even if a small hit is won with any of the special symbols.

First, the small hit opening table 202g is classified according to the type of special symbol, that is, the opening mode and the like based on the winning start ports 64 and 71. Specifically, for "special figure 1 small hit" which is referred to when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The opening mode of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is defined for the reference "Special Figure 2 Small Hit".

As shown in FIG. 29, in the case of "special figure 1 small hit" of the small hit opening table 202 g, when the small hit is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the first starting port 64 (see FIG. 3). ), The small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a of the small winning opening 73 provided at the lower part of the front view is opened / closed once (one round). Then, the maximum opening time of the small prize opening opening / closing plate 73a is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of prizes is specified to "10", and the number of prize balls based on the prize is specified to "10". ing. In the first embodiment, the opening time is set so that 10 balls fired within the maximum opening time of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol cannot be won. The opened small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is configured to be easier to close under the condition of the maximum opening time than to close under the condition of the maximum number of winnings.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in the case of "special figure 2 small hit" of the small hit opening table 202 g, even when the small hit is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the first starting port 64 (FIG. 3). The small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a of the small winning opening 73 provided in the lower part of the front view is repeatedly opened / closed three times (three rounds). Then, the interval time, which is the closing time between one round of the small hit and the next round, is set to "1 second". Further, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum opening number is specified to "10", and the number of prize balls based on winning is specified to "10". In the first embodiment, the opening time is set so that even 10 balls fired within the maximum opening time of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol cannot be won. The opened small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is configured to be easier to close under the condition of the maximum opening time than to close under the condition of the maximum number of winnings.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), the details of the random number table 202h per normal figure, the normal figure fluctuation table 202i, and the ordinary electric service opening table 202j will be described. First, FIG. 30A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202h per normal figure stored in the ROM 202.

As described above, in the random number table 202h per normal figure, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state ("probability fluctuation state" or "time" of a normal symbol in which the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "latent probability fluctuation state". The game state for the "normal symbol low probability state" used in the case of a period other than the "shortened state" (including during the jackpot of the special symbol) and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are the normal symbols than the "normal symbol low probability state". It can be divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol high probability state" used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", which is the state with a high probability of winning. Then, the number of hit random numbers included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that hit the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" different, the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" can be used. , The probability of winning in the variable display of ordinary symbols is changed.

As shown in FIG. 30A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the case of the "normal symbol low probability state", is 50, and the value "50". ~ 99 ”is defined (set) in the random number table 202h per pachinko machine. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state") is 50/100 = 1/2, and is about 2 in the variable display of the normal symbol. The hit is set to be derived once every time.

On the other hand, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the case of "normal symbol high probability state", is 99, and the values "1 to 99" are defined (set) in the random number table 202h per normal figure. ing. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state") is 99/100, so that the hit is almost derived in the variable display of the normal symbol. Is set to.

As a result, by changing the winning / failing probability of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference between the situation where the normal electric service 72 can be opened to a certain extent and the situation where it is easier to open. .. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ordinary electric service 72 can be easily opened, so that a prize can be won to the second starting port 71 side, or the ordinary electric service 72 can be opened to a certain extent. However, it is difficult to open the ball more than the situation where it is easy to open, so it is more difficult to win the second starting port 71 than the situation where the ball is easy to open. It can produce different playability.

In particular, among the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" and "latent probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state" are "normal symbol high probability state". Therefore, the normal electric service 72 is likely to be in the open state, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is easily entered into the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, and is arranged on the downstream side of the ball and is placed on the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72. It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided to the variable winning device 65 side provided at a position where it is difficult to win a prize unless the player rolls. As a result, even if the small hit game is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" and the variable winning device 65 is opened, it is usually placed on the upstream side thereof. Since the electric service 72 is likely to be in the open state, it is difficult to win the variable winning device 65 that is open, and it is difficult to acquire the game value based on winning the small hit game of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", it becomes the "normal symbol low probability state", and the normal electric service 72 is more difficult to open than the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the ball launched by the right-handed game It may roll over the closed ordinary electric service 72 from the right end to the left end, and is configured so that it can flow down to the downstream side where the variable winning device 65 is arranged. In other words, it is difficult for a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" to win a prize in the second starting port 71 from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", and is based on the small hit winning in the second special symbol. It is configured to be able to win a prize in the variable winning device 65 which is open to the public. As a result, when the variable winning device 65 is opened by winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ordinary electric service 72 closes the second starting port 71. In this state, the ball can win the variable winning device 65, so that the game value based on winning the small hit game of the second special symbol can be obtained. In the first embodiment, even if the small hit game of the second special symbol is won, the opening period of the variable winning device 65 is short, so that the game based on the winning of the small hit game of the second special symbol Although it is possible to obtain a certain amount of value, the winning frequency is low (for example, the base is maintained (that is, 15 balls are fired and one ball is entered)), and the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" It is difficult to increase the number of balls remarkably only based on the small hit game.

On the other hand, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is set, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the normal electric service 72 is difficult to open, and when it is opened. However, since the normal electric service 72 is opened only for a short time, even if the ball is fired in the right-handed game, it is difficult to win the second starting port 71 from the "normal symbol high probability state". Further, the first starting port 64 is not provided with a device for assisting a prize such as the ordinary electric service 72, and the through gate 67 is not arranged in the flow area of the ball launched in the left-handed game. Therefore, the ball launched by the left-handed game is not configured to easily win a prize in the first starting port 64 by the winning assist function. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if the right-handed game is played, it is difficult for the right-handed ball to win the second starting opening 71, and the ball launched in the left-handed game is also , The first starting port 64 must be won without using the winning assist function, and the first starting port 64 is configured to win a prize by itself in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol. .. In the "normal game state", the player can win a prize in the second starting port 71 in the "normal game state" by providing a plurality of types of variable display time of the normal symbol and opening patterns of the normal electric service 72. It is more preferable to configure it so that it is difficult to grasp the timing and to make it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71. In addition, in the "normal game state", when a right-handed game is played, an error is notified due to the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, so that the player and the employee of the game hall are notified of the error. By suggesting that the game mode is not encouraged, the player may suppress the game in the right-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30 (b), the details of the normal figure variation table 202i for determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 30B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal map variation table 202i stored in the ROM 202.

The normal figure fluctuation table 202i is for the "normal game state" referred to in the "normal game state" and for the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" referred to in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state". , It is divided into three types, one for the "latent probability fluctuating state" referred to in the "latent probability fluctuating state". The variable display time of the normal symbol set for the "normal game state", the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state", and the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbol different in each game state, the time for deriving the winning / failing result of the normal symbol is changed in each game state.

As shown in FIG. 30B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the "normal game state" is set to "120 seconds". It is specified in 202i. That is, in the "normal game state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "120 seconds" without exception.

Further, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is defined in the normal symbol fluctuation table 202i so as to be "0.5 seconds". That is, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is set to be "0.5 seconds" without exception. ..

Further, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "latent probability fluctuation state" is defined in the normal symbol fluctuation table 202i so as to be "3 seconds". That is, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set to be "3 seconds" without exception.

As a result, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to change the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electric service 72 is released. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it becomes a hit with a variable display due to the passage of the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric service 72 is released based on the corresponding situation, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to make a difference depending on the game state whether or not the player can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each game state, it is possible to make the winning mode for the through gate 67 and the second starting port 71 of one ball different, and the game performance is different for each game state. Can be born.

In particular, among the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" and "latent probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is normal. Because it is short and easy to win, the normal electric role 72 is in an open (immersive) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric role 72, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is released. It is configured so that a prize can be won in the second starting port 71. In other words, the ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71 and it is difficult to win a prize in the variable winning device 65.

On the other hand, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the variable display time of the normal symbol is longer than the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Because it is harder to win, it is easy for the normal electric service 72 to keep the closed (protruding) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72, and the ball launched by the right-handed game It is configured so that the upper surface of the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 can be completely rolled from the right end to the left end and flow down to the variable winning device 65 side. In other words, a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a certain amount of prize in the second starting port 71, but from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" to the second starting port 71. It is difficult to win a prize, and the variable winning device 65 is configured to win a prize.

Next, the ordinary electric service opening table 202j will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (c). FIG. 30C is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the ordinary electric service opening table 202j stored in the ROM 202. The ordinary electric service opening table 202j is referred to at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric service 72 are defined based on the gaming state at the timing when the ordinary symbol hit occurs.

The ordinary electric service opening table 202j is divided into groups based on the game state in which ordinary symbols are drawn. Specifically, for the "normal game state" referred to in the "normal game state", for the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" referred to in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", and " The opening mode (opening time) of the ordinary electric service 72 is changed for the "latent probability fluctuation state" referred to in the "latent probability fluctuation state".

As shown in FIG. 30 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state" which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal electric service 72 set when the normal symbol is won. The number of times of opening is one, and the opening time is specified by the ordinary electric service opening table 202j so as to be "0.1 seconds". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state", the normal electric service 72 is set to be released for "0.1 seconds" x 1 time = "0.1 seconds". There is.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" which is a high probability state of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric service 72 set when the normal symbol is won is "3 seconds" and the number of times of opening. Is specified in the ordinary electric service opening table 202j so that the number of times is 3 times (the interval time between opening is "0.5 seconds"). That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the normal electric service 72 is configured to be released for "3 seconds" x 3 times = "9 seconds". Will be done.

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, the number of times of opening the normal electric service 72 set when the normal symbol is won is one, and the opening time is "3 seconds". It is specified in the ordinary electric service opening table 202j so as to be. That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the normal electric service 72 is configured to be released for "3 seconds" x 1 time = "3 seconds".

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric service 72 according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric service 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 72 is open for a long period of time, so that it is easy to win a prize on the second starting port 71 side, or the normal electric service 72 is open. By making it difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 due to the short situation depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is set, the opening period of the normal electric service 72 is extended, and the game is fired by the right-handed game. The ball is configured so that it can easily win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to accumulate. The fluctuation shortening function is easy to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is easily executed efficiently.

In addition, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is set, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric service 72 are to the right of the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state". The ball launched by the hitting game is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a certain amount of prize in the second starting port 71, but the second special symbol is dynamic from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Since it is difficult to accumulate the number of reserved balls for display, the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is lower than that of the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", but a lottery opportunity for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is obtained. It is configured so that you can play games while playing.

In this way, by providing each gaming state in which the high-probability state or low-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state or low-probability state of the normal symbol are combined, the game playability is changed to each gaming state, and variations are made. Can provide abundant games and improve the interest of the games.

The hit probability of the variable display of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is easier to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state" or the like. For example, the hit of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" The probability may be set to about 1/100 so that it is difficult to hit, or the hit probability of a normal symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2. Further, any time may be used as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "probability fluctuation state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" is "10 seconds" or more. It may be a long time (for example, "30 seconds") or a short time less than "10 seconds" (for example, "1 second").

Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric service 72 are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72, any opening time may be used as long as the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more advantageous to the player than the "normal gaming state" or the like. The opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the "normal game state" or the like may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "1 second"). It may be set to "3 times"). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be a long time of "3 seconds" or more (for example, "5 seconds"), or a short time of less than "3 seconds" (for example, "3 seconds"). 1 second ") may be used. Further, the number of times the ordinary electric service 72 is opened in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a large number of times (for example, "3 times") or more.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and inputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as / output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 35) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 55) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to detect balls that have won prizes in the winning ports 63, 64, 65, and 71, balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through the out port 66. Various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches including a switch (for example, a large winning opening switch 65c, a probability change area switch 65e, etc.) and a group of sensors, and a setting key 501 for setting a start-up mode when the power is turned on, "setting". A setting change switch 502 for updating the probability set value and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing the data stored in the RAM 203 are connected by being pressed in the "change mode".

Further, on the output side of the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol hold lamp 84, and the variable winning device 65 open and close the large winning opening. It is possible to switch whether or not the ball can flow into the large winning opening solenoid 65b for driving the opening and closing of the plate 65a to the front side and the probability variation region (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65. A probabilistic region solenoid 65d for driving the opening / closing of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate (not shown), a normal electric utility solenoid (not shown) for driving the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72, and other solenoids 209 are connected. There is. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. Set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 55) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is used to output audio from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, turn on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produce fluctuations. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the "premium live effect" and the "pending change notice" described later.

The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured so that commands can be transmitted and received to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image of the "super reach" production mode and the like, and the music in the "premium live production" is selected, and the frame is set to the display control device 114. The third symbol display device 81 is instructed to display the display based on the pressing of the button 22.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and "" It executes display control of "premium live production" and "pending change notice". The details of the "premium live concert" will be described later in FIG. 65.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 55). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

Here, a detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d as fixed value data. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. The look-ahead process can be executed based on each value of the counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d.

Then, what kind of effect will the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead processing be as a result of this look-ahead processing (whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a "reach display", etc.). Is determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects, or to change the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4). It executes control that determines the content (and execution time (timing)).

The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, a sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, a sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, and a second reserved information. At least a storage area 223f, a first execution information storage area 223g, and a second execution information storage area 223h are provided.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol should be started in the on state. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1225 in FIG. 59). .. Then, it is turned off when the variation effect of the first special symbol is set regardless of whether or not it is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see S1302 in FIG. 61).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol on standby when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on. In the case where the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (see S1306: Yes in FIG. 61), that is, the gaming state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is encouraged, the waiting state is performed. The setting process of the variation effect of the first special symbol for executing the variation effect of the first special symbol (see S1307 to S1309 in FIG. 61) is performed.

Even when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the game state is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time shortening state", or the "latent probability fluctuation" in which the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is encouraged. When it is in the "state" (see S1306: No in FIG. 61), the shift processing of the first reserved information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g, which will be described later, and the subtraction processing of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c. Is executed (see S1303 to S1305 in FIG. 61), but is configured not to execute the setting process of the variation effect of the first special symbol (see S1307 to S1309 in FIG. 61). With this configuration, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is not encouraged, the first special symbol display device 81 is used for the first special. It is possible to execute (display) only the encouraged variation effect of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls without executing (displaying) the variable effect and the number of reserved balls related to the symbol.

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol should be started in the ON state. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1235 in FIG. 60). .. Then, it is turned off when the variation effect of the second special symbol is set regardless of whether or not it is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see S1311 in FIG. 61).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation effect of the second special symbol on standby when the special figure 2 variation start flag 223b is turned on. When the gaming state is other than the "normal gaming state" (see S1315: No in FIG. 61), that is, the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is encouraged. In the case of "latent probability fluctuation state", the setting process of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol for executing the variation effect of the second special symbol in standby (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 61) is performed. ..

Even when the special figure 2 change start flag 223b is turned on, when the game state is the “normal game state” in which the change effect of the first special symbol is encouraged (S1315: Yes in FIG. 61). (See), although the shift processing of the second reserved information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h and the subtraction processing of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d, which will be described later, are executed (see S1312 to S1314 in FIG. 61). , The setting process of the variation effect of the second special symbol (see S1316 to S1318 in FIG. 61) is not executed. With this configuration, in the "normal game state" in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is not encouraged, the variation effect and the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol are executed (displayed) by the third symbol display device 81. Instead, it is possible to execute (display) only the encouraged variation effect of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls.

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variation effect of the first special symbol that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command (held ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c displays the reserved balls. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is added by entering the ball into the first starting port 64, and the number of reserved balls counter 203a in the main control device 110. When the first reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the values are added, the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the first reserved ball number command. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 58).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received and the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol is set regardless of the execution on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sub-first 1 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S1305 in FIG. 61). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, so that the main control The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is a variation effect of the second special symbol that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), similarly to the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. (Dynamic display), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d manages the number of reserved balls. It has become.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is added by entering the ball into the second starting port 71, and the number of reserved balls counter 203b in the main control device 110. When the second reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the values are added, the addition of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the second reserved ball number command. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1211 in FIG. 58).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted by the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, and the mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol is set regardless of the execution on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sub-number 2 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223d is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S1314 in FIG. 61). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, so that the main control The value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110.

The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is used to display the reserved symbol and the executed symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the gaming state in which the variation effect of each special symbol is encouraged. Used. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter. It is stored in the number counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 58), and responds to the reception of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command. Then, at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball counter 223d (see S1305 or S1314 in FIG. 61), it corresponds to a special symbol encouraged according to the gaming state. The display control device 114 is notified of the values of the sub 1st reserved ball counter 223c and the sub 2nd reserved ball counter 223d after storage or updating. The ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display first reserved ball number command or the display second reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first of the voice lamp control device 113. The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d and the execution symbol indicating the variation effect during execution are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 4B). Control the drawing of the image so that it is displayed in (see).

As described above, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is changed. The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4B) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the number of reserved balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 regarding the recommended special symbol. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls on which the special symbol variation effect encouraged according to the gaming state is reserved.

The first hold information storage area 223e is information for performing a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held, that is, the first hold ball acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main control device 110. It is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. It is configured to perform the production.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, the second reserved ball that is acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the main control device 110 starts winning a prize. This is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second separate symbol transmitted by the number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. It is configured to perform the production.

The first execution information storage area 223g is executed by at least the special symbol display device 37, and depending on the game state, the information of the variation effect of the first special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main control device. In 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command is stored. It is an area to do.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol, the above-mentioned first hold information storage is performed in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the like. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the like) stored in the first reserved information storage first area of the area 223e for performing the variation effect is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g.

The second execution information storage area 223h is executed by at least the special symbol display device 37, and depending on the game state, the information of the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the main control device. In 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c and transmitted by the second reserved ball number command is stored. It is an area to do.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the second special symbol, the above-mentioned second hold information storage is performed in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the second special symbol and the like. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the like) stored in the second reserved information storage first area of the area 223f for performing the variation effect is shifted to the second execution information storage area 223h.

Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the details of the first reserved information storage area 223e and the first execution information storage area 223g, and the second reserved information storage area 223f and the second execution information storage area 223h will be described. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first reserved information storage area 223e, the second reserved information storage area 223f, the first execution information storage area 223g, and the second execution information storage area 223h.

The first reserved information storage area 223e has four areas, the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and the jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored are stored. At least 223e2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, the second reserved information storage area 223f has four areas of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, similarly to the first reserved information storage area 223e. In each of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored are stored. At least 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, in the first execution information storage area 223g, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 in which the value is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At least it is provided.

Further, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 in which the value is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area 223h4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At least it is provided.

Specifically, the first execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed. Further, the second execution information storage area 223h is an area related to the variation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed. Further, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time among the variation effects of the reserved first special symbol. The first reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time. , The first reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the third oldest reserved fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and is the first reserved area. The information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the fourth oldest reserved variation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time among the pending variation effects of the first special symbol.

Further, the second reserved information storage first area of the second reserved information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation effect of the second special symbol held first in time among the variation effects of the second special symbol held. The second area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that is held second in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects. , The second reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect, which is the third oldest in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and is the second hold. The information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that has been reserved for the fourth oldest time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 first holds each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. Extract from the ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the reserved balls included in the first reserved ball number command in the corresponding first reserved information storage first to fourth areas. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, and the variation type counter storage area 223e4 in the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol held at that time is X. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command are the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol held in the Xth time among the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol held. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 in the first hold information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first hold ball number command in the first hold X area of the first hold ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the first hold information storage X area.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball count command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. 2 Extract from the number of reserved balls command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the reserved balls included in the third reserved ball number command in the corresponding third reserved information storage first to fourth areas. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, and the variation type counter storage area 223f4 in the area corresponding to the number.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ Y ≦ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol held at that time is Y. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command are the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol held at the Yth position in time among the fluctuation effects of the second special symbols held. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 in the first hold information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved Y area of the main control device 110 are stored in the second storage information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the start of the variation effect of the first special symbol from the main control device 110, the first reserved information storage area 223e The process of shifting the information stored in the first execution information storage area 223g is executed. That is, when the hold information regarding the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started, so that the first special symbol held first is executed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first storage area for storing the first reserved information corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g.

Then, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first execution information storage area 223g. Moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the start of the variation effect of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reserved information storage area 223f The process of shifting the information stored in the second execution information storage area 223h is executed. That is, when the hold information regarding the second special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the second special symbol held first is executed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first area for storing the second reserved information corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol currently being executed. The second execution information storage area 223h is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4.

Then, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the second execution information storage area 223h. Moves the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored in the first execution information storage area 223g. Further, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g of the main control device 110 are stored. Further, in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first reserved first to first reserved ball storage areas 203d of the main control device 110 are stored. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the 4 areas and the 2nd reserved 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which are being executed and held by the main control device 110, are the first execution information. It is stored in the storage area 223g, the second execution information storage area 223h, the first hold information storage area 223e, and the second hold information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the look-ahead process (not shown) is performed, the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d. Grasp the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the fluctuation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the first reserved information storage first area. I do. If the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the 2nd special symbol is 4 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the 4th area for storing the 2nd reserved information. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first hold information storage area 223e and the second hold information storage area 223f, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main control device 110 are changed. Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effect are also stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223e and the second hold information storage area 223f are also stored. The pre-reading process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 by referring to. That is, when the reserved 1st special symbol and / and the 2nd special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variation time)? Etc.) can be determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects.

The shift processing described above in the first hold information storage area 223e or the second hold information storage area 223f, and the first execution information storage area 223g or the second execution information storage area 223h is the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1. Fig. 2 Number of balls on hold when the stop type command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command are received (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 FIG. 2 First reserved information storage first to fourth areas based on the values of the sub first reserved ball count counter 223c and the sub second reserved ball count counter 223d before the update based on the reception of the stop type command is performed. Alternatively, data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved fluctuation effects among the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas.

For example, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c before the update when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e. It is assumed that the data is stored in (the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first hold information storage first area is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223 g, the data in the first hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the first The data in the hold information storage third area is shifted to the first hold information storage second area, and the data in the first hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the first hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub first hold ball count counter 223c before the update when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received is "2", the first hold information storage first area The data is shifted to the first execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. , The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is stored in an area where the area number is one smaller (first execution information storage area). It may be configured to shift to 223 g or the second execution information storage area 223h, or the first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas). In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 58) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol variation effect and the continuous notice in the third symbol display device 81 are produced. It controls the production.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation mode of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is different for each gaming state, and the player is shown the launching mode of the ball encouraged for each gaming state. It is configured as follows. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" in which a left-handed game is encouraged, the character display "left-handed" that encourages a left-handed game is displayed in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, and is composed of Arabic numerals. Each of the fluctuating symbols is displayed so as to fluctuate by vertical scrolling and to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the character display "right-handed" that encourages the right-handed game is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm. While being displayed, each variable symbol composed of Arabic numerals fluctuates by vertical scrolling, and is displayed so as to form 5 effective lines (so-called 5 lines) in the main display area Dm. In this way, by clearly differentizing the display mode of the variable symbol in each game state, it is easy for the player to recognize the game state, and the game mode (launch mode) necessary for performing the encouraged game can be obtained. It can be easily recognized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation effect of 1 special symbol executed (encouragement) according to the gaming state is set, and the variation effect of other special symbols (non-encouragement) is executed. It is configured not to be done. Specifically, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win a prize in the first starting port 64, the third symbol display device 81 executes only the variation effect and the hold display of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the variation effect and the hold display of the second special symbol are not executed. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged and the ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71, the third symbol display device 81 has the second special. It is configured so that only the variation effect and the hold display of the symbol can be executed, and the variation effect and the hold display of the first special symbol are not executed. With this configuration, in the main display area Dm, which is the main display area of the game result, a variation effect that is not encouraged (it is difficult to derive the game result because the variation time is long) is executed. It is possible to provide a comfortable game without making the player feel uncomfortable (bad impression) due to this, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 55. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, the initial value setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S101). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, weight processing (“1 second” in this embodiment). Is executed (S102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 5) provided in the main control device 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of the determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally. In this case, the processing is shifted to S116 in order to initialize the RAM 203. To do.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S116 even in such a case.

As will be described later in the process of S156 in FIG. 35, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

When it is determined in the process of S109 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503: is off and the setting key 501: is turned on when the power is turned on, so that the user stands up. In order to start the raising mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504 (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111). The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is finished (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is finished, and the process is shifted to S113. To do. If the setting key 501 is not turned on in the processing of S109 (S109: No), the processing of S110 to S112 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S113 in order to start the startup mode in the "normal mode". To do.

In the process of S113, a set value command is generated based on the probability set value, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then an interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 35) described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 36) of the timer interrupt process described later. Upon receiving this set value command, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to store (store) the probability set value indicated by the set value command in the set value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S104, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether to start the startup mode in "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode". In order to determine, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

If it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process shifts to S116 in order to start the start mode in the "RAM clear mode".

In the process of S116, the initialization process (S116, S117) of the RAM 203 is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on regardless of the setting change, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. To. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No) or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initial RAM 203 is also set. The conversion process (S116, S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserved ball count counter 203a) is set in the RAM 203. "0" clear, etc.) is set (S117). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), the setting change process is performed in order to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode", and is to accept and confirm the change (update) of the probability setting value from the hall related persons and the like. It is the processing of.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 sets the start of display of the current probability set value (S121), and the process shifts to S122. By the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the probability display device 504.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here is not the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, but may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start the display with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "3" which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be "4" or "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is. .. As a result, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", if the probability setting value set in the probability display device 504 before the power is turned off is "3" or more, the probability setting value is set to "3" or more. The display starts as "3", and if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is less than "3", the display starts with the probability setting value set before the power is turned off. It may be done. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high such as "5" or "6", there may be many cases where the probability setting value is to be slightly reduced (for example, only 1). In such a case, if the display of the probability set value is started with the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is, the following problems occur. That is, the update of the probability set value is added by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and when the probability set value is "6" and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, the probability set value is set to "". It is done by returning to "1". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from "6" to "5", it is necessary to make the probability set value make one round while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed at "3" to set the probability while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. The value can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122), and it is not within the predetermined range, that is, an abnormal probability set value is obtained. If so (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" as a result of the processing of S122 (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the processing of S123 Is skipped and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122, while if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to the process of S122.

To update the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is "6". In the case of "", it is performed by returning the probability setting value to "1". The probability set value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The loop processing of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on in the processing of S124 (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is used as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the probability setting value is set (S128).

After the processing of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the off state (S129). In the process of S129, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, and the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value in the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is made. The process (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 33), the process is shifted to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). .. In this way, the hall related persons strongly recognize that the data of the RAM 203 is erased after the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on to determine the probability set value in the processing of S124. Can be made to.

Further, in the process of S124, the probability setting value is determined by the ON detection of the RAM erase switch 503, but the probability setting value may be determined by the OFF detection of the setting key 501.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power off process are roughly classified.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999”, “99” in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S207 (see FIG. 36) of the timer interrupt process described later (S153), and the process proceeds to the process of S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), which will be described later, is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open and close, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of the normal symbol. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. come. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the normal figure per counter C4 that use these as the initial value of the update are randomly updated. Can have sex.

In the process of S151, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since the NMI interrupt processing described later is executed in FIG. 55, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S154 is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to another control device (payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, or other peripheral control device). ) (S155). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S156), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and at the timing when the updates of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are completed, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cut-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S151 can be started. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and the main process (see FIG. 35), commands or signals to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and a pachinko machine 10 are connected). Outputs a signal to an external output terminal board (not shown) for the purpose. In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the signal is output to various devices.

After the processing of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the hitting process for executing the processing at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed (s). S203). This hit process (S203) will be described later in FIG. 47.

After S203, next, the ordinary electric service control process for executing the drive control process of the ordinary electric service 72 is executed (S204). Briefly, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol on the condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " When the "○" symbol) appears and becomes a hit state, the normal electric service 72 is opened for a predetermined time, while when the lost symbol of the normal symbol (for example, the "x" symbol) appears, the normal electric service 72 Keep closed. This ordinary electric service control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

After the processing of S204, the reading processing of various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch 208 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure hit counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure per counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (first embodiment). Then, when they reach "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99"), respectively, they are cleared to "0" respectively. When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure hit counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure hit counter C4. Is read as the initial value of, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is executed (S208). The details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Next, a gate passing process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined in the gate passage process (S209) that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is the normal figure. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 203i (see FIG. 6), and the holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol holding lamp 84. The details of this gate passing process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

After the gate passage process (S209) is executed, the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 based on the process content of the start winning process (S208) is performed. The special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

Next, it is a setting process for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S209), and for performing variable display of the normal symbol based on the determination result on the normal symbol display device 83. Figure variation processing is executed (S211). In this normal symbol variation processing (S211), the hit probability of the normal symbol is performed with either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (5/10) according to the game state described above. Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the hit / fail result, and the display result according to the hit / fail result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83. The details of the normal map variation processing (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S211), the launch control process is executed (S212), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S213) to end the timer interrupt process. ..

The launch control process (S212) is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining whether to turn on / off the firing of a ball. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case of performing the timer interrupt processing has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. .. For example, the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal read process (S202), the hit process (S203), the ordinary electric service control process (S204), and the switch read process (S205), which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. ) May be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each of them is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, and if there is a winning, the starting with the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 being won. The process of storing (holding) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the ports 64 and 71 is executed. In addition, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 (S301). Here, the first is based on the output signal of the first start port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the first start port 64, which is read in the switch read process (see S205 in FIG. 36). 1 The entry into the starting port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 36).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there was a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the first held in the main control device 110). 1 It is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol N1) is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the fourth embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a prize in the first start port 64, if the number of balls on hold for operation is not N1 <4 (S302: No), this start prize process (S208) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). Return to.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N1 <4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of pending balls N1) is added by 1 (S303). Then, since it is a prize to the first starting port 64 corresponding to the first special symbol this time, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S304), and processing is performed. To S305.

In the processing of S305, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5), and is set as the storage destination in S304. 1 Out of the 1st reserved 1st to 4th areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203d, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 and the jackpot type counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the 1st reserved ball counter 203a. It is held (stored) in 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter storage area 203d4, respectively (S305).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S304 based on the winning of the first starting port 64, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S303. If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of operation reserved balls N1) after addition by the processing of S303, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (held) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the processing of S305, In order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including the respective values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for sending the command (S306). As a result, the first reserved ball count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36) that is executed next. When the process of S306 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command in the processing of S306, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309 may be used, or the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S305 may be used. 1 The value stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203d may be read out and used.

In the process of S301, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64 (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 71 (starting winning). (S307). Here, as in the case of the first starting port 64, the second starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the second starting port 71, which is read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 36). Based on the output signal of, the ball entering the second starting port 71 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 36).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 71 (there was a starting prize) (S307: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second held in the main control device 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N2 of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S308). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting port 71 (S307: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting port 71 but the number of pending balls N2 <4 (S308: No), this The start winning process (S208) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N2 <4 (S308: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of reserved balls N2) is added by 1 (S309). Then, since it is a prize to the second starting port 71 corresponding to the second special symbol this time, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S310), and the process is performed. To S311.

In the processing of S311, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6), and is set as the storage destination in S310. 2 Of the second reserved balls 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203e, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 and the jackpot type counter storage area in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball counter 203b. It is held (stored) in 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4, respectively (S311).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S310 based on the winning of the second starting port 71, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and the second reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S309. If the value of 203b is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the second holding first area. If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operating reserved balls N2) after the addition by the processing of S309, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (held) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the processing of S311. In order to transmit the second reserved ball number command including the respective values of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. It is set in the ring buffer for sending the command (S312). As a result, the second reserved ball count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36) that is executed next. When the process of S312 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command in the processing of S312, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309 may be used, or the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S311 may be used. 2. The value stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203e may be read out and used.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S307, when a ball wins the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 at the same time, the winning process of the ball to the first starting port 64 is preferentially executed, and the second starting is performed. Wait for the ball winning process to enter the mouth 71, and execute the ball winning process to the waiting second starting port 71 in the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). It may be configured as.

Next, the gate passing process (S209), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this gate passing process (S209). The gate passing process (S209) determines whether or not the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67, and when the ball has passed (entered), the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is stored in the normal figure reserved ball. The process of storing (holding) in the area 203i is executed.

In this gate passing process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, to the through gate 67 based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage (entry) of the ball to the through gate 67 read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 36). Passage (entry ball) is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 36).

In the process of S401, if the sphere has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), the gate passage process (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67 (S401: Yes), then whether or not the game state is the "normal game state", that is, the launch of the ball in the left-handed game is encouraged. It is determined whether or not the gaming state is being played (S402). As a result of the determination, if it is in the "normal game state" (S402: Yes), the ball launched by the non-encouragement (prohibited) right-handed game instead of the encouraged left-handed game has passed through the through gate 67. Therefore, in addition to outputting an alarm sound from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5), normal right-handed error processing such as displaying the character display "Please return to left-handed" on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed (S403), and the process shifts to S404.

With this configuration, in the "normal game state", when a right-handed game is performed in a situation where the normal electric service 72 is difficult to open and a ball is won in the second starting port 71, a "super long fluctuation" effect mode is produced. Can be selected, but in the variation effect of the "ultra-long variation" effect mode, the ball is won in the small hit game in the second special symbol, and the ball is launched in the right-handed game at that timing to hit the ball. It becomes possible to win a ball in the variable winning device 65 that is opened based on the winning of the game, and the player can be given a game value that is not expected in the game specifications. Therefore, when a ball is detected by the through gate 67 in the "normal game state", error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed to hit the player right in the game state in which the right-handed game is not encouraged. It is possible to avoid the execution of the game, eliminate as much as possible the game in the game form different from the recommended game specifications, and realize the game performance expected in each game state.

In the processing of S402, if the gaming state is not the "normal gaming state" (S402: No), in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged. Therefore, the normal right-handed error processing of S403 is not performed, the processing of S403 is skipped, and the processing is shifted to S404.

In the process of S404, the value of the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203h (the operation holding ball number HN of the variable display of the normal symbol held in the main control device 110) is the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S404). Then, even if there is a passage (entry) to the through gate 67, if the number of balls on hold is not HN <4 (S404: No), this gate passage process (S209) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if the number of operation-holding balls HN <4 (S404: Yes), the value of the normal figure reservation-holding number counter 203h (operation-holding number HN) is added by 1 (S405). Then, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5), and the read data is read from the normal figure hold first to fourth areas provided in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i. It is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the number of reserved balls counter 203h (S406).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal figure holding ball counter 203h after addition by the processing of S405 is "1", the value of the normal figure holding counter C4 is held in the normal figure holding first area. Further, if the value of the normal figure holding ball counter 203h after addition is "2", it is in the normal figure holding second area, and if the value of the normal figure holding ball counter 203h after addition is "3", it is in the normal figure. If the value of the normal figure hold ball counter 203h after addition is "4" in the hold third area, the value of the normal figure hold counter C4 is held in the normal figure hold fourth area. After the processing of S406 is completed, the gate passing processing (S209) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36).

In the first embodiment, the normal symbol hold ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol is not transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, but the normal figure hold ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol is used. It may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 to perform an effect (notification) regarding a reserved symbol or the like related to a variable display of a normal symbol. In this case, by including the value of the counter C4 per normal figure in the command for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure and transmitting it, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the so-called look-ahead processing related to the normal symbol, and the effect related to the normal symbol is produced. It may be configured to provide variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation processing (S210).

This special symbol variation processing (S210) controls the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the control related to the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. It is something to do.

In this special symbol variation processing (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S501). The jackpots include during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot opening). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S501, if the jackpot of any of the special symbols is in progress (S501: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

In the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S501: No), then it is determined whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in the small hit. (S502). As the small hit, the predetermined time during the small hit game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit and before the start of the small hit game (that is, the small hit opening). And during a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game (that is, the small hit ending) are included. As a result of the determination in S502, if any of the special symbols is in the small hit (S502: Yes), the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

If it is determined in the processing of S502 that the small hit is not being made (S502: No), then whether or not the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being dynamically displayed on the special symbol display device 37 is determined. If it is determined (S503) and the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S503: Yes), the setting process related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not performed, so that S504 and S505 The process is skipped and the process is transferred to S506.

In the process of S503, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the first special symbol (S503: No), then, after the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped, it is predetermined. It is determined whether or not the time has passed (S504). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed (S504: No) after the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the process shifts to S506. As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is the special symbol display device 37 (“normal game state”, “latent probability fluctuation state”, “probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction” for a predetermined time. If it is "state", it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), so that the player can visually recognize the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S504, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S504: Yes), whether or not to dynamically display the first special symbol and the movement of the first special symbol are performed. The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505) for performing various setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing the target display is performed, and then the processing is shifted to S506.

Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S505), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505).

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505), as described above, whether or not to dynamically display the first special symbol and the setting of the dynamic display when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed. The process and the process of changing the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed according to the dynamic display result of the first special symbol.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505), first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls for operation of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not N1) is larger than "0" (S5001). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is not larger than "0" (S5001: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S505) is finished, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 39).

If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5001: No), the third symbol is determined according to the gaming state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. In this demo effect, the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed (dynamic display) in a gaming state in which the variation effect of the first special symbol can be executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, in the "normal game state". Executed if does not exist.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol to be executed does not exist, a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, and the first It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (operation hold ball number N1) is determined to be larger than "0".

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36). It is transmitted toward 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

In the process of S5001, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is larger than "0" (S5001: Yes), the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is performed. It is determined that it is the execution start timing, and first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operation pending ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S5002). This is because the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol is started by the process described later, so that the reserved ball related to the first special symbol is started. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S5003). This data shift process (S5003) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first hold first to fourth areas of the first hold ball storage area 203d toward the first hold ball execution area 203f. , 1st hold 1st area → 1st hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → The data in each area is shifted, such as the 1st hold and the 3rd area.

After the data shift processing of S5003, the special symbol display device 37 (the third symbol display in the "normal game state") is based on the values of various counters stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. In order to perform the setting process of the dynamic display of the first special symbol executed in the device 81), first, whether or not the ST counter 203m provided in the RAM 203 is a value larger than "0" in order to determine the game state. (S5004). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the ST counter 203m is not a value larger than "0" (that is, "0" or less) (S5004: No), the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "time shortened state". Since the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5005), and the processing is shifted to S5007. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0" (S5004: Yes), the gaming state is "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", and the special symbol jackpot. Since the probability is in the high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5006), and the processing is shifted to S5007.

In the processing of S5007, a jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5005 or S5006 ( Win / fail determination) processing is performed (S5007).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability set value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. It is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "1" is 33/10000 and the set value "6" is 43/10000. When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is specified so as to be 100/10000 for "" and 125/10000 for the set value "6".

In the processing of S5007, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. , Determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S5007 (S5007: Yes), then the number of occurrences of the "time saving function" given during the "renso" state before the jackpot this time (that is, the number of times of the time saving limit) ) Performs the time reduction limit processing (S5008) in order to determine whether or not the time reduction limit number has been reached since the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the previous time reduction limit arrival, and then shifts the processing to S5009. ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, in one process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43) described later. A certain time saving limit processing (S5008 or S5308) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this time saving limit processing (S5008 or S5308). The time saving limit processing (S5008) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) and the time saving limit processing (S5308) performed in the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 43) described later are Since it is configured to perform the same processing, the processing of S5008 will be described here, and the description of the processing of S5308 will be omitted.

In this time reduction limit processing (S5008), as described above, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized or after the previous time reduction limit is reached, the time reduction is continuously performed in the "continuous villa" state without shifting to the "normal game state". Until the "function" is granted 6 times (that is, before the time saving limit is reached), the jackpot type table 202b that can select the jackpot type in the jackpot from the jackpot types including the jackpot type that grants the "time saving function" is displayed. Set. On the other hand, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after the previous time saving limit is reached, every time the "time saving function" is continuously granted 6 times in the "ream villa" state without shifting to the "normal game state", the said The jackpot type table 202b is set so that the jackpot type of the jackpot can be selected from the jackpot types that do not generate (activate) the "time saving function".

In the time saving limit processing (S5008), first, S5007 (special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40. The same applies to the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 43); the same applies hereinafter)). In FIG. 43), since it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the process of S5307), 1 is added to the value of the time saving limit counter 203n (S5101). Then, a limit count command indicating that the time reduction limit counter 203n has been added by 1 is generated, and the limit count command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S5102). The limit number of times command set in S5102 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 36) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the limit number of times command, it recognizes that one big hit to which the "time saving function" is given occurs once after the end of the big hit, and can control according to the limit number of times.

After the processing of S5102, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203n added by 1 in S5101 is less than "6" (S5103). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time reduction limit counter 203n is less than "6" (S5103: Yes), the number of time reduction limits has not been reached in this jackpot, so the jackpot type table 202b before the time reduction limit is reached (FIG. 8). (See) is set (S5104), and the time saving limit processing (S5008) is terminated. After the time saving limit processing (S5008) is completed, the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is not less than "6", that is, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is "6" or more (S5103: No). ), Since the number of time reduction limits has been reached in this jackpot, the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8) at the time of reaching the time reduction limit is set (S5105), and the time reduction limit processing (S5008) is completed. After the time saving limit processing (S5008) is completed, the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40).

In this way, the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is updated every time the jackpot in which the "time saving function" occurs six times in succession in the "ream villa" state is won, and the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is updated according to the value of the time saving limit counter 203n. When the "ream villa" state continues depending on whether the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot types that can generate the "time saving function" or the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot types that cannot generate the "time saving function". Even so, it is possible to make sure that the "time saving function" does not occur every time the time saving limit is reached, and the "time saving function" continues continuously during the "ream villa" state, and the player has an excessive game value in a short time. It can be suppressed that it is given to.

In the first embodiment, the time saving limit number is determined when determining the jackpot type to determine the jackpot type, but the time saving limit number is determined at the end of the jackpot, and in the subsequent gaming state, the "time saving function" is determined. May be configured to determine whether or not to grant.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5009, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit or when the time saving limit is reached set in the above time saving limit processing (S5008) and the first hold. Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the ball execution area 203f, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5009).

In this process, according to the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. Therefore, by opening the probability variation region during the jackpot and letting the sphere pass through the probability variation region, the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 160 times after the jackpot. "Probability change A" that shifts to "probability fluctuation state" where the "time saving function" is also granted until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 160 times, or after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the special symbol has a low probability Although it is in a state, the jackpot type of "time saving A" to which the "time saving function" is given until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8) set in S5104 or S5105. Will be done.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S5010). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 21B) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5010, the processing is shifted to S5011, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is a big hit (small hit) set in S5009 and S5010, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. Change special figure 2 in order to determine the relationship between the destination and the back where the derivation result of the above appears, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first. The process is performed (S5011), and then the process is transferred to S5017. The details of this special figure 2 change process (S5011) will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5007, when it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot (S5007: No), subsequently, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and S5005 or S5006 A small hit lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed is performed based on the set large hit random number table 202a (S5012).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to be the same in the all probability set value and the high probability state and the low probability state of the special symbol. Has been done. Specifically, in the big hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number value is defined so that the small hit probability is 100/10000 in all the settings and all the gaming states.

In the processing of S5012, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small hit random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. In addition, it is determined that it is a small hit of the first special symbol. When it is determined that the hit is a small hit as a result of the processing of S5012 (S5012: Yes), then the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the first special symbol (only one type in the first embodiment) is set. (S5013). In the process of S5113, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the small hit symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first hold stored in the first hold ball execution area 203f. Based on the value of the ball number counter 203a and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, and "non-reach (normal)" effect mode One of the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode is set. In the fourth embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "normal gaming state" or a "latent probability fluctuation state", a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", or a "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state". The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S5014). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, first, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the small hit (common to the loss), the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f Select the effect mode associated with the value. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5014, the processing is shifted to S5011, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol which is the small hit set in S5013 and S5014 and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed are the same as in the case of the big hit. In order to determine the predecessor-posterior relationship in which the derivation result appears with the display, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first, the special figure 2 Change processing is performed (S5011), and then the processing is transferred to S5017.

On the other hand, in the process of S5012, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (S5012: No), the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S5015). In the process of S5015, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first hold ball stored in the first hold ball execution area 203f are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203a and the current gaming state, as the effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special" effect mode. Set one of the "reach" effect modes. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5016), and the process proceeds to S5017. In the process of S5016, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S5015, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the small hit time, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are the same random number values C3. By making a judgment using the same judgment program using CS1, the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 42, a special figure 2 change process (S5011), which is one process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 change process (S5011).

In the special figure 2 change process (S5011), when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the first special of the big hit or the small hit set in the above special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40). Compare each fluctuation time between the dynamic display of the symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, and perform the big hit game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol whose result is derived first. While giving priority, the change process for extinguishing the big hit game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol whose result is derived later is executed.

Further, in this special symbol 2 change process (S5011), when both the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol generate a jackpot game, one of the special symbols is displayed. Since the jackpot game selected by the dynamic display disappears, the time reduction limit processing (see FIG. 41) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5008) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S5308) is accompanied by the disappearance. The process of restoring (subtracting) the value of the time saving limit counter 203n that has been added once is executed.

In this special figure 2 change process (S5011), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5201). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not executed (S5201: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed based on the dynamic display result of the first special symbol. Therefore, the special figure 2 change process (S5011) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5201: Yes), then the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is special. Whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5010 or S5014 of the variation start process (see FIG. 40), that is, the result of the dynamic display of any special symbol comes first. It is determined whether or not it is derived (S5202).

As a result of the determination in S5202, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the second special symbol being executed is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5010 or S5014 (S5202: Yes). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is shorter and the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Is to stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. First, the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the big hit result, the small hit result, or the lost result) (S5203), and then the changed second It is determined whether or not the result of the dynamic display of the special symbol is the jackpot result that imparts the "time saving function" (S5204). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed second special symbol is the jackpot result that gives the "time saving function" (S5204: Yes), the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S5205). The process shifts to S5206.

In the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the big hit result that the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be extinguished gives the "time saving function". In that case, the time saving limit number of times is added according to the jackpot result in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. In this case, if only the time saving limit number is increased (counted) even though the "time saving function" is not given, the "time saving function" is given only by the number of times the "time saving function" is given, which is less than the time saving limit number. There is a possibility that the player cannot be given the game value according to the game specifications, and the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, which may awaken the player.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot result that the dynamic display of the second special symbol gives the "time saving function" is derived. If this is the case, the number of times of the time saving limit that has already been counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of times of the "time saving function" that is not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine is provided so as not to inflict an unexpected disadvantage on the player, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S5204, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) second special symbol being executed (S5204: No), the process of S5205 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5206. ..

In the process of S5206, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the remaining fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5010 (S5206). By performing this process, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

After the processing of S5206, the display control device 114 is notified of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S5206. Special figure 2 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S5207). Specifically, for example, if the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "25000 milliseconds", the loss result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5203 and the first special symbol A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating "25,000 milliseconds", which is the remaining time of the dynamic display of, is set. If the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is "5345 milliseconds", the result of the loss of the display of the second special symbol set in S5203 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating "5345 milliseconds" is set.

Then, after the processing of S5207, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (that is, the loss result) set in the processing of S5203 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5208) is completed, the special figure 2 change process (S5011) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40).

In this way, when changing the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 stop type command different from the executing second special symbol is transmitted again, so that the special figure 2 stop type command is transmitted. By setting a rough stop type based on the correctness of the variation effect, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type of the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the correctness. Based on the information, the stop result of the variation effect can be determined in detail.

These special figure 2 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 2 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 36). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 2 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

With this configuration, when the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the special figure relating to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed is changed. By transmitting the 2-variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command as a set to the voice lamp control device 113, it is not necessary to change the control program on the voice lamp control device 113 side, which reduces the design man-hours and reduces the control burden. Mitigation can be achieved. Further, the variation effect of the special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the game state. Here, when the content of the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is replaced by the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is not executed in the first place, so that the variation effect on the non-execution side is not executed. Even when the replacement control is executed with respect to the above, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Note that, according to S5207 and S5208, the special figure 2 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command regarding the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be changed are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. 2 In the gaming state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not encouraged (that is, the “normal gaming state”), the effect related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol (variable effect and audio output device in the third symbol display device 81). Since the audio output in 226, the lighting display in the lamp display device 227, etc.) are not executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command set in S5207 and S5208 are the second special notified in advance. Notifying that the fluctuation time and stop type of the dynamic display of the symbol will be changed, the execution mode of the dynamic display of the second special symbol recognized by the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device. It is transmitted in order to grasp the consistency with the execution mode of the dynamic display of the second special symbol recognized in 114.

As a result of the determination in S5202, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the second special symbol being executed is shorter than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5010 or S5014 (S5202: No). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is longer and the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived earlier (S5209). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol from which the big hit result or the small hit result is derived. Is derived, based on the jackpot result or small hit result derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot result or small hit derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be derived later It is configured to extinguish the result.

As a result of the determination in S5209, if the big hit result or the small hit result is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5209: No), the first special symbol is derived. Since it is not necessary to change the dynamic display result of, the process of S520 to S5213 is skipped, the special figure 2 change process (S5011) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5209: Yes), the first special symbol being executed is executed. In order to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of The dynamic display of the symbol is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the big hit result, the small hit result or the loss result) (S5210), and then the result of the dynamic display of the changed first special symbol is It is determined whether or not the result is a jackpot (S5211). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed first special symbol is the jackpot result (S5211: Yes), the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S5212), and the process is shifted to S5213. In the process of S5210, if the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss result, it may be configured so as not to be changed to the loss result again to reduce the processing load.

In the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be extinguished is a jackpot result, the first 1 The time saving limit number is added according to the jackpot result that gives the "time saving function" in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case, if only the time saving limit number is increased (counted) even though the "time saving function" is not given, the "time saving function" is given only by the number of times the "time saving function" is given, which is less than the time saving limit number. There is a possibility that the player cannot be given the game value according to the game specifications, and the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, which may awaken the player.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot result that the dynamic display of the first special symbol gives the "time saving function" is derived. If this is the case, the number of times of the time saving limit that has already been counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of times of giving the "time saving function" that is not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine is provided so as not to inflict an unexpected disadvantage on the player, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S5211, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) first special symbol being executed (S5211: No), the process of S5212 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5213. ..

In the process of S5213, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol from which the result is derived first (S5213). , The special figure 2 change process (S5011) is finished, and the process returns to the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40). By performing this process, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

Returning to FIG. 40, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5017, the voice lamp control device 113 is used based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the first special symbol determined by the processing of S5010, S5014, S5016 or S5213 (see FIG. 42). A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (S5017). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "probability change A", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the jackpot / "probability change" is selected. A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "A" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is displayed. Set. Further, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed based on the dynamic display result of the second special symbol, the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is "25000 milliseconds". , The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5310 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol "25000 milliseconds". Is set.

Then, after the processing of S5017, a special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5009, S5013, S5015 or S5210 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5018) is completed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S505) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 39).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the special figure 1 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) has the first special symbol based on the propriety. It is possible to grasp the stop type of the dynamic display and determine the stop result of the variable effect in detail based on the information.

These special figure 1 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 1 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 36). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 1 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 1 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. In the process of S506, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being dynamically displayed in the special symbol display device 37 (S506), and the second special symbol is dynamically displayed in the special symbol display device 37. If it is being displayed (S506: Yes), since the setting process related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not performed, the processes of S507 and S508 are skipped and the process is shifted to S509.

On the other hand, in the process of S506, if the special symbol display device 37 is not dynamically displaying the second special symbol (S506: No), then after the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped. , It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed (S507). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed (S507: No) after the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the process shifts to S509. As a result, if the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is the special symbol display device 37 (“probability fluctuation state”, “time reduction state”, or “latent probability fluctuation state” for a predetermined time, the second special symbol is displayed. Since it is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81), the player can visually recognize the stopped symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S507, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S507: Yes), whether or not to dynamically display the second special symbol and the movement of the second special symbol The special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S508) for performing various setting processing of the dynamic display in the case of performing the target display is performed, and then the processing is shifted to S509.

Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S508), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (S508).

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S508), as described above, whether or not to dynamically display the second special symbol and the setting of the dynamic display when the second special symbol is dynamically displayed. The process and the process of changing the dynamic display of the first special symbol are performed according to the dynamic display result of the second special symbol.

In this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S508), first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of reserved balls for operation of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not N2) is larger than "0" (S5301). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is not larger than "0" (S5301: No), there is no dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed. The special figure 2 variation start process (S508) is finished, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 39).

If it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5301: No), the third symbol is determined according to the gaming state. The display device 81 is configured to perform a demonstration effect. This demo effect is executed in a gaming state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol can be executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the "probability variation state", the "time reduction state", or the "latent probability variation state". It is executed when there is no variation effect (dynamic display) of the second special symbol to be power.

Specifically, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state", when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to be executed does not exist, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. A demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and it is determined that the demo is in progress until the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b (operation pending ball number N2) is determined to be larger than "0".

The set demo command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36). It is transmitted toward 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display demo command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 is based on the reception of the display demo command. Then, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so as to display the demonstration effect for the variation effect of the second special symbol.

In the process of S5301, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is larger than "0" (S5301: Yes), the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is performed. It is determined that it is the execution start timing, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S5302). This is because the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol is started by the process described later, so that the reserved ball related to the second special symbol is started. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S5303). This data shift process (S5303) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second hold first to fourth areas of the second hold ball storage area 203e toward the second hold ball execution area 203 g. , 2nd hold 1st area → 2nd hold ball execution area 203g, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → The data in each area is shifted, such as the second hold and the third area.

After the data shift processing of S5303, the special symbol display device 37 (“probability fluctuation state”, “time reduction state” or “time reduction state” or based on the values of various counters stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g by the data shift processing. In the case of the "latent probability fluctuation state", in order to perform the setting process of the dynamic display of the second special symbol executed in the third symbol display device 81), first, in order to determine the game state, the RAM 203 is provided. It is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0" (S5304). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter 203m is not greater than "0" (that is, the value of the ST counter 203m is "0" or less) (S5304: No), the gaming state is "normal gaming state". Alternatively, since it is in the "time shortened state" and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S5305), and the process shifts to S5307. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0" (S5304: Yes), the gaming state is "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", and the jackpot of the special symbol Since the probability is in the high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S5306), and the process shifts to S5307.

In the process of S5307, a jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S5305 or S5306 ( Win / fail determination) processing is performed (S5307).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability set value, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. It is determined based on the relationship between the value of and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "1" is 33/10000 and the set value "6" is 43/10000. When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is specified so as to be 100/10000 for "" and 125/10000 for the set value "6".

In the process of S5307, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. , Determined to be a big hit. When it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit as a result of the processing of S5307 (S5307: Yes), then when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the jackpot result in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40). Similarly, in order to determine whether or not the number of jackpot wins in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has reached the time reduction limit since the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the previous time reduction limit has been reached. Limit processing is performed (S5308), and then the processing is transferred to S5309. Since the time saving limit processing (S5308) is the same as the time saving limit processing (S5008) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S5309, the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the second special symbol before reaching the time saving limit or when the time saving limit is reached set in the above time saving limit processing (S5008), and the second reserved ball execution area. Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in 203 g, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S5309).

In this process, according to the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g, that is, the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. Therefore, by opening the probability variation region during the jackpot and letting the sphere pass through the probability variation region, the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 160 times after the jackpot. "Probability variation A" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is also granted until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 160 times, or the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 10 rounds, and the jackpot is in progress. By opening the probability variation area and passing the sphere through the probability variation area, the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 160 times after the big hit, but the "time saving function" is not given. The jackpot type of "latent probability A" that shifts to the "latent probability fluctuation state" is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the jackpot from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 8B) set in S5204 or S5205 above. The type is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S5310). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5310, the processing is shifted to S5311, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is the big hit (small hit) set in S5309 and S5310, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed. Change special figure 1 in order to determine the relationship between the destination and the back where the derivation result of the above appears, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first. The process is performed (S5311), and then the process is transferred to S5317. The details of this special figure 1 change process (S5311) will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5307, when it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot (S5307: No), then the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and S5305 or S5306. A small hit lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed is performed based on the set large hit random number table 202a (S5312).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set to be the same in the all probability set value and the high probability state and the low probability state of the special symbol. Has been done. Specifically, in the big hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number value is defined so that the small hit probability is 9800/10000 in all the settings and all the gaming states.

In the processing of S5312, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is compared with the small hit random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match. In addition, it is determined that it is a small hit of the second special symbol. When it is determined that the hit is a small hit as a result of the processing of S5312 (S5312: Yes), then the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol (only one type in the first embodiment) is set. (S5313). In the process of S5313, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the small hit symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second hold stored in the second hold ball execution area 203 g. Based on the value of the ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and "super reach" effect mode Set one of the "special reach" production modes. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S5314). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, first, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for the small hit (common to the loss), the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is used. Select the effect mode associated with the value. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

After the processing of S5314, the processing is shifted to S5311, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol which is the small hit set in S5313 and S5314 and the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed are the same as in the case of the big hit. In order to determine the predecessor-posterior relationship in which the derivation result appears with the display, and to change the content of the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears later while maintaining the dynamic display of the special symbol that appears first, the special figure 1 Change processing is performed (S5311), and then the processing is transferred to S5317.

On the other hand, in the process of S5312, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (S5312: No), the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S5315). In the process of S5315, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second hold ball stored in the second hold ball execution area 203 g are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special" effect mode. Set one of the "reach" effect modes. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5316), and the process proceeds to S5317. In the process of S5316, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S5315, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the small hit time, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are the same random number values C3. By making a judgment using the same judgment program using CS1, the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced. Further, by determining and determining the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the same determination program, the program can be shared and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, a special figure 1 change process (S5311), which is one process of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 change process (S5311).

In the special figure 1 change process (S5311), when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the second special of the big hit or the small hit set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43). Compare each fluctuation time between the dynamic display of the symbol and the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed, and perform the big hit game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol from which the result is derived first. While giving priority, the change process for extinguishing the big hit game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol whose result is derived later is executed.

Further, in this special symbol 1 change process (S5311), when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol both generate a jackpot game, one of the special symbols is displayed. Since the jackpot game selected by the dynamic display disappears, the time reduction limit processing (see FIG. 41) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S5008) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S5308) is accompanied by the disappearance. The process of restoring (subtracting) the value of the time saving limit counter 203n that has been added once is executed.

In this special figure 1 change process (S5311), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5401). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed (S5401: No), there is no dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed based on the dynamic display result of the second special symbol. Therefore, the special figure 1 change process (S5311) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5401: Yes), then the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is special. Whether or not it is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5310 or S5314 of FIG. 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 43), that is, the result of the dynamic display of which special symbol comes first. It is determined whether or not it is derived (S5402).

As a result of the determination in S5402, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the first special symbol being executed is longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5310 or S5314 (S5402: Yes). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is shorter and the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Is to stop the dynamic display of the first special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed. First, the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the big hit result, the small hit result, or the lost result) (S5403), and then the changed first first. It is determined whether or not the result of the dynamic display of the special symbol is the jackpot result (S5404). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed first special symbol is the jackpot result (S5404: Yes), the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S5405), and the process is shifted to S5406.

In the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be extinguished is a jackpot result, the first 1 The time saving limit number is added according to the jackpot result that gives the "time saving function" in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case, if only the time saving limit number is increased (counted) even though the "time saving function" is not given, the "time saving function" is given only by the number of times the "time saving function" is given, which is less than the time saving limit number. There is a possibility that the player cannot be given the game value according to the game specifications, and the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, which may awaken the player.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, or when the dynamic display of the first special symbol derives the jackpot result. , The time saving limit number of times that has already been counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of times of the "time saving function" that is not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine is provided so as not to inflict an unexpected disadvantage on the player, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the processing of S5404, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) first special symbol being executed (S5404: No), the processing of S5405 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S5406. ..

In the process of S5406, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5310 (S5406). By performing this processing, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the first special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

After the processing of S5406, the display control device 114 is notified of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S5406. Special figure 1 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S5407). Specifically, for example, if the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is "25000 milliseconds", the loss result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol set in S5503 and the second special symbol A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating "25,000 milliseconds", which is the remaining time of the dynamic display of, is set. If the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "5345 milliseconds", the result of the loss of the display of the first special symbol set in S5503 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol A special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating "5345 milliseconds" is set.

Then, after the processing of S5407, a special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (that is, the loss result) set in the processing of S5403 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5408) is completed, the special figure 1 change process (S5311) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43).

In this way, when changing the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the special figure 1 stop type command different from the executing first special symbol is transmitted again, so that the special figure 1 stop type command is transmitted. By setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the propriety. , It is possible to determine the stop result of the variation effect in detail based on the information.

These special figure 1 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 1 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 36). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 1 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 1 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

With this configuration, when the content of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed based on the content of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the special figure relating to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed is changed. By transmitting the 1-variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command to the voice lamp control device 113 as a set, it is not necessary to change the control program on the voice lamp control device 113 side, which reduces the design man-hours and reduces the control burden. Mitigation can be achieved. Further, the variation effect of the special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the game state. Here, when the content of the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is replaced by the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the special symbol on the non-execution side is not executed in the first place, so that the variation effect on the non-execution side is not executed. Even when the replacement control is executed with respect to the above, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Note that, according to S5407 and S5408, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command regarding the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be changed are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. 1 In a gaming state in which dynamic display of a special symbol is not encouraged (that is, a “probability fluctuation state”, a “time reduction state”, or a “latent probability fluctuation state”), an effect relating to the dynamic display of the first special symbol (that is, Since the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output in the voice output device 226, the lighting display in the lamp display device 227, etc.) are not executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop set in S5407 and S5408 are not executed. The type command notifies that the fluctuation time and the stop type of the dynamic display of the first special symbol notified in advance are changed, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol recognized by the main control unit 110 is displayed. It is transmitted to grasp the consistency between the execution mode and the execution mode of the dynamic display of the first special symbol recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

As a result of the determination in S5402, when the remaining time of the dynamic display fluctuation time of the first special symbol being executed is shorter than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5310 or S5314 (S5402: No). ), That is, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is longer and the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived earlier than the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol derived earlier (S5409). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained in the dynamic display of the first special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the second special symbol from which the big hit result or the small hit result is derived. Is derived, based on the jackpot result or small hit result derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot result or small hit derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be derived later It is configured to extinguish the result.

As a result of the determination of S5409, if the big hit result or the small hit result is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5409: No), the second special symbol is derived. Since it is not necessary to change the dynamic display result of, the process of S541 to S5413 is skipped, the special figure 1 change process (S5311) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 43). On the other hand, when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol derived before the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5409: Yes), the second special symbol being executed is executed. In order to stop the dynamic display of the second special symbol at the timing when the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived while changing the content of the dynamic display of, first, the second special being executed is executed. The dynamic display of the symbol is changed to the display mode at the time of loss (regardless of the big hit result, the small hit result or the loss result) (S5410), and then the result of the dynamic display of the changed second special symbol is It is determined whether or not the result is a jackpot (S5411). As a result of the determination, when the result of the dynamic display of the changed second special symbol is the jackpot result (S5411: Yes), the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S5412), and the process is shifted to S5413. In the process of S5410, if the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss result, it may be configured so as not to be changed to the loss result again to reduce the processing load.

In the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished by the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and when the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be extinguished is a jackpot result, the first 2 The time saving limit number is added according to the jackpot result in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case, if only the time saving limit number is increased (counted) even though the jackpot game is not given, the high probability state of the special symbol cannot occur only in the number of jackpot games less than the time saving limit number. There is a possibility that the game value according to the game specifications cannot be given to the player, the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage, and the player may be awakened.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished based on the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, or when the dynamic display of the second special symbol derives the jackpot result. , The time saving limit number of times already counted is subtracted by the amount of extinction (that is, 1) so that the number of jackpots that are not substantially given is not counted. By configuring in this way, the game value according to the game specifications is given to the player, the game machine is provided so as not to inflict an unexpected disadvantage on the player, and the player is suppressed from being awakened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S5411, if the jackpot result is not derived in the dynamic display of the (changed) second special symbol being executed (S5411: No), the process of S5412 is skipped and the process is shifted to S5413. ..

In the process of S5413, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is set to be equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol from which the result is derived first (S5413). , The special figure 1 change process (S5311) is finished, and the process returns to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43). By performing this process, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed become the same, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed. At the timing when the big hit result or the small hit result is derived, the loss result is derived by the dynamic display of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the jackpot results from being derived in the dynamic display of the two special symbols. In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where the dynamic display of the other special symbol is executed during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, and during the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of one special symbol. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a troublesome situation as a game in which the result of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5317, the voice lamp control device 113 is used based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern of the dynamic display of the second special symbol determined by the processing of S5310, S5314, S5316 or S5413 (see FIG. 44). A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (S5317). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "probability change A", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the jackpot / "probability change" is selected. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "A" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is displayed. Set. Further, when the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changed based on the dynamic display result of the first special symbol, the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is "25000 milliseconds". , The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol set in S5410 and the remaining time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol "25000 milliseconds". Is set.

Then, after the processing of S5317, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5309, S5313, S5315 or S5410 via the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. The setting (S5318) is completed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S508) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 39).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the special figure 2 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) has a second special symbol based on the propriety. It is possible to grasp the stop type of the dynamic display and determine the stop result of the variable effect in detail based on the information.

These special figure 2 fluctuation pattern commands and special figure 2 stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (S201 in FIG. 36). (See), these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command or a display special figure 2 type command according to the game state. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. In the process of S509, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed has elapsed and whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has elapsed. Then, a fluctuation stop process for stopping the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed according to the discrimination result, the special symbol variation process (S210) is terminated, and the timer is interrupted. The process returns to the process (see FIG. 36).

Here, with reference to FIG. 45, the fluctuation stop processing (S509), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation stop processing (S509).

In this fluctuation stop processing (S509), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of each special symbol has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop result according to each stop type is special. It is displayed on the symbol display device 37, and each confirmation command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the case of a high probability state of the special symbol, that is, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", the special symbol is subjected to the counting result of the number of fluctuations of the dynamic display of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the end condition of the high probability state is satisfied, and if the end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol is satisfied, the process of switching from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is performed. Further, when the "time saving function" is in the effective gaming state, that is, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", the "time saving function" is set according to the counting result of the number of fluctuations in the dynamic display of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied, and if the time saving ending condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied, a process of switching the "time saving function" from valid to invalid is performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment executes the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol in parallel at the same time, and when the special symbol that stops first hits a big hit or a small hit. Is configured to stop (disappear) the execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol that is stopped later, but the number of executions of the dynamic display that disappears is counted as the end condition and the time saving end condition of the above high probability state. Configure not to. The number of executions of the dynamic display to be extinguished may be counted as the end condition and the time saving end condition of the high probability state, and the high probability state and / Alternatively, it may be configured to provide a time saving end condition.

In the fluctuation stop processing (S509), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5501: No), the process shifts to S5508. On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5501: Yes), the dynamic display time (variation) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol It is determined whether or not the time has passed (S5502). The display time of the first special symbol during dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 or the like (determined according to the special figure 1 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not elapsed (S5502: No), the display of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated. (S5503), the process shifts to S5508.

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the upper LED group 37b1 is lit in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol until the fluctuation time elapses. Alternatively, a display mode for turning off the light is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5502: Yes), the special symbol display For the upper LED group 37b1 of the device 37, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (S5504). The stop symbol is S5009, S5013 or S5015 of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 40), S5210 of the special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 41), or S5403 of the special figure 1 change process (see FIG. 44). It is preset by the process.

In the first embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is lost, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a small hit. , When the upper LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed by one of a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns and the determination result is a jackpot, the lighting pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (type) is used upward. The LED group 37b1 is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set in the process of S5504, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to confirm and confirm the display in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S5505), and the process shifts to S5506. The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 is in a gaming state (that is, a “normal gaming state”) in which the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. Sends a display special figure 1 confirmation command to the display control device 114. By receiving the display special symbol 1 confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and confirms and displays the stopped symbol. It is configured as follows. If the first special symbol variation effect is not executed by the third symbol display device 81 in a gaming state (that is, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "latent probability fluctuation state"), the voice lamp is used. The control device 113 is configured so that the display special figure 1 confirmation command is not transmitted to the display control device 114 even if the special figure 1 confirmation command is received. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed and reduce the processing load.

In the processing of S5506, whether or not it is a "normal game state", that is, whether or not it is a high probability state of a special symbol in a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "latent probability fluctuation state" or when the "time reduction function" is enabled. (S5506).

In the process of S5506, if it is in the "normal game state" (S5506: Yes), the process of S5507 is skipped and the process shifts to S5508. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the "normal game state" (S5506: Yes), ST is executed to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol and / or the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied. -The time saving counting process is executed (S5507), and the process shifts to S5508. The details of this ST / time saving counting process (S5507) will be described later in FIG. 46.

In the process of S5508, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5508). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not executed in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 (S5508: No), this fluctuation stop processing (S509) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 39). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5508: Yes), the dynamic display time (variation) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol It is determined whether or not the time has passed (S5509). The display time of the second special symbol during dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 or the like (determined according to the special figure 2 variation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not elapsed (S5509: No), the display of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 is updated. (S5510), the fluctuation stop processing (S509) is completed, and the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 39) returns.

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the lower LED group 37b2 is lit in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the second special symbol until the fluctuation time elapses. Alternatively, a display mode for turning off the light is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5509, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5509: Yes), the special symbol display For the lower LED group 37b2 of the device 37, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped (S5511). The stop symbol is S5309, S5313 or S5315 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43), S5410 of the special figure 1 change process (see FIG. 44), or S5203 of the special figure 2 change process (see FIG. 42). It is preset by the process.

In the first embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is lost, only the leftmost LED of the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a small hit. , When the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed by one of a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns and the determination result is a big hit, the lower LED group 37b2 is lit by the lighting pattern corresponding to the type of the big hit. The LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set in the process of S5511, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set. , In order to confirm and confirm the display in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37, the special figure 2 confirmation command is set (S5512), and the process shifts to S5513. The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 is in a gaming state (that is, a “probability fluctuation state”, “time reduction”) in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. In the case of "state" or "latent probability fluctuation state"), a display special figure 2 confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display special symbol 2 confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and confirms and displays the stopped symbol. It is configured as follows. When the variation effect of the second special symbol is in a gaming state (that is, "normal gaming state") that is not executed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 confirmation command. Is also configured not to send the display special figure 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing related to the command related to the variation effect that has not been executed and reduce the processing load.

In the processing of S5513, whether or not it is a "normal game state", that is, whether or not it is a high probability state of a special symbol in a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "latent probability fluctuation state" or when the "time saving function" is enabled. (S5513).

In the process of S5513, if it is in the "normal game state" (S5513: No), the process of S5507 is skipped, the fluctuation stop process (S509) is terminated, and the special figure variation process (see FIG. 39) is performed. Return. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the "normal game state" (S5513: Yes), ST is executed to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol and / or the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied. -The time saving counting process is executed (S5507), the fluctuation stop process (S509) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure variation process (see FIG. 39).

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the ST / time saving counting process (S5507), which is one of the fluctuation stop processes (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this ST / time saving counting process (S5507).

In this ST / time saving counting process (S5507), when the special symbol is in a high probability state, that is, when the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0", the number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol is counted. It is determined whether or not the counting result satisfies the end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state according to the determination result. Further, in the ST / time saving counting process (S5507), when the "time saving function" is enabled, the dynamic display of the special symbol which is the end condition of the "time saving function" set for each jackpot type is displayed. The number of executions (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the counting result satisfies the time saving end condition. It is determined whether or not it is, and the "time saving function" is changed from valid to invalid according to the determination result.

In this ST / time saving counting process (S5507), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (S5601). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stopped (S5601: No), it is not the timing to subtract the ST counter 203m and the time reduction counter 203o, so the processing of S5602 to S5611 described later is skipped. Then, the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5601 that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (S5601: Yes), first, in order to determine whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state, the ST counter 203 m. It is determined whether or not the value of is larger than "0" (S5602). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter 203m is not larger than "0" (S5602: No), the special symbol is not in the high probability state. Therefore, the processing of S5603 to S5606 described later is skipped and the processing is performed in S5607. Move to. As a result of the determination of S5602, if the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0" (S5602: Yes), the special symbol is in the high probability state. Therefore, the second special symbol is in the high probability state of the special symbol. Since the dynamic display of is executed once, the value of the ST counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S5603), and then whether or not the value of the subtracted ST counter 203m is larger than "0" is determined. Determine (S5604).

As a result of the determination of S5604, when the value of the ST counter 203m subtracted in the process of S5603 is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the ST counter 203m is "0" or less (S5604: No), it is special. Since the end condition of the high probability state of the symbol is satisfied, first, the game state changes from the high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state") to the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the latent probability fluctuation state). That is, a game state command indicating the transition to the "normal game state") is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like (S5605), and the "ream villa" state ends, so that the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is set. "0" is cleared (S5606), and the process shifts to S5607. As a result, when the player falls from the "renso" state to the "normal game state", the time reduction limit number can be initialized, and when the player enters the "renso" state again, the time reduction limit number can be counted again. It becomes. If the value of the ST counter 203m is determined to be larger than "0" in the processing of S5604 (S5604: Yes), the special symbol is still in a high probability state, so the processing of S5605 and S5606 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to S5607.

In the process of S5607, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203o is larger than "0", that is, whether or not the "time saving function" is activated (S5607). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203o is not larger than "0" (S5607: No), the "time saving function" is not activated (that is, the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state". ) Therefore, the processes of S5608 to S5611 described later are skipped, the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203o is larger than "0" (S5607: Yes), the "time saving function" is activated, so that the "time saving function" is being activated. Since the dynamic display of the second special symbol was executed once, the value of the time saving counter 203o was subtracted by 1 (S5608), and then the value of the subtracted time saving counter 203o was larger than "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S5609).

As a result of the determination of S5609, when the value of the time saving counter 203o subtracted in the process of S5608 is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the time saving counter 203o is "0" or less (S5609: No), " Since the end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied, first, the "time saving function" is activated from the state in which the "time saving function" is activated (that is, the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time saving state"). A game state command indicating that the state is not set (that is, "normal game state" in the case of the first embodiment) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like (S5610), and the "ream villa" state ends. Therefore, the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is cleared to "0" (S5611), the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45). If the value of the time saving counter 203o is larger than "0" as a result of the processing of S5609 (S5609: Yes), the end condition of the "time saving function" is not satisfied, so the processing of S5610 and S5611 is performed. The process is skipped, the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45).

In this way, in the high-probability state of the special symbol or the state in which the "time saving function" is enabled, the end condition of the high-probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving end condition are individually discriminated, so that the special according to the game state It is possible to appropriately activate the high-probability state of the symbol and the "time saving function" to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a hit process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this hit process (S203).

In this winning process (S203), when a big hit of each special symbol occurs, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening of the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is set according to the type of big hit, and the variable winning device 65 Set the opening time of. Then, in the case of the jackpot state (game), the jackpot opening / closing control process (S610) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the jackpot state is set to end at the timing when the jackpot state ends. The end process (S612) is executed.

Further, in this hit processing (S203), when a small hit of each special symbol occurs, the number of times the small winning opening 73 is opened (the number of rounds) is set according to the small hit, and the opening time of the small winning opening 73 is set. To set. Then, in the case of the small hit state (game), the small hit opening / closing control process (S614) for opening or closing the small winning opening 73 is executed, and the small hit state ends at the timing when the small hit state ends. The small hit end process (S616) for setting is executed.

In the hit processing (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S601). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S601: Yes), the number of rounds according to the jackpot type is set in the round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 in order to perform the jackpot game (S602). .. Then, in order to transmit the jackpot opening command indicating that the jackpot is started to the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S603), and then the jackpot opening command is set. The opening time (for example, "30 seconds", "10 seconds", or "180 seconds") is set according to the jackpot type (S604), and the process shifts to S609. As a result, the jackpot opening command according to the jackpot type is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36) that is executed next.

The above-mentioned round counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the variable winning device 65 is opened and controlled according to the big hit game or the small hit game. While doing so, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the big hit or the small hit being executed is terminated.

In the processing of S601, if it is determined that the big hit has not been won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S601: No), then the small hit has been won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols. Whether or not it is determined (S605). As a result of the determination, if a small hit is won (S605: Yes), a winning opening (that is, a small winning opening 73) is set to be opened according to the special symbol won in the small hit in order to perform the small hit game. At the same time, the number of rounds corresponding to the small hit type (the type of the special symbol won in the small hit) is set in the round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S606). Then, in order to transmit the small hit opening command indicating that the small hit is started to the voice lamp control device 113, the small hit opening command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S607). Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, "0.5 seconds") is set (S608), and the process shifts to S609. As a result, the small hit opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36) that is executed next.

In the process of S609, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S609). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the jackpot opening / closing control process for executing the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S610).

Here, the jackpot opening / closing control process (S610), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this jackpot opening / closing control process (S610).

In this jackpot opening / closing control process (S610), the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened set in the winning process (S203).

In this jackpot opening / closing control process (S610), first, the opening time set in S604 of the hit process (S203) or S6025 (see FIG. 49) of the jackpot opening opening process (S6007) described later is set. It is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S6001). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the jackpot has not elapsed (S6001: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is continuously closed. The process is skipped and the process is transferred to S6006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6001, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has elapsed (S6001: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6002), and then , Set "10" in the winning counter (not shown) (S6003). Then, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 at the time of a big hit (“30 seconds” in the first embodiment) is set (S6004), and a big winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 is opened is issued. It is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6005), and the processing is shifted to S6006. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the large winning opening opening command executes the fact that the variable winning device 65 has been opened in the third symbol display device 81, and informs the player that the variable winning device 65 has been opened. It is configured to encourage the player to win a ball in the variable winning device 65 that is open to the player.

In the process of S6006, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open (S6006). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6006: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open and is in the opening time or the interval time. Therefore, the processing of S6007 is skipped and this is performed. The jackpot opening / closing control process (S610) is finished, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S606, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open (S606: Yes), in order to determine the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened, the large winning opening opening process is performed. Perform (S607), end the jackpot opening / closing control process (S610), and return to the hit process (see FIG. 47).

Here, with reference to FIG. 49, a process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007), which is one process of the jackpot opening / closing control process (S610) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the process during opening of the large winning opening (S6007).

In the process of opening the large winning opening (S6007), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In the process during opening of the large winning opening (S6007), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6004 of the above-mentioned jackpot opening / closing control process (S610) has elapsed (S6011). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has elapsed (S6011: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied, and the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in that round is obtained. The process shifts to S6019 in order to clear the value of the counter "0" (S6012) and close the variable winning device 65. The closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6019 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6011, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has not elapsed (S6011: No), then whether or not the large winning opening switch 65c is turned on, that is, the ball is sent to the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S6013).

In the process of S6013, if the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 65c and the ball wins the variable winning device 65 (S6013: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6014), and then this time. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "latent probability A" (S6015). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is a jackpot of the jackpot type "probability change A" or "latent probability A" (S6015: Yes), a ball is set on the probability variation area switch 65e in order to bring the special symbol to a high probability state after the jackpot ends. In order to determine whether or not the timing of detection is made, it is determined whether or not the ball detected by the large winning opening switch 65c in the process of S6013 is the first count of the 10th round (S6016).

As a result of the determination of S6016, if it is determined that the ball detected by the large winning opening switch 65c in the processing of S6013 is the first count of the 10th round (S6016: Yes), the ball is detected by the probability variation region switch 65e. In order to make it possible, the probability variation region opening setting for opening and driving the probability variation region solenoid 65d is performed (S6017), the processing during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is completed, and the process returns to the jackpot opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 48). .. On the other hand, in the processing of S6016, when it is determined that the ball detected by the large winning opening switch 65c in the processing of S6013 is not the first count of the 10th round (S60116: No), the probability variation region (not shown) is set. Since it is not the timing to open, the process shifts to S6018.

In the process of S6018, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 in the process of S6014 is larger than "0" (S6018). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6018: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning is made. Since the closing condition of the device 65 is satisfied, the process shifts to S6019 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

If it is determined in the process of S6018 that the value of the winning counter is larger than "0" (S6018: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is not satisfied, and the variable winning device 65 is opened. In order to continue, the processing of S6019 to S6025 is skipped, and the processing during opening of the large winning opening (S6007) is terminated. After the completion of the large winning opening opening processing (S6007), the process returns to the big hit opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 48).

In the process of S6013, if it is determined that the ball is not detected by the large winning opening switch 65c (S6013: No), then the ball is detected by the probability variation region switch 65e and the probability variation region is open (not shown). ), It is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (S6026). As a result of the determination, if the ball is not detected by the probability variation region switch 65e (S6026: No), the process during opening the big winning opening (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit opening / closing control process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, when the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switch 65e (S6026: Yes), it means that the sphere has won a prize in the probability variation region. Therefore, in order to put the special symbol in a high probability state after the jackpot, the probability variation transition flag 203k is set. It is set to ON (S6027), then the probability variation region closing setting for closing and driving the probability variation region solenoid 65d (S6028) is performed, the processing during opening of the big winning opening (S6007) is completed, and the jackpot opening / closing control processing (FIG. 48). See).

Next, in the closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6019, first, the closing setting of the variable winning device 65 is set (S6019), and then it is shown to the voice lamp control device 113 that the variable winning device 65 is closed. The big winning opening closing command is set (S6020), and the process shifts to S6021. The large winning opening closing command set in the process of S6020 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next. The external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36). ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the process of S6021, since one round of the variable winning device 65 was digested, the value of the round counter was subtracted by 1 (S6021), and then the probability variation region solenoid 65d was driven in the open mode. It is determined whether or not the probability variation region (not shown) is open and the ball can win a prize (S6022). As a result of the determination, if the probabilistic region is open (S6022: Yes), the probabilistic region closing process of closing and driving the probabilistic region solenoid 65d to close the probabilistic region is executed (S6023), and the process shifts to S6024. On the other hand, if the probability variation region is not open (S6022: No), the process of S6023 is skipped and the process shifts to S6024.

In the process of S6024, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 in the process of S6021 is larger than "0" (S6024). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S6024: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the variable winning device 65) remains, so the next variable winning device Set the interval time (for example, "2 seconds", "1 second" or "3 seconds") until the 65 is opened (S6025), end the process during opening of the big winning opening (S6007), and control the opening and closing of the big hit. Return to the process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the processing of S6024, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S6024: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the variable winning device 65 in this jackpot Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the interval time is not set (that is, S6025 is skipped), the jackpot opening / closing process (S6007) is terminated, and the jackpot opening / closing control is performed. Return to the process (see FIG. 48).

Returning to the hit process (S203) of FIG. 47, the description will be continued. After the jackpot opening / closing control process (see FIG. 48) of S610 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S611). As a result of the determination, if the round counter has a value larger than "0" (S611: Yes), the jackpot state is continued, so that the jackpot end setting process S612 is skipped and this hit process (S203). To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S611: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the variable winning device 65 in this jackpot Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, a jackpot end process (S612) is performed, and this hit process (S203) is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 50, a jackpot end process (S612), which is one process of the hit process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S612).

In this jackpot end processing (S612), the ST counter 203m and the time saving counter 203o are set based on the winning jackpot type, and when the number of times the "time saving function" is given reaches the time saving limit number, the said The process of clearing the time saving limit counter 203n to "0" and initializing the time saving limit number of times is executed.

In this jackpot end process (S612), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned on (S6101). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned on (S6101: Yes), the ball passes through the probability variation region (not shown) during this jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is a high probability of the special symbol. First, the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned off (S6102), the value of the ST counter 203m is set to "160" (S6103), and the process is shifted to S6104.

In the process of S6104, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is smaller than "6" (S6104). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is smaller than "6" (S6104: Yes), "160" is set in the time saving counter 203o in order to activate the "time saving function" (S6105). , The process shifts to S6109. As a result, the high-probability state of the special symbol and the "time saving function" can be set to the "probability fluctuation state" that functions until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 160 times.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S6104, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is not smaller than "6", that is, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is larger than "6" (S6104: No), the time saving limit number of times is reached. Therefore, the value is not set in the time saving counter 203o, and the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is cleared to "0" (S6106) in order to reset the time saving limit number of times, and the process is shifted to S6109. As a result, while the special symbol is in a high probability state, it can be set to a "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is not activated.

In this way, when the time saving limit number of times has been reached in the jackpot end processing (S612), the time saving limit number of times is initialized, and after the end of the jackpot, the initial value of the time saving limit number of times is changed to ". It is possible to count the number of times the "time saving function" is granted.

If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the probability variation transition flag 203k is not turned on (S6101: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot type "time saving A" (S6107). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot type is "time reduction A" (S6107: Yes), "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203o (S6108), and the process shifts to S6109. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not "time reduction A" (S6107: No), the value is not set in the time reduction counter 203o, and the process shifts to S6109. In the processing of S6107, as a situation in which the jackpot type "time saving A" is determined, even though the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, it is opened when the variable winning device 65 in the 10th round is opened. Even if the ball is not won in the probable change area, or in the game state where the dynamic display of the second special symbol is encouraged, the left-handed game is performed to dynamically display the first special symbol. In addition, a rare case such as when the jackpot type "normal A" is won when the time saving limit is reached is applicable.

In the process of S6109, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S6109). The ending command set in the process of S6109 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a jackpot ending effect.

After the processing of S6109 is completed, the ending time (for example, "30 seconds", "10 seconds" or "180 seconds") is set according to the game state (S6110), and various processing at the end of the jackpot is executed. The jackpot end setting process (S6111) is performed, the jackpot end process (S612) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 47).

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the process of S609, if it is not a big hit (S609: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S613). As a result of the determination, if it is not a small hit (S613: No), this hit process (S203) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), while if it is a small hit (S613: Yes). ), Then, the small hit opening / closing control process for executing the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 73 according to the small hit game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed (S614).

Here, the small hit opening / closing control process (S614), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this small hit opening / closing control process (S614).

In this small hit opening / closing control process (S614), the opening / closing control of the small winning opening 73 is executed based on the number of times the small winning opening 73 is opened set in the winning process (S203).

In this small hit opening / closing control process (S614), first, the opening time set in S608 of the hit process (S203) or S6220 (see FIG. 52) of the small hit opening processing (S6206) described later is set. It is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S6201). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has not elapsed (S6201: No), it is not the opening timing of the small winning opening 73, and the small winning opening 73 is continuously closed, so that S6202 to S6204 The process of is skipped and the process is transferred to S6205.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6201, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of small hit has elapsed (S6201: Yes), it is the opening timing of the small winning opening 73, so first, the winning counter (not shown) is set to "10". (S6202), and then the small winning opening 73 is set to open according to the special symbol that has been hit (S6203). Then, a small winning opening opening command indicating that the small winning opening 73 has been opened is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6204), and the process shifts to S6205.

In the process of S6205, it is determined whether or not the small winning opening 73 is open at the time of a small hit (S6205). As a result of the determination, if the small winning opening 73 is not open at the time of small hit (S6205: No), the small winning opening 73 is not open at the time of small hit, but during the opening time or the interval time. The process of S6206 is skipped, the small hit opening / closing control process (S614) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the processing of S6205, when it is determined that the small winning opening 73 is open at the time of a small hit (S6205: Yes), the small winning opening 73 is determined to close the opening small winning opening 73. The opening process is performed (S6206), the small hit open / close control process (S614) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 47).

Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a small winning opening opening processing (S6206), which is one processing of the small hit opening / closing control processing (S614) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the small winning opening (S6206).

In this small winning opening opening processing (S6206), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the opening small winning opening 73 is satisfied is executed.

In the small winning opening opening processing (S6206), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the small winning opening 73 set in S6203 of the small hit opening / closing control processing (S614) described above has elapsed (S6211). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the small winning opening 73 has elapsed (S6211: Yes), the closing condition of the small winning opening 73 is satisfied, and the closing timing of the small winning opening 73 in that round is obtained. The value of the counter is cleared to "0" (S6212), and the process shifts to S6216 in order to close the small winning opening 73.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6211, if the opening time of the small winning opening 73 has not elapsed (S6211: No), then whether or not the small winning opening switch (not shown) is turned on, that is, the small winning opening. It is determined whether or not the ball has won the 73 (S6213).

In the process of S6213, if the ball is detected by the small winning opening switch and the ball has won the small winning opening 73 (S6213: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6214), and then 1 is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is larger than "0" (S6215). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6215: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the small winning opening 73 to win a small prize. Since the closing condition of the mouth 73 is satisfied, the process shifts to S6216 in order to close the small winning mouth 73.

In the closing process of the small winning opening 73 from S6216, first, the closing setting of the small winning opening 73 is set (S6216), and then the small winning opening 73 indicating that the small winning opening 73 is closed to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. The mouth closing command is set (S6217), and the process shifts to S6218. The small winning opening closing command set in the process of S6217 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next. The external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36). ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S6218, since one round of the small winning opening 73 has been digested, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S6218), and the processing shifts to S6219.

In the process of S6219, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 in the process of S6218 is larger than "0" (S6219). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S6219: Yes), the number of rounds in the small hit (the number of remaining opening of the small winning opening 73) remains, so that the next small winning is won. An interval time (for example, "1 second") until the mouth 73 is opened is set (S6220), the small winning opening opening processing (S6206) is ended, and the process returns to the small hit opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 51). ..

In the processing of S6213, when it is determined that the ball has not won the small winning opening 73 (S6213: No), or in the processing of S6215, the value of the winning counter is larger than "0". If it is determined (S6215: Yes), the closing condition of the small winning opening 73 is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the small winning opening 73, the processing of S6216 to S6220 is skipped and this small winning opening 73 is skipped. The processing during opening of the mouth (S6206) is completed, and the process returns to the small hit opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 51).

In the small hit game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the ball is hard to win in the small winning opening 73, and the opening time of the small winning opening 73 is set extremely short ( That is, since it is "0.1 seconds"), the ball does not substantially win the small winning opening 73, and the opening time of the small winning opening 73 set in advance is not the closing condition based on the number of winning conditions. It is configured so that the closing condition of the small winning opening 73 based on the above can be easily satisfied.

Returning to the hit process (S203) of FIG. 47, the description will be continued. After the small hit opening / closing control process (see FIG. 51) of S614 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S615). As a result of the determination, if the round counter has a value larger than "0" (S615: Yes), the small hit is continued. Therefore, the processing of S616, which is the end setting processing of the small hit, is skipped and this hit processing (S203). ) Is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S615, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S615: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the small winning opening 73 in this small hit Since all the opening operations of are completed, in order to end the small hit state, a small hit end process (S616) is performed, and this hit process (S203) is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a normal figure variation process (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this normal map variation processing (S211).

This normal symbol variation processing (S211) controls the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 due to the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67.

In this normal figure variation processing (S211), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric service 72 is currently protruding (operating), that is, whether or not the normal symbol is hit (S701). As a result of the determination, if the normal electric service 72 is protruding (S701: Yes), the normal symbol is hit, so the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). ) Return.

On the other hand, if the ordinary electric service 72 is not protruding (S701: No), it is not a hit of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, next, whether or not the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is in the variable display of the ordinary symbol is determined. Determine (S702). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is not during the variable display of the normal symbol (S702: No), then, after the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second") ") It is determined whether or not it has passed (S703). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: No), the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). As a result, the stop symbol in the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S703, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: Yes), the value of the normal figure reserved ball count counter (not shown) (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number HN) of the variable display relating to the normal symbol is larger than "0" (S704).

As a result of the processing of S704, if the value of the normal figure hold ball number counter (operation hold ball number HN) is not larger than "0" (S704: No), there is no hold ball number of the variable display of the normal symbol to be executed. Therefore, the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure reserved ball counter (HN of operating reserved balls) is larger than "0" (S704: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variable display related to the reserved normal symbol. Then, first, the value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (the number of reserved balls for operation HN) is subtracted by 1 (S705). This is because the number of reserved balls related to the normal symbol is reduced by one as the execution of the variable display of one of the reserved variable displays related to the normal symbol is started by the processing (S706 to S712) described later. Because.

Next, the data stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i is shifted (S706). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the normal figure holding spheres storage areas 203i toward the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j, and is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the normal figure holding spheres 1st to 4th areas. Hold 1st area → Fuzu hold ball execution area 203j, Fuzu hold 2nd area → Fuzu hold 1st area, Fuzu hold 3rd area → Fuzu hold 2nd area, Fuzu hold 4th area → Fuzu The data in each area is shifted, such as the hold third area.

After the data shift processing of S706, the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 is variable based on the data stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j by the data shift process (that is, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure). In order to execute the display, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the "normal game state" (S707). As a result of the determination, if it is in the "normal game state" (S707: Yes), the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "120 seconds" (S708), and the process shifts to S712. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player is not in the "normal game state" (S707: No), then it is determined whether or not the device is in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (S709). As a result of the determination, if it is in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (S709: Yes), the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "3 seconds" (S710), and the process shifts to S712. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the "latent probability fluctuation state" (S709: No), it is the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortened state", so the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds". The setting (S711) is performed, and the process shifts to S712.

As a result, while the "time saving function" is enabled and the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72 (that is, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time shortening state" in the right-handed game. When the variable display of the normal symbol stops fluctuating in about 3 seconds) and the variable display hits, the normal electric service 72 is released and the ball rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72. Almost all of them fall downward in the front view and flow into the second starting port 71. On the other hand, in the "time saving function" being disabled and in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the right-handed game, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72. In that case, depending on the result of the result, the normal electric service 72 may be opened and the ball may flow into the second starting port 71, or the variable display of the normal symbol may not stop, and the variable display of the normal symbol may not stop. Is configured so that the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 72 may roll completely from the left end to the right end and flow down to the variable winning device 65 side. Therefore, even in the same right-handed game, it is possible to create a game state in which the game flows into the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 and a game state in which the game does not flow in. it can.

In the process of S712, the stop symbol in the variable display of the normal symbol, that is, the propriety of the variable display of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the random number table 202h per normal symbol according to the game state (S712). Specifically, in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", that is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal figure holding ball is referred to in the group for the low probability state in the random number table 202h per normal figure. The value of the counter C4 per normal symbol stored in the execution area 203j is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, whether the normal symbol is correct or not) is determined. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", that is, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the group for the high probability state in the random number table 202h per normal figure is referred to, and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j is set. The value of the stored counter C4 per normal symbol is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, whether the normal symbol is correct or not) is determined. After the process of S712, the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

As a result, by changing the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol according to the game state, whether or not the normal electric service 72 is easily opened when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits right. Can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 72 is likely to open (that is, a high probability state of the normal symbol) and easily flows into the second starting port 71 side, or is normal. In a situation where the electric service 72 is difficult to open (that is, a low probability state of a normal symbol), the upper surface of the closed (protruding) normal electric service 72 is completely rolled from the left end to the right end, and the second starting port 71 and By making the situation in which the variable winning device 65 can flow into the variable winning device 65 different depending on the gaming state, it is possible to create different game performance for each gaming state.

In the process of S702, when it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S708, S710 or S711, and if this variable display time has not elapsed (S713: No), the normal symbol display device 83 Is updated (S714), the normal map variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S713: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset by S712 is set for the normal symbol display device 83. (S715), the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

As a result, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 is set based on the normal symbol variation process (S211), and the variable display is started in the normal symbol display device 83. From to the time when the variable display time elapses, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit. Then, when the variable display result is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit, while when the variable display result is a loss, the symbol "x" is lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a normal electric service control process (S204), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this ordinary electric service control process (S204).

This ordinary electric service control process (S204) executes open / close (protruding and immersive) drive control of the ordinary electric service 72 according to the game state when a hit of the normal symbol occurs. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric service 72 is set according to the game state, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened and driven based on the set time, and the normal electric service 72 is released when the set protrusion time elapses. The control for closing (protruding) the ordinary electric service 72 during (immersion) is executed.

In this ordinary electric service control process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric service 72 is open (immersed), that is, whether or not the normal symbol is hit (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the ordinary electric service 72 is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that the ordinary symbol is not hit, then whether the variable display of the ordinary symbol is completed? Whether or not it is determined (S802).

As a result of the determination in S802, if the variable display of the normal symbol is not completed (S802: No), the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). If the variable display of the normal symbol is completed (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winner is won in the variable display (S803).

As a result of the determination in S803, if it is determined that the variable display does not win (S803: No), the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36). Return to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is won in the variable display (S803: Yes), in order to execute the control regarding the winning, it is first determined whether or not it is in the "normal gaming state" (S804). ..

As a result of the determination in S804, if it is determined to be the "normal gaming state" (S804: Yes), the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the hit state is set to "0.1" based on the specified contents of the ordinary electric service opening table 202j. Set to "seconds" (S805), set "1" to the value of the electric service counter (not shown) in order to open the normal electric service 72 once based on the corresponding situation (S806), and process. To S810.

On the other hand, in the process of S804, when it is determined that the game is not in the "normal gaming state" (S804: No), the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric service 72 in the hit state based on the specified contents of the normal electric service opening table 202j. Is set to "3 seconds" (S807), and then it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the "latent probability fluctuation state" (S808). As a result of the determination, if it is in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (S808: Yes), the processing is shifted to S806, and the electric service counter (FIG. Set “1” to the value (not shown) (S806), and shift the process to S810. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (S808: No), "3" is set in the value of the electric service counter in order to open the ordinary electric service 72 three times based on the corresponding situation. (S809), the process shifts to S810.

In the process of S810, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened (immersed) (S810), the ordinary electric service 72 that was in the closed (protruding) state is driven to the open state, and the ordinary electric service control process (S204) is performed. After finishing, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

As a result, when the player hits the right, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the arrangement position of the ordinary electric service 72, and the normal electric service 72 is open for a long time or a short time. Can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided to the second starting port 71 side, or the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 72 is completely rolled from the left end to the right end in the closed state of the ordinary electric service 72. By making the situation where the ball can flow down to the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 side depending on the gaming state, it is possible to produce different game performance for each gaming state.

In the process of S801, when it is determined that the ordinary electric service 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol is hit, it is then set in S805 or S807. It is determined whether or not one opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 has elapsed (S811). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that one opening time of the set ordinary electric service 72 has not elapsed (S811: No), in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric service 72, S812 to S814 The process is skipped, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in the process of S811, when it is determined that one opening time of the set ordinary electric service 72 has elapsed (S811: Yes), first, the process of closing (protruding) the ordinary electric service 72 is performed. Perform (S812), and subtract "1" from the value of the electric service counter set in the process of S806 or S809 (S813). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted electric service counter is larger than "0" (S814). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is larger than "0" (S814: Yes), the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric service 72 based on the corresponding situation remains, so the process is performed. After shifting to S810 and performing a predetermined interval process (in the first embodiment, a closing period of "0.5 seconds"), the opening process of the ordinary electric service 72 is performed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is not larger than "0" (S814: No), that is, when the value of the electric service counter is "0" or less, the ordinary electric service based on the corresponding situation Since all of the 72s have been opened, the normal electric service 72 is not reopened, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the through gate 67 is made different from the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol according to the game state and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 accompanying the winning. In a right-handed game in which the ball can pass through, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state", the open state of the normal electric service 72 is configured to occur frequently, and the ball almost goes to the second starting port 71. It can flow in. On the other hand, even in the same right-handed game, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the closed state of the ordinary electric service 72 is configured to be long, and the upper surface of the closed ordinary electric service 72 is rolled from the left end to the right end. It may move completely, and the ball can flow into the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make the winning openings 65 and 71 that can be won in each game state at the time of right-handed game different, and to make the game value given to the player different, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The MPU 201 in which the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information (S901). ), Ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 61. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 56) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 57) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1117 (see FIG. 57) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 57, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1117. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1117 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1117, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1117 is executed (see S1116 in FIG. 57). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1117 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure occurs and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1004 to S1006 is performed. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process shifts to S1012.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the set value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the set value memory (not shown), and the main process (see FIG. 57). Move to.

In this way, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113, the main process (see FIG. 57) continues until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 33) is received. By waiting for the transition, the sound lamp control device 113 can surely grasp the probability set value set by the main control device 110, and can execute the processes after the main process based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110, the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been reached until the end of the start-up process, and the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been normally completed. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not normally completed, and the process is not shifted to the main process. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the start-up process of the main control device 110 is normally executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the main control device 110 is normally started up. It is possible to prevent the runaway of the voice lamp control device 113 in the absence state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if "1 millisecond" or more has not elapsed (S1101). S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond") in S1102 to S1109 to determine whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed, whereas in S1110. This is because it is preferable to execute the variation effect processing of S1111 and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 56, the process proceeds to the process of S1102 as it is.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on, and the notification is a voice output device 226 or a lamp display device. It is done by 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without being notified by the power on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a hit effect process for executing an effect related to a big hit or a small hit set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106. In the first embodiment, while the effect related to the small hit game by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed, a predetermined effect (for example, the variable winning device 65 is opened) while the variable winning device 65 related to the big hit is open. It is configured to perform an effect indicating that it has been done or a right-handed notification effect).

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and the input is monitored during the valid period. This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command received from the main control device 110, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and Based on the special figure 2 stop type command, the variation effect processing corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed (S1110), and the processing is transferred to S1111. Details of this variation effect processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

In the process of S1111, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to the process of S1112. The details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

In S1112, a counter update process for updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). For example, the counter that determines the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is updated, and the hold change counter (not shown) that draws the "hold change notice" is updated in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (“99”), and then returning to “0”.

When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for the repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 as described above. Judge the command that was executed.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the first command from the main control device 110 is analyzed. 1 It is determined whether or not a command related to dynamic display (variation effect) of a special symbol (that is, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 1 confirmation command, etc.) has been received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has been received (S1202: Yes), the special figure 1 command process for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1203). The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

Here, a special figure 1 command process (S1203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special figure 1 command process (S1203), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 1 command processing (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special figure 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 61) described later, the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure 1 for display that notifies the start of production and its fluctuation pattern type Used when setting a fluctuation pattern command. After that, the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 58).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1223). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has been received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 61) described later, the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure for display to notify the stop type of Fig. 1 Used when setting the stop type command. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol is started is set to on (S1225), the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 58).

As for the special figure 1 stop type command, the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command when the variation effect of the first special symbol is started. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main control device 110 to indicate the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol. By setting the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1225, the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the first reserved ball number command first in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 61) executed later. Judgment as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on is the same as the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the first special symbol extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command. I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the first reserved ball count command, and the first stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command. It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variation effect of the special symbol matches. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of the first special symbol of 1, the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command do not match, or the first If the stop type based on the held ball count command and the stop type based on the special figure 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is detected. It is configured to handle errors to indicate.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1223 (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1223: No). S1226). The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S1226: Yes), the change of the first special symbol is changed when the change effect of the first special symbol is executed for the display control device 114. A display special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming the effect is set (S1227), the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 58).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, and when the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first special figure 1 While the symbol variation effect is confirmed and displayed, if the first special symbol variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display special symbol 1 confirmation command is ignored (processing based on is not executed). , The display content is not changed based on).

As a result of the processing of S1226, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1226: No), other processing related to the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command processing is performed. (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 58).

Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has not been received (S1202: No), then the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed by the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not a command related to display (variation effect) (that is, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, a special figure 2 stop type command, a special figure 2 confirmation command, etc.) has been received (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has been received (S1204: Yes), the special figure 2 command process for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1205). The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

Here, a special figure 2 command process (S1205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special figure 2 command process (S1205), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 2 command processing (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1231). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1231: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 61) described later, the variation of the second special symbol with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure 2 for display that notifies the start of the effect and its variation pattern type Used when setting the variation pattern command. After that, the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 58).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1233). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command (S1234).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect process (see FIG. 61) described later, the display control device 114 is subjected to the variation effect of the second special symbol according to the game state. Special figure 2 for display that notifies the stop type of No. 2 Used when setting the stop type command. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol is started is set to on (S1235), the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 58).

As for the special figure 2 stop type command, the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command when the variation effect of the second special symbol is started. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main control device 110 to indicate the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol. By setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b to ON by the processing of S1235, the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the second reserved ball number command first in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 61) executed later. Judgment as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on is the same as the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command. I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the second reserved ball count command, and the second stop type extracted from the received special figure 2 stop type command. It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variation effect of the special symbol matches. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of the second special symbol of 1, the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command do not match, or the second If the stop type based on the held ball count command and the stop type based on the special figure 2 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is detected. It is configured to handle errors to indicate.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1233 (S1233: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1233: No). S1236). The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S1236: Yes), the change of the second special symbol is changed when the change effect of the second special symbol is executed for the display control device 114. A display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the effect is set (S1237), the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 58).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 2 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, and when the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect of the second special symbol, the second special figure 2 While the symbol variation effect is confirmed and displayed, if the second special symbol variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display special symbol 2 confirmation command is ignored (the processing based on is not executed). , The display content is not changed based on).

As a result of the processing of S1236, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S1236: No), other processing related to the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed (S1238), and this special figure 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 58).

Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has not been received (S1204: No), then the first reserved ball count command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S1206). Then, when it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 5) of the main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the first reserved ball number command is updated in S1207 with the sub-first reserved ball number. It is stored in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the first reserved information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the counter 223c (S1208). Then, a display first reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number of the variation effect of the first special symbol is set (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , Return to the main process (see FIG. 57).

Here, since the first reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning), the process of S1207 is performed every time there is a starting winning. Therefore, the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the sound is heard when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first hold information storage area 223e. That is, before the execution of the variation effect, what will be the result of the variation effect of the reserved first special symbol when the variation effect is executed (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the fluctuation time, etc.) It is possible to decide the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

When it is determined that the first reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1206 (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball count command has been received from the main controller 110. (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 5) of the main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the second reserved ball count command is updated in S1211, the sub-second reserved ball number. It is stored in the second hold information storage first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the counter 223d (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number of the variation effect of the second special symbol is set (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , Return to the main process (see FIG. 57).

Here, since the second reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the second starting port 71, the process of S1211 is performed every time there is a starting winning prize. Therefore, the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the sound is heard when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the second hold information storage area 223f. That is, before the execution of the variation effect, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variation time, etc.) when the pending second special symbol variation effect is executed. It is possible to decide the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

If it is determined that the second reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1210 (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not the limit number of times command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1214). ). Then, when it is determined that the limit number command has been received (S1214: Yes), the time saving limit number included in the limit number command, that is, the total number of times of the "time saving function" after the time saving limit is cleared is stored ( S1215), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

The voice lamp control device 113 can change the effect balance of the variable effect and set the effect content based on the time reduction limit number of times stored (stored) in S1215.

If it is determined that the limit number of times command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1214 (S1214: No), the processing is shifted to S1216. If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the command from the main control device 110 has not been received (S1201: No), the process shifts to S1216.

In the process of S1216, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1216), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57). Here, if the other command received is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1216, temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then the command output of the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1110).

This variation effect processing (S1110) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 57), and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. 2 Execute various processes for executing the variation effect of the special symbol. Specifically, if the gaming state is the "normal gaming state", the first special symbol variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, while the display related to the second special symbol variation effect is displayed. Is configured not to do. Further, if the gaming state is a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "latent probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. , It is configured not to display the variation effect of the first special symbol.

In the variation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1301). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), both the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, so that the first special In order to start the variation effect of the symbol, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off (S1302), and then the data included in the first hold information storage area 223e provided in the first hold information storage area 223e is stored. 1 Shift to the execution information storage area 223g (S1303), and further, the data included in the first hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first hold information storage area 223e is stored in the first hold information storage first 1st. The process shifts to the third area (S1304), the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1305), and the process shifts to S1306.

That is, in this case, the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started, so that the first special symbol is held first. 1st Hold Information Corresponding to the Variable Effect of 1st Area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the 1st area are set to correspond to the variation effect of the first special symbol being executed. 1 It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the execution information storage area 223g. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e4 of the first hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the first execution information storage area 223g, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the first hold In the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223e, each counter C1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110, respectively. The same values as ~ C3 and CS1 will be stored.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (S1306). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is not a "normal game state" (S1306: No), that is, when it is determined that it is a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "latent probability fluctuation state", Since this is a gaming state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and the variation effect of the first special symbol is not performed, the processes of S1307 to S1309 are skipped. The variation effect process (S1110) is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (S1306: Yes), the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is a game state to be performed, first, the display first reserved ball number command is set based on the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the process of S1305 (S1307), and the process is shifted to S1308. To do.

The display first reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 57). Will be sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the first special symbol indicated by the first reserved ball number command for display. Do.

Next, in the process of S1308, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is acquired. In order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern, the display special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S1308), and the process shifts to S1309. ..

The special display 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 57). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display special diagram 1 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1309, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type is acquired. A display special figure 1 stop type command is set in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type (S1309), and this variation effect process (S1110). ), And the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

The special display 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 57). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the display special diagram 1 variation pattern command set by the process of S1309 is confirmed and displayed, the display special diagram 1 stop type command is used. Set the stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1310). ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1310: Yes), both the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, so that the second special In order to start the fluctuation effect of the symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1311), and then the data included in the second hold information storage first area provided in the second hold information storage area 223f is set. 2 Shift to the execution information storage area 223h (S1312), and further, the data included in the second hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the second hold information storage area 223f is stored in the first hold information storage first 1st. The process shifts to the third area (S1313), the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S1314), and the process shifts to S1315.

That is, in this case, the change effect of the second special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the change effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the change effect is held first. 2nd Hold Information Corresponding to the Variable Effect of 1st Area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the 1st area are set to the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed. 2 It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the second hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the second execution information storage area 223h, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold ball execution area 203g of the main control device 110 are stored, and the second hold In the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the information storage area 223f, each counter C1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110, respectively. The same values as ~ C3 and CS1 will be stored.

In the process of S1315, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (S1315). As a result of the determination, if it is in the "normal game state" (S1315: Yes), it is in the game state in which the first special symbol is varied in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second special symbol is displayed. Since the variation effect of S1316 to S1318 is not performed, the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 58).

On the other hand, in the process of S1315, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the "normal gaming state" (S1315: No), that is, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state". If it is determined that there is, it is a gaming state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, first, the number of sub-second reserved balls subtracted in the process of S1314 is performed. The display second reserved ball count command is set based on the value of the counter 223d (S1316), and the process shifts to S1317.

The second reserved ball count command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 57). Will be sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol indicated by the second reserved ball number command for display. Do.

Next, in the process of S1317, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is acquired. A special figure 2 variation pattern command for display is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (S1317), and the process shifts to S1318. ..

The display special figure 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 57). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display special diagram 2 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1318, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second execution information storage area 223h, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type is acquired. A display special figure 2 stop type command is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type (S1318), and this variation effect process (S1110). ), And the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

The special display 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 57). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect of the second special symbol executed by the display special diagram 2 variation pattern command set by the process of S1317 is confirmed and displayed, the display special diagram 2 stop type command is used. Set the stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

When it is determined in the process of S1310 that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, off) (S1310: No), at least the special figure 1 stop type command and special figure 1 stop type command and special FIG. 2 Since the stop type command has not been received, the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

As a result, it is possible to execute only the variation effect of the special symbol encouraged in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state, and it is extinguished based on the variation effect result of the encouraged special symbol. By not performing the effect based on the dynamic display of the special symbol that is not encouraged to be obtained in the main display area Dm, it is possible to prevent the troublesome situation that the variable effect of a plurality of special symbols is performed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to execute a comfortable game in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort. The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. And the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 which can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls, the execution mode of each special symbol and the reserved balls in the third symbol display device 81. The number is recognizable.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the progress of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the progress of the variable display of the normal symbol in each gaming state. Variable display (dynamic display; hereinafter, the same applies) of the first special symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special symbol 1") and the second special symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special symbol 2"). The relationship between the progress of the variable display of the above and the driving mode of the ordinary electric service 72, the small winning opening 73, and the variable winning device 65 will be described.

FIG. 62 shows the detection timing of a ball at the through gate 67, the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variation of the first special symbol in the left-handed game in the “normal game state”. It is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the execution timing of the display and the variable display of the second special symbol and the drive timing of the ordinary electric service 72, the small winning opening 73, or the variable winning device 65. Further, FIG. 81 shows the ball detection timing at the through gate 67, the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, and the variable normal symbol in the right-handed game in the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time shortened state”. A timing chart that schematically shows the relationship between the execution timing of the display, the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the drive timing of the ordinary electric service 72, the small winning opening 73, or the variable winning device 65. Is. Further, FIG. 64 shows the detection timing of the ball at the through gate 67, the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the first special in the right-handed game in the “latent probability fluctuation state”. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the relationship between the execution timing of the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol, and the drive timing of the ordinary electric service 72, the small winning opening 73 or the variable winning device 65.

In the "normal game state", the right-handed game is not encouraged (prohibited), and the right-handed game in the game state is configured to be substantially difficult to execute. The description of the hitting game is omitted. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state", the left-handed game is not encouraged (it is difficult for the player to obtain the game value when the left-handed game is executed). Since the left-handed game in the game state is not encouraged as a game specification, the description of the left-handed game in the game state will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the ball is launched in the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the ball is not detected at the through gate 67 where the ball can pass only in the right-handed game, and as a result, the normal symbol Since the variable display is not executed, the normal electric solenoid that is opened based on the variable display result of the normal symbol is not driven either. Further, when the ball is launched in the left-handed game in the "normal game state", the ball is not detected at the second starting port 71 through which the ball can pass only in the right-handed game.

On the other hand, the ball launched in the left-handed game in the "normal game state" can win a prize in the first starting port 64. Then, based on the winning of the first starting port 64, the variable display of the special symbol 1 is executed. The variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed in "5 seconds" at the shortest and "190 seconds" at the longest, and is configured to derive either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a loss result.

Then, when a loss is derived in the variable display of the special symbol 1, the small winning opening 73 and the variable winning device 65 are not opened. On the other hand, in the variable display of the special symbol 1, when the small hit game is won, the small winning opening solenoid is turned on for "0.1 seconds" and the small winning opening 73 is opened. However, as described above, the small winning opening 73 is configured so that the ball fired in the left-handed game is difficult to win due to the plurality of nails and the outer shape of the first starting opening 64 (both see FIG. 3). Even if the small winning opening 73 is opened, the ball is substantially unable to win a prize.

In addition, when the jackpot game is won with the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the "normal game state", the jackpot solenoid 65b is used as the jackpot game a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (10 rounds. A maximum of "30 seconds" for each round. ”. Interval time“ 2 seconds ”. Opening time and ending time“ 30 seconds ”.) The variable winning device 65 is opened. At this time, the player is urged to change the firing mode from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the open variable winning device 65 is made to win a ball, so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained.

In the "normal game state", if a ball wins a prize in the second starting port 71 and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed, the variation display of the special symbol 2 is uniformly "600 seconds" of "super". The "long variation" effect mode is configured to be selected, and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is configured to be executed in a maximum of "190 seconds". Therefore, by deriving the small hit game or the big hit game in the variable display of the special symbol 1 before the result of the variable display of the special symbol 2 executed for "600 seconds" is derived, the variable effect of the special symbol 2 is produced. Can be extinguished regardless of the result. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the variable winning device 65 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and to the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, in the "normal game state", the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is extinguished by the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol that is easily derived first, and the first It is possible to prioritize the addition of game value based on big hits or small hits based on the dynamic display of special symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63, when a ball is launched in the right-handed game in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortened state", first, almost all the balls launched in the right-handed game can pass through. A sphere is detected at the through gate 67 arranged in. Then, based on the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. This variable display of the normal symbol is uniformly executed in "0.5 seconds" in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and is configured so that the result of either hit or loss is derived. In the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the winning probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is high (99%), and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 in the case of winning is "3 seconds". And, it is configured so that the number of times of opening is three times. Therefore, the ball fired in the right-handed game can be in the open state while rolling on the normal electric service 72, so that the ball is completely rolled on the normal electric service 72 from the left end to the right end. The second starting port 71, which is located on the lower side of the ordinary electric service 72, is awarded a prize. When the ball is launched in the right-handed game, the ball is not detected at the first starting port 64 where the ball can win only in the left-handed game.

The variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed based on the winning of the second starting port 71 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is "1 second" at the shortest. It is executed in "70 seconds" at the longest, and is configured to derive either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a lost result.

Then, if a loss is derived in the variable display of the special symbol 2, the small winning opening 73 or the variable winning device 65 is not opened, while in the variable display of the special symbol 2, if the small hit game is won, The solenoid for the small winning opening is turned on for "0.1 seconds", the number of times of opening is set to 3, and the small winning opening 73 is opened. However, as described above, the small winning opening 73 is configured so that the ball fired in the right-handed game is difficult to win due to the plurality of nails and the outer shape of the first starting opening 64 (both see FIG. 3). Even if the small winning opening 73 is opened, the ball is substantially unable to win a prize.

In addition, when the jackpot game is won by the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the solenoid for the jackpot opening / closing plate of the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times and a predetermined time (10 rounds) as the jackpot game. The maximum "30 seconds" for each round, the interval time "1 second", the opening time and the ending time "10 seconds") are turned on, and the variable winning device 65 is opened. At this time, the player is urged to continue the right-handed game, and the open variable winning device 65 is made to win a ball, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

If a ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal game state", the variation display of the special symbol 1 is uniformly displayed. The "ultra-long variation" effect mode of "600 seconds" is selected, and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is configured to be executed in "70 seconds" at the maximum. In particular, after a predetermined jackpot game is executed, balls can win a prize in the second starting port 71 during the jackpot game, so that the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol 2 is accumulated. .. Therefore, by deriving the small hit game or the big hit game in the variable display of the special symbol 2 before the result of the variable display of the special symbol 1 executed for "600 seconds" is derived, the variable effect of the special symbol 1 is produced. Can be extinguished regardless of the result. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the variable winning device 65 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and to the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is accumulated after the jackpot game is completed, the accumulated first special symbol is dynamically displayed in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state". The big hit or small hit based on is extinguished by the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is easily derived first, and the game value based on the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol It is possible to give priority to grant.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64, when a ball is launched in the right-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state", first, almost all the balls launched in the right-handed game are arranged at a position where they can pass. A sphere is detected at the through gate 67. Then, based on the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. In the "latent probability fluctuation state", the variable display of the normal symbol is executed in a uniform "3 seconds" longer than when the "time saving function" is enabled, and the result of either hit or loss is derived. There is. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the winning probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is low (that is, 50%), and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 in the case of winning is "3 seconds". Moreover, it is configured so that the number of times of opening is performed once. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", when the normal electric service 72 is closed for a long period of time and the ball fired in the right-handed game is open to the normal electric service 72, the ball is moved to the second starting port 71 to a certain extent. Although all the balls won a prize, not all the balls won a prize in the second starting port 71, and while the ordinary electric service 72 is closed, the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 72 may be completely rolled from the left end to the right end, and the second starting port 71 It is possible to flow down to the side and the variable winning device 65 side provided on the left side of the front view of the second starting port 71.

Based on the winning of the second starting port 71 in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is "5 seconds" at the shortest and "130 seconds" at the longest. , And the result of either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a loss is derived.

Then, if a loss is derived in the variable display of the special symbol 2, the small winning opening 73 or the variable winning device 65 is not opened, while in the variable display of the special symbol 2, if the small hit game is won, The solenoid for the small winning opening is turned on for "0.1 seconds", the number of times of opening is set to 3, and the small winning opening 73 is opened. However, as described above, the small winning opening 73 is configured so that the ball fired in the right-handed game is difficult to win due to the plurality of nails and the outer shape of the first starting opening 64 (both see FIG. 3). Even if the small winning opening 73 is opened, the ball is substantially unable to win a prize.

In addition, when the jackpot game is won by the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the solenoid for the jackpot opening / closing plate is used for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time (10 rounds, maximum for each round) as a jackpot game. "30 seconds". Interval time "3 seconds". Opening time and ending time "180 seconds".) Turns on and the variable winning device 65 is opened. At this time, the player is urged to continue the right-handed game, and the open variable winning device 65 is made to win a ball, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

If a ball wins a prize in the first starting port 64 and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the variation display of the special symbol 1 is uniformly "600 seconds". The "ultra-long variation" effect mode is configured to be selected, and the variation display of the special symbol 2 is configured to be executed in a maximum of "130 seconds". In particular, after a predetermined jackpot game is executed, balls can win a prize in the second starting port 71 during the jackpot game, so that the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbol 2 is accumulated. .. Therefore, by deriving the small hit game or the big hit game in the variable display of the special symbol 2 before the result of the variable display of the special symbol 1 executed for "600 seconds" is derived, the variable effect of the special symbol 1 is produced. Can be extinguished regardless of the result. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening control of the variable winning device 65 from becoming complicated due to the simultaneous occurrence of big hits or small hits by each special symbol, and to the player. It is possible to provide playability that is easy to understand. Then, even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is accumulated after the jackpot game is completed, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot or small based on the dynamic display of the accumulated first special symbol The hit is extinguished by the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is easy to be derived first, and the addition of the game value based on the big hit or small hit based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is prioritized. Is possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the content of the "premier live production" executed when a big hit is made in the "latent probability fluctuation state" executed when the time saving limit number is reached in the "renso" state will be described. To do. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a transition of the “premium live effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81 when a big hit is won in the “latent probability fluctuation state”, and FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing the “latent probability”. It is a figure which showed the state which the jackpot was won and the jackpot result was derived in the fluctuation production of the 2nd special symbol in the "variable state", and FIG. 65 (b) shows 7 consecutive villas from the state of FIG. 65 (a). It is a figure which showed the selection screen of a plurality of "premium live production" in the middle jackpot state, and FIG. 65 (c) shows that 1 "premium live production" is selected from the state of FIG. 65 (b). It is a figure which showed the screen which showed that the "premium live production" is started, and FIG. 65 (d) is the state which "premium live production" is executed from the state of FIG. 65 (c). It is a figure which showed.

FIG. 65A shows the display state of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the “latent probability fluctuation state” that occurs after the time reduction limit is reached, and the upper left of the display area of the main display area Dm. In the part, the number of consecutive villas display 81a with "6 consecutive villas" is displayed, and in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the jackpot result of "777" is displayed as the display result of the variation effect of the second special symbol. Has been done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type "latent probability A" is 100% selected. It is configured to be. That is, in FIG. 65 (a), in the "latent probability fluctuation state" that is entered when the time saving limit function is activated, the jackpot type "latent probability A" is won in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, and the jackpot type "latent probability A" is selected. The jackpot of "" indicates the state that will occur in the future.

Next, in FIG. 65 (b), the selection screen of the “premium live effect” is displayed based on the fact that the jackpot of the jackpot type “latent A” won in FIG. 65 (a) is won. In the state of FIG. 65 (b), the selection screen of the "premium live effect" executed within the opening time performed for "180 seconds" in the jackpot type "latent A" is shown, and the third symbol display device is shown. In the upper left part of the main display area Dm of 81, the number of consecutive villas display 81a with "7 consecutive villas" is displayed, and in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the jackpot symbol display 81b with "777" is displayed. Has been done.

Further, in FIG. 65 (b), a music selection display 81c indicating the selection status of the music executed in the "premium live production" is displayed in the central portion on the right side of the main display area Dm. In the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the music "AAA", the music "BBB", the music "CCC", the music "YYY" and the music "ZZZ" can be selected, and the music "AAA" is currently selected. Indicates the state of. Further, in the lower right area of the main display area Dm, an instruction message display 81d suggesting to the player that the music selected by the music selection display 81c can be changed by pressing the frame button 22 is displayed. According to this instruction message display 81d, each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the music selected in the music selection display 81c is scrolled and displayed one by one (for example, music "AAA" → music "BBB"). Has been done. Further, in the central portion on the left side of the main display area Dm, the selected music character display 81e, which is the character display corresponding to the music selected in the music selection display 81c, is displayed. At this time, the intro of the selected song is output. Then, when the selection screen ends in the state of FIG. 65 (b), the music "AAA" is selected, and the display and sound of the music "AAA" are output in the "premium live production" executed during this jackpot. To.

The player can select his / her favorite music on the music selection screen, and can perform an effect that suits the player's taste. Therefore, during the selection screen related to this "premium live production", some players examine the music and select the music. Therefore, if this period is short, the player has less choice. , In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening period of the jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the opening time longer than the jackpot in the "normal gaming state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "time reduction state" is selected. By displaying this "premium live production" and its selection screen inside, the player can select his / her favorite music with a margin, and even if the opening time is long, the player's By devoting consciousness to the work of selecting music, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the length of the opening time.

Next, in FIG. 65 (c), the start screen of the “premium live effect” indicating that the music selected in FIG. 65 (b) is started is displayed. On this start screen, as in FIG. 65 (b), the number of consecutive villas display 81a with "7 consecutive villas" is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the main display area is displayed. In the upper right part of Dm, a jackpot symbol display 81b with "777" is displayed. In addition, a message "PREMIUM live mode entry" indicating that "premium live production" is started is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the main display area Dm.

Next, in FIG. 65 (d), a state in which the “premium live production” of the music selected in FIG. 65 (b) (here, the music “AAA”) is executed, which is developed from FIG. 65 (c). Shown. In FIG. 65 (d), similarly to FIG. 65 (b) and the like, the number of consecutive villas display 81a indicating "in 7 consecutive villas" is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A jackpot symbol display 81b with "777" is displayed in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm. Further, in the central portion of the display area of the main display area Dm, the music character display 81f corresponding to the "premium live effect" of the music selected in FIG. 65 (b) is displayed. Further, in the lower right region of the main display area Dm, a firing mode suggestion display 81g that suggests the firing mode of the ball to the player is displayed. As a result, the player can recognize the firing mode to be fired during this jackpot and enjoy the music selected by himself / herself.

The production of FIGS. 65 (b) to 65 (d) may be configured to proceed during the opening time of the jackpot, or the production of FIG. 65 (b) may be performed during the opening time of FIG. 65 (b). The production of c) and FIG. 65 (d) may be configured to be performed from the start of the first round. When the production of FIGS. 65 (b) to 65 (d) is performed during the opening time, the "premium live production" selected by the player can be performed early during the jackpot period, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved. Further, by performing the effects of FIGS. 65 (c) and 65 (d) from the first round of the jackpot, the selection effect of FIG. 65 (b) can be carefully performed during the opening period, and the rounds can be performed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp the start time.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, every time a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given occurs a predetermined number of times, the normal symbol can always be in a low probability state, and the normal symbol can be set to a low probability state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive winning assistance state for the player due to the continuous high probability state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ball output rate of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears. It can be configured so that the game value to be given does not become too high. Further, in order to make the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have the time saving limit function, the ball ejection rate is lowered due to the limitation of the number of consecutive occurrences of the "time saving function". It is possible to make up for the minutes by making it easier to generate big hits of special symbols, and to make up for the continuation rate of the high probability state of special symbols with high continuation, which is done with ordinary pachinko machines that do not have a time saving limit function. It is possible to realize a variety of playability that cannot be achieved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the OP time at the time of a jackpot when any jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state" that can be entered after the time saving limiter function is activated in the "consecutive villa" state. , IT time, and ED time are configured to be longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time at the time of jackpot when the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" (including "normal game state") is won. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time. As a result, when the ball is fired in the OP time, the IT time, and the ED time, which is in a big hit state but cannot give the player the game value, the number of out balls is increased and the profit margin of the game hall is increased. Can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears, which is given to the player. It can be configured so that the game value per hour does not become too high (too much).

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has a time saving limiter function, it is still less than "7200 balls" acquired by the player at the stage where one hour has passed since the player entered the "renso" state. It is set to be a "latent probability fluctuating state", and further, it is highly likely that it will take about 17 minutes or more from entering the "latent probability fluctuating state" to acquiring the next jackpot. This makes it possible to gently increase the number of balls that the player acquires in a short time of about one hour compared to a pachinko machine that does not have a time-saving limiter function, and the number of balls that the player acquires per hour can be increased. It can be made less likely to be excessive. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to play the game appropriately without inciting the player's gambling spirit too much.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening of the jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the opening time longer than the jackpot in the "normal game state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "time reduction state" is selected. By displaying this "premium live production" and its selection screen during the period, the player can select his / her favorite music with a margin, and even if the opening time is long, the player can select it. By letting the player spend his or her consciousness on the work of selecting music, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the length of the opening time. Further, when the production of FIGS. 65 (b) to 65 (d) is performed during the opening time, the "premium live production" selected by the player can be performed early during the jackpot period, and the jackpot can be performed. Even if the period of the game is extended, it gives the player a sense of accomplishment that he has reached a production that can only be reached by continuing the "renso" state, making it difficult to feel the length of the jackpot while playing the game. Can improve the interest of. Further, by performing the effects of FIGS. 65 (c) and 65 (d) from the first round of the jackpot, the selection effect of FIG. 65 (b) can be carefully performed during the opening period, and the rounds can be performed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp the start time.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 71. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the small winning opening is arranged at a position where it is difficult to win in any of the launch modes. 73 is opened so that the player cannot be given a game value based on the winning of the small hit game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the ball launched in the right-handed game can win a prize on the right side of the front view of the game area, and the second small prize is won on the downstream side of the ordinary electric service 72. A second small winning opening unit 74 having a mouth 74a is arranged so that a ball flowing down the upper surface of the closed ordinary electric service 72 can win a prize in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is encouraged. Then, in the game state in which the right-handed game is encouraged and the closing time of the normal electric service 72 is relatively long (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state”), the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. At the same time, when the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the second small winning opening 74a is opened, so that the small hit of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is won. It is configured so that a ball can be won in the second small winning opening 74a.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 66, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. The difference between the game board 13 of the second embodiment and the game board 13 of the first embodiment is mainly that the variable winning device 65 is located directly below the front view of the through gate 67 and downstream of the ordinary electric service 72. On the side, the second small winning opening unit 74 is arranged on the left side in the front view, and the small winning opening 73 is not arranged in the lower part of the front view of the first starting port 64.

As shown in FIG. 66, as described above, the variable winning device 65 in the second embodiment is directly below the front view of the through gate 67 and is upstream from the ordinary electric service 72 and the second small winning opening unit 74 described later. It is arranged on the side. As a result, in the open state of the variable winning device 65, the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the variable winning device 65 before the normal electric service 72 and the second small winning opening unit 74, so that the normal electric service 72 When the ball is in the open state and the ball can win the second small winning opening 71, or when the second small winning opening unit 74 is in the open state and the ball can win the second small winning opening 74a. However, when the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is easy to make the variable winning device 65 win a ball, and the ball is hard to win in the second starting opening 71 or the second small winning opening 74a.

With this configuration, even if the normal electric service 72 is opened based on the winning of the normal symbol during the jackpot state, the second start while facilitating the winning of the ball to the open variable winning device 65. By making it difficult to win a ball to the mouth 71, it is difficult to give a prize ball based on the winning to the second starting mouth 71 during the jackpot, and the calculation of the payout rate regarding the game value given to the player during the jackpot Can be simplified.

A second small winning opening unit 74 is arranged at a position on the left side of the normal electric service 72 when viewed from the front and on the downstream side of the normal electric service 72 when a right-handed game is played. The second small winning opening unit 74 mainly includes a second small winning opening 74a, a second infestation plate 74b that closes the upper side of the second small winning opening 74a in front view, and the second infestation plate 74b. It is composed of a solenoid for a second small winning opening (not shown) that is driven to appear and disappear.

The main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) of the second embodiment normally maintains the second infestation plate 74b of the second small winning opening unit 74 in a protruding state, and is above the front view of the second small winning opening 74a. By covering the side, the inflow of the ball into the second small winning opening 74a is prevented. Then, when a small hit is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the solenoid for the second small winning opening (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time to drive the second small winning opening unit 74. The second solenoid plate 74b is driven from the protruding state to the immersive state immersed in the game board 13 for a predetermined time, and the ball can flow into the second small winning opening 74a. Then, when the ball that is played right-handed and flows down the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view rolls on the upper surface of the solenoid plate 72a of the solenoid function 72 from the left end side to the right end side, the second small It is configured so that the winning opening 74a can be won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, 202 g of the small hit opening table of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the small hit opening table 202g stored in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. The small hit opening table 202g of the second embodiment is referred to at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the opening mode of the second haunting plate 74b of the second small winning opening 74a is based on each special symbol. Etc. (number of rounds, maximum opening time, interval time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls) are specified. It should be noted that the game state is not changed even if a small hit is won with any of the special symbols.

First, the small hit opening table 202g is classified according to the type of special symbol, that is, the opening mode and the like based on the winning start ports 64 and 71. Specifically, for "special figure 1 small hit" which is referred to when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The opening mode of the second haunting plate 74b is specified for the reference "special figure 2 small hit".

As shown in FIG. 67, in the case of "special figure 1 small hit" of the small hit opening table 202 g, when the small hit is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the left side of the front view of the second starting port 71. The second haunting plate 74b of the second small winning opening unit 74 provided in the above is opened and closed once (one round). Then, the maximum opening time of the second haunting plate 74b is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of prizes is specified to "10", and the number of prize balls based on the prize is specified to "10". There is.

In the second embodiment, since the opening time is set so that 10 balls fired within the maximum opening time of the second haunting plate 74b based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol cannot win a prize. The opened second haunting plate 74b is configured to be easier to close under the condition of the maximum opening time than to close under the condition of the maximum number of winnings.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first starting port 64 for acquiring the execution trigger of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is arranged at a position where the ball fired in the left-handed game can win a prize, while the first starting port 64 is arranged. The 2 small winning openings 74a are arranged at positions where a ball fired in a right-handed game can win a prize and cannot be won or is difficult to win in a left-handed game. Therefore, even if the small hit of the first special symbol is won in the situation where the encouraged left-handed game is performed in the "normal game state", in a short period of time based on the winning of the small hit. It is difficult to aim the ball at the second small winning opening 74a to be opened and win a prize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67, in the case of "special figure 2 small hit" of the small hit opening table 202 g, even when the small hit is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the front view of the second starting port 71 The second haunting plate 74b of the second small winning opening unit 74 provided on the left side is opened and closed once (one round). In addition, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "3 seconds", which is longer than that of the first special symbol, the maximum number of opening is set to "10", and the number of prize balls based on winning is set to "10". It is stipulated.

In the second embodiment, the opening time is set so that even 10 balls fired within the maximum opening time of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol cannot be won. The opened small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is configured to be easier to close under the condition of the maximum opening time than to close under the condition of the maximum number of winnings.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ordinary electric service 72 is arranged on the upstream side of the second small winning opening unit 74, and when the ordinary electric service 72 is in the open state, it is fired by a right-handed game. The ball is configured so as not to win a prize in the second small winning opening 74a even when the second infestation plate 74b is in the open state, but to win a prize in the second starting opening 71 in the open state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c), the details of the random number table 202h per normal figure, the normal figure fluctuation table 202i, and the ordinary electric service opening table 202j of the second embodiment will be described. The difference between the second embodiment and the first embodiment is that the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" is shortened from "120 seconds" to "10 seconds" in the normal figure fluctuation table 202i. In addition, in the normal figure fluctuation table 202i, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is shortened from "0.5 seconds" to "0.1 seconds". In the ordinary electric service opening table 202j, the interval time of the haunting plate 72a in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is shortened from "0.5 seconds" to "0.1 seconds". In the ordinary electric service opening table 202j, the opening time of the haunting plate 72a in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is shortened from "3 seconds" to "2 seconds".

First, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the details of the normal figure variation table 202i for determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal figure variation table 202i stored in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment.

The normal map fluctuation table 202i in the second embodiment is for the "normal game state" referred to in the "normal game state" and the "probability fluctuation state / time" referred to in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state". It is divided into three types, one for the "shortened state" and the other for the "latent probability fluctuation state" referred to in the "latent probability fluctuation state". The variable display time of the normal symbol set for the "normal game state", the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state", and the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbol different in each game state, the time for deriving the winning / failing result of the normal symbol is changed in each game state.

As shown in FIG. 30B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the "normal game state" is set to "10 seconds". It is specified in 202i. That is, in the "normal game state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "10 seconds" without exception. As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol that is fluctuating during the jackpot game, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, changes to the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "latent probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends. Even if the game is executed across the game, the result of the variable display of the normal symbol can be derived at an early stage in each game state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in each game state can be quickly shifted to each game state. It is possible to quickly realize the game specifications according to the game state.

Further, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is defined in the normal symbol fluctuation table 202i so as to be "0.1 seconds". That is, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is set to be "0.1 seconds" without exception. .. As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped before the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the arrangement position of the normal electric service 72, and if the variable display result is a hit, the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to allow the ball itself and the ball that has passed near the through gate 67 before that to win a prize in the open second starting port 71.

Further, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "latent probability fluctuation state" is defined in the normal symbol fluctuation table 202i so as to be "2 seconds". That is, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the time from the start of the variable display time of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol is defined to be "2 seconds" without exception. Since it is configured so that at least "2 seconds" or more can elapse from the through gate 67 to reach the ordinary electric service 72 or to roll over the upper surface of the infestation plate 72a, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is normal. The variable display of the normal symbol is stopped at the timing when the arrangement position of the electric service 72 can be reached or the upper surface of the infestation plate 72a is rolled, and when the variable display result is a hit, the through gate 67 is pressed. The passing ball itself can be made to be able to win a prize in the open second starting port 71. On the other hand, the ball that has passed near the through gate 67 before that opens the infestation plate 72a at a timing when the opening second starting port 71 cannot be won, so that the second starting port 71 is excessively won. It becomes possible to suppress.

As a result, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to change the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electric service 72 is released. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it becomes a hit with a variable display due to the passage of the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric service 72 is released based on the corresponding situation, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. Can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is, or further, the upper surface of the infestation plate 72a is completely rolled from the left end to the right end in the closed state of the ordinary electric service 72, and the opening mode of the second small winning opening 74a is different. Whether or not it can flow into the second small winning opening 74a can be different depending on the gaming state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each game state, it is possible to make the winning mode of the through gate 67, the second starting port 71, and the second small winning opening 74a of one ball different. It is possible to produce different playability for each state.

In particular, among the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" and "latent probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is normal. Because it is short and easy to win, the appearance plate 72a is opened before the ball itself that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the arrangement position of the normal electric service 72, or the vicinity of the through gate 67 before that. While the ball passing through is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72, the normal electric service 72 is in an open (immersive) state, and the ball launched by the right-handed game goes to the second starting port 71. It is configured so that you can win a prize. In other words, the ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the second starting opening 71 and it is difficult to win a prize in the second small winning opening 74a.

On the other hand, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the variable display time of the normal symbol is longer than the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Because it is harder to win, it is easy for the normal electric service 72 to keep the closed (protruding) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72, and the ball launched by the right-handed game It is configured so that the upper surface of the haunting plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 can be completely rolled from the right end to the left end and flow down to the second small winning opening unit 74 side. In other words, a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a certain amount of prize in the second starting port 71, but from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" to the second starting port 71. It is difficult to win a prize, and it is configured so that the second small winning opening 74a can be won.

Next, the ordinary electric service opening table 202j of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (c). FIG. 68 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the ordinary electric service opening table 202j stored in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. The ordinary electric service opening table 202j is referred to at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric service 72 are defined based on the gaming state at the timing when the ordinary symbol hit occurs.

The ordinary electric service opening table 202j of the second embodiment is divided into groups based on the game state in which ordinary symbols are drawn. Specifically, for the "normal game state" referred to in the "normal game state", for the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" referred to in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", and " The opening mode (opening time) of the ordinary electric service 72 is changed for the "latent probability fluctuation state" referred to in the "latent probability fluctuation state".

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the ordinary electric service 72 is set when the ordinary symbol is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state" which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. The number of times of opening is one, and the opening time is specified by the ordinary electric service opening table 202j so as to be "2 seconds". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the normal electric service 72 is configured to be released for "3 seconds" x 1 time = "2 seconds".

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric service 72 according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric service 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 72 is open for a long period of time, so that it is easy to win a prize on the second starting port 71 side, or the normal electric service 72 is open. By making it difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 due to the short situation depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is set, the opening period of the normal electric service 72 is extended, and the game is fired by the right-handed game. The ball is configured so that it can easily win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to accumulate. The fluctuation shortening function is easy to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is easily executed efficiently.

In the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is set, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the normal electric service 72 are right-handed games from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state". It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball fired by the player to win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a certain amount of prize in the second starting port 71, but the second special symbol is dynamic from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Since it is difficult to accumulate the number of reserved balls for display, the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is lower than that of the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", but a lottery opportunity for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is obtained. It is configured so that you can play games while playing.

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the opening time in the case of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol is shorter than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", and as described above. Since it is more difficult to win than the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the normal electric service 72 maintains the closed (protruding) state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72. It is easy to continue, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is configured to roll completely on the upper surface of the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 from the right end to the left end and flow down to the second small winning opening unit 74 side. In other words, a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a certain amount of prize in the second starting port 71, but from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" to the second starting port 71. It is difficult to win a prize, and when the second small winning opening 74a is open, the second small winning opening 74a can be won.

As a result, in the second embodiment, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", while aiming to win the jackpot in the dynamic display of the second special symbol by winning the ball to the second starting port 71, the second special symbol If a small hit is won, the ordinary electric service 72 is in a closed state, so that the ball can be won in the second small winning opening 74a to obtain a prize ball. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuating state", it is possible to realize the playability of how to keep the "latent probability fluctuating state" for a long time without winning the jackpot and how to make the second small winning opening 74a win a lot of balls. can do.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, the average staying time in each game state and each jackpot state of the second embodiment and the game value obtained in each state (time) will be described. FIG. 69 shows the winning rate, the required time, the number of occurrences, the firing time, the number of firing balls, and the number of returning balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the "renso" state, and each jackpot state and It is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in each game state. Further, FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of “renso” in the case where the time saving limiter function in the second embodiment is not provided and in the case where the time saving limiter function is provided. Further, FIG. 71 is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when there is a time saving limiter function in the second embodiment.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the "latent probability fluctuation state", while the normal electric service 72 is open, the ball wins a prize at the second starting port 71, while it is normal. The point is that the ball can win a prize in the second small winning opening 74a while the electric service 72 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the second embodiment, the main winning destination of the ball launched in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71, which is " The jackpot probability of the special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set to 1/100. Further, although the "latent probability fluctuation state" is not as much as the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the ordinary electric service 72 is opened at a fixed rate and for a short time due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The ball is set so that the ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71. Therefore, when the ball is continuously fired in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the winning rate to the second starting port 71 is "40% (that is, when 10 balls are fired in the right-handed game, the second starting port". In the case of "71 with 4 winnings)", and when the winning rate to the 2nd small winning opening 74a is "30% (that is, when 10 balls are fired in a right-handed game, the 2nd small winning opening" (3 wins in 74a) ”and, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won, that is, until the second starting port 71 wins a“ 100 ball ”ball. It is set to take "1030 seconds" time (similar to FIG. 25).

However, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of "1030 seconds", in the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, the variable winning device 65 based on the jackpot Since there is no opening of the second small winning opening 74a based on the opening of the ball or the opening of the second small winning opening 74a, the player temporarily stops the firing of the ball during the stop hitting period, and therefore wins the big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state". From the period from (that is, "1030 seconds") to the above-mentioned stop period (that is, "150 seconds" which is the execution time of the "super reach" production mode + "270 seconds" which is the execution time of the "special reach" production mode. ) Is subtracted, and "610 seconds" is the firing period of the ball.

Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the second embodiment, when the ordinary electric service 72 is open, the ball wins the second starting port 71, while the ordinary electric service 72 is closed. If this is the case, the ball can be won in the second small winning opening 74a, so that the player continues to shoot the ball in a period other than the above-mentioned stop hitting period. Therefore, the number of launch balls is "610 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "1017 balls", and the number of return balls is "1017 balls" x "40%" x "1 ball (of the second starting port 71). "Number of prize balls based on winning" + "1017 balls" x "30%" x "10 balls (number of prize balls based on winning of the second small winning opening 74a)" = about "3458 balls".

As a result, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the second embodiment, the player fires a ball for a period of "610 seconds" and shoots a total of "1017 balls". , Win the prize ball of "3458 balls". Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player acquires "3458 balls"-"1017 balls" = "2441 balls".

Here, with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, an increase / decrease in the number of balls held by the player in consideration of the number of launched balls and the number of returned balls described with reference to FIG. 69 will be described. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the first embodiment is that, as described above, the number of balls increases or decreases in the “latent probability fluctuation state” when there is a time saving limiter function.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the time saving limiter function is activated at the time of "consecutive villa" and enters the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player acquires "2441 balls" and accumulates in the "consecutive villa" state. The number of balls is "7157 balls" + "2441 balls" = "9598 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2754 seconds" + "1030 seconds" = "3784 seconds" (see FIG. 71). ).

Then, at the time of the 7th big hit at the time of "renso" when there is a time saving limiter function (at the time of the 6th big hit after entering "renso"), it is a big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the player Acquired "712 balls", the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "9598 balls" + "712 balls" = "10310 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "3784 seconds" + “473 seconds” = “4257 seconds” (see FIG. 71).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the ball can be won in the second small winning opening 74a which is in the open state. As a result, if the ball is won in the second starting port 71 and the second special symbol is dynamically displayed to win the big hit, and the second special symbol is won in the small hit, the ordinary electric service 72 will be used. By being in the closed state, it is possible to win a prize ball in the second small winning opening 74a as well. Therefore, by repeating the number of jackpot "renso" and activating the time saving limiter function to enter the "latent probability fluctuation state", in addition to the balls acquired by the "renso" up to that point, the "latent probability fluctuation state" By adding the balls to be acquired in "", it is possible to realize a game playability in which a large number of balls can be acquired. As a result, when the "renso" is started, how many big hits are repeated without ending the "renso" state, and as a result, the time saving limiter function is activated to enter the "latent probability fluctuation state". It is possible to create a game-like nature of rushing in and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first starting port 64, which triggers the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, is arranged at a position where the ball fired in the left-handed game can win, while the right-handed pachinko machine 10 is hit. It is difficult for the ball launched in the game to win a prize in the first starting port 64, and in the right-handed game, it is difficult to obtain an opportunity to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol. In addition, the second starting port 71, which triggers the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, is arranged at a position where the ball launched in the right-handed game can win a prize, while the ball launched in the left-handed game is described above. It is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71, and it is difficult to obtain an opportunity to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the left-handed game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the second starting port 71, which serves as an opportunity to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol, is arranged at a position where the ball launched in the right-handed game can win a prize. At the same time, the right first starting port 64a, which triggers the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, is arranged, and in the right-handed game, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time. It is configured so that it can be easily executed in parallel. Further, the dynamic display time of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is configured to have a pattern that can be shorter than the dynamic display time of the second special symbol. Then, the game value given to the player is set to be different depending on which special symbol the dynamic display is stopped first.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment are used for the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 72, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The difference between the game board 13 of the third embodiment and the game board 13 of the first embodiment is mainly the position where the ordinary electric service 72 is arranged and the position where the variable winning device 65 is arranged. The point is that the right first starting port 64a, which triggers the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, is arranged between them.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the third embodiment, on the downstream side of the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 and on the upstream side of the variable winning device 65, a first special symbol is provided as in the first starting port 64. The right first starting port 64a, which serves as an execution trigger (lottery trigger) for the dynamic display, is arranged. When the ball enters the right first starting port 64a, the right first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the right first starting port switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) draws a big hit for the first special symbol. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. Based on the variation effect is executed. The right first starting port 64a is also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls, unlike the first starting port 64, when a ball enters.

A plurality of game nails are planted directly above the right first start port 64a, and the ball that has flowed down to the downstream side of the ordinary electric service 72 is placed on the right side first start port 64a side or the downstream side thereof by the game nail. Is distributed to the variable winning device 65 side.

In the third embodiment, in the front view right side of the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71 in the ordinary electric service 72, the right first starting port 64a, and the right side first starting port 64a The variable winning device 65 is arranged, and the ball launched in the right-handed game can pass through the through gate 67 and can win a prize in the second starting port 71 if the ordinary electric service 72 is open. If the ordinary electric service 72 is closed, it is configured to be able to win a prize in the right first starting port 64a or the variable winning device 65 (limited to the opening of the variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side thereof. There is. Therefore, when the ball is fired in the right-handed game, the execution trigger of the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be acquired, and the execution trigger of the dynamic display of the second special symbol can also be acquired. Has been done. The right first starting port 64a may be arranged on the upstream side of the through gate 67, may be arranged at a position between the through gate 67 and the ordinary electric service 72, or the variable winning device 65. It may be arranged on the downstream side (a position where a prize cannot be won in a left-handed game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 shows the transition to the game state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol, the recommended ball launch mode, the main winning destination, and the first special symbol in each game state of the third embodiment. It is a list explaining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the special symbol that is likely to be stopped first, and whether or not right-handed strike is possible. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the main winning destinations are the first special symbol (that is, the right first starting port 64a) and the second special symbol (that is, the right side first starting port 64a). , 2nd starting port 71), and in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is equal to the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The point is that the special symbol that is likely to be stopped first in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is not set.

As shown in FIG. 73, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", although the ball launched in the right-handed game does not have the winning assist function, the second starting port 71 is opened when the normal electric service 72 is opened. To win a prize. Further, when the ordinary electric service 72 is in the closed state, the right first starting port 64a provided on the downstream side thereof can also win a prize. Then, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 130 seconds" which is longer than the "probability fluctuation state", and the fluctuation of the dynamic display of 1 of the first special symbol is performed. The time is also in the range of "5 seconds to 130 seconds", and as a result, depending on the selected fluctuation time, the dynamic display result of the first special symbol may be derived first, or the movement of the second special symbol may occur. It is configured so that there may be cases where the target display is derived first.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the details of the hold number table 202c of the first special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram schematically showing a reservation number table 202c1 for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol in the third embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the first embodiment is that when the first special symbol is changed in the "latent probability fluctuation state", it is equivalent to the case where the second special symbol is changed. It is configured to select the stop pattern table 202d which is the fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the third embodiment, the total number of reserved balls is "1" at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state". In the case of, the H table 202d8 (see FIG. 19B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected as in the “latent probability fluctuation state” in the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2. In addition, when the total number of reserved balls is "2 to 4" at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction of the "latent probability fluctuation state", the "latent probability" in the reserved number table 202c2 for special figure 2 Similar to the "variable state", the I table 202d9 (see FIG. 20A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected. On the other hand, at the time of extracting the jackpot of the "latent probability fluctuation state", the J table 202d10 of the stop pattern table 202d is the same as the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the reservation number table 202c2 for special figure 2 regardless of the number of reserved balls. (See FIG. 20 (b)) is selected.

As a result, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the third embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time is selected. The special symbol is configured to be stopped and displayed first. Then, in the third embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol, the dynamic display of the other special symbol is stopped. Depending on whether or not the dynamic display of the symbol is stopped first and the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to increase the variation of the game value given to the player.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, the average staying time in each game state and each jackpot state of the third embodiment and the game value obtained in each state (time) will be described. FIG. 75 shows the winning rate, the required time, the number of occurrences, the firing time, the number of firing balls, and the number of returning balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the “renso” state, and shows each jackpot state and the number of returning balls. It is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in each game state. Further, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of “renso” in the case where the time saving limiter function in the third embodiment is not provided and in the case where the time saving limiter function is provided. Further, FIG. 77 is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when there is a time saving limiter function in the third embodiment.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the "latent probability fluctuation state", while the normal electric service 72 is open, the ball wins the second starting port 71, while it is normal. The point is that the ball can win a prize in the first starting port 64a on the right side while the electric service 72 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the third embodiment, the main winning destinations of the ball launched in the right-handed game are the second starting port 71 and the right first starting. The mouth is 64a, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set to 1/100. Further, although the "latent probability fluctuation state" is not as much as the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the ordinary electric service 72 is opened at a fixed rate and for a short time due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The ball is set so that the ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71. Further, when the ordinary electric service 72 is in the closed state, the ball can also win a prize at the right first starting port 64a arranged on the downstream side thereof. Therefore, when the ball is continuously fired in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the winning rate to the second starting port 71 is "30% (that is, when 10 balls are fired in the right-handed game, the second starting port is launched". In the case of "71 with 3 prizes)", the winning rate to the right first start port 64a is "10% (that is, when 10 balls are fired in a right-handed game, the right first start port). (1 prize in 64a) ”and, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won, that is, based on the balls that have won the second starting port 71 and the right first starting port 64a. It takes "1030 seconds" for the second starting port 71, which is easy to win, to win a total of "100 balls" before the total number of executions of the dynamic display derived earlier reaches "100 times". Is set to require (similar to FIG. 25).

However, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of "1030 seconds", in the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, the variable winning device 65 based on the jackpot Since there is no opening, the player temporarily stops firing the ball during the stoppage period, so from the period until the jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (that is, "1030 seconds"), the above The ball firing period is "610 seconds" minus the stoppage period (that is, "150 seconds" which is the execution time of the "super reach" production mode + "270 seconds" which is the execution time of the "special reach" production mode). It becomes.

Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the third embodiment, when the ordinary electric service 72 is open, the ball wins the second starting port 71, while the ordinary electric service 72 is closed. If this is the case, the ball can win a prize in the first starting port 64a on the right side, so that the player continues to shoot the ball in a period other than the above-mentioned stop hitting period. Therefore, the number of launch balls is "610 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "1017 balls", and the number of return balls is "1017 balls" x "30%" x "1 ball (of the second starting port 71). "Number of prize balls based on winning" + "1017 balls" x "10%" x "3 balls (number of prize balls based on winning of the first starting port 64a on the right side)" = about "710 balls".

As a result, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the third embodiment, the player fires a ball for a period of "610 seconds" and shoots a total of "1017 balls". , Acquire the prize ball of "710 balls". Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes the possessed balls of "1017 balls"-"710 balls" = "407 balls".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the jackpot type that can be selected by the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type that can be selected by the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured to be easy (see FIG. 8). Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player is given a big hit by the lottery result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, rather than by the lottery result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Play the game hoping for that. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the character corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (the first character 81h described later in FIG. 81) It is configured to execute a "battle effect" in which a character corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol (second character 81i described later in FIG. 81) competes. This "battle effect" will be described later in FIG. 81.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, an increase / decrease in the number of balls held by the player in consideration of the number of launched balls and the number of returned balls described in FIG. 75 will be described. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the first embodiment is that, as described above, the number of balls is increased or decreased in the "latent probability fluctuation state" when there is a time saving limiter function.

As shown in FIG. 76, when the time saving limiter function is activated at the time of "consecutive villa" and enters the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player consumes "407 balls" and accumulates in the "consecutive villa" state. While the number of balls is "7157 balls"-"407 balls" = "6750 balls", the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2754 seconds" + "1030 seconds" = "2754 seconds" as in the first embodiment. It becomes "3784 seconds" (see FIG. 77).

Then, at the time of the 7th big hit at the time of "renso" when there is a time saving limiter function (at the time of the 6th big hit after entering "renso"), it is a big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the player Acquired "712 balls", the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "6750 balls" + "712 balls" = "7462 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "3784 seconds" + “473 seconds” = “4257 seconds” (see FIG. 77).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), details of the random number table 202h per normal figure, the normal figure fluctuation table 202i, and the ordinary electric service opening table 202j of the third embodiment will be described. The difference between the third embodiment and the first embodiment is that in the random number table 202h per normal figure, the probability of success or failure of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state" is "50%" to "10%". It is a point that is low.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202h per normal figure stored in the ROM 202. In the random number table 202h per normal symbol of the third embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (“probability fluctuation state” or “time”) of a normal symbol in which the gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “latent probability fluctuation state”. The game state of the pachinko machine 10 for the "normal symbol low probability state" used in the case of a period other than the "shortened state" (including during the jackpot of the special symbol) is the normal symbol than the "normal symbol low probability state". It can be divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol high probability state" used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", which is the state with a high probability of winning. Then, the number of hit random numbers included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the case of the "normal symbol low probability state", is 10, and the value "90". ~ 99 ”is defined (set) in the random number table 202h per pachinko machine. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state") is 10/100 = 1/10, which is about 10 in the variable display of the normal symbol. The hit is set to be derived once every time.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal game state" and the jackpot state) is set to "120 seconds". When shifting to the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the like after the end of the jackpot, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, there will be a period in which the result of the variable display of the normal symbol is not derived for a while. During this period, since the ordinary electric service 72 cannot be released, there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the first special symbol held during the jackpot and during the jackpot will be derived first. Therefore, the player how to save the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol before the end of the jackpot, or if the number cannot be saved, the variable display of the normal symbol being executed stops early. It is possible to create a playability of expecting a prize in the second starting port 71 while hoping for this.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S208) of the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment in the start winning process (S208) in the third embodiment is that when the ball wins in the right first start port 64a, the process is equivalent to the process in which the ball wins in the first start port 64. Is the point to do.

In the start winning process (S208) of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64 or the right first starting port 64a (S351). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the first starting port 64 or the right first starting port 64a (S351: Yes), the process is shifted to S302 and the acquisition regarding the dynamic display of the first special symbol is acquired. Perform processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64 or the right first starting port 64a (S351: No), the process is shifted to S307 and the ball has won the second starting port 71. It shifts to the determination process of whether or not. As a result, when the ball wins the right first starting port 64a, it is possible to perform the same processing as when the ball wins the first starting port 64.

Here, with reference to FIG. 80, the winning mode of the ball to the through gate 67, the first starting port 64, the right first starting port 64a or the second starting port 71 in each gaming state of the third gaming state, and About the relationship between the progress of the variable display of the ordinary symbol, the transition of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the driving mode of the ordinary electric service 72, the small winning opening 73, and the variable winning device 65. explain.

As shown in FIG. 80, when a ball is launched in a right-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of the third embodiment, first, almost all the balls launched in the right-handed game are placed at a position where they can pass. A sphere is detected at the provided through gate 67. Then, based on the passage of the sphere to the through gate 67, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. In the "latent probability fluctuation state", the variable display of the normal symbol is executed in a uniform "3 seconds" longer than when the "time saving function" is enabled, and the result of either hit or loss is derived. There is. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the winning probability in the variable display of the normal symbol is low (that is, 10%), and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 in the case of winning is "3 seconds". Moreover, it is configured so that the number of times of opening is performed once. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the closing period of the ordinary electric service 72 becomes long, and the ball launched in the right-handed game is to a certain extent the second starting port 71 when the ordinary electric service 72 is open. However, not all the balls won the second starting port 71, and while the ordinary electric service 72 is closed, the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 72 may be completely rolled from the left end to the right end. It is possible to flow down to the 71 side and the right side of the first starting port 64a provided on the left side of the front view of the second starting port 71 or the variable winning device 65 side.

Based on the winning of the second starting port 71 in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is "5 seconds" at the shortest and "130 seconds" at the longest. , And the result of either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a loss is derived.

Further, the variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed based on the winning of the right first starting port 64a in the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the variation display of the special symbol 1 is also the special symbol 2 (second special symbol). Similarly, it is executed in "5 seconds" at the shortest and "130 seconds" at the longest, and is configured to derive either a big hit result, a small hit result, or a loss result.

As a result, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the third embodiment, the ball can win a prize at any of the starting ports 64a and 71, so that the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are displayed. A special symbol that is executed in parallel and has a short fluctuation time variation pattern selected is stopped and displayed first. Then, in the third embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), the dynamic display of the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. Since it is configured to stop the symbol), the variation of the game value given to the player depending on which special symbol the dynamic display is stopped first and the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be enriched.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type "time saving A" and the jackpot type "normal A" can be selected as the jackpot types that can be won by the first special symbol. , Since the jackpot type "time saving A" or "normal A" cannot be selected as the jackpot type that can be won by the second special symbol, how can the player select the first special symbol? Since it is possible to create a game of winning the jackpot in the dynamic display of the second special symbol before the jackpot is derived in the dynamic display, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be done. Further, by deriving the small hit first in each special symbol, the dynamic display in which the jackpot of the other special symbol can be derived can be stopped. Therefore, for example, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot can be stopped. While the dynamic display that was won in is being executed, the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol that can derive the above jackpot is shorter. When the fluctuation time is selected, the dynamic display of the first special symbol capable of deriving the jackpot can be stopped, so how a small hit with a short fluctuation time is extracted in the second special symbol. It is possible to create playability of whether or not.

On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the above-mentioned big hit can be derived from the dynamic display of the second special symbol. If a short fluctuation time is selected, the dynamic display that can derive the jackpot of the second special symbol will be stopped. Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the first 1 Even when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of a special symbol, it is possible to create a playability of how a long fluctuation time is extracted.

In addition, when the small hit of one special symbol is won and the dynamic display of the other special symbol is extinguished, the small hit of one special symbol occurs continuously, the other. It is possible to delay the derivation of the jackpot of the special symbol. As a result, by delaying the derivation of the jackpot that triggers the transition of the gaming state, it is possible to prolong the stay period of the "latent probability fluctuation state", suppress the frequent occurrence of excessive jackpots in a short time, and play the game. It can be configured so that the game value per hour given to a person does not become too high (too much).

In FIG. 80, although the jackpot was won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot in the dynamic display of the first special symbol was derived first, so that the jackpot of the second special symbol was derived first. Disappears, and then the jackpot of the first special symbol is derived before the jackpot of the second special symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the “battle effect” executed in the “latent probability fluctuation state” of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a transition of the “battle effect” performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the “latent probability fluctuation state” of the third embodiment, and FIG. 81 (a) shows the “battle effect”. It is a figure which showed the started state, FIG. 81 (b) is a figure which showed the state which "battle effect" progressed from the state of FIG. 81 (a), and FIG. 81 (c) is a figure which showed FIG. It is a figure which showed the state which the "battle effect" further progressed from the state of (b), and FIG. 81 (d) shows the state which "battle effect" progressed from the state of FIG. It is a figure which showed the state which the corresponding character symbol has won.

In FIG. 81 (a), in the entire display screen of the “latent probability fluctuation state” third symbol display device 81, the character symbol 81h corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed on the left side of the display area (hereinafter, “” The first character 81h ”is displayed), and the character symbol 81i corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed on the right side of the display area (hereinafter, may be referred to as the“ second character 81i ”). The "battle production" in which the characters confront each other has been started, and the introduction screens of the characters 81h and 81i are shown.

On this screen, the normal modes of the first character 81h and the second character 81i are displayed. For example, when the jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the movement of the second special symbol When a big hit or a small hit is not derived in the target display, the display mode of the first character 81h is changed from the normal mode to a special mode (for example, the red effect or the parts constituting the character are changed (for example, the eyes are displayed in flames). . Chance down pattern.) It is configured to change. On the other hand, when the small hit or the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the big hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the display mode of the second character 81i is usually used. It is configured to change from a mode to a special mode (in this case, a chance-up pattern).

Next, in FIG. 81 (b), the “battle effect” progresses from the state of FIG. 81 (a), and the state before the first character 81h and the second character 81i each hold a sword and cut each other is shown. .. At the upper part of the display area of this screen, the reach symbol 81j of the third symbol indicating that the variation effect is being executed is displayed.

The normal modes of the first character 81h and the second character 81i are also displayed on this screen, but as in FIG. 81 (a), for example, when a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. When the big hit or the small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the display mode of the first character 81h is configured to change from the normal mode to the special mode. On the other hand, when the small hit or the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the big hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the display mode of the second character 81i is usually used. It is configured to change from a mode to a special mode.

In particular, during the execution of this "battle effect", the dynamic display in which a big hit or a small hit is won in one of the special symbols is acquired, and the dynamic display is the movement of the special symbol that caused the execution of the "battle effect". When the result is derived before the fluctuation time of the target display, the characters 81h and 81i from which the result is derived may be changed to a special mode at that time.

FIG. 81 (c) shows a state in which the “battle effect” progresses from the state of FIG. 81 (b), and the first character 81h and the second character 81i are pressed against each other while overlapping their swords. ing.

The normal modes of the first character 81h and the second character 81i are also displayed on this screen, but as in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), for example, a big hit is obtained in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. When it is derived and the big hit or small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the display mode of the first character 81h is configured to change from the normal mode to the special mode. To. On the other hand, when the small hit or the big hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the big hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the display mode of the second character 81i is usually used. It is configured to change from a mode to a special mode.

Further, on this screen, the jackpot can be derived by increasing the display portion of the special symbol for which the jackpot result is derived and decreasing the display portion of the special symbol for which the jackpot or small hit is not derived. It is configured to suggest a dynamic display of special symbols at this point.

FIG. 81 (d) shows a state in which the “battle effect” progresses from the state of FIG. 81 (c), and the first character 81h defeats the second character 81i. This display result indicates that the jackpot was derived first in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol disappeared. Then, in the upper part of the display area, "777", which is the jackpot symbol 81k corresponding to the jackpot result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, is displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the jackpot has been derived first in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time. A special symbol in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected is configured to be stopped and displayed first. Then, in the third embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit is won in the dynamic display of one special symbol, the dynamic display of the other special symbol is stopped. Depending on whether or not the dynamic display of the symbol is stopped first and the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to increase the variation of the game value given to the player.

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type "time saving A" and the jackpot type "normal A" can be selected as the jackpot type that can be won in the first special symbol, while the jackpot that can be won in the second special symbol. Since the above-mentioned jackpot type "time saving A" or "normal A" cannot be selected as the type, the player can see how before the jackpot is derived by the dynamic display of the first special symbol. In addition, since it is possible to create a game property of winning a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, by deriving the small hit first in each special symbol, the dynamic display in which the jackpot of the other special symbol can be derived can be stopped. Therefore, for example, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot can be stopped. While the dynamic display that was won in is being executed, the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol that can derive the above jackpot is shorter. When the fluctuation time is selected, the dynamic display of the first special symbol capable of deriving the jackpot can be stopped, so how a small hit with a short fluctuation time is extracted in the second special symbol. It is possible to create playability of whether or not.

On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the above-mentioned big hit can be derived from the dynamic display of the second special symbol. If a short fluctuation time is selected, the dynamic display that can derive the jackpot of the second special symbol will be stopped. Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the first 1 Even when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of a special symbol, it is possible to create a playability of how a long fluctuation time is extracted.

In addition, when the small hit of one special symbol is won and the dynamic display of the other special symbol is extinguished, the small hit of one special symbol occurs continuously, the other. It is possible to delay the derivation of the jackpot of the special symbol. As a result, by delaying the derivation of the jackpot that triggers the transition of the gaming state, it is possible to prolong the stay period of the "latent probability fluctuation state", suppress the frequent occurrence of excessive jackpots in a short time, and play the game. It can be configured so that the game value per hour given to a person does not become too high (too much).

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 89. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/300 (when the set value is "1"), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/100 (set value "1"). 1 ”), and the continuation rate when entering the“ consecutive villa ”state is about“ 80% ”, and if you win the jackpot, 10 rounds = 1500 prizes The ball is configured to be paid out. In addition, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" after reaching the time saving limit, the ball can be won in the second small winning opening 74a by winning the small hit game with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. , The game value substantially given to the player in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is configured to be "2441 pieces".

In this case, the game value given when the time saving limit is reached becomes excessive, and the prize ball given by the jackpot up to that point in the "renso" state and the prize ball given when the time saving limit is reached are combined for a short time. Excessive game value is given to the player, which may incite the player's gambling spirit.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/111 (when the set value is "1"), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/100. (When the set value is "1"), the continuation rate when entering the "renso" state is about "90%", and when the jackpot is won, 5 rounds = 750. It is configured so that individual prize balls are paid out. Then, the game value substantially given to the player in the "latent probability fluctuation state" after reaching the time saving limit is configured to be "3736 pieces".

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments are used for the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments. The description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 stored in the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 82 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 stored in.

The special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the fourth embodiment are for the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state of the special symbol for each set value, respectively. It is divided into two types, one for the high-probability state, which is used when the game state is the high-probability state of the special symbol, which has a higher probability of becoming a big hit than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

Then, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently for each set value. In addition, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required to shift from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the loss. That is, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased in order to shift from the low probability state to the high probability state, the number of lost random numbers is reduced and the decrease is allocated as the number of jackpot random numbers. In this way, by making the number of jackpot random numbers different according to the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small hit random values included in each set value and in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set to be the same. That is, the number of small hit random numbers in the first special symbol is the same for each set value, and is configured to be the same in the low-probability state and the high-probability state. Similarly, the number of small hit random numbers in the second special symbol is also the same for each set value, and is also configured to be the same in the low-probability state and the high-probability state. In this way, by making the number of small hit random values the same for each set value in each special symbol, and for the low probability state and the high probability state, all the set values and the game state in each special symbol are set. The ratio of the game value given considering only the small hit game in is the same.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is "1", the jackpot random number that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The number of values (big hit random number values) of the counter C1 is 90, and the values "0 to 89" are defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 90/10000 = 0.9 / 100. (That is, 0.9%) is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 100, and the value "0 to 99" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, That is, 1%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.11 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is 100, which is low. The value "90 to 189" in the case of the probability state or the value "100 to 199" in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol are high. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9810, and the value "190-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9800 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "200 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "1" is 9810/10000 = 98.1 / 100. (That is, 98.1%), the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9800. It is set so that / 10000 = 98/100 (that is, 98%). That is, it is configured so that there is no big difference in the jackpot probability between the high probability state and the low probability state of the special symbol.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 92, and the value "0 to 91". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 92/10000 = 0.92 / 100. (That is, 0.92%) is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 105, and the value "0 to 104" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "2" is 105/10000 = 1.05 /. It becomes 100 (that is, 1.05%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.18 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

When the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the set value "1". As in the case, both are 100, and the value "92 to 191" in the low probability state or the value "105 to 204" in the high probability state is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. Has been done. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "2" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9808, and the value "192 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9795 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "205-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 9808/10000 = 98.08 / 100. (That is, 98.08%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9795. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.95 / 100 (that is, 97.95%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 94, and the value "0 to 93". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 94/10000 = 0.94 /. It is set to be 100 (that is, 0.94%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 110, and the value "0 to 109" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 110/10000 = 1.1 /. It becomes 100 (that is, 1.1%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.17 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

When the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the set value "1" and As in the case of the set value "2", both are 100, and the value "94 to 193" in the low probability state or the value "110 to 209" in the high probability state is the special figure 1 jackpot random number table. It is defined (set) in 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "3" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9806, and the value "194 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9790 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "210-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "3" is 9806/10000 = 98.06 / 100. (That is, 98.06%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9790. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.9 / 100 (that is, 97.9%).

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 96, and the value "0 to 95". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time reduction state") of the first special symbol with the set value "4" is 96/10000 = 0.96 / 100. (That is, 0.96%) is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 115, and the value "0 to 114" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "4" is 115/10000 = 1.15 /. It is 100 (that is, 1.15%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.20 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low-probability state and the high-probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is from the set value "1". Similar to the case of "3", both are 100, and the value "96 to 195" in the low probability state or the value "115 to 214" in the high probability state is displayed in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "4" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9804, and the value "196 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9785 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "215-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortening state") of the first special symbol with the set value "4" is 9804/10000 = 98.04 / 100. (That is, 98.04%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9785. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.85 / 100 (that is, 97.85%).

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 98, and the value "0 to 97". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "5" is 98/10000 = 0.98 / 100. (That is, 0.98%) is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 120, and the value "0 to 119" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "5" is 120/10000 = 1.2 /. It becomes 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.22 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low probability state.

When the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low-probability state and the high-probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is from the set value "1". As in the case of "4", both are 100, and the value "98 to 197" in the low probability state or the value "120 to 219" in the high probability state is displayed in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "5" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9802, and the value "198 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9780 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "220 to 9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the first special symbol with the set value "5" is 9802/10000 = 98.02 / 100. (That is, 98.02%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9780. It is set to be / 10000 = 97.8 / 100 (that is, 97.8%).

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 100, and the value "0 to 99". Is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time shortening state") of the first special symbol with the set value "6" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, that is). It is set to be 1%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 125, and the value "0 to 124" is , Special figure 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the first special symbol with the set value "6" is 125/10000 = 1.25 /. It is 100 (that is, 1.25%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.2 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

When the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low-probability state and the high-probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is from the set value "1". As in the case of "5", both are 100, and the value "100 to 199" in the low probability state or the value "125 to 224" in the high probability state is displayed in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. It is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "6" is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any gaming state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same depending on the state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The number is 9,800, and the value "200 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9775 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "225-9999" is a special figure. It is defined (set) in the 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time shortening state") of the first special symbol with the set value "6" is 9800/10000 = 98/100 (that is, that is). , 98%), and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 9775/10000 = 97. It is set to be .75 / 100 (that is, 97.75%).

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is "1", the jackpot is determined in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The number of values (big hit random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 is 90 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 89" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. Has been done. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 90 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.9 / 100 (that is, 0.9%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 100 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 99" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 100, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.11 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is 9875. The value "90 to 9964" in the low probability state or the value "100 to 9974" in the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "1" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. There are 35 pieces, and the value "9965-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 25 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9975-9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 35/10000 = 0.35 / 100. It is set to be (that is, 0.35%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”) is 25. It is set to be / 10000 = 0.25 / 100 (that is, 0.25%).

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 92, and the value "0 to 91" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 92 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.92 / 100 (that is, 0.92%).

When the set value is "2", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 105 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 104" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "2" is 105, as in the case of the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.05 / 100 (that is, 1.05%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.14 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of, both are 9875, and the value "92 to 9966" in the low probability state or the value "105 to 9979" in the high probability state is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. ) Has been done. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "2" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. There are 90 pieces, and the values "9967 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 20 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9980 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "2" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 33/10000 = 0.33 / 100. It is set to be (that is, 0.33%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”) is 20. It is set so that / 10000 = 0.2 / 100 (that is, 0.2%).

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 94, and the value "0 to 93" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 94 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.94 / 100 (that is, 0.94%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 110 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 109" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "3" is 110, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.1 / 100 (that is, 1.1%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.17 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". And, as in the case of "2", both are 9875 pieces, and the value "94 to 9966" in the low probability state or the value "110-9984" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "3" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 31 pieces, the values "99999 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 15 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9985-9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "3" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 31/10000 = 0.31 / 100. It is set to be (that is, 0.31%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state” or the “probability fluctuation state”) is 15. It is set to be / 10000 = 0.15 / 100 (that is, 0.15%).

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 96, whose value "0 to 95" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "4" is 96 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.96 / 100 (that is, 0.96%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 115, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 114" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "4" is 115, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.15 / 100 (that is, 1.15%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.20 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of "3", the number is 9875, and the value "96 to 9970" in the low probability state or the value "115 to 9899" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "4" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 29 pieces, the value "9971 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 10 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9990 to 9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "4" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 29/10000 = 0.29 / 100. (That is, 0.29%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 10. It is set so that / 10000 = 0.1 / 100 (that is, 0.1%).

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 98, and the value "0 to 97" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "5" is 98 / It is set so that 10000 = 0.98 / 100 (that is, 0.98%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 120 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 119" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "5" is 120, as in the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.2 / 100 (that is, 1.2%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.22 times easier to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of "4", the number is 9875, and the value "98 to 9772" in the low probability state or the value "120 to 9994" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "5" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. Of the 27 pieces, the values "9973 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining five other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the value "9995-9999" is a special figure. 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "5" is 27/10000 = 0.27 / 100. (That is, 0.27%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 5. It is set to be / 10000 = 0.05 / 100 (that is, 0.05%).

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , The value "0 to 99" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") of the second special symbol with the set value "6" is 100 / It is set so that 10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 125 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value "0 to 124" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "latent probability fluctuation state" or the "probability fluctuation state") of the second special symbol with the set value "6" is 125, which is the same as the first special symbol. / 10000 = 1.25 / 100 (that is, 1.25%), and the high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be about 1.2 times more likely to hit the jackpot from the low-probability state.

Here, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value "1". As in the case of "5", the number is 9875, and the value "100 to 9974" in the low probability state or the value "125 to 9999" in the high probability state is the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. It is stipulated (set) in. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "6" is 9875/10000 = 98.75 / 100 (that is, 98.75%) in any gaming state, which is a low probability of the special symbol. It is set so that the winning probability of a small hit is the same in the state and the high probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "9975-9999" of 25 pieces is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value, and the number of lost random numbers is set in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The corresponding value is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value "6" (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state") is 25/10000 = 0.25 / 100. (That is, 0.25%), and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state" or "probability fluctuation state") is 0. It is set so that / 10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), and is configured so that the losing combination does not appear.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram. Similarly, it is a figure which shows typically an example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol stored in ROM 202 of 4th Embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the second embodiment is that the number of rounds of each jackpot type is reduced from 10 rounds to 5 rounds, and the number of STs is increased from 160 times to 230 times. And that.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the jackpot probability of the special symbol are performed until the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (230 times in the fourth embodiment). "Probability variation A" corresponding to "probability fluctuation state (so-called ST state)" in which both normal symbol hit probabilities are high probability states, and after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of special symbols is low. Although it is in a state, the maximum number of rounds is "Time saving A" corresponding to the "time reduction state" in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. After the big hit of 5 rounds, until the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (230 times similar to "probability variation A" in the fourth embodiment), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is obtained, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is low. "Hidden probability A" corresponding to the "latent probability fluctuation state" that becomes the state, and "normal A" in which both the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol become low probability after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. There is.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 83 (a), the number of jackpots is before the time reduction limit is reached and after the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the first to fifth jackpots after the time reduction limit reset), and When a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for "probability change A". "0 to 49" is associated, and the value "50 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A". In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of jackpots after resetting the time reduction limit is the sixth), and the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state" When a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in, the value "0 to 49" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability A", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "normal A". "50 to 99" are associated with each other.

Therefore, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type of "probability change A" is 50% and the jackpot type of "time saving A" is 50%. , Will be won. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type of "latent change A" is 50% instead of "probability change A", and "time saving A" is replaced with "". Usually, the jackpot type of "A" will be won at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, before the time reduction limit is reached (after the time reduction limit is reached), the selection ratios of the jackpot types "probability variation A" and "time reduction A" are selected at the same level (both 50%). When the time saving limit is reached, the selection ratios of the jackpot types "latent A" and "normal A" are set to be the same (both 50%).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first starting port 64 can be won and the first special symbol can be dynamically displayed, but it is difficult to win the second starting port 71. As a result, it is difficult to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Further, in the right-handed game, the second special symbol can be dynamically displayed by winning the second starting port 71, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed because it is difficult to win the first starting port 64. Is hard to execute. Then, when the time saving limiter is activated, it means that the "time saving function" is operating, that is, the state during the "ream villa", and in the present embodiment, the right-handed game is encouraged during the "ream villa". Therefore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is difficult to execute. Therefore, when the time saving limiter is activated in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the player dares to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol even though the right-handed game is encouraged. This is a case where a left-handed game is performed, a ball is won in the first starting port 64, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, the game state in which the right-handed game is encouraged (that is, the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", and the "latent probability fluctuation state") is until the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is derived. Is configured to be longer than the time until the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is derived, so that it can be selected when the time saving limiter is activated in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The "latent A" and the "normal A" are set so as to be practically difficult to be derived (not derived).

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 83 (b), the number of jackpots is 1 to 5 before reaching the time saving limit and after reaching the time saving limit (that is, after resetting the time saving limit number of times). In addition, when a jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type counter C2 is used for the "probability change A". Values "0 to 99" are associated with each other. In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of jackpots after resetting the time reduction limit is the sixth), and the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state" When the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in, the value "0 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "latent probability A".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol in all the gaming states before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the first holding area of any one of the second holding ball storage areas 203e When the value of the stored jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same first holding area is It is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, and in the fourth embodiment, "probability variation A" is determined as the jackpot type by the values of all the jackpot type counters C2.

Therefore, if a jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type of "probability variation A" will be won at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type of "latent change A" is won at a rate of 100% instead of "probability change A".

Therefore, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type "probability variation A" is always selected, and when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type "latent probability A" is always selected. It is configured to be selected. As a result, after winning the first jackpot, if the "renso" state continues without shifting to the "normal game state" even once, the jackpot of the special symbol that is given the "time saving function" will be 6 times. Every time it occurs, a "latent probability fluctuation state" can be generated without fail after the sixth big hit. As a result, every time a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given occurs a predetermined number of times, the normal symbol can always be in a low probability state, and the closing period of the normal electric service 72 occurs for a long time, so that the second small prize is won. It is configured so that the ball can be won in the mouth 74a.

In the fourth embodiment, in the low probability state of the normal symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball can win the second small winning opening 74a on the downstream side by the closing period of the normal electric service 72. Because it is configured in, when you enter the "renso" state and the time saving limiter function is activated, you can get more prize balls than the balls you got in each jackpot that occurred so far. Can be made to. Therefore, when the "renso" is started, how many big hits are repeated without ending the "renso" state, and as a result, the time saving limiter function is activated to enter the "latent probability fluctuation state". It is possible to create a playability of winning a large number of prize balls at once, and improve the interest of the game. Also, while keeping the number of balls earned in one big hit that can occur during the "renso" state low, it is possible to give a lot of prize balls when the time saving limiter function is activated as a result of repeating "renso". By configuring the above, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears, which is given to the player. It can be configured so that the playing value per hour is not too high (too much).

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the "probability fluctuation state" which is the ST state is entered, the probability and the end of the "probability fluctuation state" being "consecutive". The probability of doing so will be explained. FIG. 84 shows the number of “series villas” (0 to 10 times) according to the continuation probability when entering the ST state in the fourth embodiment, and the arrival probability and end probability of the “sequential villas” number of times. It is a list. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described above, in the "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol after the jackpot ends is 1/100 at the set value "1" and 1 at the set value "2". .05 / 100, 1.1 / 100 at the set value "3", 1.15 / 100 at the set value "4", 1.2 / 100 at the set value "5", 1.25 at the set value "6" It is configured to be / 100. Then, in any of the set values, the ST state after the end of the big hit is configured to continue 230 times. Here, for convenience of explanation, the ST continuation probability and the end probability in the set value "1" will be described, and the description of other set values will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 84, whether or not a jackpot with a probability of 1/100 is derived while the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed 230 times is 90.09% (hereinafter, for convenience, "90.0%". In addition, "about" is omitted in the notation of the percentage.) When the first jackpot enters the "probability fluctuation state", the average "renso" until it returns to the "normal game state". The number of times will be 10.09 times (about 10 times).

Here, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 230 times without being able to win the jackpot, and the "renso" ends. The probability is 10.0%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability of being able to "ream" once in the jackpot is 90.0% as described above, and the jackpot is hit. The probability that the "ream villa" state will end after one "ream villa" is made is 19.0%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" twice is 81.0%, and the jackpot is twice "consecutive". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 27.1%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" three times is 72.9%, and the jackpot is "consecutive" three times. After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 34.4%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" four times is 65.6%, and the jackpot is "consecutive" four times. After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 41.0%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "reamed" 5 times is 59.9%, and the jackpot is 5 times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 46.9%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "reamed" 6 times is 53.1%, and the jackpot is 6 times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 52.2%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "reamed" 7 times is 47.8%, and the jackpot is 7 times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 57.0%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" eight times is 43.0%, and the jackpot is eight times "consecutive villas". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 61.3%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "renso" 9 times is 38.7%, and the jackpot is 9 times "renso". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 65.2%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the jackpot can be "consecutive" 10 times is 34.8%, and the jackpot is 10 times "consecutive". After that, the probability that the "ream villa" state will end is 68.7%.

That is, when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot and the "probability fluctuation state" is entered, for example, the rate at which the jackpot "renso" occurs 6 times is about 2 times when the first jackpot is won. In addition, the rate at which the jackpot "renso" occurs 10 times is about once every 3 times when the first jackpot is won. Therefore, for example, in the case of playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 for one day, if the first jackpot can be won 10 times, the phenomenon that the time saving limiter can operate occurs about 5 times in the game per day. In addition, if the first jackpot can be won 10 times, the phenomenon that the jackpot of 10 "renso" occurs is whether or not it occurs about 3 times in one day game. Therefore, when the first jackpot is won from the "normal game state", it may occur about once every two times whether or not a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the "latent probability fluctuation state" by operating the time saving limiter. It is possible to create a playability of how to accumulate big hits and operate a time-saving limiter to acquire game value when entering the "renso" state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the jackpot opening table 202f of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the jackpot opening table 202f stored in the ROM 202 in the fourth embodiment. The jackpot opening table 202f of the fourth embodiment is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the jackpot opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65 is based on the jackpot type in which the jackpot of each special symbol is generated. The opening mode of 65a (number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls), and a gaming state to be shifted after the jackpot is completed are specified.

First, the jackpot opening table 202f is based on the jackpot type selected based on the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, which is easy to win for each gaming state, and the value of the time saving limit counter 203n. The opening mode and the like are classified.

Specifically, in the "normal game state", the "normal game state" referred to when the jackpot type "probability change A" or "time reduction A" is won, and the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" In the case of winning the jackpot type "probability change A" or "time saving A" that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit, and the jackpot type "latent A" or "normal A" that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit. For the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" to be performed, and for the "latent probability fluctuation state" referred to when the jackpot type "probability change A" or "time reduction A" is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state". , The opening mode of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a and the like are specified.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the "normal game state" of the jackpot opening table 202f of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot type "probability change A" is won in the "normal game state", or the jackpot type "time saving A" In the case of winning the first big hit, that is, when the time saving limiter function is initialized, the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened / closed over 5 rounds. Then, the OP time of the jackpot is set to "30 seconds", the IT time which is the closing time between one round of the jackpot and the next round is set to "2 seconds", and the ED time of the jackpot is set to "2 seconds". It is set to "30 seconds". Further, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of winnings in one round is defined as "10".

Then, in the "normal game state", when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the transition to the "probability fluctuation state" is performed on condition that the ball passes through the probability variation area switch 65e, and the jackpot type "time reduction A" is selected. If you win, it is configured to shift to the "time reduction state".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the firing interval of the balls is "0.6 seconds", the minimum opening time in one round in which the maximum number of winnings is set to "10" is about ( Average) "6 seconds". Further, the number of prize balls when a ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 65c (see FIG. 5) is set to "15".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85, in the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, the jackpot type "probability change A" is set in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" before the time reduction limiter is reached. If you win the jackpot type "Time saving A", or if you win the jackpot type "Hidden A" when you reach the time saving limiter, or if you win the jackpot type "Normal A" The large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened / closed over 5 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". Further, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of winnings in one round is defined as "10".

Then, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", if the jackpot type "probability change A" is won before reaching the time reduction limiter, the "probability fluctuation state" is provided on condition that the ball passes through the probability change area switch 65e. , And if the jackpot type "Time saving A" is won, it is configured to shift to the "Time saving state". In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the jackpot type "latent probability A" is won when the time reduction limiter is reached, the "latent probability fluctuation state" is conditioned on the passage of the ball to the probability variation region switch 65e. When the game shifts to the "state" and the jackpot type "normal A" is won, the state shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, as shown in FIG. 85, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of the jackpot opening table 202f, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the jackpot type "time saving A" is selected. If a winner is won, that is, if a big hit is made after the time saving limiter function is activated, the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened / closed over 5 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "180 seconds", the IT time is set to "3 seconds", and the ED time is set to "180 seconds". Further, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of winnings in one round is defined as "10".

Then, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the transition to the "probability variation state" is performed on condition that the ball passes through the probability variation area switch 65e, and the jackpot type "time saving A" is selected. If you win, it is configured to shift to the "time reduction state".

In this way, by changing the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game for each winning jackpot type, it is possible to make a difference in the game playability after the end of the jackpot based on the winning jackpot type. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to create a playability of which jackpot type is won or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89, the average staying time in each game state and each jackpot state of the fourth embodiment and the game value obtained in each state (time) will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the number of occurrences, required time, and integrated time of each phenomenon in each game state and jackpot state of the fourth embodiment, and also shows the average total staying time in each game state and jackpot state. .. Further, FIG. 87 shows the winning rate, the required time, the number of occurrences, the firing time, the number of launched balls, and the number of returned balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the “renso” state of the fourth embodiment. In addition to showing, it is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in each jackpot state and each game state. Further, FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of “renso” in the case where the time saving limiter function of the fourth embodiment is not provided and in the case where the time saving limiter function is provided. Further, FIG. 89 (a) is a slump graph at the time of “ream villa” when there is no time saving limiter function in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a case where there is a time saving limiter function in the fourth embodiment. It is a slump graph at the time of "Renso". In the description of FIGS. 86 to 89, the jackpot probability and the like will be described in the case of the set value “1”, and the other set values (that is, the set values “2” to “6”) will be described. For convenience, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 86, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the “normal game state” (when the encouraged left-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed). Then, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is 1/111 (about 90/10000), and the probability of selecting the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit is 86/111, and the probability of selection at the time of loss / small hit is 86/111. The probability that the "normal reach" production mode will be selected at the time is 20/111, and the probability that the "super reach" production mode will be selected at the time of loss / small hit is 3/111. The probability that the "special reach" effect mode will be selected at the time of hitting is 2/111.

Therefore, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability in the "normal game state", until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" production mode is selected as the production mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, While the first special symbol variation effect is performed 111 times, the average number of "non-reach" effect modes at the time of loss and small hit is 85 times (one big hit of the "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance). (Calculated with 86-1 = 85 to replace with fluctuation) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 20 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit is average Appearing 3 times, the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears twice on average, and the "special reach" production mode at the time of big hit appears once on average.

In this case, the fluctuation time of the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit is between the start of the game and the occurrence of the big hit state of 1 without interruption of the fluctuation production of the first special symbol. Since it can be performed in "15 seconds" (including the opening time (small hit time) of the second small winning opening 74a based on the small hit game. The same shall apply hereinafter), 85 times x "15 seconds" = "1275 seconds". It takes time, and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit can be performed for "20 seconds", so it takes 20 times x "20 seconds" = "400 seconds", and at the time of loss / small Since the "super reach" production mode at the time of hitting can be performed for "60 seconds", it takes time of 3 times x "60 seconds" = "180 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit Can be performed in "180 seconds", so it takes time of 2 times x "180 seconds" = "360 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit can be performed in "180 seconds", so 1 It takes time of times x "180 seconds" = "180 seconds".

That is, the average total time from the start of the game to the occurrence of the jackpot state of 1 without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is "1275 seconds" + "400 seconds" + "180 seconds" + "360 seconds" + "180 seconds" = "2395 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 25, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the case of the first big hit (including the case of both the big hit type "probability change A" and "time saving A") in the "normal game state", " In the "big hit state" (when the ball is continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds" to the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game), the OP time is "30 seconds" and the big winning opening of each round. The minimum (shortest) opening time of the opening / closing plate 65a is 10 maximum winning numbers x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", each IT time is "2 seconds", and the ED time is "30 seconds". Will be done.

Then, in the first jackpot of 1, the opening effect is performed once, the round is 5 rounds, the interval is 4 times obtained by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is performed once.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot are won in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, the OP time as an opening effect is between the start and the end of the first jackpot of 1. It takes "30 seconds" and one round can be done in "6 seconds" on average, so it takes "6 seconds" x 5 = "30 seconds" and the interval of 1 is "2 seconds". Since it can be broken, it takes "2 seconds" x 4 = "8 seconds", and the ED time "30 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start of the first jackpot of 1 to the end is "30 seconds" + "30 seconds" + "8 seconds" + "30 seconds" = "98 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the "probability fluctuation state" (probability fluctuation state) when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won in the first jackpot is performed and the encouraged right-handed game is performed. (2) When the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is about 100/10000 (1/100), and the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss or small hit is selected. The probability of losing is 89/100, and the probability of selecting the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss / small hit is 7/100, and the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss / small hit is selected. The probability is 3/100, and the probability that the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss or small hit is selected is 1/100.

Therefore, for example, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" effect mode is selected as the effect mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, the second special symbol While the variation effect is performed 100 times, the average number of "non-reach" effect modes at the time of loss and small hit is 88 times (because one time of the "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance is replaced with the jackpot variation. (Calculated with 89-1 = 88) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 7 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 3 times on average, The "special reach" production mode at the time of loss and small hit will appear once on average, and the "special reach" production mode at the time of big hit will appear once on average.

In this case, the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit between the time when the player enters the "probability fluctuation state" and the time when the next big hit state occurs without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol. Since the fluctuation time of can be set to "1 second" (including the opening time (small hit time) of the variable winning device 65 based on the small hit game. The same applies hereinafter), 88 times x "1 second" = "88". It takes "seconds", and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss or small hit can be performed for "10 seconds", so it takes 7 times x "10 seconds" = "70 seconds", and when it is lost -Since the "super reach" production mode for small hits can be performed for "20 seconds", it takes 3 times x "20 seconds" = "60 seconds", and "special reach" for lost or small hits. Since the production mode can be performed in "60 seconds", it takes a time of 1 time x "60 seconds" = "60 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit can be performed in "60 seconds". It takes one time x "60 seconds" = "60 seconds".

That is, the average total time from entering the "probability fluctuation state" to the occurrence of the next jackpot state without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is "88 seconds" + "70 seconds" + " "60 seconds" + "60 seconds" + "60 seconds" = "338 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, before the time reduction limiter is reached (when the time reduction limiter is reached) in the “probability fluctuation state” (including the case of the “time reduction state”; the same applies hereinafter). In the "big hit state" (when the ball is continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds" to the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game) in the case of the "renso" big hit in (including), the OP time It is "10 seconds", the minimum (shortest) opening time of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of each round is the maximum number of winning 10 pieces x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", and each IT time is "1". It is "seconds", and the ED time is "10 seconds".

Then, in the "Renso" jackpot in this "probability fluctuation state", the opening effect is performed once, the round is 5 rounds, the interval is 4 times by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is 1 time. Will be done.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot win in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, the opening effect is produced between the start and the end of the 1 "renso" jackpot. As an OP time of "10 seconds" is required, one round can be performed in "6 seconds" on average, so "6 seconds" x 5 = "30 seconds" is required, and the interval of 1 is "1 second". , So it takes "1 second" x 4 = "4 seconds", and the ED time "10 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start to the end of the jackpot at the time of "ream villa" in the "probability fluctuation state" is "10 seconds" + "30 seconds" + "4 seconds" + "10 seconds" = " 54 seconds ".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the “latent probability fluctuation state” (encouragement) after winning the jackpot type “latent probability A” when the time saving limiter is reached at the time of “renso”. In the case of performing the right-handed game and executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is about 1/100 (100/10000), and the probability of a big hit is about 1/100 (100/10000). The probability that the "non-reach" production mode will be selected is 86/100, and the probability that the "normal reach" production mode will be selected at the time of loss or small hit is 10/100. The probability that the "super reach" effect mode will be selected is 3/100, and the probability that the "special reach" effect mode will be selected at the time of loss or small hit is 1/100.

Therefore, for example, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" effect mode is selected as the effect mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, the second special symbol While the variation effect is performed 100 times, the average number of "non-reach" effect modes at the time of loss and small hit is 85 times (because one time of the "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance is replaced with the jackpot variation. (Calculated with 86-1 = 85) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 10 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit appears 3 times on average, The "special reach" production mode at the time of loss and small hit will appear once on average, and the "special reach" production mode at the time of big hit will appear once on average.

In this case, the "non-reach" effect at the time of loss or small hit between the time when the player enters the "latent probability fluctuation state" and the time when the next big hit state occurs without interruption of the change effect of the second special symbol. Since the variation time of the embodiment can be set to "5 seconds" (including the opening time (small hit time) of the variable winning device 65 based on the small hit game. The same applies hereinafter), 85 times x "5 seconds" = " It takes "425 seconds", and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss / small hit can be performed for "15 seconds", so it takes 10 times x "15 seconds" = "150 seconds" to lose. Since the "super reach" production mode for hours and small hits can be performed for "30 seconds", it takes 3 times x "30 seconds" = "90 seconds", and "special reach" for lost and small hits. Since the production mode can be performed in "90 seconds", it takes a time of 1 time x "90 seconds" = "90 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit can be performed in "90 seconds". Therefore, it takes one time x "90 seconds" = "90 seconds".

That is, the average total time from entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" to the occurrence of the next jackpot state without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is "425 seconds" + "150 seconds" + "90 seconds" + "90 seconds" + "90 seconds" = "845 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 86, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the “latent probability fluctuation state”, the “big hit state” in the case of the “renso” big hit (against the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game). If the ball is continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds"), the OP time is "180 seconds", and the minimum (shortest) opening time of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of each round is the maximum number of winnings. 10 pieces x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", each IT time is "3 seconds", and the ED time is "180 seconds". When the "renso" jackpot is hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", a "premium live production" (see FIG. 65) described later, which allows the player to select a favorite song, is executed.

Then, in the "renso" jackpot in this "latent probability fluctuation state", the opening effect is performed once, the round is 5 rounds, the interval is 4 times obtained by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is 1. It is done once.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot win in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, from the start to the end of the "renso" jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state". In the meantime, it takes "180 seconds" of OP time as an opening effect, and one round can be performed in "6 seconds" on average, so "6 seconds" x 5 = "30 seconds" is required, and 1 Since the interval can be set to "3 seconds", "3 seconds" x 4 = "12 seconds" is required, and the ED time "180 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start to the end of the jackpot at the time of "renso" in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is "180 seconds" + "30 seconds" + "12 seconds" + "180 seconds" = It becomes "402 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 87, in the first jackpot at the time of entering the "renso", the main winning destination of the launched ball is the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening), and the opening time of the first jackpot is It is "30 seconds" and is performed "once" in the first jackpot. Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "30 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "50 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 for the first jackpot is "6 seconds" x "5 rounds (5 times)" = "30 seconds" when all the launched balls win. Assuming that the winning rate to the variable winning device 65 is "70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired)", the ball firing time is "30 seconds" ÷ "70%" = about "43". The number of shot balls is "43 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "72 balls", and the number of return balls is "15 balls" x "10 balls" x "5 rounds". = "750 balls".

Further, the interval time of the first jackpot is "2 seconds", and the first jackpot is performed "4 times" in total between each round. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "2 seconds" x "4 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "13 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the first jackpot is "30 seconds", and the first jackpot is performed "once". Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "30 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "50 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, during the entire period of the first jackpot, the player fires the ball while the total firing time is "30 seconds" + "43 seconds" + "8 seconds" + "30 seconds" = "111 seconds". Then, while firing "50 balls" + "72 balls" + "13 balls" + "50 balls" = "185 balls", respectively, "0 balls" + "750 balls" + "0 balls", respectively. "+" 0 balls "=" 750 balls "win a prize ball. Therefore, in the first jackpot, the player can acquire "750 balls"-"185 balls" = "565 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 87, the jackpot before reaching the limiter or when reaching the limiter at the time of "ream villa" (hereinafter, the jackpot before reaching the limiter or when reaching the limiter may be referred to as "big hit before activating the limiter"). Then, the main winning destination of the launched ball is the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening), the opening time of the jackpot before the limiter is activated is "10 seconds", and the jackpot before the limiter is activated is " It is done "once". Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "10 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about. It is "17 balls" and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 of the jackpot before the limiter is activated is the same as the first jackpot, and the shortest opening time when all the launched balls win is "6 seconds" x "5 rounds (5 times)" = "30". Although it is "seconds", assuming that the winning rate to the variable winning device 65 is "70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired)", the ball firing time is "30 seconds" ÷ " 70% ”= about“ 43 seconds ”, the number of launch balls is“ 43 seconds ”÷“ 0.6 seconds ”= about“ 72 spheres ”, and the number of return balls is the prize sphere“ 15 spheres ”ד 10 ”. "Ball" x "5 rounds" = "750 balls".

Further, the interval time of the jackpot before the limiter is activated is "1 second" which is shorter than the interval time of the first jackpot, and the jackpot before the limiter is activated is performed "4 times" in total between each round. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "1 second" x "4 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "7 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the jackpot before the activation of the limiter is "10 seconds", and the jackpot before the activation of the limiter is performed "once". Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "10 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about. It is "17 balls" and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, during the entire period of the jackpot before the limiter is activated, the player has a ball while the total firing time is "10 seconds" + "43 seconds" + "4 seconds" + "10 seconds" = "67 seconds". , "17 balls" + "72 balls" + "7 balls" + "17 balls" = "113 balls", respectively, while firing "0 balls" + "750 balls" + " Win a prize ball of "0 balls" + "0 balls" = "750 balls". Therefore, in the first jackpot, the player can acquire "750 balls"-"113 balls" = "637 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 87, in the jackpot after reaching the limiter at the time of "renso" (hereinafter, the jackpot after reaching the limiter may be referred to as "big hit after activating the limiter"), the main of the launched ball. The winning destination is the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening), the opening time of the jackpot after the limiter is activated is "180 seconds", and the jackpot is performed "once" after the limiter is activated. Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, if the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "180 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "300 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 of the jackpot after reaching the limiter is the same as the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and the shortest opening time when all the launched balls win is "6 seconds" x "5 rounds (5 times). ) ”=“ 30 seconds ”, but assuming that the winning rate to the variable winning device 65 is“ 70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired) ”, the ball firing time is“ 30 seconds ÷ "70%" = about "43 seconds", the number of launch balls is "43 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "72 balls", and the number of return balls is the prize ball "15" "Balls" x "10 balls" x "5 rounds" = "750 balls".

Further, the interval time of the jackpot after reaching the limiter is "3 seconds" which is longer than the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and the jackpot after the limiter is activated is performed "4 times" in total between each round. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "3 seconds" x "4 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "20 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the jackpot after reaching the limiter is "180 seconds", and the jackpot is performed "once" after reaching the limiter. Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "180 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "300 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, during the entire period of the jackpot after reaching the limiter, the player has a ball while the total firing time is "180 seconds" + "43 seconds" + "12 seconds" + "180 seconds" = "415 seconds". , "300 balls" + "72 balls" + "45 balls" + "300 balls" = "788 balls", respectively, while firing "0 balls" + "1500 balls" + " Win a prize ball of "0 balls" + "0 balls" = "1500 balls". Therefore, in the first jackpot, the player can acquire "1500 balls"-"788 balls" = "712 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 87, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the main winning destination of the ball launched in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71, and the "probability fluctuation state". The jackpot probability of the special symbol in is set to 1/100. Further, the "probability fluctuation state" is set so that the ordinary electric service 72 can be opened for a long period of time with a high probability due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 so that the ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 71. There is. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the winning rate to the second starting port 71 was "60% (that is, when 10 balls were launched in the right-handed game, 6 balls were won in the second starting port 71)". In this case, and assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, the above-mentioned is described in FIG. 86 until the jackpot is won, that is, until the second starting port 71 wins a "100 ball" ball. As described above, it is set to take a time of "338 seconds".

However, in the "probability fluctuation state" of "338 seconds", in the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, the player generally has a ball. In order to temporarily stop the firing (so-called stop hitting) (hereinafter, the period during which the player in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode temporarily stops the firing of the ball is "stop hitting". "Period"), the period from the period until the jackpot is won in the "probability fluctuation state" (that is, "338 seconds") to the above-mentioned stop period (that is, "60 seconds" which is the execution time of the "super reach" production mode. + "158 seconds", which is obtained by subtracting "120 seconds", which is the execution time of the "special reach" effect mode, is the firing period of the ball.

In the "probability fluctuation state" (including the "latent probability fluctuation state" described later. The same shall apply hereinafter), the launch time of the ball may be calculated including the case where the ball is stopped in the "normal reach" production mode. Then, the firing time of the balls may be calculated including the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the maximum value (that is, "4") and the ball is stopped. In addition, the general winning opening 63 is placed at a position where the ball launched in the right-handed game can win, and the number of returning balls is calculated in consideration of the winning rate and the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 63. It may be configured.

Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the number of launched balls is "158 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = "263 balls", and the number of returned balls is "263 balls" x "60%". "X" 1 ball (number of prize balls based on the winning of the second starting port 71) "=" 158 balls ".

As a result, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the player fires balls for a period of "158 seconds", and while firing a total of "263 balls", "158 balls" Win a prize ball. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes "263 balls"-"158 balls" = "105 balls".

As shown in FIG. 87, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the fourth embodiment, the main winning destination of the ball launched in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71, which is " The jackpot probability of the special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set to 1/100. Further, although the "latent probability fluctuation state" is not as much as the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the ordinary electric service 72 is opened at a fixed rate and for a short time due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The ball is set so that the ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71. Therefore, when the ball is continuously fired in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the winning rate to the second starting port 71 is "40% (that is, when 10 balls are fired in the right-handed game, the second starting port". In the case of "71 with 4 winnings)", and when the winning rate to the second small winning opening 74a is "45% (that is, when 20 balls are fired in a right-handed game, the second small winning opening" (9 prizes in 74a) ”and, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won, that is, by the time the second starting port 71 wins a“ 100 ball ”ball. It is set to take "845 seconds" time (see FIG. 86).

However, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of "1030 seconds", in the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, the variable winning device 65 based on the jackpot Since there is no opening of the second small winning opening 74a based on the opening of the ball or the opening of the second small winning opening 74a, the player temporarily stops the firing of the ball during the stop hitting period, and therefore wins the big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state". From the period from (that is, "1030 seconds") to the above-mentioned stop period (that is, "90 seconds" which is the execution time of the "super reach" production mode + "180 seconds" which is the execution time of the "special reach" production mode. ) Is subtracted, and "575 seconds" is the firing period of the ball.

Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the fourth embodiment, when the ordinary electric service 72 is open, the ball wins the second starting port 71, while the ordinary electric service 72 is closed. If this is the case, the ball can win the second small winning opening 74a, so that the player continues to shoot the ball in a period other than the above-mentioned stop hitting period. Therefore, the number of launch balls is "575 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "958 balls", and the number of return balls is "958 balls" x "40%" x "1 ball (of the second starting port 71). "Number of prize balls based on winning" + "958 balls" x "45%" x "10 balls (number of prize balls based on winning of the second small winning opening 74a)" = about "4694 balls".

As a result, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of the "consecutive villa" of the fourth embodiment, the player fires a ball for a period of "575 seconds" and shoots a total of "958 balls". , Win the prize ball of "4694 balls". Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player acquires "4694 balls"-"958 balls" = "3736 balls".

Here, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, an increase / decrease in the number of balls held by the player in consideration of the number of launched balls and the number of returned balls described with reference to FIG. 87 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 88, when there is no time saving limiter function, the player acquires "565 balls" at the first big hit, which is the trigger for entering the "renso" state, and the total number of balls in the "renso" state is increased. It becomes "565 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state becomes "111 seconds" (see FIG. 89 (a)).

In addition, when there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "105 balls" in the first "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "565 balls". "-" 105 balls "=" 460 balls ", and the elapsed time from entering the" consecutive villa "state is" 111 seconds "+" 338 seconds "=" 449 seconds "(see FIG. 89 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "637 balls" at the time of the second big hit at the time of "Renso" (the first big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the state is "460 balls" + "637 balls" = "1097 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "449 seconds" + "67 seconds" = "516 seconds". (See FIG. 89 (a)).

In addition, when there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "105 balls" in the second "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "1097 balls". -"105 balls" = "992 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "516 seconds" + "338 seconds" = "854 seconds" (see FIG. 89 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "637 balls" at the time of the third big hit at the time of "Renso" (at the time of the second big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the state is "992 balls" + "637 balls" = "1629 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "854 seconds" + "67 seconds" = "921 seconds". (See FIG. 89 (a)).

In addition, when there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "105 balls" in the third "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "1629 balls". -"105 balls" = "1523 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "921 seconds" + "338 seconds" = "1259 seconds" (see FIG. 89 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "637 balls" at the time of the 4th big hit at the time of "Renso" (at the time of the 3rd big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the "" state is "1523 balls" + "637 balls" = "2160 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1259 seconds" + "67 seconds" = "1326 seconds". (See FIG. 89 (a)).

In addition, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "105 balls" in the fourth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "2160 balls". -"105 balls" = "2055 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1326 seconds" + "338 seconds" = "1664 seconds" (see FIG. 89 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "637 balls" at the time of the 5th big hit at the time of "Renso" (at the time of the 4th big hit after entering "Renso"), and "Renso" The total number of balls in the "" state is "2055 balls" + "637 balls" = "2692 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1664 seconds" + "67 seconds" = "1731 seconds". (See FIG. 89 (a)).

In addition, when there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "105 balls" in the fifth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "2692 balls". -"105 balls" = "2587 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1731 seconds" + "338 seconds" = "2069 seconds" (see FIG. 89 (a)).

Furthermore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the player will get "637 balls" at the 6th big hit at the time of "Renso" (the 5th big hit after entering "Renso"), and the "Renso" will be won. The total number of balls in the state is "2587 balls" + "637 balls" = "3224 balls", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "renso" state is "2069 seconds" + "67 seconds" = "2136 seconds". (See FIG. 89 (a)).

In addition, in the sixth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa" when there is no time saving limiter function, the player consumes "105 balls", and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is "3224 balls". -"105 balls" = "3119 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2136 seconds" + "338 seconds" = "2474 seconds" (see FIG. 89 (a)).

Furthermore, at the time of the 7th big hit at the time of "Renso" when there is no time saving limiter function (at the time of the 6th big hit after entering "Renso"), the player gets "637 balls" and "Renso". The total number of balls in the state is "3119 balls" + "637 balls" = "3756 balls", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "renso" state is "2474 seconds" + "67 seconds" = "2541 seconds". (See FIG. 89 (a)).

Therefore, if there is no time saving limiter function, the total number of balls acquired by the player can be "3756" at "2541 seconds" before one hour (that is, "3600 seconds") elapses. The number of balls acquired by the player per hour tends to be insufficient, which may result in a monotonous increase. In such a pachinko machine, the player may be awakened to the game, and as a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

Here, as shown in FIG. 88, when there is a time saving limiter function, the first big hit, which is the trigger for entering the "renso" state, the first to fifth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", and , The 2nd to 6th jackpots at the time of "Renso" (the 1st to 5th jackpots after entering the "Renso") are the same as when there is no time saving limiter function. On the other hand, at the 6th jackpot after entering the "renso" (at the time of the 5th jackpot after entering the "renso"), the time saving limiter function is activated to enter the "latent probability fluctuation state".

Then, when entering this "latent probability fluctuation state", the player acquires "3736 balls", and the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "3224 balls" + "3736 balls" = "6960 balls". , And the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2136 seconds" + "845 seconds" = "2981 seconds" (see FIG. 89 (b)).

In addition, when there is a time saving limiter function, the 7th big hit at the time of "renso" (the 6th big hit after entering the "renso") is a big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the player Acquired "58 balls", the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "6960 balls" + "58 balls" = "7018 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2981 seconds" + “415 seconds” = “3396 seconds” (see FIG. 89 (b)).

Therefore, in the case of having the time saving limiter function, at the stage where one hour has passed since entering the "renso" state, the player is still less than "7200 balls" and is in the "latent probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, it is set so that there is a high possibility that it will take about 7 minutes from entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" to acquiring the next jackpot. As a result, the number of balls acquired by the player in a short time of about one hour can be gradually increased as compared with a pachinko machine without a time saving limiter function. In addition, by overlapping the "renso" state and entering the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball can be placed in the second small winning opening 74a, which is opened based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol. By maintaining this state, it is possible to create a playability in which a prize ball can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the case of entering the "latent probability fluctuation state", if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won early, the "renso" state can be maintained again, but the jackpot is not won. However, by maintaining the state of the "latent probability fluctuation state" for a long time, it is possible to obtain a prize ball based on the small hit winning of the second special symbol. Therefore, when the player enters the "latent probability fluctuation state", the situation is advantageous for the player regardless of which result is derived, and the game is expected to obtain a lot of game value. It is possible to make people embrace and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that about six balls launched in the left-handed game can win about six balls per minute for the first starting port 64. Further, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, one jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is always selected. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and does not perform a variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured in.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the opening width of the first starting port 64 is wider than that of the first starting port 64 of the first embodiment, and the ball launched in the left-handed game is the first starting port. It is configured so that about 12 prizes can be won in 1 minute for 64. Further, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, one jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, if an advantageous jackpot type is won, the advantageous gaming state will continue until the next jackpot. Further, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" are configured to be substantially the same (third embodiment). same as). Further, when a jackpot is hit by the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is always selected. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the left-handed game and the right-handed game can be selected by the player, and the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Either one of the variable effects corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments are used for the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. The description will be omitted. In particular, the selection ratio between the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is the dynamic of the first special symbol in the third embodiment. Since it is the same as the selection ratio between the fluctuation time of the display and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment is that the opening width of the first starting port 64 is widened.

To the first starting port 64 of the fifth embodiment, about 12 balls (so-called S1 = 12) fired in the left-handed game win a prize per minute (so-called S1 = 12), so that the first starting port of the first embodiment is won. The opening width is wider than 64, and game nails and the like are planted in the surrounding area. As a result, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the number of balls fired in the right-handed game is not as many as the number of winning balls in the second starting port 71 (for example, about 80 balls per minute), but the balls are fired in the left-handed game. The ball is configured to easily win a prize in the first starting port 64. The number of prize balls based on the winning of the first starting port 64 is set to 5, which is larger than the number of prize balls of the second starting port 71 (that is, 1). , Even in the case of a left-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the number of balls held by the player can be relatively suppressed by the prize balls based on the winning of the first starting port 64. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the jackpot type table 202b of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol stored in ROM 202 in 5th Embodiment. The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment is that when the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "latent probability A" is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained until the next jackpot is won. And the point that the jackpot type "probability variation A" is always selected when the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the dynamic display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot is won in, either the jackpot type "probability variation A" or "time saving A" is selected before the time saving limit is reached or after the time saving limit is reached, and if the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type "latent probability" is selected. A point where "A" or "normal A" is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, as a jackpot type, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, until the next jackpot, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are both in a high probability state. After the "probability variation A" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" and the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, but until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. During the period, "Time saving A" corresponding to the "time reduction state" where the hit probability of the normal symbol is high, and after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, until the special symbol hits the next jackpot, the special symbol While it becomes a jackpot probability, "latent probability A" corresponding to the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the hit probability of a normal symbol becomes a low probability state, and after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of a special symbol and normal There is a "normal A" in which the probability of hitting a symbol is both low.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 91 (a), the first special symbol is before the time reduction limit is reached and in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state". When the jackpot of is generated, the value "0 to 49" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability variation A", and the value "50 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A". It is associated. In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached and a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", or "time reduction state", the "latent probability A" is dealt with. The value "0 to 49" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated, and the value "50 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "normal A". Further, when the time saving limit is reached and a jackpot of the first special symbol occurs in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the value "0 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is set for the "probability variation A". It is associated.

Therefore, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit, the jackpot type of "probability change A" is 50% and the jackpot type of "time saving A" is 50%. It will be. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type of "latent A" is 50% and the jackpot type of "normal A" is 50%. Will be done. Further, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" after reaching the time saving limit, the jackpot type of "probability variation A" is won at a rate of 100%. That is, it is configured so that the transition probability of the special symbol to the high probability state differs (multiple) depending on the game state.

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 91 (b), the number of jackpots is 1 to 5 before reaching the time saving limit and after reaching the time saving limit (that is, after resetting the time saving limit number of times). In addition, when a jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type counter C2 is used for the "probability change A". The value "0 to 79" is associated with the value "0 to 79", and the value "80 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "time saving A". In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of jackpots after resetting the time reduction limit is the sixth), and the "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "latent probability fluctuation state" When the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs in, the value "0 to 79" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability A", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "normal A". "80 to 99" are associated with each other.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit, the jackpot type of "probability change A" is 80%, and the jackpot type of "time saving A" is 20%. You will be elected at a rate. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type of "latent A" is 80% instead of "probability change A", and "time saving A" is replaced with "". Usually, the jackpot type of "A" will be won at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, when the time saving limit is reached, if the ball is fired in a right-handed game and the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 71, the probability is 80%. Although it is possible to win the jackpot type "latent A" and maintain the high probability state of the special symbol again, there is a 20% chance of winning the jackpot type "normal A" and the "renso" state. Is configured to end. In the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is much longer than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Since the time (that is, "600 seconds") is configured to be selected, the jackpot type "latent A" or "normal A" that can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the time saving limit is reached. Is configured to be difficult to appear.

In addition, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" after reaching the time saving limit, when a ball is fired in a right-handed game and a big hit is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 71. There is an 80% chance of winning the jackpot type "Probability Change A" and entering the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol again, but there is a 20% chance of winning the jackpot type "Time saving A". Is won, and the high-probability state of the special symbol ends. On the other hand, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" after reaching the time saving limit, when a ball is fired in a left-handed game and a big hit is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 64. Is configured to be able to win the jackpot type "probability variation A" with a probability of 100, and to maintain the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol again.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is released to a certain extent when the player fires a ball in a right-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state" after reaching the time saving limit. While creating a playability that aims to win the jackpot type "probability change A" with a probability of 80% while winning a ball in the second starting port 71 by the ordinary electric service 72 that is obtained, the "latent probability fluctuation" after reaching the time saving limit In the "state", when the player shoots a ball in a left-handed game and plays the game, since there is no prize-winning assistance by the ordinary electric service 72 or the like, 100 while letting the ball win the first starting port 64 by himself. It is possible to create a playability that aims to win the jackpot type "probability change A" with a probability of%. When the left-handed game is played in the "latent probability fluctuation state", it is more difficult to obtain the execution trigger of the dynamic display of the special symbol than when the right-handed game is played. It will take more time than if you did. As a result, the time until the jackpot is won becomes longer, and the game result is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained in a predetermined time when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress such a situation, and it can be configured so that the game value per hour given to the player does not become too high (too much).

Here, with reference to FIG. 92, when the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment enters the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol will continue and the probability of ending will be described. .. FIG. 92 is a list showing the number of times the special symbol is maintained in the high-probability state (0 to 10 times) when the special symbol enters the high-probability state, and the arrival probability and end probability of the number of “renso” times. Therefore, it is a list showing the case where the game is played by the right-handed game and the case where the game is played by the left-handed game in the "latent probability fluctuation state". In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot probability of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot is 1/100 at the set value "1" and the set value "2". 1.05 / 100 at the set value "3", 1.1 / 100 at the set value "3", 1.15 / 100 at the set value "4", 1.2 / 100 at the set value "5", and at the set value "6". It is configured to be 1.25 / 100. Then, in any of the set values, when the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, the state is configured to continue until the next big hit is won. Here, for convenience of explanation, the continuation probability and the end probability of the high probability state of the special symbol in the set value "1" will be described, and the description of other set values will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot type of "probability variation A" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the left-handed game, the state shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot game is completed. .. Then, when the launch mode is switched from the left-handed game to the right-handed game encouraged in the "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type "probability change" again in the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the right-handed game is continued. A game of whether or not to win "A" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 92, whether or not the jackpot type “probability variation A” is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 80.0%. In addition, "about" is omitted in the notation of percentage. When entering the "probability fluctuation state" at the first jackpot, the average number of "consecutive villas" until the high probability state of the special symbol ends (that is, until the jackpot type "time saving A" or "normal A" is won) Will occur 4.99 times (about 5 times).

First, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol will end by winning the jackpot type "time saving A" is 20.0%. ..

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit again (once) is 80.0, as described above. %, And the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends after the high probability state of the special symbol is continued once is 36.0%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit twice is 64.0%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued twice, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 48.8%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit three times is 51.2%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued three times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 59.0%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit four times is 41.0%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued four times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 67.2%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit 5 times is 32.8%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued 5 times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 73.8%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is 6 times is 26.3%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued 6 times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 79.0%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit 7 times is 21.0%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued 7 times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 83.2%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit eight times is 16.8%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued 8 times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 86.6%.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit 9 times is 13.4%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued 9 times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 89.3%.

Furthermore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained when the jackpot is hit 10 times is 10.7%, which is a high probability of the special symbol. After the probability state is continued 10 times, the probability that the high probability state of the special symbol ends is 91.4%.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when the time saving limiter function is activated and the player enters the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball launch mode is selected according to the player's intention to play the game. Is configured to be possible. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state" when the "probability change A" is won in the first jackpot, when the jackpot is hit 6 times (that is, when the "latent probability fluctuation state" is entered), the player hits right until then. When the game is switched from the game to the left-handed game and the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot type "probability change A" is always selected. It is possible to maintain the high probability state of the special symbol with the same arrival probability as when the jackpot is hit 6 times. Therefore, when the player enters the "latent probability fluctuation state", it is easy for the player to win the second starting port 71 by opening the normal electric service 72 to a certain extent, but there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol will end. There is a right-handed game, or a left-handed game in which you have to win a prize in the first starting port 64 by yourself, but you can always maintain a high probability state of the special symbol. This makes it possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, the average staying time in each game state and each jackpot state of the fifth embodiment and the game value obtained in each state (time) will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the number of occurrences, required time, and integrated time of each phenomenon in each gaming state and jackpot state of the fifth embodiment, and also showing the average total staying time in each gaming state and jackpot state. .. Further, FIG. 94 shows the winning rate, the required time, the number of occurrences, the firing time, the number of firing balls, and the number of returning balls for each phenomenon in each jackpot state and each gaming state in the “renso” state of the fifth embodiment. In addition to showing, it is a figure which showed the total number of acquired balls in each jackpot state and each game state. Further, FIG. 95 shows the number of acquired balls and the total number of balls according to the number of “renso” in the case where the right-handed game is performed and the case where the left-handed game is performed in the “latent probability fluctuation state” of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed. Further, FIG. 96 (a) is a slump graph at the time of “ream villa” when the right-handed game is performed in the “latent probability fluctuation state” of the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 96 (b) is the fifth embodiment. It is a slump graph at the time of "ream villa" when the right-handed game is performed in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of the form. In the description of FIGS. 93 to 96, the jackpot probability and the like will be described in the case of the set value "1", and the other set values (that is, the set values "2" to "6") will be described. For convenience, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment and the first embodiment is the total number of acquired balls and the total time when the left-handed game is performed in the "latent probability fluctuation state". When the right-handed game is performed in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the total number of acquired balls and the total time are the same as those in the first embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 93, when the right-handed game is performed in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is about 1/100 (100/10000), and the "non-reach" at the time of loss. The probability that the production mode will be selected is 78/100, the probability that the "normal reach" production mode will be selected at the time of loss is 15/100, and the probability that the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss will be selected. However, it is 5/100, and the probability that the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss is selected is 2/100.

Therefore, for example, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" effect mode is selected as the effect mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, the first special symbol While the variation effect is performed 100 times, the average number of "non-reach" effect modes at the time of loss is 77 times (since one "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance is replaced with a jackpot variation, 78-1 = (Calculated with 77) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss appears 15 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss appears 5 times on average, "special reach" production mode at the time of loss averages 2 times The "special reach" production mode at the time of reappearance and big hit will appear once on average.

Here, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol (particularly, the "non-reach" effect mode and the "normal reach" effect mode) is selected to be longer than the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is easily configured, and it is a "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss between the time when the player enters the "latent probability fluctuation state" and the time when the next jackpot state occurs without interruption of the fluctuation production of the first special symbol. Since the fluctuation time can be performed in "15 seconds", it takes 77 times x "15 seconds" = "1155 seconds", and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss can be performed in "20 seconds", so 15 Time x "20 seconds" = "300 seconds" is required, and the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss can be performed for "30 seconds", so 5 times x "30 seconds" = "150 seconds" time Since the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss can be performed in "90 seconds", it takes time of 2 times x "90 seconds" = "180 seconds", and the "special reach" production at the time of a big hit Since the embodiment can be performed in "90 seconds", it takes a time of 1 time x "90 seconds" = "90 seconds".

That is, the average total time from entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" to the occurrence of the next jackpot state without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is "1155 seconds" + "300 seconds" + "150 seconds" + "180 seconds" + "90 seconds" = "1030 seconds".

On the other hand, when the right-handed game is performed in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is about 1/100 (100/10000) as in the first embodiment, and the "non-reach" at the time of loss is achieved. The probability that the production mode will be selected is 78/100, the probability that the "normal reach" production mode will be selected at the time of loss is 15/100, and the probability that the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss will be selected. However, it is 5/100, and the probability that the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss is selected is 2/100.

Therefore, for example, assuming that the jackpot is won according to the probability, until the jackpot is won in which the "special reach" effect mode is selected as the effect mode at the time of the jackpot, that is, the second special symbol While the variation effect is performed 100 times, the average number of "non-reach" effect modes at the time of loss is 77 times (since one "non-reach" effect mode with the highest probability of appearance is replaced with a jackpot variation, 78-1 = (Calculated with 77) Appearance, "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss appears 15 times on average, "super reach" production mode at the time of loss appears 5 times on average, "special reach" production mode at the time of loss averages 2 times The "special reach" production mode at the time of reappearance and big hit will appear once on average.

In this case, the fluctuation time of the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss between the time when the "latent probability fluctuation state" is entered and the time when the next jackpot state occurs without interruption of the fluctuation production of the second special symbol. Can be performed in "5 seconds", so it takes 77 times x "5 seconds" = "385 seconds", and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss can be performed in "15 seconds", so 15 times x It takes "15 seconds" = "225 seconds", and the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss can be performed for "30 seconds", so it takes 5 times x "30 seconds" = "150 seconds". However, since the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss can be performed in "90 seconds", it takes time of 2 times x "90 seconds" = "180 seconds", and the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit is Since it can be performed in "90 seconds", it takes a time of 1 time x "90 seconds" = "90 seconds".

That is, the average total time from entering the "latent probability fluctuation state" to the occurrence of the next jackpot state without interruption of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is "385 seconds" + "225 seconds" + "150 seconds" + "90 seconds" + "90 seconds" = "1030 seconds".

In this way, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", there are cases where the right-handed game is continued and the game is played by switching from the right-handed game to the left-handed game. The average staying time in the "fluctuation state" can be different. Therefore, while realizing a wide variety of playability according to the player's intention, when a left-handed game is selected, the setting is set so that it is easier to spend time than when performing a right-handed game, and a big hit is won. By lengthening the time until, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained in a predetermined time appears when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10. It can be configured so that the game value per hour given to the player does not become too high (too much). The fluctuation time selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol may be longer than the fluctuation time selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the "big hit state" (for the variable winning device 65) in the case of a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state". (When the ball is continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds"), the OP time is "10 seconds", and the minimum (shortest) opening time of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of each round is the maximum number of winnings. 10 pieces x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", each IT time is "3 seconds", and the ED time is "10 seconds".

Then, in the jackpot of the first special symbol in this "latent probability fluctuation state", the opening effect is performed once, the round is 10 rounds, the interval is 9 times obtained by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is. It is done once.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot win in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, from the start to the end of the "renso" jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state". In the meantime, it takes "10 seconds" of OP time as an opening effect, and one round can be performed in "6 seconds" on average, so "6 seconds" x 10 = "60 seconds" is required, and 1 Since the interval can be set to "3 seconds", "3 seconds" x 9 = "27 seconds" is required, and the ED time "10 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start to the end of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is "10 seconds" + "60 seconds" + "27 seconds" + "10 seconds" = " It becomes "107 seconds".

Next, as shown in FIG. 93, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the “big hit state” (with respect to the variable winning device 65) in the case of a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the “latent probability fluctuation state”. If the ball is continuously fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds"), the OP time is "180 seconds", and the minimum (shortest) opening time of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of each round is the maximum number of winnings. 10 pieces x "0.6 seconds" = "6 seconds", each IT time is "3 seconds", and the ED time is "180 seconds".

Then, in the jackpot of the second special symbol in this "latent probability fluctuation state", the opening effect is performed once, the round is 10 rounds, the interval is 9 times obtained by subtracting 1 from the total number of rounds, and the ending effect is. It is done once.

In this case, if all the balls fired during the jackpot win in the state where the variable winning device 65 is open, from the start to the end of the "renso" jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state". In the meantime, it takes "180 seconds" of OP time as an opening effect, and one round can be performed in "6 seconds" on average, so "6 seconds" x 10 = "60 seconds" is required, and 1 Since the interval can be set to "3 seconds", "3 seconds" x 9 = "27 seconds" is required, and the ED time "180 seconds" is required as the ending effect.

That is, the shortest total time from the start to the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is "180 seconds" + "60 seconds" + "27 seconds" + "180 seconds" = " 447 seconds ".

In this way, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot time of the second special symbol that occurs when the right-handed game is continued and the game is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game. The average staying time can be different from the jackpot time of the first special symbol that occurs when the above is performed. Therefore, while realizing a variety of playability according to the player's intention, when the left-handed game is selected, the time required for the jackpot is set shorter than when the right-handed game is performed, and the game is dynamic. Since the difference in the amount of time spent in the display fluctuation time can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and the player from being awakened.

In addition, the time to digest the jackpot when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol is shorter than the time to digest the jackpot when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It may be configured to be. In this case, the above-mentioned "premium live effect" is performed on the jackpot of the first special symbol that is long, while the "premium live effect" is not performed on the jackpot of the second special symbol that is short. May be good.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94, in the jackpot of the first special symbol after reaching the limiter at the time of "renso", the main winning destination of the launched ball is the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening). The opening time of the jackpot of the first special symbol after the activation of the limiter is "10 seconds", and the jackpot of the first special symbol after the activation of the limiter is performed "once". Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "10 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "17 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 of the jackpot of the first special symbol after reaching the limiter is the same as the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and the shortest opening time when all the launched balls win is "6 seconds" × "10 rounds (10 times)" = "60 seconds", but assuming that the winning rate for the variable winning device 65 is "70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired)". The launch time of the ball is "60 seconds" ÷ "70%" = about "86 seconds", the number of launch balls is "86 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "143 balls", and the return ball The number is the prize balls "15 balls" x "10 balls" x "10 rounds" = "1500 balls".

Further, the interval time of the jackpot of the first special symbol after reaching the limiter is "3 seconds" longer than the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and each round in the jackpot of the first special symbol after the limiter is activated. In the meantime, a total of "9 times" will be held. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "3 seconds" x "9 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "45 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the jackpot of the first special symbol after reaching the limiter is "10 seconds", and the jackpot of the first special symbol after reaching the limiter is performed "once". Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "10 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "17 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, in the entire period of the jackpot of the first special symbol after reaching the limiter, the player has a total firing time of "10 seconds" + "86 seconds" + "27 seconds" + "10 seconds" = "133". During "seconds", the balls are fired, and while firing "17 balls" + "143 balls" + "45 balls" + "17 balls" = "222 balls", respectively, "0 balls" + Obtain the prize balls of "1500 balls" + "0 balls" + "0 balls" = "1500 balls". Therefore, in the jackpot of the first special symbol after reaching the limiter, the player can acquire "1500 balls"-"222 balls" = "1278 balls".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94, in the jackpot of the second special symbol after reaching the limiter at the time of "renso", the main winning destination of the launched ball is the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening). The opening time of the jackpot of the second special symbol after the activation of the limiter is "180 seconds", and the jackpot of the second special symbol after the activation of the limiter is performed "once". Then, in this opening time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, if the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "180 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "300 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

In addition, the opening time of the variable winning device 65 of the jackpot of the second special symbol after reaching the limiter is the same as the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and the shortest opening time when all the launched balls win is "6 seconds" × "10 rounds (10 times)" = "60 seconds", but assuming that the winning rate for the variable winning device 65 is "70% (that is, 7 balls are won when 10 balls are fired)". The launch time of the ball is "60 seconds" ÷ "70%" = about "86 seconds", the number of launch balls is "86 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "143 balls", and the return ball The number is the prize balls "15 balls" x "10 balls" x "10 rounds" = "1500 balls".

Further, the interval time of the jackpot of the second special symbol after reaching the limiter is "3 seconds" longer than the first jackpot and the jackpot before the limiter is activated, and each round in the jackpot of the second special symbol after the limiter is activated. In the meantime, a total of "9 times" will be held. Then, in this interval time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "3 seconds" x "9 times" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "45 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

Further, the ending time of the jackpot of the second special symbol after reaching the limiter is "180 seconds", and the jackpot of the second special symbol after reaching the limiter is performed "once". Then, in this ending time, since the variable winning device 65 is not opened, when the balls are continuously fired, the number of shot balls is "180 seconds" x "1 time" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = " It is "300 balls", and the number of return balls is "0 balls".

As a result, in the entire period of the jackpot of the second special symbol after reaching the limiter, the player has a total firing time of "180 seconds" + "86 seconds" + "27 seconds" + "180 seconds" = "473". During "seconds", the balls are fired, and while firing "300 balls" + "143 balls" + "45 balls" + "300 balls" = "788 balls", respectively, "0 balls" + Obtain the prize balls of "1500 balls" + "0 balls" + "0 balls" = "1500 balls". Therefore, in the jackpot of the second special symbol after reaching the limiter, the player can acquire "1500 balls"-"788 balls" = "712 balls".

Next, as shown in FIG. 94, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the main winning destination of the ball launched in the left-handed game is the first starting port 64, and the "latent probability fluctuation". The jackpot probability of the special symbol in "state" is set to 1/100. Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", since the winning assist function by the ordinary electric service 72 or the like is not activated, the first starting port 64 is configured to win a prize by itself. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", when the ball is continuously fired other than the stop hitting period, the winning rate to the first starting port 64 is "12% (that is, 100 ball is fired in the right-handed game). In that case, 12 prizes were won in the first starting port 64) ”, and assuming that the jackpot was won according to the probability, until the jackpot was won, that is, the first starting port 64 As shown in FIG. 93, it is set that it takes "1875 seconds" to win a prize of "100 balls".

However, in this "latent probability fluctuation state" of "1875 seconds", not only the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, but also a slight jackpot is expected. Even in the "normal reach" production mode that can be performed, the player temporarily stops firing the ball during the stop striking period, so that the period until the jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is won (that is, "1875 seconds"). ) To the above stoppage period (that is, "300 seconds" which is the execution time of the "normal reach" production mode + "150 seconds" which is the execution time of the "super reach" production mode + the execution time of the "special reach" production mode. "1155 seconds", which is obtained by subtracting a certain "270 seconds"), is the firing period of the ball.

Therefore, when the left-handed game is stopped and played in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the number of shot balls is "1155 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "1925 balls". Yes, the number of return balls is "1925 balls" x "12%" x "3 balls (number of prize balls based on the winning of the first starting port 64)" = about "693 balls".

As a result, when playing with a stop in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the player fires a ball for a period of "1155 seconds" and fires a total of "1925 balls". While doing so, he won the prize ball of "693 balls". Therefore, when playing a game without stopping in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes "1925 balls"-"693 balls" = "1232 balls". ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the main winning destination of the ball launched in the right-handed game is the second starting port 71, and the "latent probability fluctuation". The jackpot probability of the special symbol in "state" is set to 1/100. Further, although the "latent probability fluctuation state" is not as much as the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the ordinary electric service 72 is opened at a fixed rate and for a short time due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The ball is set so that the ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", when the ball is continuously fired outside the stop hitting period, the winning rate to the second starting port 71 is "40% (that is, 10 balls are fired in the right-handed game). In that case, 4 prizes were awarded to the 2nd starting port 71) ”and, assuming that the jackpot was won according to the probability, until the jackpot was won, that is, the 2nd starting port 71 As shown in FIG. 93, it takes "1030 seconds" to win a prize of "100 balls".

However, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" of "1030 seconds", in the production mode in which the winning of the jackpot can be expected, that is, in the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode, the player has a stop period. During that time, in order to temporarily stop the firing of the ball, the period from the period until the jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state" (that is, "1030 seconds") to the above-mentioned stop-stop period (that is, the "super reach" production mode) The ball firing period is "610 seconds", which is obtained by subtracting the execution time of "150 seconds" + the execution time of the "special reach" production mode ("270 seconds").

Therefore, when the right-handed game is played without stopping in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the number of shot balls is "610 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "1017 balls". Yes, the number of return balls is "1017 balls" x "40%" x "1 ball (number of prize balls based on the winning of the second starting port 71)" = about "407 balls".

As a result, when playing without stopping in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "renso", the player fires a ball for a period of "610 seconds" and fires a total of "1017 balls". While doing so, he won the prize ball of "407 balls". Therefore, when playing without stopping in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes "1017 balls"-"407 balls" = "610 balls". ..

On the other hand, in this "latent probability fluctuation state", if the ball is continuously fired during a period other than the stop striking period, the consumption of the ball will increase, so that the player can prevent a useless launch ball. Depending on the skill, the ball is fired only when the normal electric service 72 is open (when the normal electric service 72 can be opened), and the ball launch is temporarily stopped in other situations. , In the situation where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated (for example, 4 or 3), the ball firing is temporarily stopped, or the ball firing is performed when the "normal reach" effect mode is executed. It may stop temporarily. In this case, the winning rate to the second starting port 71 is higher than that in the case without stop hitting, and by reducing the number of wasted balls as much as possible, the number of shot balls is approximately halved (that is, in the case without stop hitting). "610 balls" ÷ 2 = "305 balls").

Therefore, when playing with a stop in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the number of shot balls is "305 seconds" ÷ "0.6 seconds" = about "508 balls", and the return ball. The number is "508 balls" x "80%" x "1 ball (number of prize balls based on the winning of the second starting port 71)" = about "406 balls".

As a result, when playing with a stop in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player fires a ball for a period of "305 seconds" and fires a total of "508 balls". While doing so, he won the prize ball of "406 balls". Therefore, when playing with a stop in the "latent probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", the player consumes "508 balls"-"406 balls" = "102 balls". ..

Here, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, an increase / decrease in the number of balls held by the player in consideration of the number of launched balls and the number of returned balls of the fifth embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the case where the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player acquires "1227 balls" at the first big hit, which is the trigger for entering the "renso" state, and "reams". The total number of balls in the "villa" state is "1227", and the elapsed time from the entry into the "sou" state is "164 seconds" (see FIG. 96 (a)).

In addition, when the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player consumes "122 balls" in the first "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and is in the "ream villa" state. The total number of balls in the above is "1227 balls"-"122 balls" = "1105 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "164 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "567 seconds" (Fig. 96 (a)).

Furthermore, in the case where the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player will be asked to "1308" at the time of the second big hit at the time of "Renso" (at the time of the first big hit after entering "Renso"). Acquired "balls", the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "1105 balls" + "1308 balls" = "2413 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "567 seconds" + "115" Seconds = "682 seconds" (see FIG. 96A).

In addition, when the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player consumes "122 balls" in the second "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and is in the "ream villa" state. The total number of balls in the above is "2413 balls"-"122 balls" = "2291 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "682 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "1085 seconds" (Fig. 96 (a)).

Furthermore, in the case where the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player will be asked to "1308" at the time of the third big hit at the time of "Renso" (at the time of the second big hit after entering "Renso"). The total number of balls in the "renso" state is "2291 balls" + "1308 balls" = "3599 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1085 seconds" + "115". Seconds = "1200 seconds" (see FIG. 96A).

In addition, when the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player consumes "122 balls" in the third "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and is in the "ream villa" state. The total number of balls in the above is "3599 balls"-"122 balls" = "3477 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1200 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "1603 seconds" (Fig. 96 (a)).

Furthermore, in the case where the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, at the time of the fourth big hit at the time of "renso" (at the time of the third big hit after entering "renso"), the player is "1308". Acquired "balls", the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "3477 balls" + "1308 balls" = "4785 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1603 seconds" + "115" Seconds = "1718 seconds" (see FIG. 96 (a)).

In addition, when the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player consumes "122 balls" in the fourth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and is in the "ream villa" state. The total number of balls in the above is "4785 balls"-"122 balls" = "4663 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "1718 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "2121 seconds" (Fig. 96 (a)).

Furthermore, in the case where the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player will be asked to "1308" at the time of the fifth big hit at the time of "Renso" (at the time of the fourth big hit after entering "Renso"). The total number of balls in the "renso" state is "4663 balls" + "1308 balls" = "5791 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2121 seconds" + "115". Seconds = "2236 seconds" (see FIG. 96A).

In addition, when the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, the player consumes "122 balls" in the fifth "probability fluctuation state" at the time of "ream villa", and is in the "ream villa" state. The total number of balls in the above is "5791 balls"-"122 balls" = "5849 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2236 seconds" + "403 seconds" = "2639 seconds" (Fig. 96 (a)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 95, at the 6th jackpot after entering the "renso" (at the 5th jackpot after entering the "renso"), the time saving limiter function is activated and the "latent probability fluctuation" is activated. Enter the "state". In the case of entering this "latent probability fluctuation state", if the player continues to shoot the ball in the right-handed game, the player consumes "102 balls" (when there is a stop hit), and the player consumes "102 balls". The total number of balls in the "renso" state is "7157 balls"-"102 balls" = "7055 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2754 seconds" + "1030 seconds" = "3784 seconds". (See FIG. 96 (a)).

In addition, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball is continuously fired in the right-handed game, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, and the seventh jackpot at the time of "renso" (after entering "renso"). At the time of the 6th jackpot), it is the jackpot of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player acquires "712 balls", and the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "7055 balls". + "712 balls" = "7767 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "3784 seconds" + "473 seconds" = "4257 seconds" (see FIG. 96 (a)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95, when the player has entered the "latent probability fluctuation state" and has switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game and fired a ball, the player has entered the "latent probability fluctuation state". In this case, if the player continues to shoot the ball in the right-handed game, the player consumes "1232 balls" (when there is a stop hit), and the total number of balls in the "ream villa" state is increased. "7157 balls"-"1232 balls" = "5925 balls", and the elapsed time from entering the "renso" state is "2754 seconds" + "1875 seconds" = "4629 seconds" (see FIG. 96 (b)). ).

Then, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the ball is continuously fired in the left-handed game, and the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, and the seventh jackpot at the time of "renso" (after entering "renso"). At the time of the 6th jackpot), it is the jackpot of the first special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player acquires the "ball", and the total number of balls in the "renso" state is "5925 balls" + “Ball” = “ball”, and the elapsed time from entering the “renso” state is “4629 seconds” + “second” = “second” (see FIG. 96 (b)).

With this configuration, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" that occurs after the time saving limiter is activated at the time of "renso", the staying time, the game value of the jackpot given, the execution time of the jackpot, and the game of the transition destination By making the game value in each state different, it is possible to let the player select the firing mode by his / her own will and realize the desired game. Therefore, while realizing a wide variety of playability according to the player's intention, when a left-handed game is selected, the setting is set so that it is easier to spend time than when performing a right-handed game, and a big hit is won. By lengthening the time until, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained in a predetermined time appears when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10. It can be configured so that the game value per hour given to the player does not become too high (too much). In addition, while realizing a wide variety of playability according to the player's intention, when a left-handed game is selected, the time required for a jackpot is set shorter than when a right-handed game is performed, and the game is dynamic. Since the difference in the amount of time spent in the display fluctuation time can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and the player from being awakened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the transition of the “launch mode selection effect” after the 6 consecutive villas performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment, and the “latent probability fluctuation state” performed in the “latent probability fluctuation state”. It is the figure which showed the "challenge mode" or "safety mode", FIG. 97 (a) is a figure which showed the state which the big hit of the 6th consecutive villa occurred, and FIG. 97 (b) is a figure 97 (a). ) Is a state in which the “launch mode selection effect” is performed on the ending screen of the jackpot state of the sixth consecutive villa, and FIG. 97 (c) shows the state of FIG. 97 (b). It is a figure which showed the screen which "left-handed mode production" is executed when the left-handed game is selected in "launch mode selection effect", and FIG. 97 (d) is the state of FIG. 97 (b). It is a figure which showed the screen which "right-handed mode production" is executed when right-handed game is selected in "launch mode selection effect".

FIG. 97A shows the display state of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the “latent probability fluctuation state” that occurs after the time reduction limit is reached, and each symbol sequence of the main display area Dm is shown. In Z1 to Z3, the jackpot result of "777" is displayed as the display result of the variation effect of the second special symbol. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the jackpot type "latent probability A" is selected by 80%. It is configured to be. That is, in FIG. 97 (a), in the "latent probability fluctuation state" that is entered when the time saving limit function is activated, the jackpot type "latent probability A" is won in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, and the jackpot type "latent probability A" is selected. The jackpot of "" indicates the state that will occur in the future.

Next, in FIG. 97 (b), the “launch mode selection effect” is executed at the ending time of the jackpot of the jackpot type “latent probability A” won in FIG. 97 (a). In the state of FIG. 97 (b), in the "latent probability fluctuation state" started after the big hit, the player is made to select whether to play the game in the right-handed game or the left-handed game. "Direction" is in progress. When the player selects one of the game modes (launch mode) during the execution of this "launch mode selection effect", the effect corresponding to the game mode selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is executed.

In this "launch mode selection effect", the display area of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into two, and the challenge mode selection display 81m suggesting that the game is performed in the left-handed game is displayed in the left side area thereof. Then, the safety mode selection display 81n suggesting that the game is played in the right-handed game is displayed in the right side area, and the button display 81p suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed in the central portion of the display area. In this "launch mode selection display", each time the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the challenge mode selection display 81m and the safe mode selection display 81n are alternately selected, and the challenge mode is selected at the end of the ending time. The game mode corresponding to the selection display 81m or the safety mode selection display 81n is configured to start.

Next, FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the “challenge mode” in which the left-handed game is encouraged is executed from the state of FIG. 97 (b). In FIG. 97 (b), when the ending time ends and the challenge mode selection display 81m is selected in the above-mentioned "launch mode selection effect", this "challenge mode" is displayed. In this "challenge mode", the challenge mode display 81q indicating the game mode is displayed in the upper left part of the display area, and the left-handed suggestion display 81r suggesting the firing mode is displayed in the upper right part of the display area. 1 A variable effect corresponding to the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed. When the player enters the "challenge mode", the left-handed suggestion display 81r can recognize the firing mode of the ball selected by the player. In the left-handed game "challenge mode", the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm.

Next, FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the “safety mode” in which the right-handed game is encouraged is executed from the state of FIG. 97 (b). In FIG. 97B, when the ending time ends and the safe mode selection display 81n is selected in the above-mentioned "launch mode selection effect", this "safety mode" is displayed. In this "safety mode", the safe mode display 81s indicating the game mode is displayed in the upper left part of the display area, and the right-handed suggestion display 81t suggesting the firing mode is displayed in the upper right part of the display area. 2 A variable effect corresponding to the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed. When the player enters the "safety mode", the right-handed suggestion display 81t allows the player to recognize the launch mode of the ball selected by the player. In the right-handed game "safety mode", the variation effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm.

As described above, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" that occurs after the time saving limiter is activated at the time of "ream villa", the player is made to select the launch mode of the ball, and the game in each launch mode can be executed. At the same time, by making the staying time in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the game value of the jackpot given, the execution time of the jackpot, and the game value of the transition destination game state different for each launch mode, the player himself / herself It is possible to realize a desired game by selecting the firing mode with the intention of. Therefore, while realizing a wide variety of playability according to the player's intention, when a left-handed game is selected, the setting is set so that it is easier to spend time than when performing a right-handed game, and a big hit is won. By lengthening the time until, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained in a predetermined time appears when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10. It can be configured so that the game value per hour given to the player does not become too high (too much). In addition, while realizing a wide variety of playability according to the player's intention, when a left-handed game is selected, the time required for a jackpot is set shorter than when a right-handed game is performed, and the game is dynamic. Since the difference in the amount of time spent in the display fluctuation time can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and the player from being awakened.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three patterns of variable display times of the normal symbol are provided according to the game state, and three patterns of opening patterns of the normal electric service 72 are provided according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the "latent probability fluctuation state", the "probability fluctuation state", and the "time reduction state", the variable display time of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the normal electric service 72 are set, respectively. It is configured differently.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same variable display time and opening pattern are set in the "normal game state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" are set. ”, The same variable display time and opening pattern are set. That is, the variable display time of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the normal electric service 72 are set in two patterns of the low probability state and the high probability state of the normal symbol.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments. Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments are used for the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments. The description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the random number table 202h per normal figure, the normal figure fluctuation table 202i, and the ordinary electric service opening table 202j in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202h per normal figure stored in the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (b) is a diagram stored in the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 (c) schematically shows an example of a normal electric service opening table 202j stored in the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure. In the sixth embodiment, the random number table 202h per normal figure is equivalent to that of the first embodiment, while the normal figure variation table 202i and the ordinary electric service open table 202j are different from the first embodiment and have a low probability state of the ordinary symbol. The variable display time of the normal symbol and the open pattern of the normal electric service 72 are set in each of the two patterns of the high probability state. Since the random number table 202h per normal figure shown in FIG. 98 (a) is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The normal map fluctuation table 202i of the sixth embodiment is used for the "normal game state / latent probability fluctuation state" referred to in the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", and the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction". It can be divided into two types, one for "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" referred to in "state". Then, the variable display time of the normal symbol set for the "normal game state / latent probability fluctuation state" and the "probability fluctuation state / time reduction state" is set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbol different depending on whether the normal symbol is in the low probability state or the high probability state, the time for deriving the winning / failing result of the normal symbol is changed in each game state.

As shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" is "5 seconds". It is specified in the general map variation table 202i so as to be. That is, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" is set to be "5 seconds" without exception.

Further, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is defined in the normal symbol fluctuation table 202i so as to be "0.1 seconds". That is, the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stopped symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" is set to be "0.1 seconds" without exception. ..

As a result, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to change the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electric service 72 is released. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it becomes a hit with a variable display due to the passage of the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric service 72 is released based on the corresponding situation, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to make a difference depending on the game state whether or not the player can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each game state, it is possible to make the winning mode for the through gate 67 and the second starting port 71 of one ball different, and the game performance is different for each game state. Can be born.

In particular, among the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" and "latent probability fluctuation state" in which right-handed games are encouraged, in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is normal. Because it is short and easy to win, the normal electric role 72 is in an open (immersive) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the ordinary electric role 72, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is released. It is configured so that a prize can be won in the second starting port 71. In other words, the ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71 and it is difficult to win a prize in the variable winning device 65.

Further, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the variable display time of the normal symbol is longer than the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", and the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Because it is harder to win, it is easy for the normal electric service 72 to keep the closed (protruding) state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72, and the ball launched by the right-handed game It is configured so that the upper surface of the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 can be completely rolled from the right end to the left end and flow down to the variable winning device 65 side. In other words, a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a certain amount of prize in the second starting port 71, but from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state" to the second starting port 71. It is difficult to win a prize, and the variable winning device 65 is configured to win a prize.

Next, the ordinary electric service opening table 202j in the sixth embodiment is divided into groups based on the game state in which the ordinary symbols are drawn. Specifically, it is for "normal game state / latent probability fluctuation state" referred to in "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state", and "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" referred to in "time reduction state". The opening mode (opening time) of the ordinary electric service 72 is changed for the "probability fluctuation state / time shortening state".

As shown in FIG. 98 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, it is set when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" which is the low probability state of the normal symbol. The number of times the ordinary electric service 72 is opened is one, and the opening time is specified by the ordinary electric service opening table 202j so as to be "0.1 seconds". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", the normal electric service 72 is opened for "0.1 seconds" x 1 time = "0.1 seconds". It is set to be done.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" which is a high probability state of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric service 72 set when the normal symbol is won is "5 seconds" and the number of times of opening. Is specified in the ordinary electric service opening table 202j so that is 3 times (the interval time between opening is "0.1 seconds"). That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the normal electric service 72 is configured to be released for "5 seconds" x 3 times = "15 seconds". Will be done.

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric service 72 according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric service 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 72 is open for a long period of time, so that it is easy to win a prize on the second starting port 71 side, or the normal electric service 72 is open. By making it difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 due to the short situation depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortening state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is set, the opening period of the normal electric service 72 is extended, and the game is fired by the right-handed game. The ball is configured so that it can easily win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to accumulate. The fluctuation shortening function is easy to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is easily executed efficiently.

In addition, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is set, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric service 72 are to the right of the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time shortened state". The ball launched by the hitting game is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "latent probability fluctuation state" can win a certain amount of prize in the second starting port 71, but the second special symbol is dynamic from the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Since it is difficult to accumulate the number of reserved balls for display, the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is lower than that of the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", but a lottery opportunity for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is obtained. It is configured so that you can play games while playing.

That is, since the hit probability of the normal symbol in the low probability state is 50/100 = 1/2, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is "5 seconds", the average is 10 seconds. Once every time, a hit is derived in the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal electric service 72 is released for "0.1 seconds" based on the corresponding match. Based on this opening, one or more balls rolling on the upper surface of the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 win a prize at the second starting port 71, so that about 10 in the "latent probability fluctuation state". It is configured so that it is possible to acquire the execution trigger of the variation effect of the second special symbol once or more than once per second. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state" is 15 seconds when there is no reserved ball number and 5 seconds when there is one or more reserved balls. Therefore, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is easily executed without interruption.

In this way, by providing each gaming state in which the high-probability state or low-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state or low-probability state of the normal symbol are combined, the game playability is changed to each gaming state, and variations are made. Can provide abundant games and improve the interest of the games.

The hit probability of the variable display of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as the probability that the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is easier to win the normal symbol than the "normal game state" or the like, for example, the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation". The hit probability of the normal symbol in the "state" may be set to about 1/100 to make it difficult to hit, or the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2. Further, any time may be used as long as the variable display time of the "probability fluctuation state" is shorter than that of the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state". For example, the "normal game state" or "latent probability fluctuation state" may be used. The variable display time of the normal symbol in "" may be a long time of "5 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds") or a short time of less than "5 seconds" (for example, "3 seconds").

Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric service 72 are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72, what kind of opening time is provided if the "probability fluctuation state" or the like is more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state". It may be time, for example, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state" may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "0.5 seconds"). However, the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "2 times"). Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be a long time of "5 seconds" or more (for example, "7 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5 seconds" (for example, "5 seconds"). 2 seconds ") may be used. Further, the number of times the ordinary electric service 72 is opened in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be a large number of times "3 times" or more (for example, "5 times"), or a small number of times less than "3 times" (for example, "3 times"). It may be "twice").

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a normal figure variation process (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the normal map variation processing (S211) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the normal symbol variation processing (S211) of the sixth embodiment and the first embodiment is that when the variable display time of the normal symbol is set, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and the determination is made. Based on this, one of the two patterns of variable display time is set.

In the normal figure variation processing (S211) of the sixth embodiment, after the data shift processing of S706, the data stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j by the data shift processing (that is, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure). In order to execute the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 based on the above, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the low probability state (S751). As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol is in the low probability state (S751: Yes), the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "5 seconds" (S752), and the process shifts to S712. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the low probability state (S751: No), that is, when the normal symbol is in the high probability state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". (S753), the process shifts to S712. In the process of S751, the variable display time of the normal symbol may be set by determining the time saving flag or the like indicating that the "time saving function" is effectively set.

As a result, in the state in which the "time saving function" is effective (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol), and in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state" in the right-handed game, the ball is on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72. If the variable display of the normal symbol stops fluctuating and the variable display is successful, the normal electric service 72 is released and the upper surface of the normal electric service 72 is rolled. Almost all of the spheres fall downward in the front view and flow into the second starting port 71. On the other hand, in the state in which the "time saving function" is disabled (that is, the low probability state of the normal symbol), and in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in the right-handed game, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72. If the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped in the meantime, the normal electric service 72 may be opened and the ball may flow into the second starting port 71, or the variable display of the normal symbol may not be stopped depending on the result of the result. If the variable display of the normal symbol does not stop, the upper surface of the normal electric service 72 may be completely rolled from the left end to the right end and flow down to the variable winning device 65 side. Therefore, even in the same right-handed game, it is possible to create a game state in which the game flows into the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 and a game state in which the game does not flow in. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, a normal electric service control process (S204), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric service control process (S204) of the sixth embodiment. The difference between the ordinary electric service control process (S204) of the sixth embodiment and the first embodiment is that when the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric service 72 are set, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a low probability state. Then, based on the determination, one of the two patterns of opening time and opening number is set.

In the ordinary electric service control process (S204) of the sixth embodiment, if it is determined that the winning is won in the variable display as a result of the determination in S803 (S803: Yes), the control regarding the winning is executed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a low probability state (S851).

As a result of the determination in S851, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state (S851: Yes), the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the hit state is set to "0. Set to "1 second" (S852), and set "1" to the value of the electric service counter (not shown) in order to open the ordinary electric service 72 once based on the corresponding situation (S853). The process shifts to S810.

On the other hand, in the processing of S851, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the low probability state (S8511: No), that is, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the high probability state, the provision of the ordinary electric service opening table 202j. Based on the content, the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the hit state is set to "5 seconds" (S854), and the electric service counter is used to open the ordinary electric service 72 three times based on the corresponding situation. The value (not shown) is set to "3" (S855), and the process shifts to S810.

As a result, when the player hits the right, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the arrangement position of the ordinary electric service 72, and the normal electric service 72 is open for a long time or a short time. Can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided to the second starting port 71 side, or the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 72 is completely rolled from the left end to the right end in the closed state of the ordinary electric service 72. By making the situation where the ball can flow down to the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 side depending on the gaming state, it is possible to produce different game performance for each gaming state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 accompanying the winning are different depending on the game state. In a right-handed game in which a ball can pass through the through gate 67, in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state", the open state of the normal electric service 72 is configured to occur frequently, and the ball is almost second-started. It can flow into the mouth 71. On the other hand, even in the same right-handed game, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the closed state of the ordinary electric service 72 is configured to be long, and the upper surface of the closed ordinary electric service 72 is rolled from the left end to the right end. It may move completely, and the ball can flow into the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65. Therefore, it is possible to make the winning openings 65 and 71 that can be won in each game state at the time of right-handed game different, and to make the game value given to the player different, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at the start of the dynamic display of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived first, and the lottery result of the special symbol to be derived first is determined. It is configured to correct the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later according to. Further, it is configured to correct the time reduction limit number of times according to the correction. Further, by discriminating the values of the ST counter 203m and the time reduction counter 203o, the control according to the game state is executed. Further, even if the dynamic display of one special symbol wins the jackpot, the jackpot lottery in the dynamic display of the other special symbol can be executed. Further, it is configured to count the time reduction limit number of times at the start of the dynamic display of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the special symbol, when the dynamic display of the special symbol from which the big hit or the small hit is derived is stopped. , The other special symbol is configured to be forcibly stopped due to loss without correction. In addition, the time saving limit number is counted at the end of the jackpot, the time saving limit number is determined, and then the "time saving function" is set. Further, a probability change flag and a time reduction flag are provided, and the values of the ST counter 203m and the time reduction counter 203o are determined and subtracted according to whether or not each flag is set. Further, when the dynamic display of one special symbol wins the big hit, the lottery for the small hit is performed in the dynamic display of the other special symbol, but the lottery for the big hit is not performed.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments. Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixth embodiments are used for the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments. The description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 101, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S505), which is a process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505) of the seventh embodiment. The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505) of the seventh embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in that when the dynamic display for deriving the jackpot has already been executed in the second special symbol, the first special symbol In the dynamic display, the big hit lottery is not performed, only the small hit or loss lottery is executed, the time saving limit number is not counted at the start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the movement of the first special symbol The point is that the execution time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the lottery result are not corrected (changed) when the big hit or the small hit is won in the target display.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S505) of the seventh embodiment, after the setting process of the jackpot random number table 202a of S5005 or S5006, first, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed. It is determined whether or not a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (S5051). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is not derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed (S5051: No), a winning / losing lottery including the jackpot is performed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol starting from now on (S5052). ), If the jackpot is won (S5052: Yes), the process shifts to S5053.

In the processing of S5053, the jackpot is based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The time display mode is set (S5053).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S5054). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 21B) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot. After the processing of S5054, the processing shifts to S5017.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that has already been executed (S5051: Yes), the winning / losing lottery excluding the jackpot, that is, the small hit or the loss The process shifts to S5055 in order to draw a lottery. Further, in the process of S5052, even if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (S5052: No), the process is shifted to S5055.

In the processing of S5055, a small hit that determines whether or not it is a small hit is determined based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f and the big hit random number table 202a set in S5005 or S5006. A lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed (S5055).

When it is determined that the hit is a small hit as a result of the processing of S5055 (S5055: Yes), then the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the first special symbol (only one type in the seventh embodiment) is set. (S5056).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S5057). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. After the processing of S5057, the processing shifts to S5017.

On the other hand, in the process of S5055, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (S5055: No), the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S5058). In the process of S5058, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first hold ball stored in the first hold ball execution area 203f are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203a and the current gaming state, as the effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special" effect mode. Set one of the "reach" effect modes. In the seventh embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5059), and the process proceeds to S5017. In the process of S5059, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S5058, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the first reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, when a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot is duplicated by configuring so that the jackpot lottery is not performed in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The situation can be prevented. In addition, at the start of fluctuation, the number of processes at the start of fluctuation is reduced by configuring so that the correction of the dynamic display of the other that has already been executed is not performed based on the lottery result of one dynamic display. , The program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced. Further, the same random number values C3 and CS1 are used for the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of big hit, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the small hit time, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss. By using and determining by the same determination program, the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S508), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S508) of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S508) of the seventh embodiment and the first embodiment is that, like the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505), the dynamic display for deriving the jackpot has already been performed in the first special symbol. If it is executed, the big hit lottery is not performed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, only the small hit or loss lottery is executed, and the time reduction limit number of times at the start of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The point that does not count, and the point that the execution time and lottery result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol are not corrected (changed) when a big hit or a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Is.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S508) of the seventh embodiment, after the setting process of the jackpot random number table 202a of S5305 or S5306, first, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed. It is determined whether or not a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (S5351). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is not derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed (S5351: No), a winning / losing lottery including the jackpot is performed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be started from now on (S5352). ), If the jackpot is won (S5352: Yes), the process shifts to S5353.

In the processing of S5353, the jackpot is based on the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the second special symbol and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The time display mode is set (S5353).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S5354). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 23) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot. After the processing of S5354, the processing shifts to S5317.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5351, if it is determined that the jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol that has already been executed (S5351: Yes), the winning / losing lottery excluding the jackpot, that is, the small hit or the loss The process shifts to S5355 in order to draw a lottery. Further, in the process of S5352, even if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (S5352: No), the process is shifted to S5355.

In the processing of S5355, a small hit that determines whether or not it is a small hit is determined based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g and the big hit random number table 202a set in S5305 or S5306. A lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed (S5355).

When it is determined that the hit is a small hit as a result of the processing of S5355 (S5355: Yes), then the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the second special symbol (only one type in the seventh embodiment) is set. (S5356).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S5357). Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. The effect mode is selected based on the above, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. After the processing of S5357, the processing shifts to S5317.

On the other hand, in the process of S5355, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (S5355: No), the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S5358). In the process of S5358, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second hold ball stored in the second hold ball execution area 203 g are set. Based on the value of the number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, and a "special" effect mode. Set one of the "reach" effect modes. In the seventh embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5359), and the process proceeds to S5317. In the process of S5359, the fluctuation time until the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 stop and display the lost symbol is determined. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S5358, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the second reserved ball execution area 203g. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, when a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot is duplicated by configuring so that the jackpot lottery is not performed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The situation can be prevented. In addition, at the start of fluctuation, the number of processes at the start of fluctuation is reduced by configuring so that the correction of the dynamic display of the other that has already been executed is not performed based on the lottery result of one dynamic display. , The program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced. Further, the same random number values C3 and CS1 are used for the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of big hit, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the small hit time, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss. By using and determining by the same determination program, the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the fluctuation stop processing (S509), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing (S509) of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment in the variable stop processing (S509) of the seventh embodiment is that when one of the special symbols is stopped, the other special symbol is dynamically displayed according to the stop type of the stopped special symbol. The point of stopping the execution and the point of executing the counting process of the ST counter 203m or the time saving counter 203o after determining the setting status of the probability change flag or the time saving flag in the ST / time saving counting process (S5507).

In the fluctuation stop processing (S509) of the seventh embodiment, after the special figure 1 confirmation command is set in S5505, the second special symbol is then moved according to the stop type of the dynamic display of the stopped first special symbol. On the other hand, the change processing is performed (S5551). The details of the other change process (S5551) will be described later.

Further, in the fluctuation stop processing (S509) of the seventh embodiment, after the special figure 2 confirmation command is set in S5512, the first special symbol is then according to the stop type of the dynamic display of the stopped second special symbol. On the other hand, the change processing is performed (S5551).

Here, the other change process (S5551) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the other change process (S5551) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the seventh embodiment.

On the other hand, in the other change process (S5551), as described above, the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is stopped at the timing when the big hit or the small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. In addition, at the timing when the big hit or the small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the process of stopping the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is executed.

In the other change process (S5551) shown in FIG. 104, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (S5571). If it is determined as a result of the determination that the fluctuation of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has not stopped (S5571: No), it is the timing when the fluctuation of the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped, so processing To S5575. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the dynamic display of the first special symbol has stopped (S5571: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5572). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not being executed (S5572: No), the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be canceled does not exist, so the other change process (S5551) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 103). On the other hand, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed (S5572: Yes), then whether or not a big hit or a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the stopped first special symbol. Is determined (S5573).

As a result of the processing of S5573, if a big hit or a small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the stopped first special symbol (S5573: No), that is, if a loss is derived, the second special symbol that is stopped later is stopped. There is no possibility that the variable winning device 65 or the small winning opening 73 will be opened in duplicate based on the big hit or the small hit in the dynamic display of the above, and there is no problem even if the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is not stopped. Therefore, the process of S5574 is skipped, the other change process (S5551) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 103). On the other hand, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the stopped first special symbol (S5573: Yes), the variable winning device 65 is based on the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol stopped later. Alternatively, in order to prevent the small winning openings 73 from being opened in duplicate, the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped (S5574), and the other change process (S5551) is terminated to change. The process returns to the stop process (see FIG. 103).

In this case, the confirmation command is not set when the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped. This is because if the main control device 110 recognizes that the second special symbol has been canceled, no control inconvenience will occur. By not performing the processing related to the confirmation command, the main control device 110 The control burden can be reduced. When the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped, the confirmation command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Further, in the process of S5575, since the fluctuation of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, it is next determined whether or not the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5575). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not being executed (S5575: No), the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be canceled does not exist, so the other change process (S5551) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 103). On the other hand, if it is determined that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed (S5575: Yes), then whether or not a big hit or a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the stopped second special symbol. Is determined (S5576).

As a result of the processing of S5576, if a big hit or a small hit is not derived in the dynamic display of the stopped second special symbol (S5576: No), that is, if a loss is derived, the first special symbol that is stopped later is stopped. There is no possibility that the variable winning device 65 or the small winning opening 73 will be opened in duplicate based on the big hit or the small hit in the dynamic display of the above, and there is no problem even if the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed is not stopped. Therefore, the process of S5577 is skipped, the other change process (S5551) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 103). On the other hand, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the dynamic display of the stopped second special symbol (S5576: Yes), the variable winning device 65 is based on the result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol stopped later. Alternatively, in order to prevent the small winning openings 73 from being opened in duplicate, the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (S5577), and the other change process (S5551) is terminated to change. The process returns to the stop process (see FIG. 103).

With this configuration, when a big hit or a small hit is derived in the special symbol that is stopped first, it is possible to prevent the derivation of the big hit or the small hit in the special symbol that is stopped later. As a result, while the variable winning device 65 is open based on the dynamic display of one special symbol, the number of rounds of the variable winning device 65 is extended based on the dynamic display of the other special symbol. In such a situation, the small winning opening 73 is opened when the variable winning device 65 is open, or the variable winning device 65 is opened when the small winning opening 73 is open. It is possible to prevent the situation in which an excessive game value is given to the player.

When a big hit or a small hit is derived by the dynamic display of one special symbol, a special big hit or a small hit is derived as a timing to stop the dynamic display of the other special symbol that could be stopped later. In addition to the stop timing of the dynamic display of the symbol, the dynamic display of the other special symbol may be stopped based on the timing when the variable winning device 65 is opened, or based on the timing when the small winning opening 73 is opened. The dynamic display of the other special symbol may be stopped, the dynamic display of the other special symbol may be stopped at the timing when the opening of the big hit or the small hit starts, or the dynamic display of the other special symbol may be stopped at the timing when the gaming state changes. The dynamic display of the other special symbol may be stopped. In addition, when a big hit or a small hit is derived by the dynamic display of one special symbol, the progress of the dynamic display of the other special symbol is interrupted during the big hit state or the small hit state, and the big hit state or the small hit state or the small hit state. It may be configured to restart the progress of the dynamic display of the interrupted special symbol at the timing when the hit state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the ST / time saving counting process (S5507), which is one of the fluctuation stop processes (see FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) of the seventh embodiment and the first embodiment is that the setting status of the probability variation flag set in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol is determined and based on the determination result. The point at which the ST counter 203m is counted and the setting status of the time saving flag set when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, in the high probability state of the normal symbol are determined, and the time saving is based on the determination result. When the point where the counter 203o is counted and the value of the ST counter 203m is no longer larger than "0" (that is, when the value of the ST counter 203m is "0" or less), the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is set. The point at which the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is cleared to 0 when the time saving counter 203o is no longer larger than "0" without clearing 0 (that is, when the value of the time saving counter 203o is "0" or less). And.

In the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) of the seventh embodiment, the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0" in the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, when the probability variation flag is set to ON. The number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result satisfies the end condition of the high probability state of the special symbol, and the determination result is determined. The special symbol is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. Further, in the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) of the seventh embodiment, when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, when the time saving flag is set to on, it is set for each jackpot type. The number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol, which is the end condition of the "time saving function", is executed (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol (Total number of fluctuations) is counted, it is determined whether or not the counting result satisfies the time saving end condition, and the "time saving function" is changed from valid to invalid according to the determination result.

In the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (S5651). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stopped (S5651: No), it is not the timing to subtract the ST counter 203m and the time reduction counter 203o, so the processes of S5652 to S5662 described later are skipped. Then, the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 103).

On the other hand, in the process of S5651 when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (S5651: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is turned on (S5652). As a result of the determination, if the probability change flag is not turned on (S5652: No), at least the special symbol is not in the high probability state, so the processing of S5653 to S5656 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S5657. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is set to ON (S5652: Yes), the special symbol is in the high probability state, so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once during the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the value of the ST counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S5653), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted ST counter 203m is larger than "0" (S5654).

As a result of the processing of S5654, when the value of the ST counter 203m subtracted in the processing of S5653 is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the ST counter 203m is "0" or less (S5654: No), it is special. Since the end condition of the high probability state of the symbol is satisfied, first, the probability variation flag is set to off (S5655). Then, the gaming state changes from a high probability state of the special symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "latent probability fluctuation state") to a low probability state of the special symbol (that is, "normal gaming state" (or "time reduction state")). ) Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like (S5655), and the process shifts to S5657. On the other hand, in the processing of S5654, if the value of the ST counter 203m is determined to be a value larger than "0" (S5654: Yes), the special symbol is still in a high probability state, so the processing of S5655 and S5656 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to S5657.

In the process of S5657, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set to ON (S5657). As a result of the determination, if the time saving flag is not set to on (S5657: No), at least the "time saving function" is not effective and the normal symbol is not in the high probability state, so the processing of S5658 to S5662 is skipped and this ST -The time saving counting process (S5507) is ended, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 103). On the other hand, when the time saving flag is set to ON (S5657: Yes), the "time saving function" is effective and the normal symbol is in the high probability state, so that the second special is in the high probability state of the normal symbol. Since the dynamic display of the symbol is executed once, the value of the time saving counter 203o is subtracted by 1 (S5658), and then whether or not the value of the subtracted time saving counter 203o is larger than "0". Is determined (S5659).

As a result of the processing of S5659, when the value of the time saving counter 203o subtracted in the processing of S5658 is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the time saving counter 203o is "0" or less (S5659: No), it is normal. Since the end condition of the high probability state of the symbol is satisfied, first, the time saving flag is set to off (S5660). Then, the gaming state changes from a high probability state of the normal symbol (that is, "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state") to a low probability state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal game state" (or "latent probability fluctuation state")). ) Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like (S5661). Next, since the "renso" state ends, the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is cleared to "0" (S5662), the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 103). Return to. As a result, when the player falls from the "renso" state to the "normal game state", the time reduction limit number can be initialized, and when the player enters the "renso" state again, the time reduction limit number can be counted again. It becomes. If the value of the time saving counter 203o is larger than "0" as a result of the processing of S5659 (S5659: Yes), the end condition of the "time saving function" is not satisfied, so the processing of S5660 to S5662 is performed. The process is skipped, the ST / time saving counting process (S5507) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 103).

In this way, in the high-probability state of the special symbol or the state in which the "time saving function" is enabled (that is, the high-probability state of the normal symbol), the end condition and the time-saving end condition of the high-probability state of the special symbol are individually discriminated. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately activate the high-probability state of the special symbol and the "time saving function" according to the game state, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a hit process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the hit process (S203) of the seventh embodiment. The hit processing (S203) of the seventh embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in that the ST counter 203m and the time saving counter 203o are cleared to 0 when the big hit is won, and the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are turned off. is there.

In the hit processing (S203) of the seventh embodiment, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won as a result of the processing of S601 (S601: Yes), first, in order to reset the current gaming state, the ST counter The 203m and the time reduction counter 203o are cleared to 0 (S651), and then the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to off in order to make the game state a low probability state of the special symbol and a low probability state of the normal symbol during the jackpot game. (S652), the process shifts to S602.

With this configuration, the ST counter 203m and / or the time reduction counter 203o can be set again in the jackpot end processing (S612; see FIG. 107), which will be described later, and the game state during the jackpot game can be set as a special symbol. It is possible to set the low-probability state of the normal symbol and the low-probability state of the normal symbol, and it is possible to suppress the addition of the game value other than the game value due to the big hit by the opening of the normal electric service 72 as much as possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the jackpot end process (S612), which is one of the hit processes (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S612) of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the jackpot end processing (S612) of the seventh embodiment and the first embodiment is that a probability variation flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state is set, and whether the normal symbol is in the high probability state. A "time saving function" is given by discriminating the point of setting the time saving flag for determining whether or not, the point of adding the time saving limit counter 203n at the timing of the end of the jackpot, and the value of the added time saving limit counter 203n. Whether or not (whether or not to turn on the time saving flag) is set, and when the "time saving function" is given, the time saving counter 203o is set according to the value of the ST counter 203m.

In the jackpot end processing (S612) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned on (S6151). As a result of the determination, if the probability variation transition flag 203k is turned on (S6151: Yes), the ball passes through the probability variation region (not shown) during this jackpot, and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is a high probability of the special symbol. In order to make the state, first, the probability change transition flag 203k is turned off (S6152), and then the probability change flag is set to on (S6153). Then, "160" is set to the value of the ST counter 203m (S6154), and the process shifts to S6155.

In the processing of S6155, as the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the "time saving function" is given except when the time saving limit is reached. Therefore, the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is added by 1 (S6155). The process shifts to S6156. If there is a jackpot type to which the "time saving function" is not given, it may be configured so that the time saving limit counter 203n is not added by determining whether or not it is the jackpot type. Further, as the addition timing of the time reduction limit number of times, it may be configured to be added at the start of the big hit (at the time of opening process) or at the time of stopping the dynamic display of the special symbol, in addition to the end of the big hit. In this case as well, the winning jackpot type may be determined to determine whether or not to add the time saving limit number of times.

In the process of S6156, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is smaller than "6" (S6156). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is smaller than "6" (S6156: Yes), first, in order to activate the "time saving function", the time saving flag is set to ON (S6157). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0", that is, whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is given by the processing of S6154 (S6158). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter 203m is larger than "0" (S6158: Yes), the same value as the value set in the ST counter 203m (that is, "160") is set to the time saving counter 203o. (S6159), and the process shifts to S6163. As a result, the high-probability state of the special symbol and the "time saving function" can be set to the "probability fluctuation state" that functions until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 160 times.

On the other hand, when the value of the ST counter 203m is not larger than "0", that is, when the value of the ST counter 203m is "0" or less (S6158: No), the state does not shift to the "probability fluctuation state". In order to shift to the "time reduction state", "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203o (S6160), and the process shifts to S6163. As a result, the "time saving function" can be set to the "time saving state" in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol functions until the dynamic display is executed 100 times.

In the process of S6156, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is not smaller than "6", that is, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is larger than "6" (S6156: No), the time saving limit number of times is set. Since it has reached, the time saving flag is set to off (S6161), the value is not set in the time saving counter 203o, and the value of the time saving limit counter 203n is cleared to "0" in order to reset the time saving limit number of times (S6161). S6162), the process shifts to S6163. As a result, while the special symbol is in a high probability state, it can be set to a "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the "time saving function" is not activated.

In this way, when the time saving limit number of times has been reached in the jackpot end processing (S612), the time saving limit number of times is initialized, and after the end of the jackpot, the initial value of the time saving limit number of times is changed to ". It is possible to count the number of times the "time saving function" is granted.

In the process of S6163, an ending command indicating the start of the ending effect of the jackpot is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6163). The ending command set in the process of S6163 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a jackpot ending effect.

After the processing of S6163 is completed, the ending time (for example, "30 seconds", "10 seconds" or "180 seconds") is set according to the game state (S6164), and various processing at the end of the jackpot is executed. The jackpot end setting process (S6165) is performed, the jackpot end process (S612) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 106).

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment is provided by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging a part or a plurality of parts of the structure of the embodiment with each other. The embodiment may be modified to form the configuration. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification example 1>
In the above embodiment, the allocation of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol is different for each game state. On the other hand, in one game state, the variation time of the selected dynamic display may be allocated differently according to the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed. Specifically, for example, in the "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state" and / and "latent probability fluctuation state", a relatively long fluctuation time is obtained until the second special symbol is dynamically displayed 50 times. While it is configured so that it can be easily selected, it is configured so that a relatively short fluctuation time can be easily selected after 50 times. Further, when each game state is entered, the maximum number of reserved balls of the special symbol (that is, four times) is configured so that a significantly short fluctuation time can be selected, while the maximum number of reserved balls of the special symbol is selected. It is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol executed thereafter can be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged on the right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81 as winning openings where the ball launched in the right-handed game can win a prize. On the other hand, as a winning opening in which the ball fired in the right-handed game can win a prize, a general winning opening 63 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81, and the game is performed in the right-handed game. The general winning opening 63 is configured so that a certain number of balls (for example, 10 out of 100 shots) can be won, and in the right-handed game, a winning ball is given to the player in addition to the second starting opening 71 or the variable winning device 65. Configure to be payable. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the consumption of the ball held by the player during the right-handed game. In particular, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the player's ball by being able to pay out the prize ball based on the prize to the general prize opening 63 in the "latent probability fluctuation state" in which the prize assist function does not operate.

<Modification example 3>
In the above embodiment, the game state after a predetermined number of jackpots (that is, the “latent probability fluctuation state”) when entering the “renso” state, and the jackpot in the game state after the jackpot after the predetermined number of times (that is, , The jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state"), the game state and the staying time in the jackpot are configured to be long. On the other hand, the staying time in each gaming state and / and the jackpot may be gradually increased each time the "ream villa" state is repeated. Specifically, the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected when the "probability fluctuation state" continues 5 times is longer than the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected when the "probability fluctuation state" continues 3 times. The time required for the 7th jackpot is set to be longer than the time required for the 5th jackpot at the time. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time.

<Modification example 4>
In the above embodiment, a time saving limiter function is provided, and a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is not given appears according to the number of times the "time saving function" is given at the time of "ream villa". On the other hand, the time since the occurrence of the "ream villa" state is measured, and the staying time in the gaming state and / and the jackpot is determined based on the number of jackpots or the number of times the "time saving function" is given according to the measurement time. It may be configured to increase. Specifically, the timer is started when the player enters the "ream villa" state, and when the timer is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, one hour), the number of big hits or the number of times the "time saving function" is given is a predetermined number (for example). For example, when it reaches 7 times), it is configured to increase the staying time at the jackpot and / and the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is not given can occur depending on the number of times the "time saving function" is given in the "continuous villa" state. On the other hand, the cumulative number of times of execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol in the state where the "time saving function" is given in the "renso" state is counted, and the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed according to the cumulative number of times. It may be configured to change (is likely to increase) the fluctuation time of. Specifically, for example, when the cumulative number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed reaches 100 after entering the "renso" state, the fluctuation pattern table of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display up to that point. When the variation pattern table 202e, which has a variation time longer than 202e, is changed to the variation pattern table 202e, and the cumulative execution time of the dynamic display of the special symbol after entering the "renso" state reaches 200 times, it is determined. The variation pattern table 202e is changed to a variation pattern table 202e in which a longer variation time is easily selected than the variation pattern table 202e used up to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used, and the pachinko machine 10 is configured to generate a “probability fluctuation state”. On the other hand, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that they can win a small hit other than the big hit, and a variable winning device for a small hit that is opened based on the winning of the small hit game is provided. Then, a pachinko machine (so-called 1 type 2 type mixture) equipped with a time saving area (so-called V area) in which a big hit and a "time saving function" are given due to the ball passing through the variable winning device for small hits. (Machine) is used, and whether or not the "time saving function" is given is different depending on the number of times the "time saving function" is given. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games to which the "time saving function" is given and to improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, the end condition of the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to end by the number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol (so-called ST type) or the winning of the next jackpot (so-called loop type). doing. On the other hand, even if a pachinko machine (so-called fall type) is used in which the "probability fluctuation state" ends (so-called fall function) when a predetermined lottery result other than the jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the special symbol. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games that end after the "probability fluctuation state" occurs, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, the ordinary electric service 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured so that they can be opened based on the winning of the ordinary symbol or the special symbol. On the other hand, a pachinko machine equipped with a passage port for opening a movable accessory (so-called non-electric accessory) that closes another winning opening when the ball passes may be used.

<Modification example 9>
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", a "premium live effect" according to the player's preference is executed during the jackpot period. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", a character that can be operated by the player is operated during the jackpot period to obtain a predetermined point or the like, or a game effect in which the characters compete against each other is performed. It may be configured to run.

<Modification example 10>
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", a "premium live effect" according to the player's preference is executed during the jackpot period. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the setting of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute a customized effect that can be customized according to the player's preference during the jackpot period. ..

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, every time one type of number of times (that is, 6 times) is given to the player as the number of time saving limiters, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is not given occurs after the next big hit. .. On the other hand, the number of time reduction limiters may be different depending on the type of jackpot that was won when entering the "renso" state. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot A is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the state shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" and the time saving limiter number is set to 5 times, while the first When the jackpot B is won in the dynamic display of the special symbol, the system shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" and the number of time reduction limiters is set to 10. With this configuration, the number of time-saving limiters when entering the "renso" state can be made different, the variety of games can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification example 12>
In the above embodiment, if the jackpot is won and the time saving limit function is not activated, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is granted occurs after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when a predetermined symbol (for example, a time saving symbol) other than the big hit (small hit) is derived in the dynamic display of the special symbol, the state shifts to the state where the "time saving function" is given without going through the big hit. It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of variations to which the "time saving function" is given and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 13>
In the above embodiment, if any of the jackpots is won and the time saving limiter function is not activated, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is given occurs after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed after the jackpot ends is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without winning the jackpot, the "time saving function" is performed without going through the jackpot. It may be configured to be given (so-called ceiling function). In this case, the predetermined number of times may be individually counted by the total number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed and the number of times the total number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. The predetermined number of times may be counted by adding up the cumulative number of times of the dynamic display and the total number of times of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that the predetermined number of times is different from each other. With this configuration, in the dynamic display of the special symbol after the big hit, if the big hit is not won for a long period of time, the winning assistance function is activated and the player's ball is not reduced any more. It is possible to play the game while doing so. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by enriching the variations to which the "time saving function" is given.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, when the "time saving function" is given, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the "time reduction state", 160 times in the "probability fluctuation state" and the like. It is configured to terminate the "time saving function" when it is executed. On the other hand, depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the "time saving function" may not be terminated.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time. On the other hand, the variation effect may be controlled by the so-called special figure 2 priority variation in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation effect of the first special symbol, or the variation effect is executed in the order of winning. It may be configured to control the variation effect by the so-called variation in the winning order.

Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, first, the area for storing the data related to the dynamic display to be executed (that is, the hold ball execution) is executed. If only one area) is provided and a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display of any of the special symbols is stopped, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (main) before the first reserved ball number counter 203a. It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol held by the control device 110 is larger than "0". As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is not "0", it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol. , The value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1. This is because the dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the held dynamic displays (variation effect) related to the second special symbol is started to be executed by the variation start processing of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the number of reserved balls related to the second special symbol is reduced by one. Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved spheres 1 to 4 of the second reserved sphere storage area 203e toward the second reserved sphere execution area 203 g, and is the second. Hold 1st area → 2nd hold ball execution area 203g, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd The data in each area is shifted, such as the hold third area.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is "0", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (held by the main controller 110) is next. It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N1) of the dynamic display (variation effect) relating to the first special symbol is larger than "0". As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is not "0", it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol. , The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operation reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1. This is because the dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variation effect) related to the first special symbol is started by the variation start processing of the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is reduced by one. Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved ball first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the first reserved ball execution area 203f, and is the first process. Hold 1st area → 1st hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st The data in each area is shifted, such as the hold third area.

After the data shift processing, the variation start processing for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the hold ball execution area by the data shift processing. To do. With this configuration, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Further, when the dynamic display is executed in the order in which the prizes are won, one area (that is, the reserved ball execution area) for storing the data related to the dynamic display to be executed is set as in the case of the priority change of the second special symbol. Only, regardless of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the data related to the starting prize is stored in the order of winning, and the dynamic display of the special symbol based on the oldest stored data is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the order of winning, instead of the type of the special symbol.

<Modification 16>
In the above embodiment, as the end condition of the "time saving function", it is configured to end based on the predetermined number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol or the winning of the jackpot. On the other hand, the "time saving function" may be terminated based on the winning of the small hit game or the derivation of the time saving ending symbol different from the big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the end conditions of the winning assistance state, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 17>
In the fourth embodiment, when the time saving limiter function is activated and the player enters the "latent probability fluctuation state", the player is based on winning the small hit game of the second special symbol in the "latent probability fluctuation state". It is configured so that you can win more prize balls than when you hit the jackpot. On the other hand, when the time saving limiter function is activated and the game state shifts to a game state different from the previous game state (that is, "latent probability fluctuation state"), in the game state, it can be selected in the previous game state. It may be configured so that the jackpot type having a large number of times of opening the variable winning device 65 can be selected. With this configuration, by continuing the "renso" state and activating the time saving limiter function, it is possible to select a jackpot type that can acquire more game value than the previous jackpot types, and the game value can be increased at once. It can be made available, and the variety of games can be enriched to improve the interest of the game. When a jackpot is hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the closing time is shorter than the closing time (OP time, IT time or ED time) of the variable winning device 65 in the jackpot in the "probability fluctuation state" or "normal game state". Therefore, the number of prize balls obtained at the time of one big hit may be increased.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, the winning combination is selected from the big hit, the small hit or the loss in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the winning combination is selected from the big hit, the small hit or the loss in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, the lottery of the first special symbol may not be provided with a small hit, and the winning combination may be selected from the big hit or the loss, or the lottery of the second special symbol may not be provided with a small hit. The winning combination may be selected from the big hit or the loss, or the winning combination may be selected from the big hit or the loss without providing a small hit in the lottery of any special symbol. Good.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, as a normal electric service 72, in a state where the flat plate-shaped infestation plate 72a protrudes from the surface of the board, the infestation plate 72a closes the second start port 71 and the ball does not win the second start opening 71. On the other hand, in a state where the appearance plate 72a is immersed in the surface of the board surface, the second starting port 71 is opened so that the ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71. On the other hand, in a state where the flat plate-shaped infestation plate 72a is immersed from the surface of the board, the ball cannot guide the ball to the second start port 71 and does not win a prize in the second start port 71, while the infestation plate 72a is in the board surface. When the ball rolls on the upper surface of the infestation plate 72a in a state of protruding from the surface, the ball can be guided to the second starting port 71, and the ordinary electric service 72 can win a prize in the second starting port 71. May be configured. Further, the second starting port 71 is closed by an openable and closable blade member as a normal electric service 72, and the second starting port 71 is opened by opening (tilting) the blade member, and the ball is opened to the second starting port 71. It may be configured to win a prize (so-called tulip-type ordinary electric service).

<Modification example 20>
In the above embodiment, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, it is configured to shift to the "probability fluctuation state" with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot type may be set so that the jackpot type that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" is 0%, or 100%. The jackpot type may be set so as to shift to the "probability fluctuation state".

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the normal symbol is set to the high probability state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the normal electric service 72 is in the open state (the first). 2 It is configured to prolong the winning state of the starting port 71). On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the normal symbol is not set to the high probability state and is set to the low probability state (that is, there is no definition of the low probability state and the high probability state in the normal symbol). , The variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and / or the open state of the normal electric service 72 (the state in which the second starting port 71 can be won) is prolonged, and the "probability fluctuation state". Alternatively, in the "time reduction state", the second starting port 71 may be provided with a state in which the ball can easily win a prize. In addition, when the number of dynamic display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) after the big hit, or in the special symbol lottery, a specific symbol other than the big hit or the small hit (so-called time saving symbol) is won. In that case, the normal symbol is set to the low probability state (that is, there is no definition of the low probability state and the high probability state in the normal symbol) without setting the normal symbol to the high probability state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and / Alternatively, the open state of the ordinary electric service 72 (the state in which the second starting port 71 can be won) may be extended.

<Modification 22>
In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 50% in the "normal game state" or the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is 99% in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state". It is set to be. On the other hand, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0% in the "normal game state" or / and the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 1 in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state". It may be set to% to 100%.

<Modification example 23>
In the above embodiment, the value of the ST counter 203m is determined and the probability change flag is set, and the value of the time reduction counter 203o is determined and the time reduction flag is set. On the other hand, the value of the ST counter 203m is discriminated and the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set (for example, initialization (off)), and the time saving counter 203o is set (for example, initialization (0 clear)). It may be configured as.

<Modification 24>
In the above embodiment, when the time saving limiter is reached, the time saving flag is set to off without being turned on so that the "time saving function" does not occur. On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot, the probability change flag, the ST counter 203m, the time reduction flag, and the time reduction counter 203o are once set according to the jackpot type as before the time reduction limit is reached, and then the number of time reduction limits is determined and the number of times is determined. Depending on the determination result, the time saving flag and the time saving counter 203o may be set (for example, turned off or cleared to 0).

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the small winning opening 73 is more advantageous to the player when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol than when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured to have an open mode (that is, 1 time → 3 times). On the other hand, the opening mode of the small winning opening 73 is the same when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and when the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. In the case of winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the small winning opening 73 is more likely than in the case of winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be an opening mode advantageous to the player (for example, 3 times → 5 times).

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, the same small winning opening 73 is opened depending on whether the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. doing. On the other hand, the winning opening that is opened when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the winning opening that is opened when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be different (for example, the small hit of the first special symbol is the small winning opening 73, and the small hit of the second special symbol is the variable winning device 65).

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, in the gaming state in which the right-handed game is encouraged (that is, the jackpot state, the “probability fluctuation state”, the “time reduction state”, or the “latent probability fluctuation state”), the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output The device 226 suggests that the player plays the game by hitting right. On the other hand, the special symbol display device 37 is provided with a right-handed notification lamp for suggesting right-handed notification, and the right-handed notification lamp is turned on in a state where the right-handed game is encouraged, and the player executes the right-handed game. It may be configured to suggest what to do. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 may also be configured to simultaneously suggest right-handed strokes.

Regarding the suggestion of the right-handed game by the right-handed notification lamp and the third symbol display device 81 and / or the voice output device 226, the right-handed game suggestion by the right-handed notification lamp and the third symbol display device 81 and / or the voice It may be executed in synchronization with the right-handed game suggestion by the output device 226. Further, while the right-handed game suggestion is being executed by turning on the right-handed game suggestion, the right-handed game suggestion by the third symbol display device 81 and / or the voice output device 226 is interrupted or stopped (stopped) or small-scale. (For example, the suggestion display may be reduced). For example, in a big hit game, while the right-handed notification lamp is kept lit, the variable winning device 65 for OP time, ED time, IT time, etc. is not open, and the game value cannot be acquired even during the big hit. The period is configured to stop (stop) the right-handed game suggestion by the third symbol display device 81 and / or the voice output device 226. Further, the right-handed game suggestion by the right-handed notification lamp may be interrupted or canceled while the right-handed game suggestion by the third symbol display device 81 and / or the voice output device 226 is being executed.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiment, in the "latent probability fluctuation state" when the time reduction limit is reached, the "winning assistance function" is lower than the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", so that the game is played before the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the player's ball can be slightly reduced. On the other hand, even in the "latent probability fluctuation state" which does not have the "winning assist function", the player's ball possession may be configured so as to hardly decrease (maintain). Further, even in the "latent probability fluctuation state" which does not have the "winning assist function", the player may be configured to have a slightly increased number of balls. Specifically, for example, a ball fired in a right-handed game is fired in a right-handed game without arranging a general winning opening 63 in which a ball can win a prize, or providing a normal electric service 72 in the second starting port 71. The balls are configured to be able to win a prize, and the prize balls are configured to be equal to or greater than the number of balls fired. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of balls held by the player and allow the player to play a comfortable game even in the "latent probability fluctuation state".

<Modification 29>
In the above embodiment, when the "time saving function" occurs a predetermined number of times, a gaming state (that is, a "latent probability fluctuation state") in which the "time saving function" is not given occurs after the next big hit, and in the gaming state When the jackpot is won again, a gaming state (for example, a "probability fluctuation state") in which a "time saving function" is given after the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when the time saving limit function is activated and the player enters a game state in which the "time saving function" is not given, the "time saving function" is given unless a plurality of jackpots (for example, 3 times) are passed in the game state. It may be configured so that the number of time-saving function revival jackpots in which the game state cannot occur again can be set. Specifically, for example, when the time saving function revival jackpot count is 3 times, when the time saving limit function is activated and the first "latent probability fluctuation state" is entered, the first "latent probability fluctuation state" is entered. After winning the first jackpot in, the second "latent probability fluctuation state" is entered again, and after winning the second jackpot in the second "latent probability fluctuation state", the third "latent" is also entered. After entering the "probability fluctuation state" and winning the third jackpot in the third "latent probability fluctuation state", a gaming state (for example, "probability fluctuation state" or "time") to which a "time saving function" is added is finally added. It is configured to enter the "shortened state"). With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variations in which each game state occurs and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 30>
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state" generated by activating the time saving limit function, the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot are lengthened, respectively, to be as follows. It is configured so that the time until the jackpot ends is long. On the other hand, at least one of the average fluctuation time of the special symbol selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state" and the OP time, IT time or ED time of the jackpot when the jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state". The above may be lengthened, or the average fluctuation time of the special symbol selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the OP time, IT time, or the jackpot of the jackpot when the jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state". A combination of at least two or more ED times (for example, the OP time and the IT time may be lengthened, the ED time may be the same as the normal time, etc.) may be lengthened.

<Modification 31>
In the above embodiment, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of winnings in one round of the variable winning device 65 at each jackpot are configured to be the same. On the other hand, the combination of the maximum opening time and the maximum number of winnings of the variable winning device 65 may be different depending on each gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot is won in a gaming state other than the "latent probability fluctuation state", the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 is 30 seconds, and the maximum number of winnings is 5. As a result, the minimum opening time is 3 seconds, while when a big hit is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the maximum opening time is 20 seconds, but the maximum number of winnings is 10, so the minimum opening is The time is configured to be 6 seconds. With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in the "latent probability fluctuation state", it is possible to prolong the time of the entire jackpot. Further, a round may be provided in which the maximum opening time can be reached before the maximum number of winnings can be won. Specifically, for example, although the maximum number of winnings is set to 10, the maximum opening time is set to 2 seconds, so that the maximum opening time is likely to arrive before the maximum number of winnings is won. , One round is configured to end with the lapse of the maximum opening time.

<Modification 32>
In the above embodiment, when a big hit is won, the variable winning device 65 is opened so that the player can be given a game value. On the other hand, even if a plurality of variable winning devices 65 are provided and the variable winning devices 65 to be opened according to the jackpot type are different, or each variable winning device 65 can be opened by one jackpot. Good.

<Modification 33>
In the above embodiment, the number of prize balls, the maximum opening time, and the maximum number of prizes in one round of the variable prize device 65 at each jackpot are configured to be the same. On the other hand, although the combination of the number of prize balls, the maximum opening time, or the maximum number of winnings in one round is different, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to the jackpot type so that the same or substantially the same game value can be given. It may be configured to perform control and prize ball payout control. Specifically, in one round in the first jackpot type, the number of prize balls based on one prize is 10, and the maximum number of prizes is 10, so 100 prize balls can be paid out. In one round in the second jackpot type, although the number of prize balls based on one prize is 5, the maximum number of prizes is 20, so 100 prize balls can be paid out. In one round of the three jackpot types, the number of prize balls based on one prize is four, but since the maximum number of prizes is 25, 100 prize balls can be paid out. With this configuration, the time required to digest one round at the time of a big hit can be made variable. For example, at the time of a big hit in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the opening time becomes long. For example, by selecting (the number of prize balls is 4 and the maximum number of prizes is 25) based on 1 prize, it is possible to prolong the time required for the entire jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the big hit or small hit in the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be stopped first is extinguished (stopped) by the big hit or small hit in the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be stopped later. It is configured. Instead, the dynamic display of special symbols that can generate big hits or small hits that can be stopped later is suspended (stopped) by the big hits or small hits in the dynamic display of special symbols that can be stopped first. It may be configured.

With this configuration, the maximum execution time of 1 dynamic display of the special symbol encouraged in each gaming state, the maximum execution time of the jackpot that can occur based on the 1 dynamic display, and the jackpot From the total time with the maximum execution time of the dynamic display of 1 that is first executed for the special symbol that is encouraged in the game state after the end, the dynamic display of 1 of the special symbol that is not encouraged in each game state The maximum execution time is set shorter, and the dynamic display of the encouraged special symbol can be executed at least 3 times and up to 120 times while the dynamic display of the non-encouragement special symbol is executed. As a result, for example, in the "normal game state", when the dynamic display of the first special symbol on the encouragement side and the dynamic display of the second special symbol on the non-encouragement side are executed at the same time, the first special symbol is executed. In the case of winning the jackpot type "probability change A" in the dynamic display of, and transitioning to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends, the first is based on the occurrence of the jackpot in the dynamic display of the first special symbol that generates the jackpot. 2 By suspending (stopping) the dynamic display of the special symbol, executing the jackpot, and then winning the jackpot or small hit in the encouraged dynamic display of the first special symbol executed after the jackpot. It is possible to suspend (stop) the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is not encouraged again. This delays the timing at which the dynamic display of the special symbol on the non-encouragement side is confirmed, and makes it easier to prioritize the addition of the game value by the special symbol on the encouragement side over the game value by the special symbol on the non-encouragement side. It is possible to play an efficient game and improve the interest of the game. In addition, all the winning roles (game value) can be provided to the player, and the phenomenon that the game value is not given even though the role is won (so-called loss) can be eliminated, and the player can do so. You can prevent the game from getting excited.

In the above embodiment, the small hit type of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the small hit type of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured by one type each. .. Instead of this, a plurality of small hit types of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and / and a small hit type of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are provided. You may. Further, it may be configured so that whether or not the "time saving function" is terminated differs depending on the small hit type. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In the above embodiment, when a jackpot of a predetermined special symbol is won, the time saving limit number is updated, the jackpot type is set based on the limit number of times, and then the dynamic display of the other special symbol is derived first. It is determined whether or not the dynamic display in which the jackpot can occur disappears. Instead, when a jackpot of a predetermined special symbol is won, the dynamic display of the predetermined special symbol is dynamically displayed before setting the jackpot type based on the time reduction limit number of times. It may be configured to determine whether or not it disappears based on the above, and then set the jackpot type after updating the time saving limit number of times. With this configuration, after updating the time reduction limit number of times, it is determined whether or not the jackpot disappears, and if the jackpot disappears, it is not necessary to re-update the time reduction limit number of times, reducing the control burden. can do. In addition, it is possible to set the jackpot type according to the appropriate number of time reduction limits, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the playability according to the assumed game specifications.

In the above embodiment, the variation effect of the special symbol encouraged for each gaming state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variation effect of the special symbol that is not encouraged is performed by the third symbol display device 81. It is configured not to be executed in the main display area Dm. Instead of this, the variation effect of the special symbol, which is not encouraged, may be configured to be executed in a predetermined mode in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, the encouraged special symbol variation effect is conspicuous in the main display area Dm (center part, most, the area larger than the non-encouragement special symbol variation effect, and the symbol display mode is darkened. (Execution, etc.) While executing, make the variation effect of the special symbol that is not encouraged less noticeable than the variation effect of the encouraged special symbol in the main display area Dm (corner, small part, encouraged special symbol) Area smaller than the fluctuation effect of, the pattern display mode is thin, etc.) It is configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is possible for the third symbol display device 81 to grasp the execution mode of the variation effect of a plurality of special symbols.

In the above embodiment, the big hit game and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later are eliminated by any of the big hit game and the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived earlier. It is configured. Instead, either the jackpot game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived earlier eliminates the jackpot game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later. It may be configured as. Specifically, for example, the big hit game (or small hit game) of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later only when the dynamic display of the special symbol derived first is the big hit game (small hit game). If the dynamic display of the special symbol derived first is a small hit game (big hit game), the big hit game (or small hit game) of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later will not be extinguished. Configure to. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the derived game results and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the derivation probability is low and the derivation probability is high. It is configured so that a common effect (similar variation effect of fluctuation time, etc.) is executed when the small hit game is derived. Instead of this, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, when a loss result with a low derivation probability is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the derivation probability is high. An effect different from the case where the winning game is derived may be executed, and the game value given to the player may be different based on the execution result.

Specifically, for example, when the loss result of the second special symbol is derived in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, the "ultra-long fluctuation" effect mode is selected. The variation time of the dynamic display of the encouraged second special symbol can be derived after the dynamic display of the unencouraged first special symbol, and the jackpot game or the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be derived. May be configured so that By constructing in this way, by winning the so-called "pure loss" with a low probability of derivation, a production different from the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

In the above embodiment, the variation time of the dynamic display of the other special symbol derived later is changed based on the winning of the big hit game or the small hit game of the dynamic display of one special symbol derived earlier. The fluctuation time of the dynamic display of one special symbol derived first and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the other special symbol derived later are configured to be the same. Instead of this, when changing the variation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later based on the winning of the big hit game or the small hit game of the dynamic display of one of the special symbols derived earlier, later The fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the derived special symbol is set to be approximately shorter than the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived earlier, and the confirmation time of the dynamic display of the special symbol derived later is set. By diversifying the types of and adjusting the confirmation time, the confirmation time (big hit or small hit start timing) of the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be derived first and the dynamic display of the special symbol that can be derived later It may be configured so that the fixed time is the same. With this configuration, when changing the fluctuation time, it is not necessary to set a fine fluctuation time, and the control load of each of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the transition of the time saving limit number of times (the limit number of times and the time when the limit is reached) is not suggested to the player. Instead of this, it may be configured so that the transition of the time saving limit number can be directly or indirectly suggested to the player. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is won or when a predetermined number of fluctuations is reached), the time saving limit number of times is directly or indirectly transmitted to the player to the third symbol display device 81 by lottery. It may be configured to be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of balls for which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is held, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is held. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol changes according to the number of balls. In other words, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured to affect only. Alternatively, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of one special symbol may be configured to affect the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the other special symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to the total number of reserved balls of the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured to change accordingly. With this configuration, a peculiar fluctuation time can be selected in a state where the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are mixed. By configuring it, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in 6 stages of "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. Is not limited to 6 stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In the above embodiment, the case where the jackpot probability is changed by changing the probability setting value has been described, but the hit probability of a normal symbol or the winning probability of a small hit may be changed.

In addition, when it is determined in the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") is set from the range of "1" to "6". It may be forcibly set as a value. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during the timer interrupt process), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to the sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change process is forcibly executed. Then, the hall personnel, etc. are encouraged to change the probability setting value, the hall personnel, etc. are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, or a specific probability within the normal range as the probability setting value. The set value may be forcibly set.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed with the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 can be rotated from the on state to the setting change position provided in the direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is urged to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, it may be possible to perform this by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to project from the main board through the hole provided in the board box 100. Even if the board box 100 is not opened, it may be operated by a person involved in the hall or the like. This also makes it possible to easily determine the probability set value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the start-up mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an indispensable condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Further, the hall may be configured to be able to select whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is a condition for changing the setting or confirming the setting.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 is mounted on the main control device 110. On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch 503 may be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed by the setting key 501. On the other hand, the setting key 501 is used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one prize is won (for example, change from 3 to 5) and the movable accessory that assists the prize in the prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or member that affects the flow mode of the ball (for example, a stage or crune where the ball can roll) It is possible to change the settings related to the degree of advantage to the player, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). It may be configured.

In each of the above embodiments, the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the lateral direction (left direction or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You may.

In the above embodiment, the big hit random values, the small hit random values, and the lost random values are set as continuous values, and whether or not they are big hits or whether or not they are small hits is range-determined (for example, "0" or more). It was configured to be possible (whether or not it was "49" or less), and was configured to reduce the control load of the main control device 110. On the other hand, each random number value giving the game value (that is, a big hit random value and a small hit random value) may be arranged so as to be dispersed (dissipated) instead of being arranged continuously. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", the jackpot random number value is set to "7,341,555,777,831" and the small hit random number value is set to "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845 ".

Here, if a value that becomes a jackpot random number value (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in the low probability state and the high probability state) exists continuously regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is that. There is a possibility that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be illegally assigned. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described modification, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random value that gives the game value from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a are not duplicated. The jackpot random number value may be set. By configuring in this way, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot can be changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be made difficult to predict, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type random number C2 are updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random number). On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With such a configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is configured to increase evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, each time the set value increases, the jackpot random number value (or small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random number value is increased by "2" for the set values "1" to "3", while the jackpot random number value is increased to "5" for the set values "4" to "6". Increase in increments. With this configuration, the game value that can be given by the setting difference changes greatly, and it is possible to provide a game with intonation (sharpness) due to the setting difference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the jackpot type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the jackpot is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the jackpot type is changed. It may be configured so that a setting difference occurs due to the change.

In the above embodiment, the random number value to which the game value is given (that is, the jackpot random number value) is changed according to the setting change, and the change is compensated from the random number value which does not give the game value (that is, the lost random number value). It was configured like this. On the other hand, when the random value to which the game value is given (for example, the jackpot random value) is changed due to the setting change, the changed amount is used as the random value to give another game value (for example, the small hit random value). ) May be supplemented. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "missing random number value range", and "small hit random number value range". Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "the range of the jackpot random number value", "the range of the small hit random number value", "the range of the jackpot random number value (hereinafter referred to as" the range of the re-big hit random number value ")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be in the sequence of "range of lost random number values". Here, as the "range of the re-big hit random value", the increase in the big hit random value due to the setting change is configured to correspond. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of random numbers that do not change (that is, big hit random values and small hit random values that do not change even if the settings are changed) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the hit / fail judgment control program, the basic hit / fail judgment of the fixed random number value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. It is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "missing random number value range", and "small hit random number value range". Was. On the other hand, each random number value may be defined (set) in descending order (or small number) of random number values.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "missing random number value range", and "small hit random number value range". Was. On the other hand, the jackpot random number so that the "big hit random number range" that increases with the setting change is adjacent (adjacent) to the random number value that decreases with the setting change (that is, the "missing random number range"). It may be configured to be specified (set) in the table 202a. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of small hit random number value", "range of jackpot random number value", and "range of lost random number value". .. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of the random value that does not change (that is, the small hit random value) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for determining whether the small hit is correct or not, the determination of the small hit random value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the large hit random value due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. It is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is improved (doubled or more). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the small hit probability of the special symbol may be improved. Further, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be set to 2 times or more (for example, 10 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", even if both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to be improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the small hit probability is also 5 times). Good.

In the above embodiment, the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol and the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol are configured to be equal to each other. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol, or the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol may be set. The probability may be configured to be lower than the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol.

In the above embodiment, it is configured so that a setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low probability state or the high probability state) is eliminated, and the setting difference is provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high probability state or the low probability state). You may.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated from the lost random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value may be compensated from the small hit random number and the lost random number value. With this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers due to setting changes from each of the small hit random numbers and the lost random numbers, and the changes in the jackpot random numbers are fixed. It is not necessary to supplement from the predetermined random number value of 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the jackpot random number value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the ordinary electric service 72 is arranged with respect to the second starting port 71, and the inflow mode of the ball into the second starting port 71 differs depending on the opening / closing mode of the ordinary electric service 72. ing. On the other hand, the ordinary electric service 72 is arranged with respect to the first starting port 64 so that the inflow mode of the ball into the first starting port 64 differs depending on the opening / closing mode of the ordinary electric service 72. May be good.

In the above embodiment, the normal electric service 72 that is displaced between the protruding state and the immersive state is used, and the gametability of the present invention is realized by changing the immersion timing and the immersion time of the ordinary electric service 72 in each gaming state. It is configured in. On the other hand, the gameability of the present invention may be realized by using a rotary blade member and changing the operation timing and operation time of the blade member in each gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the blade members are arranged on the left and right sides of the second starting port 71 and the blade members are in the non-operating state (for example, the upright state), the ball collides with the outside of the blade members (non-rolling side). Then, it is configured to flow down to the downstream side as it is. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the blade member is rotated (in a state of tilting 120 degrees to the right from the upright state), the ball collides with the inside of the blade member (rolling side), and the inside of the blade member is on the second starting port 71 side. It is configured to roll toward. With this configuration, the rotation mode of the blade member is easier to recognize whether or not the region in which the blade member itself operates is driven larger than the drive mode due to the appearance of the normal electric service 72. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether or not the player has won the prize with the variable display.

In the above embodiment, as the arrangement position of the first starting port 64, only the ball fired in the left-handed game can win a prize, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is difficult to win or cannot win a prize. It is arranged. On the other hand, the first starting port 64 may be arranged or the winning auxiliary member may be arranged so that the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the first starting port 64. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to store the maximum number of reserved symbols for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the jackpot where the right-handed game is performed, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol after the jackpot ends. It is possible to suppress the event that the small hit game of the second special symbol may appear due to the fact that the number is not stored, and to realize the game playability according to the game specifications.

It may be configured so that the number of time reductions given based on each jackpot type is different. Specifically, for example, in "time saving A" where the "time saving function" ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the time saving number is given 100 times, while in "time saving B", the time saving number is given 50 times. Configure. Further, in the "time saving function" in which the "time saving function" ends based on the number of times the special symbol is changed, the number of times the first special symbol is changed is 100 times or the number of times the second special symbol is changed is 50 times. While the "time saving function" is configured to end when the condition ends first, in "time saving B", the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is 50 times, or the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 100 times. The "time saving function" is configured to end when any of the conditions of is terminated first. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 are changed to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in which the main display area Dm is used to vary. It may be configured to be changed accordingly. Specifically, for example, corresponding to the special symbol executed in the main display area Dm, the executed fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are positioned on the upper side or displayed in Arabic numerals or red. The 4th symbol display areas 88 and 87, which are not executed, are displayed on the lower side, displayed in a notation different from the above Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals and Roman numerals), and in a color different from red (for example, Chinese numerals and Roman numerals). For example, it is configured to be displayed in blue). With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize which special symbol is being executed while identifying and displaying the variable effect being executed, and the player is aware of the currently staying gaming state. By making it difficult to configure, it is possible to create a game property in which the game state is estimated, and to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, it is configured to output the alarm sound when a specific condition is satisfied, instead of outputting the alarm sound when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the gaming state where the left-handed game is recommended. May be good. Specifically, for example, by configuring in this way, an alarm sound is output only for the act of a malicious player who intentionally tries to obtain more balls than the game specification, and an unfamiliar player. By not outputting an alarm sound for a well-meaning right-handed game due to an operation error or an operation error, it is possible to suppress an illegal game and also suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The probability of hitting a normal symbol may be set to be about the same in any gaming state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "time shortened state" where the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low, the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to 50/100 and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high "probability fluctuation". In the "state" and "latent probability fluctuation state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to be 50/100, 51/100, etc., which is the same as or equal to the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" and the like. With this configuration, regarding the opening of the ordinary electric service 72 based on the hit of the ordinary symbol, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 are taken into consideration, and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is not considered. By making it possible to calculate the ball output rate and the like, it is possible to facilitate the design of game specifications in each game state.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol selected after the jackpot may be different for each jackpot symbol won by the jackpot. Specifically, for example, if one of the 1 symbol, 3 symbols, 5 symbols, and 7 symbols, which are jackpot symbols that can generate a "probability fluctuation state", is won, the first symbol in the "probability fluctuation state" is set. Both the special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to shift to the "both long fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected. In addition, when three symbols are won, the first special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively long fluctuation time in the "probability fluctuation state", while the second special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively short fluctuation time. It is configured to shift to "1 long special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, when winning with 5 symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol both shift to the "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively short fluctuation time is easily selected in the "probability fluctuation state". Configure to. Further, when the 7 symbols are won, the first special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively short fluctuation time, while the second special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively long fluctuation time. It is configured to shift to "special 1 short special 2 long fluctuation probability fluctuation state". With this configuration, the special symbols that can be derived first can be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol in the game state after the jackpot. For example, which special symbol stops first or not. Therefore, the probability that the jackpot will appear first can be different for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

The fluctuation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol may be configured to be different based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation production of the first to tenth special symbols after the end of the jackpot is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time can be easily selected, and the eleventh and subsequent times are configured. Regarding the variation effect of the special symbol of, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time can be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game while providing the game with sharpness.

A plurality of types of hits for ordinary symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened once, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened three times, and the ordinary electric service 72 is opened three times and for a long time. 3 times long open hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the gaming state is advantageous for the player in the order of "normal gaming state"-> "time shortening state"-> "latent probability fluctuation state"-> "probability fluctuation state". On the other hand, the game specifications may be set so that the "time shortening state", the "latent probability fluctuation state", and the "probability fluctuation state" are positioned as the game states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". .. Specifically, for example, the start port of the first special symbol is provided on the upstream side of the start port of the second special symbol to which the ordinary electric service 72 is attached, and the ordinary electric service 72 operates in the "normal game state". Due to the difficulty, it is easier for the player to receive a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is easy to receive a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the person. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

In the above embodiment, a so-called time saving limiter function is provided in which a jackpot type in which the "time saving function" does not occur is selected for each predetermined number of times the "time saving function" is given. On the other hand, a so-called probability variation limiter function may be provided in which a jackpot type that does not generate a high probability state of a special symbol is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots. In this case, when the probability change limiter function is installed, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set for each predetermined number of jackpots, but the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variable display time is shortened, the normal electric service 72 opening time is extended, etc. It is configured to set the "winning assistance state" by.

When the right-handed suggestion display suggesting the right-handed game appears, the display position of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed. Specifically, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, while the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "probability fluctuation state" or the like, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed in the right small area Ds3, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications according to the game state.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits a limit number of times command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a jackpot is won. On the other hand, it may be configured to send a limit number of times command when the power is turned on. Since the voice lamp control device 113 does not have a so-called backup function, once the power is cut off, the limit number of times cannot be recognized until the next jackpot is won and the limit number of times command is transmitted. It ends up. Therefore, by transmitting the limit number of times command when the power is turned on and executing the effect recognizing the limit number of times in the voice lamp control device 113 from the time when the power is turned on, there is no discrepancy in the effect contents and the variation of the effect is enriched. be able to.

In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of a plurality of special symbols that can be executed at the same time, the variation effect of the special symbol encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variation effect of the non-encouragement special symbol is mainly performed. It is configured not to be performed in the display area Dm. On the other hand, regarding the production of a plurality of symbols (for example, a special symbol and a normal symbol) that can be executed at the same time, the priority order of the effects to be executed depends on the game state, the game specifications, the game value to be given, the execution frequency, and the like. Is provided in advance, and the production according to the priority order is preferentially executed, and for the production with a low priority order, the player has a higher priority than the production such as reducing the scale of the production or not executing the production itself. It may be configured to be difficult to recognize. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the effect related to the variable display of the normal symbol having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol is displayed. 3 If the symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 does not execute or the effect scale is reduced, or if the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the game is played from the second special symbol. The effect related to the variable display of the ordinary symbol having a low game value that can be given to the person may not be executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226, or the effect scale may be reduced. With this configuration, the player does not feel annoyed by reducing (eliminating) the scale of the low-priority production while preferentially executing the production that the player wants to recognize when performing the game. The production can be executed.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a case where the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON when any stop type command is received will be described. However, when each variation pattern command is received and the corresponding stop type command is received, the variation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange variation effect when one of the stop type commands is received without receiving each variation pattern command.

Further, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON at the timing when each fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation effect process (S1110) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by each variation pattern command is displayed by the display control device based on the fact that the variation start flags 223a and 223b are turned on. Each display variation pattern command to be notified to 114 may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive each stop type command, each variation effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the respective display variation pattern commands to the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when each stop type command is received. , May be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, in the demonstration effect, the third symbol composed of the main symbols not given the numbers "0" to "9" may be stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbol with a number or the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided and the third symbol is provided. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates in response to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner in combination with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. The sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an effect different from the usual one. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that when the start prize is won. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination thereof), a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect may be prepared.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous advance notice effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbol, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the reception of the continuous advance notice command is determined by the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and the other stop symbol determination flags are turned off. It may be set to. In the command judgment process, after the stop identification command processing, the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed in the other command processing, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, when the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 is awarded (starting prize), the main control device 110 adds "1" to the number of reserved balls to be added to the voice lamp control device 113. The case where the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in connection with the start winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 as they are is described for the hold ball number command to be notified to. The type of counter included in the ball count command may be a part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values by including information indicating the values of each counter in a command other than the reserved ball count command. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas corresponding to the hold count based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a hold ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, whether it is a jackpot or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the loss based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. In the case of, a part or all of the deviation type, etc. is judged, and these judgment results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or together with a part or all of the value of the counter. It may be stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, for winning a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4". It may be any number other than. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is set by a number or a region divided into four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is provided by the light emitting member. May be configured to notify.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is horizontal. The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by bonuses (features) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table, and has the same function as the bonus ratio management chip or the bonus ratio management chip. The number of winning combinations (the symbols are aligned on the valid line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations during the bonus game period, and the winning combination during the AT period. The number of winning combinations may be counted to manage the winning combination ratio and the continuous winning combination ratio.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below. In addition, each of the concepts of various inventions shown below adds a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the concept of another invention to the concept of the invention, or a part or a plurality of the configurations of the concept of the other invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and constructed by exchanging with a part or the like.

<Group A: Change the game status during consecutive villas to prolong the jackpot time>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting gaming value to a player.

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (for example, start winning process (S109)) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means (for example, a hit process (S104)) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player by using the determination result by the determination means. In
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
When a predetermined condition (for example, winning a big hit or a starting prize) is satisfied in the specific state, the execution period is longer than the execution period of the predetermined event executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state. The execution period prolonging means capable of executing the predetermined event (for example, the OP time or ED time of the jackpot in the "latent probability fluctuation state", or the H table 202d8, the I table 202d9, or the J table 202d10) is provided. A game machine A0 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine A0, the player can use the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine comprising a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means and the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means are determined. In the specific state means and the specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state when the number of times determination means determines that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution period prolonging means capable of executing the predetermined event in an execution period longer than the execution period of the predetermined event executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state. , Is equipped. As a result, when a predetermined event is executed by satisfying a predetermined condition in a specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, it is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state. It is possible to execute the predetermined event in an execution period longer than the execution period of the predetermined event. Therefore, by prolonging the execution period of a predetermined event in a specific state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and to appropriately give the player the game value. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine A0
The predetermined event
The gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is in the first advantageous state generated by the first advantageous state means.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined event is the first advantageous state generated by the first advantageous state means. As a result, when the first advantageous state is generated by satisfying the predetermined condition in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the execution is performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state. It is possible to execute the first advantageous state in an execution period longer than the execution period of the first advantageous state to be performed. Therefore, by prolonging the execution period of the first advantageous state in the specific state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player is appropriately given the game value. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine A1
A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
The ball-entry means is provided with a changing means (for example, a large winning opening solenoid 65b) that changes the ball-entry means into a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter.
The first advantageous state means is
At least a plurality of times, the changing means changes the ball-entry means from the non-enterable state to the ball-entryable state.
The means for extending the execution period is
The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the execution period of the non-entry state is increased.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means capable of launching the game ball, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means, and the ball entering means in the non-entering state in which the game ball cannot enter and the game. The first advantageous state means includes a changing means for changing the ball into a ball-fillable state, and the first advantageous state means causes the ball-entering means to enter the ball from the non-ball-filling state at least a plurality of times. The ball-capable state is changed, and the execution period prolonging means increases the execution period of the ball-impossible state. As a result, when the player fires a game ball in the non-entry state by prolonging the period of the non-entry state in which the player cannot be given the game value, although it is in the first advantageous state. Has the effect that only the number of shots of balls can be increased without giving the player a game value, and the profit margin of the game hall can be improved.

In the gaming machine A2
The above-mentioned non-entry state is
The gaming machine A3 is characterized by having at least a start period (for example, an opening time) executed at the start of the first advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-entry state includes at least a start period executed at the start of the first advantageous state. As a result, the player can play the game ball in the non-entry state by prolonging the execution time of the start period, which is the first advantageous state but cannot give the player the game value. When is fired, there is an effect that only the number of shots of the ball can be increased without giving the player a game value, and the profit margin of the game hall can be improved.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3
The above-mentioned non-entry state is
The gaming machine A4 is characterized by having at least one interval period (for example, an interval time) executed between the ball-enterable state and the next ball-enterable state.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-entry state includes at least one interval period between the possible entry state and the next possible entry state. As a result, although it is in the first advantageous state, the player can play the game ball in the non-entry state by prolonging the execution time of the interval period in which the player cannot be given the game value. When is fired, there is an effect that only the number of shots of the ball can be increased without giving the player a game value, and the profit margin of the game hall can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4
The above-mentioned non-entry state is
The gaming machine A5 is characterized by having at least an end period (for example, an ending time) executed at the end of the first advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-entry state includes at least an end period executed at the end of the first advantageous state. As a result, the player can play the game ball in the non-entry state by prolonging the execution time of the end period, which is the first advantageous state but cannot give the player the game value. When is fired, there is an effect that only the number of shots of the ball can be increased without giving the player a game value, and the profit margin of the game hall can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A5
A display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game, and
When the execution period of the predetermined event is lengthened by the execution period prolonging means, a special effect (for example, "for example,""in the display means, which cannot appear until the second advantageous state reaches the first number of times". The gaming machine A6 is characterized by having a special production execution means for executing "premium live production").

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the execution period of the predetermined event is lengthened by the display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game and the execution period prolonging means, the second advantageous state is the first in the display means. It is equipped with a special effect execution means for executing a special effect that cannot appear until the number of times is reached. As a result, even if the execution period of a predetermined event is extended by executing a special effect that cannot be executed unless the second advantageous state is performed the first time, the second advantageous state is given to the player. It gives a sense of accomplishment that it has reached a special effect that can only be reached by continuing the first time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while making it difficult to feel the length of the execution period of a predetermined event. There is.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A6
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The means for extending the execution period is
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific state, the predetermined event can be executed in a longer execution period than the execution period of the predetermined event executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal state. A7 game machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the means for prolonging the execution period includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means which is different from the specific state and can generate the most disadvantageous normal state for the player. When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific state, the predetermined event can be executed in a longer execution period than the execution period of the predetermined event executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal state. .. As a result, when a predetermined event is executed by satisfying a predetermined condition in a specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, a predetermined condition is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal state. It is possible to execute the predetermined event in an execution period longer than the execution period of the event. Therefore, by prolonging the execution period of a predetermined event in a specific state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and to appropriately give the player the game value. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine A7
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine A8, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means is configured to be initialized when the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group B: Prolong the time until the next big hit by changing the game state at the time of consecutive villas and prolonging the fluctuation time>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group B has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting gaming value to a player.

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (for example, start winning process (S109)) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means (for example, a hit process (S104)) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player by using the determination result by the determination means. In
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
A jackpot OP time or ED time in a prolonging means (for example, a "latent probability fluctuation state") that prolongs the period from the occurrence of the specific state by the specific state means to the end of the next first advantageous state. , Or, a gaming machine B0 including an H table 202d8, an I table 202d9, or a J table 202d10).

According to the gaming machine B0, the player can use the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine comprising a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means and the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means are determined. A specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state when the number of times determination means determines that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time, and the specific state means. It is provided with a prolonging means for prolonging the period from the occurrence of the specific state to the end of the next first advantageous state. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the next first advantageous state that can give the player a game value ends after entering the specific state by the prolongation means. It is possible to extend the period until this happens. Therefore, by prolonging the period in which the game value is given in the first advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player can be appropriately given the game value. It has the effect of being able to be given.

In the gaming machine B0
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the display control device 114).
An execution time selection means (for example, a variation pattern table 202e) for selecting an execution time of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means is provided.
The first advantageous state means is
In the dynamic display executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means, when a predetermined display result is derived, the first advantageous state can be generated.
The prolongation means
When the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the execution time selection means in the specific state, it is easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display that can be selected in the second advantageous state. Game machine B1.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the execution time of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means by using the determination result by the determination means. The first advantageous state means is provided with an execution time selection means for selecting the above, and the first advantageous state means is when a predetermined display result is derived in the dynamic display executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means. The first advantageous state can be generated, and the prolonging means is selected in the second advantageous state when the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the execution time selection means in the specific state. It is configured so that it is easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display to be obtained. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the next first advantageous state that can give the player a game value ends after entering the specific state by the prolongation means. The execution time of the dynamic display to be executed until the first advantageous state is set to be longer than the execution time of the dynamic display that can be selected in the second advantageous state. It can be extended. Therefore, by prolonging the period in which the game value is given in the first advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player can be appropriately given the game value. It has the effect of being able to be given.

In the gaming machine B1
The dynamic display execution means
When deriving the predetermined display result, it is possible to derive a pre-stage aspect (for example, "reach display") that constitutes a part of the predetermined display result.
The prolongation means
At least, in the dynamic display from which the previous stage mode in the specific state is derived, it is easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display from which the previous stage mode in the second advantageous state is derived. Characteristic gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display executing means derives the predetermined display result, it is possible to derive a pre-stage aspect that constitutes a part of the predetermined display result, and the prolonging means can at least derive the specific display result. In the dynamic display from which the pre-stage aspect in the state is derived, it is easy to select an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display from which the pre-stage aspect in the second advantageous state is derived. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the next first advantageous state that can give the player a game value ends after entering the specific state by the prolongation means. It is easy to select the execution time of the dynamic display from which the previous stage mode to be executed is derived, which is longer than the execution time of the dynamic display from which the previous stage mode that can be selected in the second advantageous state is derived. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the period until the end of the first advantageous state. Therefore, by prolonging the period in which the game value is given in the first advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player can be appropriately given the game value. It has the effect of being able to be given.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B2
The prolongation means
At least, the execution time of the dynamic display (for example, the “non-reach” effect mode) that is most easily selected in the specific state is longer than the execution time of the dynamic display that is most easily selected in the second advantageous state. A game machine B3 characterized by selecting.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the prolonging means selects at least the execution time of the dynamic display, which is most easily selected in the specific state, and an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display, which is most easily selected in the second advantageous state. To do. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the next first advantageous state that can give the player a game value ends after entering the specific state by the prolongation means. The execution time of the dynamic display that is most easily selected is selected from the dynamic displays that are most easily selected, and the execution time that is longer than the execution time of the dynamic display that is most easily selected in the second advantageous state is selected. It is possible to extend the period until the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, by prolonging the period in which the game value is given in the first advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player can be appropriately given the game value. It has the effect of being able to be given.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B3
The prolongation means
At the very least, select the shortest execution time of the dynamic display (for example, a "non-reach" effect mode) in the specific state, and a longer execution time than the shortest execution time of the dynamic display in the second advantageous state. A game machine B4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the prolonging means selects at least the shortest execution time of the dynamic display in the specific state and a longer execution time than the shortest execution time of the dynamic display in the second advantageous state. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the next first advantageous state that can give the player a game value ends after entering the specific state by the prolongation means. The execution time of the shortest dynamic display is selected from the dynamic displays executed until the execution time is longer than the execution time of the shortest dynamic display in the second advantageous state, and the first advantageous state ends. It is possible to extend the period until this happens. Therefore, by prolonging the period in which the game value is given in the first advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player can be appropriately given the game value. It has the effect of being able to be given.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B4
The prolongation means
At least, the longest execution time of the dynamic display (for example, the "special reach" effect mode) in the specific state should be selected to be longer than the longest execution time of the dynamic display in the second advantageous state. A game machine B5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the prolonging means selects at least the longest execution time of the dynamic display in the specific state and a longer execution time than the longest execution time of the dynamic display in the second advantageous state. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the next first advantageous state that can give the player a game value ends after entering the specific state by the prolongation means. The execution time of the longest dynamic display is selected from the dynamic displays executed until the execution time is longer than the execution time of the longest dynamic display in the second advantageous state, and the first advantageous state ends. It is possible to extend the period until this happens. Therefore, by prolonging the period in which the game value is given in the first advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player can be appropriately given the game value. It has the effect of being able to be given.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B5
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The prolongation means
When the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the execution time selection means in the specific state, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the dynamic display that can be selected in the normal state. Game machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the prolonging means includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means capable of generating the most disadvantageous normal state for the player, which is different from the specific state. When the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the execution time selection means in a specific state, it is configured so that it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the dynamic display that can be selected in the normal state. .. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the next first advantageous state that can give the player a game value ends after entering the specific state by the prolongation means. The execution time of the dynamic display to be executed is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the dynamic display that can be selected in the normal state so that it can be easily selected, and the period until the end of the first advantageous state is extended. It becomes possible to change. Since the specific state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, if the execution time of the dynamic display in the specific state is too long, the game may be delayed and the player may be awakened. .. Therefore, although the execution time of the dynamic display in the specific state is lengthened, the execution time shorter than the execution time of the dynamic display in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player, can be easily selected. By prolonging the period during which the game value is given, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, while suppressing the delay in the game and improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In the gaming machine B6
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine B7, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means is configured to be initialized when the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group C: Change the game state when you stay in a row, and change the length of the part other than the opening time of the big prize opening>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group C has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting gaming value to a player.

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (for example, start winning process (S109)) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, a first advantageous state means (for example, a hit process (S104)) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player, and
A game value-adding means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player by changing to the first mode (for example, an open mode) in the first advantageous state by the first advantageous state means. In a gaming machine equipped with
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
When the specific state is generated by the specific state means, the jackpot OP time or ED in the prolongation means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") for prolonging the period other than the first aspect in the game value adding means. The gaming machine C0 comprising time or H table 202d8, I table 202d9 or J table 202d10).

According to the gaming machine C0, the player can use the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means. A predetermined game value is given to the player by changing to the first aspect in the first advantageous state means capable of generating the first advantageous state capable of imparting the game value and the first advantageous state means by the first advantageous state means. A gaming machine provided with a game value imparting means that can be imparted, the second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state means by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the advantageous state, the number of times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means, and the first number of times determining means. When it is determined that the two advantageous states have occurred the first time, the specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state, and when the specific state is generated by the specific state means, the game The value-imparting means includes a prolonging means for prolonging a period other than the first aspect. When appropriately giving the game value to the player, it can be realized by prolonging the predetermined period, but the period in which the game value-giving means capable of giving the player the game value is the first aspect is long-term. If this happens, the period during which the player can obtain the game value will be increased, and the player may be given an excessive game value. Therefore, when a specific state occurs, the period in which the game value-adding means is the first aspect is not extended, and the period other than the first aspect is extended so that the player is not given the game value. In addition, it is possible to prolong the time required for the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine C0
The first advantageous state means is
The game value-adding means is changed to the first aspect at least a plurality of times.
The prolongation means
A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the period of any of the first aspects is not changed.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means is configured to change the game value-adding means to the first aspect at least a plurality of times, and the prolonging means is configured not to change the period of any of the first aspects. There is. As a result, when a specific state occurs, the game value is given to the player by prolonging the period other than the first aspect without prolonging any period in which the game value-giving means is the first aspect. It is possible to prolong the time required for the game without giving it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1
The first advantageous state means is
In the first advantageous state, the game value-adding means has a period before the first aspect (for example, an opening time) before the first aspect.
The prolongation means
The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the execution time of the first aspect preceding period is lengthened.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means has a period before the first aspect before the game value-adding means becomes the first aspect in the first advantageous state, and the prolonging means has the first aspect. It is configured to increase the execution time of the previous period. As a result, when a specific state occurs, the period during which the game value-adding means is the first aspect is not extended, and by prolonging the period before the first aspect, the player is not given the game value. In addition, it is possible to prolong the time required for the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C2
The first advantageous state means is
In the first advantageous state, the game value-adding means has a post-first aspect period (for example, ending time) after becoming the first aspect.
The prolongation means
The gaming machine C3, characterized in that the execution time of the post-period of the first aspect is lengthened.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means has a post-period after the first aspect after the game value-adding means becomes the first aspect in the first advantageous state, and the prolonging means has the first aspect. It is configured to increase the execution time of the post-mode period. As a result, when a specific state occurs, the period during which the game value-adding means is the first aspect is not extended, and by prolonging the period after the first aspect, the player is not given the game value. In addition, it is possible to prolong the time required for the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C3
The first advantageous state means is
In the first advantageous state, the game value-adding means has a first-mode interval period (for example, an interval time) from the first mode to the first mode.
The prolongation means
The gaming machine C4, characterized in that the execution time of the first aspect interim period is lengthened.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means has a first-mode interval period from when the game value-adding means becomes the first mode to when the game value-adding means becomes the first mode in the first advantageous state. , The prolongation means is configured to lengthen the execution time of the first aspect interim period. As a result, when a specific state occurs, the period during which the game value-adding means is the first aspect is not lengthened, and by prolonging the interim period between the first modes, the player is not given the game value. In addition, it is possible to prolong the time required for the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4
A display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game, and
When the period other than the first aspect is lengthened by the prolongation means, a special effect (for example, "premium live") that cannot appear until the second advantageous state reaches the first number of times in the display means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by having a special effect executing means for executing "effect").

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a period other than the first aspect is lengthened by the display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game and the prolongation means, the second advantageous state is changed to the first number of times in the display means. It is equipped with a special effect execution means that executes a special effect that cannot be displayed until it is reached. As a result, by executing a special effect that cannot be executed unless the second advantageous state is performed the first time, the second advantageous state is given to the player even when the period other than the first aspect is extended. It gives a sense of accomplishment that it has reached a special production that can only be reached by continuing the first time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game while making it difficult to feel the length of the period when the game value is not given. There is.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C5
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The prolongation means
The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the period of the first advantageous state other than the first aspect in the specific state is made longer than the period of the first advantageous state other than the first aspect in the normal state.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the prolonging means includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means which is different from the specific state and can generate the most disadvantageous normal state for the player. The period of the first advantageous state other than the first aspect in the specific state is configured to be longer than the period of the first advantageous state other than the first aspect in the normal state. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, when the period other than the first aspect of the first advantageous state is extended, the first aspect of the first advantageous state in the normal state It is possible to configure it to be longer than the length of the period other than. Therefore, by prolonging the period other than the first aspect of the first advantageous state in the specific state, it is possible to suppress the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and the player can appropriately play the game. It has the effect of adding value.

In the gaming machine C6
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine C7, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means is configured to be initialized when the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group D: When a predetermined number of consecutive villas occur, the game medium that can be acquired in the part other than the jackpot is changed>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group D has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting gaming value to a player.

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (for example, start winning process (S109)) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, a first advantageous state means (for example, a hit process (S104)) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player, and
A first game value-adding means (for example, a variable winning device) capable of giving a player a first game value by changing to a first aspect (for example, an open mode) in the first advantageous state by the first advantageous state means. 65) and in a gaming machine equipped with
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
A second game in which a player can be given a second game value (for example, a prize ball based on a prize in the second starting port 71) by being able to change to the second aspect in the second advantageous state or the specific state. Value-adding means (for example, ordinary electric service 72) and
Value acquisition difficult means (for example, "for example," which makes the second game value by the second game value means in the specific state more difficult to obtain than the second game value by the second game value giving means in the second advantageous state. The gaming machine D0 is characterized by having a normal symbol in a low probability state) in the "latent probability fluctuation state".

According to the gaming machine D0, the player can use the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means. The first advantageous state means capable of generating the first advantageous state capable of imparting the game value and the first advantageous state means by the first advantageous state means are changed to the first aspect to give the player the first game value. A gaming machine provided with a first game value-imparting means that can be imparted, the second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state means. By the second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state, the number of times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means, and the number of times determining means. When it is determined that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time, the specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state and the second advantageous state or the second aspect in the specific state. The second game value imparting means capable of imparting the second game value to the player by being able to change, the second game value by the second game value means in the specific state, and the second game value in the second advantageous state. It is provided with a value acquisition difficulty means that makes it more difficult to acquire than the second game value by the second game value giving means. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the acquisition of the second game value by the second game value adding means is performed by the second game value adding means in the second advantageous state. Make it more difficult than acquiring game value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine D0
A second information acquisition means (for example, through gate 67) for acquiring the second predetermined information, and
A second determination means for determining the second predetermined information acquired by the second information acquisition means (for example, S803 of the ordinary electric service control process (S204)) and
By using the determination result by the second determination means, a changing means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) that changes the second game value-adding means to the second aspect is provided.
The means for which it is difficult to acquire value is
The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the winning probability of the second aspect by the second determining means in the specific state is lower than the winning probability of the second aspect by the second determining means in the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second information acquisition means for acquiring the second predetermined information, the second determination means for determining the second predetermined information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and the determination result by the second determination means are used. By doing so, the second game value giving means is provided with a changing means for changing to the second aspect, and the value acquisition difficult means is the winning probability of the second aspect by the second determining means in the specific state. Is lower than the winning probability of the second aspect by the second determination means in the second advantageous state. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the winning probability of the second aspect in the second determination means is lowered, and the second game value is acquired by the second game value adding means. , It is more difficult than the acquisition of the second game value by the second game value adding means in the second advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the game machine D1
By using the determination result by the second determination means, the display means (for example, the ordinary symbol display device 83) executes the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the normal figure variation processing (S211)). )When,
An execution time selection means for selecting the execution time of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means (for example, S708, S710, S711 of the general diagram variation processing (S211)) is provided.
The means for which it is difficult to acquire value is
In the dynamic display by the execution time selection means in the specific state, it is configured so that an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display by the execution time selection means in the second advantageous state can be easily selected. The featured gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result by the second determination means. The execution time selection means for selecting the execution time is provided, and the value acquisition difficult means is the dynamic display by the execution time selection means in the specific state, and the execution time selection means in the second advantageous state. It is configured so that an execution time longer than the execution time of the dynamic display can be easily selected. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the execution time of the dynamic display executed by using the determination result of the second determination means is lengthened, and the specific state is extended. The acquisition of the second game value by the second game value-adding means in the above is made more difficult than the acquisition of the second game value by the second game value-adding means in the second advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2
The means for which it is difficult to acquire value is
The gaming machine D3 is configured to reduce the period of the second aspect by the changing means in the specific state from the period of the second aspect by the changing means in the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the value acquisition difficult means is configured to reduce the period of the second aspect by the changing means in the specific state from the period of the second aspect by the changing means in the second advantageous state. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the period of the second mode by the changing means is reduced from the period of the second mode by the changing means in the second advantageous state. It makes the acquisition of the second game value by the second game value-adding means in the specific state more difficult than the acquisition of the second game value by the second game value-adding means in the second advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3
The means for which it is difficult to acquire value is
It does not affect the acquisition of the first game value by the first game value adding means (for example, the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upstream side of the ordinary electric service 72, and the high probability state of the special symbol is equivalent).
The gaming machine D4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the value acquisition difficult means is configured so as not to affect the acquisition of the first game value by the first game value adding means. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, the acquisition of the second game value by the second game value adding means is performed by the second game value adding means in the second advantageous state. While making it more difficult than the acquisition of the game value, the first game value is configured to be available in the same manner as the second game state without affecting the acquisition of the first game value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D4
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine D5, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means capable of generating the most disadvantageous normal state for the player, which is different from the specific state. Is configured to be initialized when the normal state is entered. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group E: Transition to a game state in which more balls can be acquired than the number of game media acquired at the time of consecutive villas when a predetermined number of consecutive villas occur>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines and the like as illustrated above, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group E has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (for example, start winning process (S109)) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means (for example, a hit process (S104)) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player by using the determination result by the determination means. In
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
The gaming machine E0 is characterized in that, in the specific state, a gaming value larger than the gaming value that can be acquired in the first advantageous state can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine E0, the player can use the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine comprising a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means and the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means are determined. The number-of-times determining means and the specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state when it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time are provided. In a specific state, it is possible to give a player more game value than the game value that can be obtained in the first advantageous state. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, it becomes possible to acquire more game value than the game value that can be acquired in the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is repeated. This has the effect of creating a game property in which more game value can be obtained than in the first advantageous state, increasing the variety of games, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E0
A first game value-adding means (for example, winning a prize in a variable winning device 65) capable of giving a game value to a player in the first advantageous state, and
A third game value-adding means (for example, winning a prize in the second small winning opening 74a) capable of giving a game value to a player in the specific state is provided.
A game characterized in that the game value given by the third game value-adding means can be obtained more than the game value given by the first game value-giving means in the first advantageous state of 1. Machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first game value-adding means capable of giving the player a game value in the first advantageous state and the third game value-adding means capable of giving the player a game value in the specific state are provided. The game value given by the third game value-adding means can be obtained more than the game value given by the first game value-giving means in the first advantageous state of 1. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, it becomes possible to acquire more game value than the game value that can be acquired in the first advantageous state of 1, and the second advantageous state becomes possible. By repeating the above, it is possible to create a game property that more game value can be obtained in which the first advantageous state is performed once, and to increase the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the gaming machine E1
A second game value-adding means (for example, a prize to the second starting port 71 based on the opening of the ordinary electric service 72), which can give the player a game value in the second advantageous state, is provided.
The game value given by the third game value-adding means is the game value given by the first game value-giving means in the first advantageous state before that, and the second game value-giving in the two advantageous states. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is configured so that it can be acquired more than the gaming value given by the means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state before that is provided with the second game value-adding means capable of giving the player a game value in the second advantageous state, and the game value given by the third game value-adding means. The game value given by the first game value-adding means and the game value given by the second game value-giving means in the two advantageous states can be obtained. As a result, in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, more game value than the game value that can be acquired in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state generated so far is acquired. By stacking the second advantageous states, it is possible to acquire more game value than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state that have occurred so far, and to enrich the variation of the game. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E2
A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71 in the ordinary electric service 72) into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.
A second ball entry means (for example, a second small ball) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and imparting a game value greater than the game value based on the entry into the first ball entry means. With a winning opening 74a),
The second game value-adding means is
By inserting the game ball into the first ball entry means, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means.
The third game value-adding means is
The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that by making it difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means from the second advantageous state, the game ball can enter the second ball entry means. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball. A second ball-entry means capable of adding more game value than the game value based on the ball-entry into the first ball-entry means is provided, and the second game value-adding means is provided with a game ball to the first ball-entry means. Is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and the third game value-adding means enters the game ball into the first ball entry means from the second advantageous state. By making it difficult, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entry means. As a result, in the specific state generated by the second advantageous state being performed the first time, the game ball can be entered into the second entry means capable of imparting more game value than the first entry means. By constructing and stacking the second advantageous state, it is possible to create a game property that more game value can be obtained than in the first advantageous state, to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine E0
A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A third ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
A display means capable of displaying predetermined identification information (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and
In the first advantageous state and / or the second advantageous state, when a predetermined display result is derived to the display means, the third ball entry means can be opened a predetermined number of times (for example, a fourth game value-adding means (for example). , Open the variable winning device 65 5 times),
In the specific state, when a predetermined display result is derived to the display means, the third ball-entry means can be opened a specific number of times more than the predetermined number of times (for example, the variable winning device 65). The game machine E4 is characterized by being equipped with (opened 10 times).

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a third ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, a display means capable of displaying predetermined identification information, and the first advantageous state. And / or in the second advantageous state, when a predetermined display result is derived to the display means, the third ball entry means can be opened a predetermined number of times, and the fourth game value-adding means and in the specific state. When a predetermined display result is derived from the display means, the third ball entry means is provided with a fifth game value-adding means capable of opening the third ball entry means a specific number of times more than the predetermined number of times. As a result, a predetermined display result is derived in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, so that the predetermined display result in the first advantageous state and / or the second advantageous state can be derived. It is possible to acquire more game value than the base game value, and create a game property that more game value can be acquired by entering a specific state generated by repeating the second advantageous state, and a variation of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by enriching the game.

In the gaming machine E0
A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
In the first advantageous state, a third ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that enables the game ball launched by the launching means to enter the ball from a difficult entry state.
A display means capable of displaying predetermined identification information (for example, a third symbol display device 81) and
In the first advantageous state and / or the second advantageous state, when a predetermined display result is derived to the display means, the sixth game value of providing the difficult ball entry state of the third ball entry means for a predetermined period. The granting means (for example, the IT time of the variable winning device 65 is 3 seconds) and
In the specific state, when a predetermined display result is derived to the display means, the seventh game value-adding means (for example, the seventh game value-imparting means (for example,) in which the difficult-to-enter state of the third ball-entry means is provided for a specific period shorter than the predetermined period The gaming machine E5 is characterized by having an IT time of 1 second for the variable winning device 65).

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined distinction is made between a launching means capable of launching a game ball and a third ball entering means in which the game ball launched by the launching means is changed from a difficult ball entering state to a ball entering capable state in the first advantageous state. When a predetermined display result is derived from the display means capable of displaying information and the first advantageous state and / or the second advantageous state, the third ball entry means has difficulty in entering the ball. When a predetermined display result is derived to the display means in the sixth game value-adding means that provides the state for a predetermined period and the specific state, the difficult ball entry state of the third ball entry means is set from the predetermined period. It is provided with a seventh game value-adding means provided for a short specific period. As a result, a predetermined display result is derived in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, so that the predetermined display result in the first advantageous state and / or the second advantageous state can be derived. It is possible to reduce the difficulty of entering the third ball entering means based on the above, and reduce the difficulty of entering the game ball launched by the launching means into the third entering means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls for the third ball entry means based on the derivation of the predetermined display result in the specific state, and many games are played by entering the specific state generated by overlapping the second advantageous states. It has the effect of creating a gameplay that can acquire value, enriching the variety of games, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E5
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine E6, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means capable of generating the most disadvantageous normal state for the player, which is different from the specific state. Is configured to be initialized when the normal state is entered. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group F: Time saving limiter correction when simultaneous fluctuation and jackpot fluctuation are erased>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group F has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting gaming value to a player.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
A first information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) capable of acquiring first information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means.
A first determination means for determining the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505)) and
A second ball entering means (for example, a second starting port 71), which is capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and is different from the first ball entering means,
A second information acquisition means (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 203e) capable of acquiring second information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means.
A second determination means for determining the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S508)) and
By using the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, the first advantageous state means (for example, a large winning opening) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player. In a gaming machine equipped with processing during opening (S6007))
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
A display means capable of displaying predetermined identification information (for example, a special symbol display device 37) and
With a dynamic display executing means (for example, main control device 110) capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in the display means based on the ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. , Equipped with
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display of the identification information (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) in the display means based on the ball entering the first ball entry means. For example, the upper LED group 37b1) and
A second dynamic execution means (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) capable of executing the second dynamic display of the identification information (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) in the display means based on the ball entering the second ball entry means. For example, the lower LED group 37b2) and
The same-time execution means (for example, of the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time. Dynamic display and dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel),
When the first advantageous state can occur in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display by using the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, the other Derivation stopping means for stopping the derivation of the display result of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display (for example, in the derivation of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic of the first special symbol Stop displaying), and
When the second advantageous state can occur in the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display in which the derivation of the display result is stopped by the derivation suppressing means, the second advantageous state counting means said. The gaming machine F0 is configured so as not to be counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state.

According to the game machine F0, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the first ball entry means. A first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the above, a first determination means for determining the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and a game launched by the launching means. A second ball entering means capable of entering a ball and different from the first entering means, and a second information capable of acquiring second information based on the entry of a game ball into the second entering means. By using the information acquisition means, the second determination means for determining the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, the player A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the pachinko machine, and capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the advantageous state means, the second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and the second advantageous state counting means. A specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state when the second advantageous state is determined to have occurred the first time by the number determination means. Based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, the display means can dynamically display the identification information. The dynamic display executing means includes an executing means, and the dynamic display executing means is a first dynamic capable of executing a first dynamic display of the identification information in the display means based on the ball entering the first ball entering means. An execution means, a second dynamic execution means capable of executing a second dynamic display of the identification information in the display means based on the entry into the second ball entry means, and the first dynamic execution means. The first dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means can be executed at the same time, and the determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. By using the result, when the first advantageous state can occur in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display of the other. In the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display in which the derivation of the display result is stopped by the derivation stopping means, the second dynamic display is provided. When a profit state can occur, the second advantageous state counting means is configured not to count as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state. As a result, the second advantageous state that is not given to the player is not counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state, and only the second advantageous state that can be given to the player is counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state. Therefore, even when multiple dynamic displays are changed at the same time, the gameplayability that the selection content of the lottery result changes based on the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state is accurately executed to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In addition, "stopping the derivation of the display result" is an example of a case where the derivation of the display result is stopped, a case where the derivation of the display result is temporarily stopped and interrupted, and the like.

In the gaming machine F0
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, the first result (for example, a jackpot) that can give the first game value can be derived.
The derivation restraint means
When the first result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that it is configured to prevent the derivation of the first result in the obtained second dynamic display or the first dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be able to derive a first result that can give a first game value in the dynamic display, and the derivation stopping means is the first dynamic executing means or the second. When the first result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the dynamic execution means, the second dynamic display or the second dynamic display that can be derived later. 1 It is configured to stop the derivation of the first result in the dynamic display. As a result, the derivation of the first result derived later based on the first result derived first is stopped, and the second advantageous state not given to the player based on the restraint is counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state. Since only the second advantageous state that can be given to the player can be counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state can be counted even when a plurality of dynamic displays are changed at the same time. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by accurately executing the game property that the selection content of the lottery result changes based on the number of occurrences.

In the game machine F1
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a second result (for example, a small hit) that can give a second game value that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game value can be derived.
The derivation restraint means
When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. The gaming machine F2 is configured to prevent the derived of the first result or the second result in the obtained second dynamic display or the first dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be able to derive a second result capable of imparting a second game value that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game value in the dynamic display, and the derivation stopping means is configured. When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. It is configured to stop the derivation of the first result or the second result in the obtained second dynamic display or the first dynamic display. As a result, the derivation of the first result or the second result derived later based on the second result derived earlier is stopped, and the second advantageous state that is not given to the player based on the restraint is set to the second advantageous state. Since it is possible to count only the second advantageous state that can be given to the player as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state without counting as the number of occurrences, even when a plurality of dynamic displays are changed at the same time, the second advantageous state can be counted. (2) There is an effect that the playability of changing the selection content of the lottery result based on the number of occurrences of the advantageous state can be accurately executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F2
In the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display that can be derived later when the first advantageous state is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier. A pre- and post-determination means for determining whether or not the second advantageous state could occur (for example, S5209 of the special figure 2 change process (S5011)) is provided.
When it is determined that the second advantageous state can occur in the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display that can be later derived by the pre- and post-determining means, the second advantageous state counting means determines that the second advantageous state can occur. 2 The gaming machine F3, which is configured not to be counted as the number of occurrences of an advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first advantageous state is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier, the second dynamic display or the first dynamic that can be derived later. The second dynamic display or the first dynamic display, which is provided with a pre- and post-determining means for determining whether or not the second advantageous state could occur in the display and can be later derived by the pre- and post-determining means, said the first. When it is determined that the two advantageous states can occur, the second advantageous state counting means is configured not to count as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state. As a result, based on the first advantageous state derived earlier, the second advantageous state that can be derived later is not counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state, and only the second advantageous state that can be given to the player is counted. Since it can be counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state, even when a plurality of dynamic displays are changed at the same time, the selection content of the lottery result based on the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state changes. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by accurately executing.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F3
The dynamic display execution means
In the first game state, in the first dynamic short-term means (for example, in the "normal game state"", it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display. , Maximum fluctuation time of the first special symbol <variation time of the second special symbol),
In the second game state, in the second dynamic short-term means (for example, "probability fluctuation state"), it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display. , 1st special symbol fluctuation time> 2nd special symbol maximum fluctuation time).

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, the dynamic display execution means can easily select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display. It includes means and a second dynamic short-term means that makes it easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the second game state. .. As a result, it is possible to create a game property of which dynamic display is derived first according to the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine F5, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means capable of generating the most disadvantageous normal state for the player, which is different from the specific state. Is configured to be initialized when the normal state is entered. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group G: Simultaneous fluctuation, mode in which special figure 1 is easy to stop first, mode in which special figure 2 is easy to stop first, mode in which both special figure 1 and special figure 2 can be stopped>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting a gaming value to a player.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
A first information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) capable of acquiring first information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means.
A first determination means for determining the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505)) and
A second ball entering means (for example, a second starting port 71), which is capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and is different from the first ball entering means,
A second information acquisition means (for example, a second reserved ball storage area 203e) capable of acquiring second information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means.
A second determination means for determining the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S508)) and
By using the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, the first advantageous state means (for example, a large winning opening) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player. In a gaming machine equipped with processing during opening (S6007))
A display means capable of displaying predetermined identification information (for example, a special symbol display device 37) and
With a dynamic display executing means (for example, main control device 110) capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in the display means based on the ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. ,
At least, a first gaming state (for example, a "normal gaming state"), a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time shortening state"), and the first gaming state. Alternatively, a game state changing means (for example, a probability change transition flag 203k or a time reduction counter 203o) capable of changing the game state to a third game state (for example, “latent probability fluctuation state”) different from the second game state is provided. ,
The dynamic display execution means
A first dynamic execution means (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display of the identification information (for example, dynamic display of the first special symbol) in the display means based on the ball entering the first ball entry means. For example, the upper LED group 37b1) and
A second dynamic execution means (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) capable of executing the second dynamic display of the identification information (for example, dynamic display of the second special symbol) in the display means based on the ball entering the second ball entry means. For example, the lower LED group 37b2) and
The same-time execution means (for example, of the first special symbol) capable of executing the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic display by the second dynamic execution means at the same time. Dynamic display and dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel),
In the first gaming state, the first dynamic short-term means (for example, A table 202d1 and B table) in which it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the second dynamic display as the execution time of the first dynamic display. 202d2, C table 202d3 and D table 202d4),
In the second game state, as the execution time of the second dynamic display, it is easy to select an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display (for example, D table 202d4, E table). 202d5, F table 202d6 and G table 202d7),
In the third gaming state, the difference between the average value of the execution time selected in the first dynamic display and the average value of the execution time selected in the second dynamic display is the difference between the first gaming state or the said. The gaming machine G0 is characterized by comprising a time difference reducing means (for example, H table 202d8, I table 202d9, and J table 202d10) that is less than the second gaming state.

According to the game machine G0, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the first entry means. A first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the above, a first determination means for determining the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, and a game launched by the launching means. A second ball entering means capable of entering a ball and different from the first entering means, and a second information capable of acquiring second information based on the entry of a game ball into the second entering means. By using the information acquisition means, the second determination means for determining the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, the player A game machine provided with a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player, and a display means capable of displaying predetermined identification information, and the first ball entry. A dynamic display executing means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in the display means based on the means or the entry into the second ball entry means, at least the first game state, and the first game. The dynamic display executing means includes a second gaming state different from the state and a gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state to the first gaming state or the third gaming state different from the second gaming state. , The first dynamic execution means capable of executing the first dynamic display of the identification information in the display means based on the entry into the first ball entry means, and the entry into the second ball entry means. Based on the above, the second dynamic execution means capable of executing the second dynamic display of the identification information in the display means, the first dynamic display by the first dynamic execution means, and the second dynamic In the same period execution means capable of executing the second dynamic display by the execution means at the same time and the first game state, the execution time of the second dynamic display is set as the execution time of the first dynamic display. A first dynamic short-term means that makes it easy to select a shorter execution time, and an execution time shorter than the execution time of the first dynamic display is selected as the execution time of the second dynamic display in the second gaming state. Difference between the easy second dynamic short-term means and the average value of the execution time selected by the first dynamic display and the average value of the execution time selected by the second dynamic display in the third gaming state. Is provided with a time difference reducing means for reducing the number of the first gaming state or the second gaming state. As a result, the dynamic display in which the result is easily derived can be different depending on the game state. In particular, in the third game state, the execution time of the first dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display The difference between the two is smaller than that of the first game state or the second game state, and it is possible to create a game property as to which dynamic display result is derived. As a result, there is an effect that the addition of the game value based on the dynamic display that can be derived according to the game state is different, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The "difference between the average value of the execution time selected in the first dynamic display and the average value of the execution time selected in the second dynamic display" is selected when the first dynamic display is executed. It is the difference between the value obtained by dividing the total value of the execution time by the number of patterns and the value obtained by dividing the total value of the execution time selected at the time of executing the second dynamic display by the number of patterns. Therefore, it becomes easy to select an execution time that is close to the execution time selected in the first dynamic display and the execution time selected in the second dynamic display. Therefore, it does not exclude that the execution time longer than the second dynamic display can be selected in the first dynamic display, and the execution time longer than the first dynamic display can be selected in the second dynamic display. It does not exclude that.

In the gaming machine G0
When the first advantageous state can occur in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display by using the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, the other Derivation stopping means for stopping the derivation of the display result of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display (for example, in the derivation of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the dynamic of the first special symbol The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having (discontinue display).

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first advantageous state can occur in one of the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display by using the determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means. On the other hand, the derivation stopping means for stopping the derivation of the display result of the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display is provided. As a result, when the first advantageous state can occur in one dynamic display according to the game state, the derivation of the other dynamic display is stopped, and the dynamic display in which the first advantageous state can occur is different. In particular, in the third game state, the difference between the execution time of the first dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is made smaller than that of the first game state or the second game state. It is possible to create a game property based on which dynamic display the first advantageous state is derived. As a result, there is an effect that the addition of the game value based on the dynamic display that can be derived according to the game state is different, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, "stopping the derivation of the display result" is an example of a case where the derivation of the display result is stopped, a case where the derivation of the display result is temporarily stopped and interrupted, and the like.

In the gaming machine G1
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, the first result (for example, a jackpot) that can give the first game value can be derived.
The derivation restraint means
When the first result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. The gaming machine G2 is configured to prevent the derived of the first result in the obtained second dynamic display or the first dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be able to derive a first result that can give a first game value in the dynamic display, and the derivation stopping means is the first dynamic executing means or the second. When the first result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the dynamic execution means, the second dynamic display or the second dynamic display that can be derived later. 1 It is configured to stop the derivation of the first result in the dynamic display. As a result, the derivation of the first result derived later based on the first result derived first is stopped, and in particular, in the third game state, the execution time of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are stopped. The difference from the execution time of is made smaller than that of the first game state or the second game state, and the playability of which dynamic display the first advantageous state based on the derivation of the first result occurs is created. can do. As a result, there is an effect that the addition of the game value based on the dynamic display that can be derived according to the game state is different, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a second result (for example, a small hit) that can give a second game value that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game value can be derived.
The derivation restraint means
When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. The gaming machine G3 is configured to prevent the obtained second dynamic display or the derivation of the first result or the second result in the first dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be able to derive a second result capable of imparting a second game value that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game value in the dynamic display, and the derivation stopping means is configured. When the second result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic execution means, it is derived later. It is configured to stop the derivation of the first result or the second result in the obtained second dynamic display or the first dynamic display. As a result, the derivation of the first result or the second result derived later based on the second result derived earlier is stopped, and in particular, in the third gaming state, the execution time of the first dynamic display and the first The difference from the execution time of the two dynamic displays is made smaller than that of the first game state or the second game state, and which dynamic display is used to generate the first advantageous state based on the derivation of the first result. It is possible to create playability. As a result, there is an effect that the addition of the game value based on the dynamic display that can be derived according to the game state is different, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3
The game state changing means
With the second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating the second advantageous state (for example, "time saving function"),
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When the number-of-times determining means determines that the second advantageous state has occurred the first number of times (for example, six times), the specific state means (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") capable of generating the specific state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") For example, S6104: Yes), and a gaming machine G4 characterized by the present invention.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state changing means includes a second advantageous state means capable of generating the second advantageous state and a second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means. When the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means and the number-of-times determining means determine that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time. , The specific state means capable of generating the specific state, and the like. As a result, in the third gaming state generated by repeating the occurrence of the second advantageous state, the difference between the execution time of the first dynamic display and the execution time of the second dynamic display is set to the first game state or the first game state. 2 It is possible to create a game property of which dynamic display result is derived by reducing the number of games to less than the game state. As a result, there is an effect that the addition of the game value based on the dynamic display that can be derived according to the game state is different, the variation of the game is abundant, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G4
In the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display that can be derived later when the first advantageous state is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier. A pre- and post-determination means for determining whether or not the second advantageous state could occur (for example, S5209 of the special figure 2 change process (S5011)) is provided.
When it is determined that the second advantageous state can occur in the second dynamic display or the first dynamic display that can be later derived by the pre- and post-determining means, the second advantageous state counting means said the first. 2 The gaming machine G5 characterized in that it is configured not to be counted as the number of occurrences of an advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first advantageous state is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display derived earlier, the second dynamic display or the first dynamic that can be derived later. The second dynamic display or the first dynamic display, which is provided with a pre- and post-determining means for determining whether or not the second advantageous state could occur in the display and can be later derived by the pre- and post-determining means, said the first. When it is determined that the two advantageous states can occur, the second advantageous state counting means is configured not to count as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state. As a result, based on the first advantageous state derived earlier, the second advantageous state that can be derived later is not counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state, and only the second advantageous state that can be given to the player is counted. Since it can be counted as the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state, even when a plurality of dynamic displays are changed at the same time, the selection content of the lottery result based on the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state changes. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by accurately executing.

In the gaming machine G4 or G5
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine G6, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4 or G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means capable of generating the most disadvantageous normal state for the player, which is different from the specific state. Is configured to be initialized when the normal state is entered. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group H: Each mode in which the launch mode is recommended, and the mode in which the launch mode can be selected>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the H group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting a gaming value to a player.

A first launch mode in which the game ball is launched toward at least the first region of the game region (for example, a left-handed game) and a second launch mode in which the game ball is launched toward a second region different from the first region (for example, left-handed game). For example, a launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball with a right-handed game) and
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64) arranged in the first area of the game area and capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means.
A second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) arranged in the first area of the game area and capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means.
In a gaming machine provided with a gaming state changing means (for example, MPU201) capable of changing the gaming state.
The game state changing means is at least
A first gaming state (for example, a "normal gaming state") in which entry into the first ball entry means according to the first launch mode is encouraged, and
A second gaming state (for example, a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state") in which entry into the second entry means according to the second launch mode is encouraged, and
A third gaming state in which it is possible to enter the first ball-entry means according to the first launch mode and to enter the second ball-entry means according to the second launch mode (for example, a "latent probability fluctuation state"). The gaming machine H0 is characterized in that the gaming state can be changed.

According to the gaming machine H0, there are a first launch mode in which the game ball is launched toward at least the first region of the gaming region, and a second launch mode in which the game ball is launched toward a second region different from the first region. A launching means capable of launching a pachinko ball, a first ball-entry means arranged in the first region of the gaming area and capable of entering the gaming ball launched by the launching means, and the above-mentioned game area. A gaming machine provided with a second ball-entry means arranged in a first region and capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state. The gaming state changing means includes at least a first gaming state in which entry into the first ball entry means according to the first launch mode is encouraged, and entry into the second ball entry means according to the second launch mode. A second gaming state in which the ball is encouraged, a ball entering the first ball entry means according to the first launch mode, and a ball entering the second ball entry means according to the second launch mode are possible. 3 The game state and the game state can be changed. As a result, the first gaming state in which the game is played in the first firing mode, the second gaming state in which the game is played in the second firing mode, and the third gaming state in which the game is played in the first firing mode or the second firing mode are obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a wide variety of game states with different launch modes.

In the gaming machine H0
The game state changing means
Information acquisition means (for example, first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area) capable of acquiring predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. 203e) and
Determining means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S505) or special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (S508))
By using the determination result by the determination means, the first advantageous state means (for example, the processing during opening of the large winning opening) that can generate the first advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a predetermined game value to the player (S6007)) and
At least, a second game state means (for example, a jackpot end process (S612)) capable of generating the second game state triggered by the end of the first advantageous state.
A second gaming state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second gaming state by the second gaming state means, and
The number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the second gaming state counting means,
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred the first number of times (for example, six times), the third gaming state means (for example, S6104: Yes) capable of generating the third gaming state. The gaming machine H1 characterized by having and.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state changing means is acquired by the information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquisition means. A determination means for determining the predetermined information, and a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a predetermined game value to the player by using the determination result by the determination means. At least, the second gaming state means capable of generating the second gaming state triggered by the end of the first advantageous state, and the second gaming state for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state by the second gaming state means. It is determined by the counting means, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the second gaming state counting means, and the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred the first time. In this case, the third game state means capable of generating the third game state is provided. As a result, in the third gaming state generated by performing the second gaming state the first time, the game can be performed in the first launch mode or the second launch mode, and the launch modes are different. It has the effect of increasing the variety of game states and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H0 or H1
A launch regulating means (for example, right-handed prohibition notification) that regulates the launch of the game ball according to the second launch mode in the first gaming state, and
A launch permissible means (for example, right-handed notification) that allows the launch of the game ball according to the second launch mode in the second gaming state, and
Both mode permitting means (for example, challenge mode selection display 81m and safety mode selection display 81n) that allow both the first launch mode and the launch of the game ball according to the second launch mode in the third gaming state are provided. The gaming machine H2 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a launch regulating means for restricting the launch of the game ball in the second launch mode in the first gaming state, and a launch permitting means for allowing the launch of the game ball in the second launch mode in the second gaming state. It is provided with both modes of permitting means for allowing both the first launch mode and the launch of the game ball according to the second launch mode in the third gaming state. As a result, the second launch mode is regulated, but the first game state in which the game can be played in the first launch mode, the second game state in which the game is allowed in the second launch mode, and the game is played, and the second There is an effect that a third game state in which the game can be performed in one launch mode or a second launch mode is provided, a wide variety of game states with different launch modes can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H2
The gaming machine H3 is characterized by executing a launch mode selection notification (for example, "launch mode selection effect") that allows a player to select a launch mode in the third gaming state.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launch mode selection notification that allows the player to select the launch mode in the third gaming state is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game state in which the player can select the launch mode by his / her own will and then perform the game, enrich the variation of the game states with different launch modes, and improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H3
It is characterized in that the first game value based on the entry of a game ball into the first entry means and the second game value based on the entry of a game ball into the second entry means are different. Game machine H4 to play.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first game value based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second game value based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means are made different. As a result, it is possible to perform the game after selecting the launch modes having different game values that can be given in the third game state, and to enrich the variation of the game states with different launch modes to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H4
The second game state counting means is
The gaming machine H5, which is initialized when the first gaming state is entered.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state counting means is initialized when the state shifts to the first game state. As a result, the number of times of the second game state by the second game state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the first game state. As a result, when the player enters the second game state, the third game state occurs when the second game state of the first number of times continuously occurs before the transition to the first game state. It has the effect of creating sexuality and improving the interest of the game.

<Group I: "Probability fluctuation state" + difference between the expected value of the game value per unit time of the jackpot at the time of probability change and "latent probability fluctuation state" + the expected value of the game value per unit time of the jackpot at the time of probability change>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group I was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting gaming value to a player.

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (for example, start winning process (S109)) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means (for example, a hit process (S104)) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player by using the determination result by the determination means. In
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
The first advantageous state means is
As the first advantageous state, a predetermined period advantageous state (for example, a jackpot that can be selected in the "probability fluctuation state") that can occur in the second advantageous state and is executed for at least a predetermined period and occurs in the specific state. At least, a specific period advantageous state (for example, a jackpot that can be selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state") that can be executed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period can be generated at least.
The gaming machine
From the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time (for example, 1 hour) in the second advantageous state and the predetermined period advantageous state, the player is given the predetermined unit time in the specific state and the specific period advantageous state. A gaming machine I0 characterized in that the gaming value that can be given can be lower.

According to the gaming machine I0, the player can use the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means and the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means are determined. The number-of-times determining means and the specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state when the second advantageous state is determined to have occurred the first number of times are provided. The first advantageous state means, as the first advantageous state, can occur in the second advantageous state and is executed for at least a predetermined period of time, and can occur in the specific state, at least the predetermined state. A game that is configured to be capable of generating at least a specific period advantageous state that can be executed for a specific period longer than the period, and the gaming machine can be given to the player at a predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state and the predetermined period advantageous state. It is configured so that the gaming value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific state and the advantageous state for the specific period can be lower than the value. As a result, a predetermined period advantageous state that can occur in the specific state that occurs when the second advantageous state is performed the first time can occur in the second advantageous state before the second advantageous state is performed the first time. By configuring so that it can be executed longer than the period advantageous state, the predetermined unit time in the specific state and the specific period advantageous state is more than the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state and the predetermined period advantageous state. The game value that can be given to the player can be made lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine I0
A first game value-adding means (for example, a variable winning device) capable of giving a player a first game value by changing to a first aspect (for example, an open mode) in the first advantageous state by the first advantageous state means. 65), equipped with
In the predetermined period advantageous state and the specific period advantageous state, the end conditions of the first aspect (for example, the maximum opening time, the maximum number of winnings, or the maximum granted game value) are set to be the same. Characteristic gaming machine I1.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means is provided with the first game value-adding means capable of giving the player a first game value by changing to the first aspect in the first advantageous state, and the advantageous state and the advantageous state for a predetermined period are provided. The termination conditions of the first aspect are set to be the same in the advantageous state for a specific period. As a result, although the period of the first aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state and the specific period advantageous state can be equivalent, the period of the specific period advantageous state is longer than the predetermined period advantageous state, so that the player is given per predetermined unit time. The game value that can be played can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

According to the gaming machine I1
The first advantageous state means is
In the first advantageous state, the first game value-adding means can be changed from the first aspect to a second aspect (for example, a closed state) in which the game value is not or is difficult to be given to the player.
The OP time of the jackpot in the second aspect period prolonging means (for example, the "latent probability fluctuation state") in which the period of the second aspect in the specific period advantageous state is made longer than the period of the second aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state. , IT time or / and ED time is longer than the jackpot OP time, IT time and / and ED time in the "probability fluctuation state").

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state means can change the first game value-adding means from the first aspect to a second aspect in which the game value is not or is difficult to be given to the player. The second aspect period prolonging means, which makes the period of the second aspect in the specific period advantageous state longer than the period of the second aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state, is provided. As a result, in the same game mode, the period of the first aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state and the specific period advantageous state can be equivalent, but the second aspect in the specific period advantageous state is more than the period of the second aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state. By lengthening the period of, it is possible to reduce the game value that can be given to the player per predetermined unit time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine I2
The first advantageous state means is
As the second aspect, an intermediate aspect (for example, OP time) executed before the first aspect and an intermediate aspect (for example, OP time) executed between the first aspect of 1 and the next first aspect (1). For example, the IT time) and the post-dust mode (eg, ED time) that is executed after the first aspect is made feasible.
The second aspect period prolonging means is
The period of at least one or more of the preceding aspect, the intermediate aspect, or the rear dust aspect in the specific period advantageous state is made longer than the period of the preceding aspect, the intermediate aspect, or the rear dust aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state. The gaming machine I3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means is executed as the second aspect between the preceding aspect executed before the first aspect, the first aspect of 1, and the next first aspect. The intermediate mode and the post-dust mode executed after the first aspect is feasible, and the second aspect period prolonging means is the preceding aspect and the intermediate aspect in the specific period advantageous state. Alternatively, the period of at least one or two or more of the rear dust modes is configured to be longer than the period of the preceding mode, the intermediate mode, or the rear dust mode in the predetermined period advantageous state. As a result, although the period of the first aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state and the specific period advantageous state can be equivalent in the same game mode, the specific period is more advantageous than the period of the preceding aspect, the intermediate aspect or the trailing aspect in the predetermined period advantageous state. By lengthening one or two or more periods of the preceding mode, the intermediate mode, or the trailing dust mode in the state, it is possible to reduce the gaming value that can be given to the player per predetermined unit time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I3
A display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game, and
It is characterized in that, in the specific period advantageous state, the display means includes a special effect executing means for executing a special effect (for example, "premium live effect") that cannot appear in the predetermined period advantageous state. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is provided with a display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game, and a special effect execution means for executing a special effect that cannot be displayed in the display means in the predetermined period advantageous state in the specific period advantageous state. ing. As a result, by executing a special effect that cannot be executed unless the second advantageous state is performed the first time, even if the advantageous state for a specific period is longer than the advantageous state for a predetermined period, the player is given a second advantage. 2 It is possible to improve the interest of the game while giving a sense of accomplishment that the special effect that can be reached only by continuing the advantageous state for the first time is reached, and it is difficult to feel the length of the execution period of the advantageous state for a specific period. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I4
A normal state means (for example, "normal game state") capable of generating a normal state (for example, "normal game state") that is different from the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the specific state and is most disadvantageous to the player. At the end of the "time reduction state"),
The first advantageous state means is
As the first advantageous state, it can be selected in a normal period advantageous state (for example, a "normal gaming state") that can occur in the normal state and can be executed for a normal period longer than the predetermined period and shorter than the specific period. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that a jackpot) and at least can be generated.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means includes the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, and the normal state means capable of generating the most disadvantageous normal state for the player, which is different from the specific state, and the first advantageous state means is provided. As the first advantageous state, at least a normal period advantageous state that can occur in the normal state and can be executed for a normal period longer than the predetermined period and shorter than the specific period can be generated. As a result, in the stage of the normal state, the normal period advantageous state is executed, which is longer than the predetermined period advantageous state, but shorter than the specific period advantageous state, and in the stage before the second advantageous state is performed the first time, the normal period advantageous state is executed. And a predetermined period advantageous state shorter than the specific period advantageous state is executed, and at the stage where the second advantageous state is performed the first time, the normal period advantageous state and the specific period advantageous state longer than the predetermined period advantageous state are executed, and the game is played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game by providing a sharpness to the game.

In the game machine I5
The second advantageous state counting means is
The gaming machine I6, which is initialized when the normal state is entered.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second advantageous state counting means is configured to be initialized when the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, the number of times of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state counting means can be initialized each time the state shifts to the normal state. As a result, when the second advantageous state is entered, a specific state is generated when the first second advantageous state is continuously generated before the transition to the normal state is created. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group J: The game value that can be acquired per unit time differs depending on the game state>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined ball entry means is arranged in a game area provided on a game board, and a predetermined ball is entered when the ball enters the game ball entry means launched toward the game area. The discrimination is performed, and the variable ball-entry means is opened and closed according to the discrimination result to give the player a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148264). Gazette)).

However, in a gaming machine or the like as illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately give a gaming value to a player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group J has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately imparting gaming value to a player.

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information (for example, start winning process (S109)) and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means (for example, a hit process (S104)) capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player by using the determination result by the determination means. In
A second advantageous state means (for example, jackpot end processing (S612)) capable of generating a second advantageous state (for example, a “time saving function”) different from the first advantageous state,
A second advantageous state counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203n) that counts the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
With the number-of-times determining means (for example, time saving limit processing (S5008, S5308)) for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means.
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time (for example, six times), a specific state different from the second advantageous state (for example, "latent probability fluctuation state") is generated. With possible specific state means (eg, S6104: Yes),
The gaming machine J0 is configured so that the gaming value that can be given to the player in a predetermined unit time (for example, 1 hour) in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, or the specific state is different from each other. ..

According to the gaming machine J0, the player can use the information acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine comprising a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means and the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means are determined. The number-of-times determining means and the specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state when it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second advantageous state has occurred the first time are provided. The game value that can be given to the player at a predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state, or the specific state is configured to be different from each other. As a result, there is an effect that the game value can be appropriately given to the player while increasing the variation of the game value that can be given to the player in a predetermined unit time for each state.

In the gaming machine J0
At least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state. A game machine J1 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state. It is composed. As a result, the game that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time is based on the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state. The value can be lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine J0 or J1
At least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state. A game machine J2 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state. It is composed. As a result, the game that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, rather than the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state. The value can be lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J2
At least, the game value that can be given to the player during the predetermined unit time in the specific state is lower than the game value that can be given to the player during the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A gaming machine J3 characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J0 to J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least, the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific state is greater than the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. Is configured to be low. As a result, the player has a predetermined unit time in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time, based on the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. It is possible to make the game value that can be given to the player lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J3
The first advantageous state means is
As the first advantageous state, a predetermined period advantageous state (for example, a jackpot that can be selected in the "probability fluctuation state") that can occur in the second advantageous state and is executed for at least a predetermined period and occurs in the specific state. At least, a specific period advantageous state (for example, a jackpot that can be selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state") that can be executed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period can be generated at least.
At least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific period advantageous state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the predetermined period advantageous state. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J0 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means can occur as the first advantageous state in the second advantageous state, and can occur in a predetermined period advantageous state executed for at least a predetermined period, and can occur in the specific state, at least. , A specific period advantageous state that can be executed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period, and at least a game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the predetermined period advantageous state. It is configured so that the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the period advantageous state can be lower. As a result, the predetermined unit time in the specific period advantageous state that can occur in the specific state that occurs when the second advantageous state is performed the first time is based on the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the predetermined period advantageous state. It is possible to make the game value that can be given to the player lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine J0
At least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state. A game machine J5 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state. It is composed. As a result, the game that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the second advantageous state is higher than the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific state that occurs when the second advantageous state is performed the first time. The value can be lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machine J0 or J5
At least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state. A game machine J6 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0 or J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state. It is composed. As a result, the game that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state is higher than the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific state that occurs when the second advantageous state is performed the first time. The value can be lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In the gaming machines J0, J5 or J6
At least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state. A gaming machine J7 characterized by being configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J0, J5 or J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least, the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is larger than the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific state. Is configured to be low. As a result, the player has a predetermined unit time in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, based on the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific state generated by performing the second advantageous state the first time. It is possible to make the game value that can be given to the player lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

In either the gaming machine J0 or J5 to J7
The first advantageous state means is
As the first advantageous state, a predetermined period advantageous state (for example, a jackpot that can be selected in the "probability fluctuation state") that can occur in the second advantageous state and is executed for at least a predetermined period and occurs in the specific state. At least, a specific period advantageous state (for example, a jackpot that can be selected in the "latent probability fluctuation state") that can be executed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period can be generated at least.
At least, the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the predetermined period advantageous state can be lower than the game value that can be given to the player in the predetermined unit time in the specific period advantageous state. A gaming machine J8 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 or J5 to J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first advantageous state means can occur as the first advantageous state in the second advantageous state, and can occur in a predetermined period advantageous state executed for at least a predetermined period, and can occur in the specific state, at least. , A specific period advantageous state that can be executed for a specific period longer than the predetermined period, and at least a game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific period advantageous state. It is configured so that the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the period advantageous state can be lower. As a result, the predetermined unit time in the advantageous state for a predetermined period is higher than the game value that can be given to the player at the predetermined unit time in the specific period advantageous state that can occur in the specific state that occurs when the second advantageous state is performed the first time. It is possible to make the game value that can be given to the player lower. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given the game value in a short period of time, and it is possible to appropriately give the player the game value.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A8, the gaming machines A0 to A, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of H5, I0 to I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B7, the gaming machines A0 to A8, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to The configuration limited to any one of I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C7, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to The configuration limited to any one of I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D5, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to The configuration limited to any one of I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E6, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to The configuration limited to any one of I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F5, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to The configuration limited to any one of I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G6, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, H0 to H5, I0 to The configuration limited to any one of I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H5, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I6, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I6, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to 0 The configuration limited to any one of H5, J0 to J8 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J8, the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of H5, I0 to I6 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to I6, J0 to J8, the gaming machine is A gaming machine X1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to I6, J0 to J8, the gaming machine is A gaming machine X2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A8, B0 to B7, C0 to C7, D0 to D5, E0 to E6, F0 to F5, G0 to G6, H0 to H5, I0 to I6, J0 to J8, the gaming machine is A gaming machine X3 characterized in that it is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
37 Special symbol display device (part of display means)
37b1 Upper LED group (part of the first dynamic execution means)
37b2 Lower LED group (part of the second dynamic execution means)
64 First starting port (part of the first ball entry means)
65 Variable winning device (part of ball-entry means, part of first game value-adding means, part of third ball-entry means, part of fourth game value-adding means, part of fifth game value-adding means , Part of the 6th game value-adding means, 7th game value-adding means)
65d Grand prize opening solenoid (part of changing means)
67 Through gate (part of the second information acquisition means)
71 Second starting port (part of the second game value-adding means, part of the first ball entry means, part of the second ball entry means)
72 Ordinary electric service (part of the second means to add value)
74a 2nd small winning opening (part of the 3rd game value-adding means, part of the 2nd ball winning means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means)
81m Challenge mode selection display (part of both modes permissible means)
81n Reliable mode selection display (part of both modes permissible means)
83 Ordinary symbol display device (part of display means)
110 Main controller (part of dynamic display execution means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic display execution means)
201 MPU (part of determination means, part of game state changing means)
202d Fluctuation pattern table (part of execution time selection means)
202d1 A table (part of the first dynamic short-term means)
202d2 B table (part of the first dynamic short-term means)
202d3 C table (part of the first dynamic short-term means)
202d4 D table (part of the first dynamic short-term means, part of the second dynamic short-term means)
202d5 E table (part of the second dynamic short-term means)
202d6 F table (part of the second dynamic short-term means)
202d7 G table (part of the second dynamic short-term means)
202d8 H table (part of the means for extending the execution period, part of the means for extending the execution period, part of the means for reducing the time difference)
202d9 I table (part of the means for extending the execution period, part of the means for extending the execution period, part of the means for reducing the time difference)
202d10 J table (part of the means for extending the execution period, part of the means for extending the execution period, part of the means for reducing the time difference)
203d 1st reserved ball storage area (a part of the 1st information acquisition means, a part of the information acquisition means)
203e Second reserved ball storage area (part of the second information acquisition means, part of the information acquisition means)
203k Probability change transition flag (part of game state changing means)
203n time saving limit counter (part of the second advantageous state counting means, part of the second gaming state counting means)
203o Time saving counter (part of game state changing means)
Processing per S104 (part of the first advantageous state means)
S109 Start winning process (part of information acquisition means)
S211 Normal map fluctuation processing (part of dynamic display execution means)
S505 Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing (part of the first determination means, part of the determination means)
S508 Special Figure 2 Fluctuation start processing (part of the second determination means, part of the determination means)
S612 jackpot end processing (part of the second advantageous state means, part of the second game state means)
S708 (part of execution time selection means)
S710 (part of execution time selection means)
S711 (part of execution time selection means)
S803 (part of the second determination means)
S5008 Time saving limit processing (part of the number of times determination means)
S5209 (part of the pre- and post-discrimination means)
S5308 Time saving limit processing (part of the number of times determination means)
S6007 jackpot end processing (part of the first advantageous state means)
S6104 (part of specific state means, part of third game state means)

Claims (5)

Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information and
A determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination means for determining the predetermined information.
In a gaming machine provided with a first advantageous state means capable of generating a first advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player by using the determination result by the determination means.
A second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and
A second advantageous state counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state by the second advantageous state means, and
A number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second advantageous state counted by the second advantageous state counting means, and
When the second advantageous state is determined to have occurred the first time by the number-of-times determining means, the specific state means capable of generating a specific state different from the second advantageous state and the specific state means.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific state, the execution period during which the predetermined event can be executed is longer than the execution period of the predetermined event executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by having long-term means. The predetermined event
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first advantageous state means is generated by the first advantageous state means. A launching means that can launch a game ball,
An entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and a ball entry means.
The ball-entry means is provided with a means for changing the ball-entry means into a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter.
The first advantageous state means is
At least a plurality of times, the changing means changes the ball-entry means from the non-enterable state to the ball-entryable state.
The means for extending the execution period is
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the execution period of the non-entry state is increased. The above-mentioned non-entry state is
The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising, at least, a start period executed at the start of the first advantageous state. The above-mentioned non-entry state is
The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein at least one interval period between the ball-enterable state and the next ball-enterable state is provided.

Images